4.4 AMS Asset Graphics Manual

Machinery Health® Management
AMS Asset Graphics Operating Manual

Operating Manual
AMS Asset Graphics
Date: May 06, 2011
Software Version 5.4.0.1033
Part Number: MHM-97032, Rev 0

Table Of Contents
1. Introduction ______________________________________________________________________ 1
Welcome to AMS Asset Graphics 1
Program description 1
Getting started with AMS Asset Graphics 2
Central database, data-elements and objects 3
Trigger concept 4
Using variables in texts 4
Graphic format and colors 5
Properties of graphic objects 5
Installation 6
2. General operation _________________________________________________________________ 9

Overview 9
AMS Asset Graphics user interface 9
Using tables 10
Dialog Search (Table) 11
Dialog Replace (Table) 11
Dialog Filling (table) 12
Using dialogs 12
Samples for using the right mouse button 12
Menu Edit 13
Menu View 14
Menu Window 14
Menu Language 14
Menu ? 15
Dialog File selection 15
Dialog Select type 15
Dialog Element selection 15
Dialog for messages 16
Color selection dialog 17
PMS Value Control 17
Tab Print 18
3. Configuration ___________________________________________________________________ 21
Introduction 21
Network license 23
4. Projects ________________________________________________________________________ 25
Project Manager 25
Project Manager 25
Menu commands 26
Dialog New project 27
Dialog Project selection 27
Dialog Runtime configuration 27
Dialog options 28
Dialog Cross reference 29
Dialog Rename elements 30
iii
Manual AMS Asset Graphics 5.4
Standard programs 30
Runtime 31
Runtime program 31
Using 31
Project administration 31
Creating a new project 32
Configure a default project 32
Inserting programs in the program list 32
Copying project files 32
User management 33
Overview password protection 33
Dialogs 33
Using 35
Password protection 35
Define operator rights 35
Define operator, password and lifetime, assign rights 35
Define operator right for input objects 36
Define user right for the acknowledgment in the Eventjournal 36
Define password protection of editors 37
Replication 37
Configuring a database replication 37
Requirements for an successful replication 38
AMS Asset Graphics database tables 39
Dialog Add/delete tables 39
Dialog Select destination 39
Dialog Select database 39
Database Replication Runtime 40
5. Graphic ________________________________________________________________________ 41
Graphic Editor 41
User interface 41
User Interface 41
Tree view 42
Shortcuts 42
Dialogs 43
Dialog Action 43
Dialog Shortcut 43
Search element 43
Dialog Rename elements 44
Dialog File selection with preview 44
Toolbars 44
Alignment commands 44
Toolbar Alignment 45
Toolbar Input 45
Toolbar Colors 45
Toolbar Language 45
Toolbar Symbol 46
Toolbar Draw 46
Toolbar Zoom 46
Menus 47
Menu commands 47
Menu File 47
iv
Table Of Contents
Menu Edit 48
Menu View 49
Menu Alignment 49
Menu Properties 49
Menu Window 49
Editor 50
Dialog Properties Editor 50
Tab Insert (Properties Editor) 50
Tab Object selection (Properties Editor) 50
Tab Grid (Properties Editor) 51
Using 52
Select objects 52
Selecting objects 53
Arranging objects 53
Resizing objects 54
Grouping objects 54
Zooming a picture 54
Define a flashing color 54
Selecting a polygon or a polyline to change its form 55
Create Metafiles from selected objects 55
Working with symbols 55
Objects 56
Overview Objects 56
Working with different screen resolutions 57
Line, Rectangle, Round rectangle, Ellipse 57
Polygon, Polyline 57
Text 58
Number 58
OLE-objects 58
Graphic 60
Group 60
Button 60
Graphic Button 61
Checkbox 61
Radio Button 61
Scrollbar 61
Slider 62
Window 62
Link-symbol 62
Special VBScript-functions 63
Dialogs 67
Using a property dialog 67
Tab Graphic 67
Tab View options 68
Tab Position 69
Tab Size 70
Tab Rotate 71
Tab Color 72
Tab Filling 73
Tab VBScript 73
Special dialogs 74
Tab Action (OLE-OBJECT) 74
v
Tab Design (Properties BUTTON) 74

Tab Design (Graphic Button) 75
Tab Design (Properties SCROLLBAR) 76
Tab Design (Properties SLIDER) 76
Tab Design (Properties WINDOWS) 77
Tab Design 2 (Properties BUTTON) 78
Tab Design 2 (Properties Checkbox / Radio button) 78
Tab Function (Properties BUTTON) 78
Tab Function (Properties SCROLLBAR) 79
Tab Function (Properties SLIDER) 80
Tab Function (Properties Windows) 80
Tab Graphic files 80
Tab Input (Properties TEXT or NUMBER) 81
Tab Link-Symbol 81
Tab Number (Properties NUMBER) 82
Tab Pipe (Properties POLYGON / POLYLINE) 83
Tab Text (Properties TEXT) 84
Dialog objects 85
Dialog objects 85
Dialog object InputDialog 85
Dialog object ListDialog 87
Dialog object MessageDialog 89
Dialog object TextDialog 90
Picture 92
Picture 92
Dialog Properties PICTURE 92
Shortcuts (Project/picture) 95
Testing data input 96
Project 96
Project 96
Properties Visualization 96
Shortcuts (Project/picture) 98
Dialog Flashing colors 98
Dialog Project fonts 99
Visualization 99
Using 100
User interface of the Graphic Editor 100
Drawing basic forms 100
Changing the position of objects dynamically 100
Changing the size of objects dynamically 101
Display an object with different states 102
Let an object (a pointer) rotate 103
Dynamic actions in a group 105
Changing colors of graphic objects 106
Define other standard painting colors 106
Displaying a numerical value 107
Constructing a filling level indicator 108
Assigning a color change to a filling level indicator 109
Define setpoints 110
Changing to another picture 111
Constructing a graphic button 112
Displaying the current time 113
vi
Table Of Contents
Display an operating panel (sub picture) 114

Configure function keys 118
Configure shortcuts for a picture 118
Configure shortcuts for a project 119
Calling the Eventjournal Runtime 120
Calling the Recipe Runtime 121
Closing the runtime 122
Trend charts 122
Editor 122
Trend chart 122
XY-trend chart 127
Commons tabs for trend charts 133
Properties line 135
Data point selection 135
Runtime 136
Trend chart 136
Dialog Trend chart 136
Tracking views 137
Dialog Select archive 137
Context menu for the trend chart 138
XY-trend chart 138
Dialog Properties XY-trend chart 139
Tracking dialog (XY-trend chart) 139
Context menu for the XY-trend chart 140
Dialog Profile selection 140
Using 141
Displaying a trend chart 141
Displaying a XY-trend chart 144
Display archived data in a trend chart 146
Touch Panel 147
Touch panel 147
Touch panel 148
Tab Touch panel (picture settings) 149
Tab Touch panel (Object) 150
Touch panel input dialog for numbers 151
Touch panel input dialog for texts 152
6. Process Assignment ____________________________________________________________ 153

Introduction 153
Organization and optimization of process assignment tables 153
Behavior of the process assignment at runtime 154
User interface 154
Dialog Properties 155
Dialog Driver profile profile name (project name) 158
Dialog Driver profiles (project name) 161
Process assignment table 162
Functions of the process assignment table 163
Tab Serial interface (Driver profile) 165
Process assignment 165
Sample process assignment 166
Driver 169
Introduction 169
vii
Driver specific settings 170

Logging the communication 171
Structure of the protocol file 172
APEX 173
APEX 173
AEG_PG 174
AEG PG Interface 174
H1TCP 177
Siemens H1TCP 177
Tab Addressing (driver H1TCP) 177
Required hardware (H1TCP) 178
Dialog driver profile (H1TCP) 179
Installation of the PLC-Software (H1TCP) 180
S5 PLC software (driver H1TCP) 180
S7 PLC software S7 (driver H1TCP) 180
Special error messages (H1TCP) 182
IBSNT 182
Phoenix Interbus-S Windows NT (IBSNT) 182
Addressing of process assignment tables (IBSNT) 182
Dialog Driver profile (IBSNT) 183
Settings FC Card (IBSNT) 184
Settings RFC (IBSNT) 185
Notes for commissioning (IBSNT) 185
Special error messages (IBSNT) 185
Mitsubishi FX 186
Required hardware (MIFX) 186
Dialog Driver profile (MIFX) 186
Modbus / ModbusTCP 188
Modbus (serial) / ModbusTCP 188
Dialog Driver profile (Modbus) 188
Dialog Driver profile (ModbusTCP) 188
Registerkarte Adressierung (Properties Process assignment table MODBUS) 189
S7PG 190
Siemens S7 PG-Interface (S7-300 and S7-400) 190
Required hardware (S7PG) 190
Dialog Driver profile (S7PG) 190
Tab Addressing (Properties Process assignment table S7PG) 191
Special error messages (S7PG) 191
S7_Connection 192
Siemens S7_Connection 192
Driver specific settings (S7_Connection) 192
Dialog Driver profile (S7_Connection) 192
Process assignment tables (S7_Connection) 193
Special error messages (S7_Connection) 193
S7_PPI 194
Siemens S7 PPI 194
Dialog Driver profile (S7_PPI) 194
Tab Addressing (driver S7_PPI) 194
Required hardware (S7_PPI) 195
S7_Ethernet 195
Siemens S7_Ethernet 195
Dialog Driver profile (S7_Ethernet) 195
viii
Table Of Contents
Process assignment tables (S7_Ethernet) 196

Driver specific settings (S7_Ethernet) 197
Required hardware (S7_Ethernet) 197
Installation of the PLC software (S7_Ethernet) 197
Special error messages (S7_Ethernet) 199
S7_Softnet 199
Siemens S7_Softnet 199
Dialog Driver profile (S7_Softnet) 200
Process assignment tables driver S7_Softnet 200
S7_MPI 201
Siemens S7_MPI (S7 300 and S7 400) 201
Dialog Driver profile (S7_MPI) 201
Required hardware (S7_MPI) 202
Process assignment tables driver S7_MPI 202
Special error messages (S7_MPI) 203
SICP 203
Siemens S5 CP-Interface 203
Siemens S5 CP-Interface (Installation of the PLC software) 204
Siemens S5 CP-Interface (Cable connection) 204
Siemens S5 CP-Interface (Special settings) 204
SIPG 205
Siemens S5 PG-Interface 205
7. OPC __________________________________________________________________________ 207

Editor 207
Introduction 207
User interface 207
Dialog Properties (OPC) 208
OPC table window 209
Dialog Append item 210
OPC Runtime (client) 211
Define AMS Asset Graphics as OPC client 211
OPC-Server 212
Introduction 212
Configure Start project 212
Remote-operation 213
DCOM Settings on Server and Client 214
DCOM Settings only on the client 215
DCOM settings only on the Server 217
8. Events ________________________________________________________________________ 219

Editor 219
Eventjournal Editor 219
User Interface 220
Groups 220
Dialog Group 220
Dialog Group selection 222
Printer 223
Printer assignment 224
Event definition window 224
Dialog Select receiver 228
ix
SQL database for events 228

Tab VBScript 229
PageControl 233
Runtime 233
Overview 233
Commands Eventjournal 233
Event window 235
Options and filter 235
Historical alarms (old mode) 236
Viewer 238
Overview 238
View Events (current) 238
Views History 239
Tab View properties 240
Dialog Status / Connections 243
Using 244
Events (alarms, failures, messages) 244
Define an event 244
Printing an event 245
Acknowledging an event 245
Display additional text for an event 246
Define events for other languages 246
Display an event in one line in a visualization picture 247
Automatic change of pictures in alarm situations 247
Automatic change to the Eventjournal in alarm situations 247
Show in the visualization window that a new event has occurred 248
Let an object flash in the visualization in the alarm case 248
Acoustic messages with new alarms 249
9. Data Storage ___________________________________________________________________ 251

Editor 251
Introduction 251
Tab General 252
Tab Archive 253
Tab Export 254
Tab Import 256
Tab VBScript 257
Data storage tables 258
Error codes 258
Data Storage Runtime 260
Using 260
Creating a data storage 260
Saving data 262
Archiving data 262
Modifying a data storage 263
10. Recipes _______________________________________________________________________ 265

Editor 265
Introduction 265
x
Table Of Contents
Recipe group window 265

Dialog Properties RECIPE GROUP 266
Error list Recipe Runtime 268
Runtime 269
Overview Recipe Runtime 269
Dialog New Recipe (Recipe Runtime) 270
Dialog Edit (Recipe Runtime) 270
Using 271
Using recipes 271
Define a recipe group 271
Create a new recipe 271
Load a recipe 272
Save a recipe 273
Detecting errors when loading or saving recipes 275
11. DDE __________________________________________________________________________ 277

Editor 277
Introduction 277
Dialog Properties (DDE) 277
Data exchange tables 279
Command tables 280
Runtime 280
DDE-connection 280
DDE Runtime (Client) 281
DDE Runtime (Server) 281
Using 282
Data exchange via DDE 282
Sending data into an Excel sheet 282
Receiving data from an Excel sheet 284
Sending commands Excel 285
Examples DDE server 287
12. ODBC _________________________________________________________________________ 289

Introduction 289
User Interface 289
Dialog Properties (ODBC) 290
ODBC definition table 292
Dialog Column selection 293
Dialog Filter / Sorting 293
ODBC 293
13. Language ______________________________________________________________________ 295

Editor 295
Introduction 295
Language definition window 296
Dialog Used languages 296
Using 296
Creating a project in several languages 296
Define a button to change the language during runtime 297
Define texts for the language changeover in the Language Editor 297
Define text objects for the language changeover 298
xi
14. Network _______________________________________________________________________ 299

Editor 299
Introduction 299
User interface Network Editor 299
Dialog Master properties 300
Dialog Exclude declaration 301
The Station definition table 301
Runtime 302
Network system 302
Automatic network start 303
Wait for master dialog 303
Using 303
Configuration of network computers 303
Creating a network project 304
Setup redundancy mode 305
15. Activity Log ____________________________________________________________________ 309

Activity Logging 309
Viewer 309
Introduction 309
Toolbar 310
Dialog Profile properties 310
Dialog New log view 312
Log view (Table) 312
Using 313
Recording operator actions and system messages in the activity log 313
Enable activity logging 313
Start the Activity Log Viewer 313
Using the Activity Log Viewer 313
Define log level for editors 314
Define log level for input objects 314
Define log level for input objects 314
Define log level for start and stop of runtime programs 315
Define log level for the acknowledgment in the Eventjournal 315
Record communication problems in the activity log 315
16. Operation Log __________________________________________________________________ 317

Editor 317
Introduction 317
Protocol definition window 317
Dialog Properties report 320
Tab VBScript compression 322
Tab VBScript 325
Function OnInitRow 325
VBScript data types 326
Dialog Properties diagram 328
Diagram definition window 330
Dialog Selection line type 330
Dialog Data range and time period 330
Dialog Select data-element 331
Dialog Report selection 331
xii
Table Of Contents
Dialog Color settings 331

Functions 332
AMS Asset Graphics Report Designer 333
Runtime 336
Overview 336
Report views 336
Diagram view 337
Dialog Report selection 338
Dialog Single values 338
Dialog Remarks 338
17. Maintenance ___________________________________________________________________ 339

Editor 339
Introduction 339
User interface 339
Dialog Properties Maintenance 340
Maintenance definition window 341
Dialog Group selection 342
Dialog Function selection 342
Functions for the calculation of the maintenance 343
Design of the maintenance database 343
AMS Asset Graphics Report Designer 345
Runtime 345
Maintenance Runtime 345
Commands 346
Maintenance views 347
18. Debugger ______________________________________________________________________ 349

Introduction 349
User Interface 349
Dialog VBScript 349
Dialog Program options 349
Dialog Database information 350
Table view 350
Elements 351
How to work with the debugger 351
Testing objects and finding errors 352
19. Synchronization ________________________________________________________________ 353

Overview of the synchronization 353
Synchronizing a project 354
Synchronization of programs 354
Logging 355
Used directories 355
Dialogs in Synctool 355
List of synchronized program files 356
List of synchronized project files 357
20. System-elements _______________________________________________________________ 359

Numeric system-elements 359
Textual system-elements 359
xiii
Other system-elements 359

Initialization 360
Suspending individual programs 361
Bringing a program into the foreground 361
System 362
Visualization 362
Operation 363
Eventjournal 363
Network 364
Time-dependent system-elements 365
Directory paths 366
_WinExec 367
_WinHelp 368
21. VBScript_______________________________________________________________________ 369

Introduction VBScript 369
Tab VBScript 370
Editor dialogs VBScript-window 370
Context menu when editing VBScript 371
Access to data-elements 372
VBScript standard functions 373
Asynchronous call of functions 374
Using COM objects 375
Global VBScript Functions 376
Debugging 377
Access to data storage files 378
Using 379
VBScript Examples 379
Examples for standard functions 380
Change a graphic object with a VBScript 381
Write a VBScript for a process picture 381
Change project properties in the Graphic Editor 382
Write a VBScript for a process assignment table 383
Write a VBScript for a driver profile 384
Write a VBScript in the Debugger 386
22. inVISU 2.5 to PMS Editor _________________________________________________________ 389

Introduction 389
DB-transfer table window 390
Dialog Selection prefix 390
Dialog Select projects 391
Dialog reference list 391
Dialog Error handling 391
23. Database interface ______________________________________________________________ 393

Overview data interface 393
Files of the database interface 393
Automation 394
Connection via automation server 394
Example User_Program_VB 395
Provided TLB file 398
xiv
Table Of Contents
Creating an application with the automation server 400

C++ 400
C++ connection 400
Provided C++ classes 401
CUserDBConnection 401
CUserTdbInfo 401
CUserNumEle 402
CUserTxtEle 403
Writing an application program in C++ 404
Example User_Program_VC 405
Exported functions of the InvDBUser32.DLL 410
24. Glossary ______________________________________________________________________ 413

Alarm picture 413
Operator / User 413
Operating Log Runtime 413
Picture change 413
DB-Transfer 413
DDE 413
Database replication 413
Data input 413
Data-element 414
Data storage 414
Data types 414
Debugger 414
Properties 414
Development 414
Event 414
Eventjournal 415
Event Viewer 415
Maintenance Runtime 415
Runtime 415
Activity Log 415
Log level 415
Network mode 415
Notification-trigger 415
Num-element 415
ODBC 416
OPC 416
Object 416
Password protection 416
Project 416
Process assignment 416
Acknowledgment 416
Recipe 417
Recipe group 417
Recipe Runtime 417
Ring buffer 417
Button 417
Slider 417
Scrollbar 417
Script 417
xv
Language changeover 417

Control-trigger 418
Symbol 418
System-element 418
Text-element 418
Toggle 418
Driver 418
Driver profile 418
Trend chart 418
Trigger 418
Vector graphic 419
UTC 419
Visualization 419
Zooming 419
25. Appendix ______________________________________________________________________ 421

Functionality 421
Directory structure 423
List of program names and EXE-modules 425
Used file names in projects 426
Formatting codes for date and time 428
26. Index _________________________________________________________________________ 429
xvi
Introduction
Welcome to AMS Asset Graphics

AMS Asset Graphics is a powerful HMI system (Human Machine Interface) for use under Microsoft
Windows.
AMS Asset Graphics supports the operating systems Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows
Vista, Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008.
AMS Asset Graphics is task-oriented organized. With editor program a special task is configured, and the
task is exercised in the corresponding runtime program.
E.g. you define in the Graphic Editor the pictures incl. the user interface, the corresponding runtime
program is the Visualization (see AMS Asset Graphics functionality).
The Project Manager has a central function for the configuration. Keep it open during the complete project
phase, all editors as well as the runtime program can be started from this program.
With a double-click on a document, the relevant editor will be started and the document opened
for processing.
In addition the Project Manager offers a toolbar Development for starting the individual editors.
If you want to test your project during runtime, save the documents in the editors, switch to the Project
Manager and start the runtime program (at the easiest via toolbar Runtime).
Program description
Start working with AMS Asset Graphics
Central database, data-elements and objects

Trigger concept
Variables in texts
Graphic formats and color palette

Drawing basic forms
Selecting objects
Resizing objects
Installation parallel dongle
Note AMS Asset Graphics uses VBScript of the Microsoft Corporation.
Program description
AMS Asset Graphics for Windows is a process management system for IBM compatible computers. It
consists of a development environment and a runtime program. The runtime program receives and
processes data of external devices. These data are represented on the screen. However, AMS Asset
Graphics does not only visualize data, at the same time an operator may enter data, which will be sent to
the process via the process assignment. By means of this, the operator is able to control the process.
1
The function pallet is rounded off with options like Eventjournal, data storage, trend charts and Recipe
Runtime. An online debugger can display and modify the contents of variables during runtime.
Due to that, there are various possibilities to display and record data, to archive them and to make them
accessible for further processing. Thus, AMS Asset Graphics also takes over the functions of a process
control computer.
Design and function of the runtime are defined in the development environment:
The process pictures are drawn and animated with in the Graphic Editor. However, they can also be drawn
with any other Windows Graphic Editor, copied into the clipboard and then inserted in AMS Asset
Graphics.
Process dependant Objects with dynamic properties such as position, size, color, rotation and filling levels
are basic elements of the process visualization.
The operation, which shall be possible during runtime (data input, function keys, password protection etc.),
can be defined freely and independently for every picture.
The dynamic objects are linked to the current process, e.g. a control device, via process assignment or
OPC. For the connection to the process there are drivers for different PLCs, bus systems and data
acquisition cards. The list of available drivers is being extended continuously.
AMS Asset Graphics consists of the following program modules:

Project Manager
Graphic Editor
Process Assignment Editor
Eventjournal Editor
DDE Editor
Data Storage Editor
Operation Log Editor
Maintenance Editor
Recipe Editor
ODBC Editor
OPC Editor
Network Editor
Language Editor
DB Transfer Editor
Runtime programs
Debugger
Activity Log Viewer
Getting started with AMS Asset Graphics

You can work with AMS Asset Graphics in different ways. It is useful to have the Project Manager always
opened and to start other editors from this program.
Start the Project Manager first.
Open a new project (command New in the toolbar Standard).
Start the Graphic Editor to draw a picture of the plant. Save the picture under the desired name.
Draw further pictures or test the result of your work during runtime. Define in the Graphic Editor
one of your pictures as the start picture.
Select menu command Properties | Project | Visualization to open dialog Properties
Visualization.
Enter the name of your start picture directly into the relevant entry field, or select a picture via
browse-button.
2
Introduction
Save your settings.

If you would like to use more options, start the relevant editors from the Project Manager, e.g. for
alarms, data storage, etc.
Configure the runtime programs (command Runtime configuration in the toolbar Standard). In the
program list you define the programs to be started and the start order.
Start the runtime.
Note You can start the runtime in between as well, to check the result of the previous work.
Central database, data-elements and objects

Every process value, that you want to visualize, modify or archive, will be administrated dynamically by AMS
Asset Graphics during runtime.
For this, every runtime program initializes the used data-elements at the start. All tasks (Visualization,
Process assignment, Eventjournal, etc.) have access on these data-elements of the central database. Thus,
a value can be displayed simultaneously as filling level in a container, as point of a curve in a diagram and it
can cause an error message in the Eventjournal.
The following rules apply to element names:

1. The element name may have a length of up to 32 characters.
2. Possible characters are: A..Z, a..z, 0..9 and _. (a space is not allowed)
3. It is not allowed to begin an element name with a numeric character.
There are two types of data-elements:

Num(eric)-elements does contain floating point numbers in the range 1.797693 E +308 to 2.225074E-308
as value.
Example
Num-element Value Description
Temp1 22.340 Temperature value of "Temp1" in °C
Temp2 26.01 Temperature value of "Temp2" in °C
Pressure 1.0004 Pressure in bar
Motor 1 Motor is switched on
Pump 0 Pump is switched off
_Sec01 12 System-element: current second
_Min01 12 System-element: current minute
Text-elements can take on texts with a max. length of 80 characters.

Example
Text-element Value Description
Operator Meyer Name of the operator
_DateStr 15.07.98 System-element: current date
_TimeStr 12:04:55 System-element: current time
Data-elements contain numbers or texts, i.e. values. These values are represented as dynamic properties of
objects. There are six different dynamic properties: Position, Size, Filling level, Color, Rotation and script
functions. These properties can be assigned to the objects as described in table Properties of graphic
objects.
3
See also
Using a property dialog
It is possible to present a value in different ways i.e. to combine a data-element with various objects and to
assign it different properties. It is e.g. possible to indicate a temperature value as a numeric value and as a
filling level in a thermometer graphic, which means that a data element will be shown as a dynamic number
and as rectangle or polygon with the dynamic property Filling.
Instead of data-elements certain entry fields can also be filled with constants.
Trigger concept
So called triggers are used to start actions or to notify events. Every num-element can be used as trigger.
An action, to be triggered, is for example to start a data transmission to a device (e.g. to an PLC). A
successful data transfer can in turn be reported as event.
So called control-triggers start actions, while so-called notification-triggers signal events.
Type Description
Control-trigger Actions, for which a control trigger is defined, (e.g. sending data to the process) are
started, if the value of the corresponding element changes.
Notification- Events, reported to the system, change the value of the corresponding element.
trigger
Example 1
The data-element SEND shall be modified via a function key. Since data-element SEND has been defined in
the process assignment as control-trigger for sending, a single data transfer to the PLC will be performed.
Example 2
In the same process assignment table the data-element READY was defined as notification-element to
signal the end of sending. When the system has finished the sending operation to the process, the trigger
READY will be changed.
READY can be used again at another place as control-trigger. With the help of the trigger concept it is
possible to start an arbitrary number of actions, depending on each other.
Using variables in texts

Data-elements can be inserted into the text with their current value. According to the different types of data-
elements there are two wild-cards for them:
Wild-card for num-elements

The general format of the wild-card is:
$ELEMENTNAME:G:N
with
ELEMENTNAME Name of the num-element
G Total number of digits (incl. decimal point)
N Number of fractional digits
G and N are optional parameter.
4
Introduction
If the number of digits and fractional digits have not been defined, per default the number will be output in
form of an 8-digit floating point number. Floating point numbers, which cannot be displayed due to their
number of digits, will be output as exponential numbers.
If the character $ shall be used in the text, $$ must be entered.
Example
A value of 12.3 with $TEMP:5:2 will be displayed as 12.30 and with $TEMP as 12.3.
Wild-card for text-elements

The general format of the wild-card is:
@ELEMENTNAME:G
with
ELEMENTNAME Name of the text-element
G Total number of characters
The parameter G is optional.
If the character @ shall be used in the text, @@ must be entered.
Graphic format and colors

AMS Asset Graphics uses a vector-oriented graphic format. The graphic resolution can be defined freely in
the Graphic Editor. Thus it is possible to select other formats than the standard formats like 640*480,
800*600 or 1024*768.
AMS Asset Graphics uses internally the current color resolution (adjusted under the operating system). The
required minimum color resolution amounts to 256 colors.
For a project you can define up to 8 flashing colors. The flashing colors are available at every color
resolution.
The color selection is made from a palette of 16 primary colors, 224 extra colors and the 8 flashing colors.
Properties of graphic objects

The different dynamic properties Position, Size, Filling, Color, Rotation and Script functions can be assigned
to the objects as described in the following table.
Object type Position Size Rotate Filling Color VBScript

Rectangle Yes Yes - Yes Yes Yes
Line Yes Yes Yes - Yes Yes
Polygon Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Polyline Yes Yes Yes - Yes Yes
Text Yes Yes - - Yes Yes
Number Yes Yes - - Yes Yes
5
Object type Position Size Rotate Filling Color VBScript

Group Yes Yes - - - Yes
Button, Yes Yes - - - Yes
Checkbox,
Radio button
Scrollbar, Yes Yes - - - Yes
Slider
Graphic Yes Yes - - - Yes
Link-Symbol Yes Yes - - - Yes
Example
Object type Rectangle can change its position, its size, its filling level and its color and it can be
assigned to script functions. However, it cannot be rotated.
Installation
AMS Asset Graphics is dongle protected. If you want to develop AMS Asset Graphics runtime programs on
several computers at the same time, you need additional licenses.
Dongles are available as USB, parallel, PCI or PCMCIA device.
Note During the setup the dongle has to be disconnect from the PC.
Beside the installation relating the hardware, a software installation of the dongle has to be made as well.
For this purpose you have to enter the data of the license document, which you have received together with
the software into tab License in program Configuration.
USB dongle
After the setup you can connect the USB dongle to the PC.
The integrated LED is on, if the dongle is identified by Windows as an device.
Installation of a parallel dongle

The hardware dongle must be installed before you start working with AMS Asset Graphics. For this it has to
be plugged on the parallel interface of your computer. For the installation, you have to proceed as described
in the following steps:
Switch off the computer and the connected printer.
Remove the printer cable from the parallel interface at the rear of the computer.
Plug the hardware dongle carefully on the parallel interface.
Fix the dongle with the screws (protection against unintentional removing!)
Plug the printer cable on the hardware dongle at the parallel interface.
Fix the printer cable with the screws.
Switch computer and connected printer on again.
Print a test page to check the hardware dongle.
Attention The installation may only be made by skilled and experienced staff, to avoid damages at
the computer, the connected printer and the hardware dongle.
6
Introduction
De-installation of the parallel dongle

If you want to start AMS Asset Graphics on another computer, you must de-install the available hardware
dongle.
For the de-installation, you have to proceed as follows:

Switch off the computer and the connected printer.
Remove the printer cable from the hardware dongle at the interface at the rear of the computer.
Remove the hardware dongle carefully from the parallel interface of your computer.
Connect the printer cable to the parallel interface of the computer.
Fix the printer cable with the screws (protection against unintentional removing!)
Switch computer and connected printer on again.
Print a test page to check the connection.
See also
Network license
7
General operation
Overview
Here you find the descriptions of the following functions:
General
AMS Asset Graphics user interface
Using a table
Using dialogs
Using the right mouse button
Menus
Menu Edit
Menu Views
Menu Window
Menu Language
Menu ?
Further elements
File selection
Element selection (cross reference)
Color selection
PMS Value Control
Select type
Tab Print
AMS Asset Graphics user interface

Note The user Interface of AMS Asset Graphics essentially complies with the standard of modern 32 bit
programs. If you are familiar with that you can skip this section.
Above the character or table window there is a title bar which extends over the complete window width and
which shows the name of the editor.
If you have opened a file, the title bar shows the current document and the project name round brackets.
In the top right part of the title bar you can see window-like buttons to minimize and maximize the screen
size or to restore and close the window.
A further range in the top part of the AMS Asset Graphics editors (directly below the title bar) is the Menu
bar. The menu bar contains commands which can be accessed by selecting the menu names.
Below the menu bar there is a number of buttons. This element is called toolbar and permits the fast access
on many of the functions, frequently needed, which can also be found in the menu bar.
The Status bar is shown in the bottom part of the windows of the AMS Asset Graphics editors. It provides
information about the currently selected object or the function just executed.
If you open a project document, another window will be opened to edit the document. In some editors these
windows contain an own toolbar with table specific functions.
9
If you would like to see different parts of your process picture or your tables, which do not fit in your window,
use the Scrollbars.
Using tables
Tables are used in every editor to enter data for the configuration of the process visualization.
Selection of the active cell
Click with the mouse on the cell which contents shall be edited. With the help of the scrollbars the visible
part of the table can be moved.
You can move within a table with of the following keys:
Key Description
 The active cell is moved to the right or to the left by one position. If the new, active cell is
not completely visible, the displayed area will be shifted correspondingly. In the first or last
column the corresponding button has no function anymore.
If the cell is being edited, with these buttons the cursor can be moved to the right or to the
left by one character.
 The active cell is moved up or down by one line. In the first or last line the corresponding
buttons have no functions anymore.
Page  These keys can be used to scroll the table page for page.
Page 
TAB The active cell is moved one position to the left or to the right. If the new, active cell is not
Shift+TAB completely visible, the displayed area will be shifted correspondingly.
ENTER The editing process in the active cell is terminated. The cell in the next line is now the
active cell.
Del Deletes the complete contents of the active cell.
Esc, The previous content of the active cell will be restored.
CTRL+Z
CTRL+Alt+ With this key code the contents of the current cell is transferred into the cell above or below
CTRL+Alt+ of this cell.
In active cells, data can be entered directly via the keyboard.
Tabs
At some tables, the number of definitions is so large that the table is subdivided into several tabs. The active
page can be selected with tabs at the top of the table. The tab for the current page is shown pushed down.
As long as the edit mode is active, no tab can be selected before this mode is terminated again. The tabs
are selected with the mouse or with the key codes Ctrl+Tab or Ctrl+Tab+Shift.
Key Description
CTRL+Tab With these key codes you select the current tab of the table. With Ctrl+Tab you
CTRL+Shift+Tab move one tab to the right. At changes to another tab, the current line will remain the
same. By pressing button Shift in addition, you will move one tab to the left.
Having reached the last tab and if you would like to go on, the program will move to
the first tab again (or vice versa).
Working with helper dialogs

Key Description
CTRL+F Opens the Search dialog.
(F3) With key F3 the search will be continued from the current cell.
CTRL+H Opens the Replace dialog.
F9 Opens the Filling dialog for the automatic filling of tables.
10
General operation
Drag & drop

All editors support the drag & drop function, within AMS Asset Graphics editors, as well as in other
Windows-programs which support this function such as e.g. Microsoft Excel.
Function drag & drop is possible, when the cursor is placed in the outer margin of the current cell or the
highlighted range. When a drag & drop function is possible, the cursor will appear differently.
Dialog Search (Table)

This dialog offers the option of searching a text in a table.
The search is started with shortcut CTRL+F.
The search starts always at the current cell. If the text of the cell corresponds to the search text, the
appropriate cell will be marked as current cell.
Option Description
Search for Enter a search text or a part of the search text here.
Match whole word If this field is activated, the search text must agree with an entire word and not
only only with parts of it.
Match case For the search procedure, the case of the text is taken into account.
Only in the current If this field is marked, the text will be searched only in the current column.
column
Search direction Set the desired search direction here.
The search starts in the cells of a line starting from left to right, it will then continue in the next line
(depending on the search direction) until the search text matches to the text of a cell.
With button F3 the search will be continued, starting at the current cell.
Dialog Replace (Table)

This dialog offers the option of replacing texts in a table.
Replacing is started with the shortcut STRG+H.
Option Description
Search for Enter the search text here.
Replace with Enter the new text, to replace the search text.
Match case Searches for case-sensitive occurrences of a word or phrase. This limits the search so it
only locates text that matches the upper- and lowercase characters you enter.
Replace in To define the range, where the text replacement shall be performed.
Complete All cells of the table are processed.
table
Current If this field is marked, all cells of the current column are processed.
column
Selected cells Only the selected cells will be processed.
11
Dialog Filling (table)

Filling tables is made easier by an automatic filling function. Several cells of a column get filled with text.
Parts of the text can be numbered automatically by question marks, used as wild-cards for the numbers.
The filling function is started with button F9.
Enter the parameters for the automatic filling of cells that are placed in a table one below the other.
Option Description
Fill text Type in the text, which shall entered in the active cell or the cells below in a column. As wild-
card for numnbers you can enter a ? here. When closing the dialog with OK, the wild-
cards will be replaced by the number value, defined with number, start value and
increment. Max. 10 question marks in series may be used in each filling text.
Number Type in the number of cells, which shall be set with the filling text.
Start value Type in the value, which replaces the question marks in the first cell.
Increment Type in the value by which the start value is increased after one replacement. Negative
values are possible as well.
Example
If you enter a Fill text "Test???_??, with Number 3, Start value 10 and Increment 1, the current cell
as well as the both following cells will be set with the values: "Test010_10, Test011_11 Test012_12".
If an error occurs during the filling procedure, e.g. due to an invalid element name, the process will
be stopped.
Using dialogs
In a dialog you get information about settings and can change them.
The data input in a dialog is terminated with the buttons OK, Cancel and Close. With OK the changes of the
dialog are accepted, with Cancel they will be rejected. Key ESC has the same function as the button
Cancel. If dialogs can only be terminated with Close their data will always be saved.
Button Apply accepts the entered data and applies the result directly, without closing the dialog. If the dialog
is then closed by Cancel or ESC, the changed data will remain accepted.
Color buttons
Buttons that are used to select colors are called color buttons.
If you press a color button the dialog Color selection appears.
Samples for using the right mouse button
Open Dialog Properties in the Graphic Editor

In the Graphic Editor you can configure the properties of an object via the context menu.
Click with the right mouse button on the object.
In the context menu select Properties...
Configure the properties in the opened dialog.
Note Dialog Properties can also be opened with a double-click directly on the object or with the
shortcut Alt+Enter.
12
General operation
See also
Rename data-elements in the Graphic Editor

Select command Rename elements... in the context menu.
Click with the right mouse button on the object.
In the context menu select Rename elements...
Dialog Rename elements will be opened.
Here you rename the individual data-elements without the need to configure the properties for
every object.
Edit grouped objects in the Graphic Editor

In the Graphic Editor you can edit properties of grouped objects belatedly, without resolving the
grouping. Selection of objects is made in the Tree view.
Select the desired object or the subgroup in the tree view with a double-click or select the entry
Properties in the context menu.
Edit the desired properties in the dialog, now opened.
Selecting elements from the reference list

In many dialogs and tables you can select data-elements from the reference list. This helps to save time
and to avoid faults when typing.
Click with the right mouse button on a field to open the dialog Element selection.
Select the Type, e.g. Pictures or Runtime elements.
At some types there is the possibility to select between different documents, e.g. at type
Pictures between different picture files.
If possible, select the Data type. Some fields exclusively expect num- or text-elements, so that no
selection is possible here.
Select the element.
Note The reference informations are updated when a document is saved.
Reference lists for runtime elements are created when the runtime is closed. If not all data-
elements are available as expected, save the document or start and stop the runtime.
With a double-click or by pressing button OK the dialog will be closed and the element name will
be applied.
Menu Edit
Cut
With this command the highlighted data of the document and copied into the clipboard and then deleted.
Copy
This command copies highlighted data into the clipboard.
Paste
With this command, a copy of the clipboard contents is copied at the current cursor position into the
document.
13
Insert line
With this command, a new line will be inserted previous to a selected table line.
Delete line
With this command, a selected table line is deleted.
Properties...
This command opens a dialog to configure the properties of the current document or object.
Menu View
Toolbars / Status bar

In menu View commands are provided for switching on/off toolbars and the status bar.
Optimize columns
Use this command to optimize the width of columns in a table:
Without the SHIFT-key being pressed, the maximum available place will be used for the display,
all columns will then be visible.
When you press the SHIFT-key at the same time, every column of the table will use only the
maximum required place to display the complete cell text.
Always on top
As long as this option is on the application is always visible in the foreground.
Visualization
With this command, the visualization window can be switched to the foreground.
Menu Window
Cascade
Use this command to show the opened windows in an overlapping arrangement.
Tile windows
Use this command to arrange the opened windows beside each other.
Arrange icons
Use this command to arrange the symbols of the minimised windows in the bottom area of the main window.
Menu Language
Select the language for the currently opened program.
At present the following languages are supported:

German
English
Dutch
Note This menu will only be displayed if the language option is licensed.
14
General operation
Menu ?
In this menu you find the following commands:
Help topics
With this command, the online help of the editor can be called. The online help can also be called at any
time with the key F1.
If a dialog is active when pressing F1, the help topic for the current dialog will be displayed (context sensitive
help).
About
Select command About...in menu ? to open the dialog AMS Asset Graphics.
This dialog displays general information about the program and AMS Asset Graphics.
The version number shows the version number of the program.
The license field displays the serial number and the version name (MINI, MIDI, MAXI) for the quantity of
licensed variables.
Below the Copyright notice you find a link to the Machinery Health Management internet address.
Before contacting Product Support, first please note the version and serial number and the version name to
permit a fast handling of your problem.
Dialog File selection
Option Description
Project In this list field you can select the project, where the file to be selected is stored.
All files of the selected type, contained in this project, are displayed in the file selection field
below.
File The name of the file, selected in the file selection field, is shown here.
name The name of the file can also be entered via the keyboard.
File type The file type can be selected here. Generally, a certain file type is preset, depending on the
function that was used to open the dialog.
Dialog Select type

With this dialog you can specify the type of a data-element.
Select NUM for num-elements or TXT for text-elements.
Dialog Element selection

To make the input of data-elements in entry fields easier and safer, you can select a data-element from a
reference list. Different from the input via the keyboard, no typing mistake can creep in.
There are different reference lists for different document types, divided in num-elements and text-elements.
The reference informations are stored, when the correspondent document is saved. Reference lists for
runtime-elements will be generated at the end of the runtime program.
15
You open a reference list by clicking in a dialog with the right mouse button on an entry field. Edit fields with
an element selection have a blue background, when they have the input focus.
The element selection is also possible from tables, however, in this case the background will not be shown
in blue.
Option Description
Type Here you select the document type. If you are working e.g. with the Data Storage Editor, it is
useful to select type Process assignment to have access on the elements read from a PLC.
Alternatively you may select type Runtime elements to show all used elements.
Document Here you select a special document.
Data type Here you select with data type Num the display num-elements and with data type Text the
display of text-elements.
Elements Select the wanted element from the list with a double click or with the command OK.
See also
Selecting elements from the reference list
Dialog for messages

In this dialog program messages are listed. The program continues working, even if the message was not
acknowledged.
16
General operation
Color selection dialog

After you have activated the color selection with a menu command or by means of a button, the Color
selection dialog appears.
The selection of a color is made from a color palette, in which the currently selected color is marked with a
dotted line, circulating around a square.
To select a color click with the left mouse button on the color field. The color will be applied and the
dialog closes automatically.
You can also use transparency. Select the small, white, crossed out box in the top right corner. If you
use the transparent color e.g. as fill color for a rectangle, the inner area will get transparent that way. At the
use of the transparent color as frame color, the frame will be drawn with dash size 0 and will thus
be invisible.
Flashing colors are colors which change their color with a fixed clock rate. To define the flashing colors for a
project use menu command Project | Flashing colors... in the Graphic Editor.
Flashing or transparent colors are not always selectable, e.g. the text color of a text object cannot be
transparent.
With keys ESC or button Cancel the dialog will be closed without applying a color.
Note If your Windows system is adjusted with less than 256 colors, only the 16 primary colors can be
selected.
PMS Value Control

A so called PMS Value Control is used in dialogs to define a variable or a VBScript function as parameter for
a dynamic action. The simplest form of dynamic is the dependence from a data-element. For more complex
tasks the value can be defined in a script. The control changes the input between data-element and script.
The change is realized via a graphical button. With this button it can be defined whether the element
selection field or button "Edit Script" shall be displayed. If this button is red, the value is defined in a
VBScript.
The Value Control can take on the following 3 states:

1) Value Control is deactivated
The input of data-elements or editing of the VBScript is not possible.
2) Dynamic per data-element active
The element name can be entered directly or simply selected by clicking Element selection with the right
mouse button.
(This is the default setting with an activated control)
3) Dynamic per VBScript active
After activation of button Edit Script a dialog to edit the VBScript function will be called. If this function
does not yet exist, it will be generated. The text cursor will be set automatically to the corresponding
function.
17
Tab Print
In this tab you define parameters for printing. The printout is configured with the AMS Asset Graphics Report
Designer. In the Report Designer you can use various variables and fields. You can move this variables with
the mouse in the page.
If there shouldn't be a report definition yet, then the program uses a default configuration.
Option Description
Layout Name of the report definition file. Standard is DefaultDiagramLayout. This file is
always available.
New With this function you open a new layout file.
You will be asked, whether you would like to create the new file from the copy of an
existing file. If yes, you must select the source file. If no, the new file will be prepared by
the program with a default contents.
The AMS Asset Graphics Report Designer will be started with the new layout file.
Edit With this command you open the selected layout for editing.
Start Here you can enter a data-element used as a trigger to start printing.
Destination Enter here a text-element (or VBScript) to configure the destination for printing. You
must use the following syntax:
Destination;Parameter
With Destination you define the destination or the format. Parameter configures a file
or a device. If there is no parameter specified a default device will be used or a file
dialog will be opened.
See samples.
Printing Here you configure, if the background color shall be used for printing. Note This option
background is not always available.
color
Texts In this table you can configure additional variables for printing.
Parameter Here you can enter variables, which can be used in the AMS Asset Graphics Report
Designer as variable.
Text The text entered here is used for the parameter. You can also use variables in the text.
Samples for print destinations:

Text Description
PRV The preview dialog will be opened.
PRN;Epson Printing on the printer Epson.
PDF;c:\report.pdf Printing in the file report.pdf (PDF).
HTML;c:\report.html Printing in the file report.html (HTML). Note If necessary several
files are created.
MHTML;c:\report.mhtml Printing in the file report.mhtml (Multi-Mime HTML).
PICTURE_BMP;c:\report.bmp Printing in the file report.bmp (Bitmap). Note If necessary several
files are created.
PICTURE_EMF;c:\report.emf Printing in the file report.emf (Enhanced Metafile). Note If
necessary several files are created.
PICTURE_JPEG;c:\report.jpeg Printing in the file report.jpeg (JPEG). Note If necessary several
files are created.
PICTURE_TIFF;c:\report.tiff Printing in the file report.tiff (TIFF). Note If necessary several files
are created.
18
General operation
Text Description
PICTURE_MULTITIFF;c:\report.mtiff Printing in the file report.mtiff (Multi TIFF).
RTF;c:\report.rtf Printing in the file report.rtf (Rich Text Format.
TTY;c:\report.prn Printing in the file report.prn (Binary Printer File).
TXT;c:\report.txt Printing in the text file report.txt. Only the content of tables will be
printed.
XLS;c:\report.xls Printing in the file report.xls (Excel XLS).
XML;c:\report.xml Printing in the file report.xml (Excel XLM). Note If necessary
several files are created.
19
Configuration
Introduction
The program Configuration is a dialog-based application.
The program has several tabs, where you can make cross-project settings for the PC.
Tab License
On tab License you can enter up to 99 dongle entries with different parameters. The entries are saved in
section Dongle in the file WINVISU.INI (in the program directory).
Option Description
Entry number Enter the number of the entry here. Entries of 1 to 99 are possible. You
create a new entry by typing in a number that has not yet been used and
pressing button New.
Serial number The serial number is in the range of 40000000 to 49999999 (8-digit).
Version At present the version number of AMS Asset Graphics is 5.00 (4-digit).
Program options Here the program options are defined (8-digit).
Number of num-elements, Here you must enter the max. number of useable num- and text-elements (5-
Number of text-elements digit).
Number of network stations Here you must enter the max. number of network stations (4-digit).
Password With this text, the inputs will be verified (12-digit, only numerics or small
letters).
The information, necessary for an entry, can be found in the license document, you have got with the
delivery.
Tab Floating license

On this tab you can configure a network dongle, also called floating license.
Option Description
Active Set this option to activate the network license.
Server name or IP Enter the name of the computer or the IP address of the computer, where the
address network dongle is installed.
Port Enter a free port number of the computer with the network dongle. If necessary, ask
your network administrator for a free port.
The function description for the network license can be found here: Network license
21
Tab Directories
On tab Directories you can configure directory locations.
Option Description
Global data The (global) data directory is defined here.
directory
Use local data Several alternatives to organize a network project are possible.
directory If a local data directory shall be used, you have to activate the option and enter the
name of the local data directory into the field below.
It will be checked, whether the directory belongs to a local fixed disk.
Tab Network
On this tab the settings for the network mode are defined.
Option Description
General
Station number Here, you enter the network station number for the current workstation. Via this
number the station will be addressed at the definition of the network project.
The master will have station number 0.
Master The computer name or the IP address of the master is entered here (in the
redundancy mode the primary master).
Port For the data communication, a port must be set. The port number must be the same
on all network computers!
Redundancy
Active Here it will be defined, whether the redundancy mode is active. If this option is not
switched on, the stations will operate with only one master.
Second master Here you can define, whether this computer is the secondary master (station number
is 0).
Secondary master The computer name or the IP address of the secondary master is entered here.
Redundant data The (global) data directory for the access on the secondary master must be entered
directory here.
See also
AMS Asset Graphics directory structure
Network license
Opening a network project
Set up redundancy mode
22
Configuration
Network license
When using a network license the license will be requested from a license server via the network. The
number of stations (computer, on which an AMS Asset Graphics program is running) is configured on tab
License.
Editor and runtime programs can be run on the computer with the network dongle and as well on other
computers in the network. The computer with the dongle is always included in the number of stations.
On tab Floating license the settings for the network license and for the computer with the network dongle will
be made.
The request of a network dongle will only be executed, if no local dongle could be found. If a program has
read the network dongle, it will always use the network dongle until the program is started anew.
For using network licensing the network protocol TCP/IP is absolutely necessary.
If the dongle cannot be read by the runtime for three hours, the system will be terminated after another three
hours. The system data-element _LicenceError is set on 1, if the dongle couldn't be read for 3 hours.
23
Projects
Project Manager
Project Manager
The Project Manager offers the user of the development version a user interface, with this help he can
manage a project Thereby, several projects can be opened at the same time. By means of this user
interface it is possible to copy or delete single files from project to project. In the file view, the single files are
displayed with small and large symbols or in form of a list with all details, in the same way as with the
Windows explorer.
With a double-click on a document the associated editor is started and the document opened for editing.
Moreover, the Project Manager offers a toolbar Development for the start of the individual editors and a
toolbar Runtime to start the Runtime and the Debugger. Button Stop all runtime programs will stop all
active runtime programs.
Via the tree view of the Project you can define, which files shall be shown to the right of the file view. When
the entry All files is activated, all files of the project will be shown. By selecting another branch, the display
of files will be filtered to a certain AMS Asset Graphics program.
By double-clicking on a branch, the corresponding editor will be started and the last opened documents are
opened automatically. The reloading of the documents can be disabled by pressing the Shift-key at the
same time.
In the file view the files of the current project are displayed.
By clicking on the corresponding title field, the files will be sorted in ascending or descending order
according to name, file type, date of the last change or file size.
With a double-click on the file symbol, the related editor or the corresponding Windows application will be
opened for editing.
You can refresh the file view with the key F5.
For every project runtime configurations will be set.

In the Project Manager, the users, their passwords and their access rights are defined.
It will be also defined here, whether the activity log shall be active, and which log level the editors shall have.
See also
Menu commands
Getting started with AMS Asset Graphics
Password protection
Recording operator actions and system messages in the activity log
25
Menu commands
The following non-standard commands are available in the Project Manager:
Menu File
Command Description
New See Creating a new project.
Save as After the choice the dialog Project save as appears.
If option Copy all project files is set, not only the runtime configurations will be stored in
another project, but also all project files.
See also Copying project files.
Delete With this command you can delete a complete project. After the choice the dialog Project
selection appears.
The data from the project folder will be deleted irrevocably.
Menu Edit
you find the commands Copy, Paste and Delete. With these commands you exchange project files via the
clipboard between different projects or with other applications: (e.g. Windows Explorer). These commands
can also be found in the context menu of the file view (click the right mouse button).
In addition, the commands Select all and Invert selection are available.
Menu View
The following four commands will be used for changing the display in the file view. The file view presents the
files with big and small symbols and in form of a list with and without all details. These commands can also
be found in the context menu of the file view (click the right mouse button).
With the command Arrange icons you can arrange the icons according to Name, File type, Last change
and Size.
With command Refresh the display will be redrawn.
Menu Configuration
offers the possibility to configure different items of the program:
Runtime...
Password protection
Activity logging
Touch panel...
Database replication
Via Menu Start

the individual editor or runtime programs or possibly installed Add-ins will be started.
Command Stop Runtime programs will stop all active runtime programs.
Menu Options
offers the possibility to get a sight in the Cross reference list or rename data-elements in all project files.
See also
General Operation
26
Projects
Dialog New project

Select command File | New in the Project Manager to open a new project and thus a new directory on the
hard disk. All further data, which will be created under this project name, will be stored in this directory.
Enter the name of a new project in dialog New project. The possible length of the project name must
comply with the conventions of the operating system.
After the new project name was accepted with OK, a new project will be opened in the current data
directory.
Activate option Use default project to copy files from the default project file into the new project.
Note If you have to edit several projects, you can store project files, which are identical in all projects, in the
default project, thus these definitions are at disposal when starting a new project.
The default project is a „normal project", which gets a special function only by using the name
DefaultProject. The default project can be opened and edited with the Project Manager in exactly the
same way as all other projects.
See also
Creating a new project
Dialog Project selection

Select one of the existing projects by clicking it with the mouse. The name will then be shown in field
Project.
Or enter the name of the project, that shall be selected, via the keyboard directly into entry field Project.
Dialog Runtime configuration

Select menu command Configuration | Runtime... in the Project Manager, to select those programs, which
shall be active or which shall be possible to be activated during runtime. Beside AMS Asset Graphics,
standard programs or other programs can also be registered.
After selection of the command, the dialog Runtime configuration appears.

In this dialog you define a project as single station or network project.
You define in the program list, which programs shall be started at runtime in which order.
At a network project you assign the programs individually for the master and the stations.
Option Description
Network options
Network project Activate this option to define the current project as network project. In the selection
field to the right of it, you define, for which station the program list, defined below, shall
apply and whether it applies for the master.
Copy >> Click this button to copy the settings of the current program list to the program list of
those station or master that was selected to the right of the button.
Program list The program list offers space for any number of program entries. The programs will be
started by the Runtime-program in exactly the same order as defined in the list.
There are several possibilities, to entry programs into the program list, see Insertion of
programs.
Program Enter the name of the program, that you want to use. When it is not stored in the same
directory as the AMS Asset Graphics programs and when it is also not stored in a
search path, you have to enter the complete path including the drive letter.
Note Look out, that the specifications are valid. A wrong spelling or not available
programs may cause problems at runtime.
Comment Enter here descriptions for the corresponding programs, or change the comment for
the standard programs.
27
Option Description
Initialization Enter here an num-element, which is set on 1 by the runtime program, when starting
the corresponding program. The runtime program will start the next program not
before this element was reset on 0 again. By this means, the start of the different
programs can be synchronized.
View options Here you define the displaying option for a program. For this, click with the right
mouse button in a field of this column. Dialog Display options will be opened.
Standard program From this list you can select a standard program.
Options... Press the button to open the dialog Options.
Dialog View options

Option Description
Normal After loading, the application is displayed as normal window. The size of the window is
predefined by Windows.
Minimized After loading, the application will be displayed minimized (as icon).
Invisible After loading, the application is invisible. Note that such program do not appear in the
program list of the task manager.
Maximized After loading, the application will be displayed in maximized size.
Dialog options
In this dialog you can set a few runtime options for a project.
Option Description
Runtime
Block Set this option to disable the key combination ALT+F4 for all runtime programs. With this, you
Alt+F4 prevent the abortion of single runtime programs with this key combination. Even with the
system menu, the runtime programs cannot be aborted in this case.
Disable With the help of this function, unwanted user activities can be prevented.
task Function Disabling task switch deactivates all key functions, that allow a change to another
switch program, such as ALT+Tab and Ctrl+ALT+DEL.
The disabling will be started, after the runtime has started all programs. The disabling
function will be switched off again, when the runtime (LZ32.EXE) was terminated.
Important: Task switches with the mouse will further be possible. Thus, the task bar must not
be accessible by mouse and must be covered (e.g. by the visualization window).
The shortcut Ctrl+ALT+DEL can be disabled, when running under 32bit operating systems:
To enable this feature you have to perform following steps:
1. Copy InvGina32.dll into the System32-directory.
2. Create the entry GinaDLL (as character sequence) in the registry with value
'InvGina32.DLL' in subkey
\HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Microsoft\WindowsNT\CurrentVersion\Winlogon
After that, a restart of the operating system is required.
Attention Make a backup before you change the registry.
Note The shortcut Ctrl+ALT+DEL can't be disabled, when running under Windows Vista,
Windows 7 or an 64bit operating system..
28
Projects
Option Description
Update Per default, the update time during the runtime is predefined on 500 ms. It can be changed
[ms] with this option in the range 100 to 1000 ms. Enter the desired value either directly with the
keyboard or use the arrows to the right of the entry field.
Activity logging runtime programs
Start Enter here the log level, which the runtime programs will be given at the start/stop.
Stop
VBScript
Debugging Mark this option, to debug your VBScripts. The procedure for debugging your VBScripts is
active described in chapter VBScript debugging.
Dialog Cross reference

The cross reference list provides information, in which program module an element is used and how often it
is used there.
This dialog displays in a table the use of data-elements in a project. The table is sorted after data-elements
in ascending alphabetic order, capital letter are before small initial letters, system elements, that start with an
underline, are below the capital letters.
After a double-click on a cell, all project files will be shown in dialog Display documents, where the element
is used. The element will be shown in the title of the 1. column. With a double-click on a project file, the
related editor is started and the document loaded.
Columns of the cross reference table:

Column Description
Element The name of the element can be found here.
GRA The number shows how often the element is used in the Graphic Editor.
RZ Ditto Recipe Editor
DS Ditto Data Storage Editor
EJ Ditto Eventjournal Editor
OPC Ditto OPC Editor
PM Ditto Project Manager
PZ Ditto Process Assignment Editor
DDE Ditto DDE Editor
DBT Ditto inVISU 2.5 to PMS Editor
MP Ditto Network Editor
OD Ditto ODBC Editor
IH Ditto Maintenance Editor
BP Ditto Operation Log Editor
RT Has the value 1, when the element was used at runtime.
This information will be stored by the runtime program (only at station number 0), when
terminating the runtime. In this way, dynamically generated elements will be shown (e.g. by
means of VBScript).
Type The type of data-element is shown here, NUM for num-element, TXT for text-element.
29
Dialog Rename elements

By means of dialog Rename elements, data-elements can be renamed globally for a project. The data-
elements will be listed in a table, sorted in alphabetic order. The new element names must be entered in the
column New.
(Table) Rename elements

Column Description
Original The name the original data-element is shown here. This entry cannot be edited.
New Enter here the name of the new data-element. Data items can be selected from the reference
list by means of a click with the right mouse button. If the value has changed, the background
will be shaded in light red.
Type The data type of the data-element/constant is shown here.
This entry cannot be edited.
The renaming action is started with command Rename. In project root directory, the file Rename.xml is
generated with the renaming information. After this, the editors are called, which then the renaming. During
this action, the button is disabled.
With the command Refresh, the element list is build anew. Entries, which were already carried out, will be
lost.
See also
Using tables
Standard programs
The AMS Asset Graphics standard programs include the following programs:
Program name Name of the executable file

Visualization VI32.EXE
Process assignment TPZ32.EXE
Recipe Runtime TRZ32.EXE
Eventjournal TEJ32.EXE
Event Viewer TEJ_Viewer32.EXE
Data storage TDS32.EXE
ODBC TODBC32.EXE
OPC Client TOPC32.EXE
DDE (Client / Server) TDDE32.EXE
Activity Log Viewer LOG32.EXE
Network Master TMPM32.EXE
Network Station TMPS32.EXE
inVISU 2.5 to PMS TDBT32.EXE
Debugger Debugger32.EXE
Maintenance TIH32.EXE
Operation Log TBP32.EXE
Database Replication TREPL32.EXE
30
Projects
Runtime
Runtime program
With the help of the runtime program, all programs, entered in the Program list of the Project Manager, will
be started.
When a program cannot be started (not enough memory, wrong path indication etc.), you will be asked in a
dialog, whether the initialization shall be aborted or continued without this program.
When the Runtime Program is terminated, all other runtime programs will also be stopped.
The individual tasks are executed by different programs.

These programs are:
Visualization
Trend charts, XY-trend charts
Recipe
Eventjournal, Event Viewer
Process Assignment
Data Storage
Activity Log
Operation Log
Maintenance
Database Replication
OPC (Client), (Server)
Network (Master or station)
DDE (Client / Server)
ODBC
Starting of a project
Open the desired project in the Project Manager. Select then in the toolbar Runtime the command
Runtime.
Using
Project administration
With the Project Manager you can manage projects, like directories and files are managed with the Windows
explorer. It is possible to copy single files from project to project or to delete them. The single project files
are displayed with small and large symbols or in form of a list with all details.
If in the tree view a program option is selected, only the regarding project files are displayed (filtered view).
A double-click on a program option starts the accompanying editor.
A double-click on a document starts also the editor. In this case the last used documents are not loaded
automatically.
What would you like to do?

Create a new project
Establish a default project
31
Creating a new project

Start working with AMS Asset Graphics:
Press button New in the toolbar Standard of the Project Manager to open dialog New project.
Enter the name of the new project into the edit field.
The possible length of the project name varies according to the conventions of the operating
system.
After confirming the new project name with OK, a new project will be opened in the current data list.
If the option Use default project is set, the default project will be copied under this name.
Note If you have to edit several similar projects, project files which are identical in every project, can be
deposited in the default project, so that they are already available when opening a new project .
See also
Configuration of a default project
Configure a default project

Select button New in the standard toolbar of the Project Manager to open dialog New project.
Enter name DefaultProject into the edit field.
All settings and project files that you create in this project, can be used later as reference for a
new project.
Inserting programs in the program list
In the program list, either standard programs (i.e. programs, that are part of AMS Asset Graphics) or other
program are listed.
Inserting standard programs

1. Click at first with the mouse in the line of the program list, in which the program shall be entered.
2. Select in the list of standard programs that program, that you want to use.
3. Now, click with the mouse on button Apply or double-click on the name.
The program definitions appear in the line of the program list, that you have selected before. The
entry in the list of the standard programs will be deleted.
Inserting other programs

1. Select first a cell in column program of the program list.
2. Now enter the name of the program, that you want to start automatically with the runtime. If it is
not stored in the same directory as the AMS Asset Graphics program and if it is also not stored in
a search path, you have to enter the complete path.
With the right mouse button you open a file browser to select the wanted file.
Copying project files
Copying of project files can be done within the Project Manager between two projects or between Project
Manager and other applications such as e.g. the Windows explorer. The file exchange is made via the
clipboard or by drag & drop.
The copying is made in the file view via the clipboard with the commands Copy and Insert or directly via
drag & drop. Select the desired files with mouse or keyboard and copy them. A multiple selection is possible
with keys SHIFT or STRG.
32
Projects
User management
Overview password protection

The password system is user oriented. In the Project Manager you define users and rights globally for editor
and runtime programs. Operation actions in the Visualization and in the Eventjournal can be protected as
well as the access on editor programs.
Every user will be assigned specific rights, which may be in between 0 and 99. With an access right 0, the
operation action is unprotected. At this, there is no login necessary, i.e. the function may be executed from
every user.
The password protection for operator functions in the visualization is defined in the Graphic Editor, the
password protection for operator functions in the Eventjournal in the Eventjournal Editor.
If a login is necessary, dialog User Login appears.
The following commands are at disposal in menu Configuration | Password protection:

Definition...
User...
Editor programs...
See also
Password protection (Step-by-step instructions)
Dialogs
Dialog User Login

Option Description
User Enter the user name here.
Password Enter here the corresponding password.
Attention Password and User are case sensitive.

If three times in series an invalid user name or an incorrect password was entered, the login will be aborted
and the message Access denied output. In this case, the operation action will not be executed.
Dialog Define rights

In this dialog you can assign names to up to 99 access rights.
Select the desired line with the corresponding number and overwrite the number with the name of the right,
e.g. „All rights" or „Acknowledge alarms".
When you select a right for an operation you will then have the possibility, to access on names instead of
numbers.
With button Save the settings will be stored and the dialog closed.
33
Dialog User table

In this dialog you define user name and password and set access rights.
Option Description
Options
External access Set this option to enable user log in with an external control (key-switch). In this case,
the system-element _UserExtern will be evaluated. With the value of the element, the
user in the regarding line in the user list will be logged in, without the necessity of a
special password request.
Example:
_UserExtern has the value 3: The user, defined in the 3. line, is logged in.
User list In the user list, up to 100 different users and their properties are defined.
Name Enter here the name of the operator. The name may have a length of up to 32
characters.
Password The password of the user may have up to 32 characters. However, the password will but
not be shown in plain text and cannot be edited directly in the table.
With the button Change password you can call the dialog Change password to change
a password.
Attention The password is case sensitive.
Lifetime The lifetime is the time, that the user may work in the system without renewed request
for this data, when he has once entered his user name and password. At every operation
function the lifetime starts running anew. When the lifetime has elapsed, the user has to
log in again.
When the lifetime shall never elapse, which could be useful e.g. at the external user
login, enter the value -1 as lifetime.
Rights Press button Assign to open dialog Assign rights. Here you select the rights for an user.
In line 1 have a user with name Supervisor is firmly predefined. Only password and lifetime can be
configured.
Dialog Assign access rights

In this dialog you can mark the desired user access right, by activating the corresponding option.
Dialog Change password

In this dialog the password for a user can be changed.
Option Description
User / Enter the operator name and the corresponding (old) password.
Old password
New password Enter the new password here. For safety reasons, the new password has to be repeated
/ in field confirmation.
Confirmation
Attention The password is case sensitive.
34
Projects
Dialog Access rights

Select the desired access right with the button OK or with a double-click on it.
Dialog Password editor programs

In this dialog you define the access protection for the individual editor programs.
Column Description
Editor In this column, the individual editors are registered. You cannot make any change.
Right The default access right is Unprotected. If you want to protect an editor enter here the user
right as number or as name. By clicking with the right mouse button you open dialog Select
access right. Here you select the user right from a selection list.
Note User name, password and the assignment to the rights you can define with command
Configuration | Password protection | User... in dialog User table.
See also
Password protection
Using
Password protection
To protect the system against unauthorized access, you can define operators which are assigned to access
rights and passwords. During runtime, password-protected actions may only be made by operators with the
relevant access right.
For defining the password protection we recommend to proceed as follows:

Define operator rights
Define operator, passwords and lifetime, assign rights to operators
Define protection of the editors
Define operator right for input objects
Define user right for the acknowledgment in the Eventjournal
Define operator rights

Start the Project Manager.
Open the project (button Open in the standard toolbar).
Select menu command Configuration | Password protection | Definition... to open dialog
Define rights.
You can replace each of the numbers in square brackets with a text, e.g. "acknowledge", "inputs",
"only pictures" etc.
Close the dialog with Save.
Define operator, password and lifetime, assign rights

Make sure that the project, you want to work on, is opened in the Project Manager.
Select the menu command Configuration | Password protection | User to open the dialog User
table.
Enter the operators into the user list with their names and their passwords.
35
For every password you can define a Lifetime. If the configured time has elapsed, the operator
must login again.
You can assign the rights for every operator by pressing button Assign in the dialog Assign
rights. Close the dialog with OK. For the currently selected operator line the selected rights are
displayed in the Rights.
Confirm the dialog with Save.
Define operator right for input objects

Input objects are defined in the Graphic Editor as well as their password protection.
Start the Graphic Editor (command Graphic Editor in toolbar Development in the Project
Manager).
Open the picture.
Select the object, which shall be protected by a password, e.g. a number, a text, a scrollbar, a
slider, a button or a graphic button. Open dialog Properties with a double-click.
Select tab Input (only number and text objects) or tab Function at one of the other object types.
Click with the right mouse button on edit field Password protection to open dialog Select
access right.
Select the right, e.g. "Only pictures" at a button which is used for the picture change.
Confirm the dialog with OK.
Confirm also dialog Properties with OK and save your changes.
Define user right for the acknowledgment in the Eventjournal

The acknowledgment of events as well as their password-protection are defined in the Eventjournal Editor.
Start the Eventjournal Editor (button Eventjournal Editor in toolbar Development in the Project
Manager).
Select button Group properties in the table-specific toolbar to open dialog Group selection.
Select the group, in which the acknowledgment shall be password-protected, and confirm the
dialog with Edit. Dialog Properties group is now open.
If the option Necessary in group Acknowledgment is set, you can click with the right mouse
button on edit field Password protection to open dialog Select access right.
Select the wanted right, e.g. "Acknowledge".
Also confirm dialog Properties Group with OK, dialog Group selection with Close and save
your changes (button Save in the standard toolbar).
36
Projects
Define password protection of editors

Even the editors can be protected by a password. At the start of a password-protected editor, the user has
to enter his name and his password.
Make sure that the project, you want to edit, has been opened in the project manager.
Select menu command Configuration | Password protection | Editor programs... to open
dialog Password editor programs.
Select the right for every editor by clicking with the right mouse button in column Right. Dialog
Select access right will be opened. Mark the corresponding right, e.g. "editors", and close the
dialog with OK.
Confirm the dialog with Save.
Replication
Configuring a database replication

In this dialog you can set up a database replication to the SQL databases of AMS Asset Graphics.
See Requirements for a successful replication.
First setup a connection with the SQL server by entering the name of the SQL server instance in the edit
field SQL Server and then press Connect.
The connecting takes several seconds. If an error occurs you will get an error message normally after 60
seconds.
The name of the AMS Asset Graphics SQL Server instance is commonly
ComputerName\inVISU_PMS.
Note The using of an IP address instead of a computer name will result in an error, when the replication is
executed. So you must use a computer name.
If a connection to a database is not possible because the respective IP address cannot be resolved, you can
solve the problem with an entry in the Hosts-file (e.g. C:\WINDOWS\system32\drivers\etc\hosts).
After a successful connection to the SQL Server you can select a database from the list. This database will
be the primary part of the replication. For this database you will define one or more subscribers. With every
subscriber a database replication is made.
37
With the button Add/delete database table you open the dialog to select tables, which shall be replicated.
In the list of the database tables you find the tables used by AMS Asset Graphics programs.
After the selection of the tables you must create a snapshot with the so named command. This initial
snapshot is absolutely necessary.
With the command New you add a new subscription to the database.
First you select the SQL server in the dialog Select destination. After a successful connection to this SQL
server you select the database in the dialog Select database.
If the subscription could be established the new subscription is displayed in the table.
The table displays subscriptions with corresponding data-elements.

Here you can enter the trigger for the replication start. The other data-elements give you informations about
the replication status.
Because the subscriptions are stored in the SQL Server you can see them only, if a connection to the SQL
Server is established.
Column Description
Subscription Here you see the name of the subscriptions. The structure is SQL Server:Database
name name.
Database name is name of the database on the destination system.
Example: WS002094\INVISU_PMS:OperationLog.
Start The here configured num-element starts the replication.
Note It is necessary that the program Database replication is added in the program list
(see dialog Runtime configuration).
Ready This num-element is a notification-trigger for the end of a replication, independent
whether successful or not.
Error This num-element contains the last error number from the SQL Server. 0 indicates the
status successful (no error).
Status text This text-element reports the last action or error as text with a maximum of 80
characters.
Progress With this num-element you can retrieve the progress of the replication in percent.
The command Delete deletes the subscription selected in the table.
Requirements for an successful replication

To synchronize successful data between two SQL Servers (MSDE), consider the following requirements:
There must be a windows user with the same name and password on the two computers. You
can add a user in the Windows Computer Management.
The SQL Server service MSSQL$INVISU_PMS must be started on the two computers with the
users mentioned above (not under the Local System account). You can change these settings on
the tab Log On (properties of the service MSSQL$INVISU_PMS).
On the primary SQL Server the service SQLAgent$INVISU_PMS must be started with the user
mentioned above (not under the Local System account). The Startup type must be set to
Automatic.
You can change these settings on the tabs Log On and General (properties of the service
SQLAgent$INVISU_PMS).
The SQL Server service (MSSQL$INVISU_PMS) is started on the two computers.
38
Projects
The service SQLAgent$INVISU_PMS is started on the primary SQL Server.

On the primary SQL Servers the databases and the tables must exist before the replication is
configured.
Databases and tables are created by the corresponding runtime program.
The destination database must exist on the subscriber computer .
AMS Asset Graphics database tables

AMS Asset Graphics uses several tables in the databases Events, Maintenance and OperationLog.
It is useful to synchronize only certain tables with other databases. These are generally the tables where the
runtime data are stored.
Tables for the Eventjournal in the database Events:

EventHistory
Tables for the Maintenance in the database Maintenance:

IH_ProjectName_MaintenanceHistory
Tables for the Operation Log in the database OperationLog:

BP_ProjectName_ReportName_SingleValues
BP_ProjectName_ReportName_DayValues
BP_ProjectName_ReportName_TotalDayValues
BP_ProjectName_ReportName_TotalWeekValues
BP_ProjectName_ReportName_TotalMonthValues
BP_ProjectName_ReportName_TotalYearValues
Dialog Add/delete tables

In this dialog all tables of the database are listed, which can be used for replication. Set the checkbox for the
tables, which shall be synchronize the data with a subscriber.
See AMS Asset Graphics database tables
Dialog Select destination

Enter the name of the SQL Server in the edit field and press OK.
The name of the SQL Server is at AMS Asset Graphics databases generally
ComputerName\inVISU_PMS.
Connecting generally will take several seconds.
In an error case an error message is displayed after approx. 60 seconds.
Note The using of an IP address instead of a computer name will result in an error, when the replication is
executed. So you must use a computer name.
If a connection to a database is not possible because the respective IP address cannot be resolved, you can
solve the problem with an entry in the Hosts-file (e.g. C:\WINDOWS\system32\drivers\etc\hosts).
Dialog Select database

Select a database from the list and press OK.
39
Database Replication Runtime
The task of the Database Replication Runtime is to start the various replication operations.
In the program window you will find information about each subscription. This is a help for the error
diagnostics.
Sample output:
Server: Master1\INVISU_PMS
Database: OperationLog
Subscription:Master2\INVISU_PMS:OperationLog
State/Error: idle
Start time: 23.03.2006 16:00:00
Finish time: 23.03.2006 15:00:34
Initializing
Connecting to Publisher 'Master1\INVISU_PMS'
Connecting to Subscriber 'Master2\INVISU_PMS'
Retrieving publication information
Retrieving subscription information
Line Description
Server SQL Server instance of the primary database.
Database Name of the primary database.
Subscription Name of the subscription.
State/Error Current state or error.
Start time Start time of the last replication operation.
Finish time Finish time of the last replication operation.
Following Here you see all action and error output produced by the SQL server during the
lines replication operation.
40
Graphic
Graphic Editor
The Graphic Editor is a main part of the process management system AMS Asset Graphics. With this
program the process pictures are drawn and the user interface configured. The appearance of the process
data on the screen will be defined as well as the options for the user to control the process from the
computer.
The graphics are realized as vector graphics. All elements of a picture are so called objects, which can be
drawn edited at any time.
Generally, objects have three main properties:
Static properties, such as position, size and color
Dynamic properties, such as change in visibility, position, color, and rotation
VBScripts can be edited for every object (VBScript is the short form for Visual BASIC Script).
With the Graphic Editor an arbitrary number of pictures can be edited. Every view of a picture can in turn be
divided into up to 4 parts.
Overview objects
See also
User interface of the Graphic Editor
Menu commands
Shortcuts
User interface
User Interface
The user interface of the Graphic Editor offers different toolbars for file operations, for drawing, for opening
entry fields, for the color selection, for aligning several objects, for editing of symbols and for zooming the
picture. The same functions can also be executed via the menu commands above. In the center of the
screen there are one or several windows to draw the process picture.
At the start of the Graphic Editor, the data directory defined in program Configuration (tab Directories), will
be used automatically. When the directory is not accessible, a message will be displayed and the program
terminates.
See also
Toolbar Draw
Toolbar Input
Toolbar Colors
Toolbar Align
Toolbar Symbols
Toolbar Zoom
Toolbar Language
Tree view
41
Tree view
The tree view displays all objects in a hierarchical manner. All objects can be selected and configured.
If the tree view window has not the input focus, it will be shown darker.
With the TAB-key the input focus changes to the picture.
You can select an object with a left-click it in the picture or in the tree view.
When pressing the CTRL-key at the same time, the status changes between selected and not selected.
When pressing the Shift-key, all objects between the last selection and the current position will be selected,
whereat only objects of the same hierarchical level can be selected, e.g. all objects, that are part of a group
object.
A double-click opens the Property dialog of the object.

Right-clicking on a object in the tree view opens the context menu of the object.
With the left and right arrow key an object branch can be opened and closed, with the up and down arrow
key you can navigate in a branch.
With the + and - key objects are moved in the Z-order.
The F2-key starts editing of an object name. The names of the objects can also be defined on tab Graphic in
field Name.
Shortcuts
Key Function See also

CTRL+A Selectall Menu Edit
CTRL+Shift+A Deselect all
CTRL+C Copy Menu Edit
CTRL+F Search data-elements Search for data-element
CTRL+G Group objects Group object
CTRL+I Objects invisible Menu Edit
CTRL+Shift+I Display all objects again Menu Edit
CTRL+L Lock objects Menu Edit
CTRL+N File New
CTRL+O File Open...
CTRL+P File Print...
CTRL+R Rename data-elements Rename data-elements
CTRL+S File Save
CTRL+U Ungroup a group object Group object
CTRL+V Insert Menu Edit
CTRL+X Cut Menu Edit
CTRL+Y Repeat Menu Edit
CTRL+Z Undo
Alt+Enter Properties... Menu Edit
Del Delete Menu Edit
F9 Rotate objects to the right. Alignment commands
CTRL+F9 Rotate objects to the left.
42
Graphic
Dialogs
Dialog Action
In this dialog you can select one of the following actions:
Action Description
SET The data-element will be set on the value of a constant or a variable.
TIP As long as the button is pressed, the data-element has value 1. When releasing the button, the
data-element will be set on 0. When other values as 1 and 0 shall be used, enter them in field
minimum (= button not pressed) and maximum (= button pressed).
ADD The data-element will be added up with the value of a constant or variable.
SUB A constant or variable will be subtracted from the value of the data-element.
MUL The data-element will be multiplied with the value of a constant or variable.
DIV The data-element will be divided by the value of a constant or variable.
TGL The data-element will be changed independently from the value of a constant or variable. At this,
the value will be increased by 1 at every TGL action . When the value has reached 255, it will
start again at 0. The system registers this change and can trigger follow-up actions automatically.
SWP The data-element will be set from the minimum- on the maximum-value and vice versa.
Dialog Shortcut
Here you have the following input possibilities:
The 12 function keys
Every numerical key 0 to 9
Every letter, it is not distinguished between capital letters and small initial letters.
The Scroll-key
The keys Ins and Del
The keys Home and End
The PgUp and PgDn
The arrow keys: up, down, left and right
All keys may be combined with the Shift-key, the Ctrl-key or the Alt-key. These keys can be combined
together and also with further keys.
When you confirm the dialog with OK, the key or key combination is set as shortcut into the corresponding
entry field.
Search element
With this dialog you can search for a data-element in a picture. All objects of the current picture will be
scanned. In group objects, all grouped objects are also scanned. When an element is found in an object, the
object will be marked automatically.
Option Description
Search for Enter here a search string or a part of the search string. With the browse-button you can
also select an element from the reference list.
Match whole When this option is set, the search string must match completely with the element
word only name.
When this options is not set, the search string must match only in parts with the element
name.
Match case At the search, the capitalization and use of small letters of the element names are used
to find a data-element.
Start at begin Starts searching at the first object in the current picture.
43
Option Description
Find next Beginning at the currently selected object, the next object (element name in an object) is
searched for.
Edit The property dialog for the found object will be opened.
Dialog Rename elements
This is a comfortable feature, to rename data-elements, used in one or several highlighted objects, also in a
group of objects. All data-elements, used in the selected objects, will be shown in the lines of the grid.
Values of constants in VBScript can also be changed.
Shortcut
The dialog can also be accessed with the key CTRL+R.
Column Description
Original The name of the original data-element/constant is shown here. It cannot be changed.
New Enter here the name of the new data-element or the new value of the constant. Data-elements
can be selected from the reference list with a click with the right mouse button. Text-constants
will be enclosed in " ".
Type The Data type of the data-element/constant is shown here.
This entry cannot be edited.
Dialog File selection with preview
Option Description
Project or Select in this list field the project or the library, where the file to be selected is stored. The
library expression [Project] stands for files in the current project.
All files of the selected type of this project or library will be shown in the file selection field
below.
File name The name of the file, selected in the file selection field, is shown.
You can also enter the name of the file via the keyboard.
File type Select the file type. Depending on the function, that was used to open the dialog, one
particular file type (picture or symbol) is predefined generally.
Preview Activate this option to show a reduced image of the document in the preview window.
Toolbars
Alignment commands
Button or command Description

Left, Centered, Right All selected objects will be horizontally aligned at the reference object.
Top, Center, Bottom All selected objects will be vertically aligned at the reference object.
Same horizontal spacing, The horizontal/vertical spacing between all highlighted objects will be adjusted
Same vertical spacing by keeping the positions of the two outer objects and by distributing the space
among the other objects.
Same width, All objects will be given the same width and/or the same height as the first
Same height highlighted object. In this process, the top-left position remains unchanged.
Same size
Rotate left, With this command the highlighted objects will be turned by 90° to the left or to
Rotate right the right. At this, only the static properties of the objects will be modified.
Center of rotation is the geometric center of the highlighted objects.
Bring to front Moves the highlighted object on the front level.
Bring forward, Moves the highlighted object one level forward or backward.
Send backward
44
Graphic
Button or command Description

Send to back Moves the highlighted object on the rearmost level.
Grid display With this command you can switch on or off the grid. You configure the grid
space on tab Grid.
Grid capture With this command you can switch on or off the grid capture function. When
this option is activated, all new marked objects will be aligned at the currently
adjusted grid.
Lock mode With this command you can switch on or off the lock mode. When the lock
mode is off, you can also select locked objects in the picture with the mouse.
Toolbar Alignment
The toolbar Alignment has the comfortable commands to align objects relative to a reference object.
The reference object is the first selected object. Press the Shift-key pressed and mark with the left mouse
button every object, which shall be aligned at the reference object.
You can also mark objects, by drawing a marking rectangle around the object with the mouse. Also here
applies: first mark the reference object with a mouse click. The reference object has black tracker points, the
other objects have gray points.
The commands for changing the level of the object, can only be used when one object is selected.
The functions of the different buttons can be found in Alignment commands.
Toolbar Input
Here you find the commands for creating objects, that can be used with the mouse or keyboard to change
the value of data-elements.
See also
Button
Graphic Button
Checkbox
Radio Button
Scrollbar
Slider
Data-elements can also be modified with Dialog objects.

Toolbar Colors
With this toolbar you adjust the current outline color and the current fill color.
First select the objects which shall be affected by the changes. When no object is highlighted, the new color
selection will used for new objects.
With a left-click on a color field you select the current line color, with a right-click you select the current fill
color.
When you want to select a color, that is not included offered colors, double-click on a color field. The dialog
Color selection will be opened. In this dialog you can also select a transparent color or flashing colors.
Select a color, which will then be applied in the corresponding toolbar field.
Note Flashing colors are defined in the dialog Flashing colors.

Toolbar Language
The toolbar language provides commands to display the translated text of objects with language-elements.
The translation mode is enabled/disabled with the command Language text on/off. The language can be
selected in the list.
45
Toolbar Symbol
Symbols are a collection of dynamic objects, which are administrated in libraries. In such a symbol library
often used symbols are deposited.
To insert symbols precisely into a picture you should operate with the options grid and grid capture.
New library
With this command you open a new symbol library. When you activate the command the dialog New library
appears.
Enter here the name of a new symbol library. It will be created as sub directory in subdirectory Library in the
program directory.
Load symbol
With this command, you select a symbol from the list of existing symbols and insert it in the picture.
When you activate the command the dialog File selection appears.
Link-symbol
Creates a new link-symbol object and assigns the selected symbol file to the new link-symbol.
Save as symbol
Select first one or more objects, that you want to save as symbol. After selecting a file name in the dialog
File selection the selected objects are saved as symbol.
Toolbar Draw
Here you find the commands for selecting, drawing and editing of objects.
Select the wanted command and draw the corresponding object.
When you press the ESC-key the command Select objects will be activated.
Commands
Select objects
Edit polygon
Line
Rectangle
Rounded rectangle
Ellipse
Polygon
Polyline
Text
Number
Graphic
Group objects
Ungroup
Create metafiles
Windows
Trend chart
XY-trend chart
New object
Toolbar Zoom
Toolbar Zoom has commands to extend or to reduce the view on process pictures. The use of the zoom
function does not affect the document, but only the display of it.
46
Graphic
Zoom control
Select list field Zoom control in toolbar Zoom, which offers predefined zoom steps to select sizes in
percent. Predefined values are 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%, 200%, 400% and 800%.
Beside this, you can also enter other zoom values directly into the input field such as e.g. 500%.
Zoom in
This commands multiplies the current Zoom value with 2.
Zoom out
This commands divides the current zoom value with 2.
AutoZoom
After activating this command you can select a zoom area in the picture with the mouse.
Original size
When you activate command Original size in toolbar Zoom, the views will be reset on the original size,
100%.
Menus
Menu commands
In the Graphic Editor there following commands in the main menu:
File
Edit
Alignment
View
Properties
Window
Language
?
Menu File
In this menu item you find commands, to create new process pictures or open existing ones, to print
pictures, to close or save them. Beside this, the following commands are available:
Save Project settings

Select this command to save all settings for the project, that you have changed in the Graphic Editor.
See also
Menu Properties Project
Print...
Select this command to print a document. When selecting the command, the standard-dialog Print appears,
for the configuration of the printer and to select other options for the printer setting.
Print preview
Select this command to show a preview of the current picture. When selecting this command, the main
window will be replaced by a page view window, which shows the picture in its print format. In addition, you
can show the page enlarged and reduced or you can start a print job.
47
Printer settings...
Select this command to define a printer and a printer port in the dialog Printer settings.
Menu Edit
Command Description
Undo Use this command to make the last action undone. You can make undone up to 10
actions.
Redo Use this command to restore the last action that was made undone. You can
restore up to 10 actions.
Cut Use this command to remove the currently selected objects from the picture and
copy it into the clipboard.
Copy Use this command to copy currently highlighted objects into the clipboard.
Paste Use this command to insert a paste of the clipboard contents into the picture at the
current cursor position.
The Graphic Editor can deal the data types AMS Asset Graphics objects, metafile
and bitmap.
If a Metafile or a Bitmap shall be pasted, the dialog File selection will be opened.
Enter a name for the Metafile or Bitmap file and convert it to an AMS Asset Graphics
object, before pasting it into the picture.
Delete Use this command to delete all selected objects.
Select all Use this command to select all objects in the current picture.
Deselect all Use this command to deselect all objects in the current picture.
Invisible As a help function for editing objects can be made invisible in the Graphic Editor to
(submenu) get access on objects, placed below them.
Invisible objects cannot be selected anymore!
Make selected All selected objects will get invisible. This command can also be called with shortcut
objects invisible Ctrl+I.
Show all objects All selected objects will get visible. This command can also be called with shortcut
Ctrl+Shift+I.
Trend charts All trend objects are made invisible.
invisible
Windows invisible All window objects are made invisible.
Lock With this command you can lock a object. This means the object cannot be
selected anymore in the picture. In the tree view the selection of the object is
always possible.
Lock mode When the lock mode is not activated, also locked objects can be selected in the
picture.
Search element The locations of use of a data-element can be found with dialog Search element.
Rename elements Data-elements can be given a new name in the dialog Rename elements.
OLE-Objects For configuring OLE-objects (ActiveX-Objects) you can use the commands Insert
new object, Ole link and an Object specific popup menu.
Properties... This command opens the property dialog of an object.
48
Graphic
Menu View
In this menu item, the various toolbars and the status bar are switched on and off to use optimally the
available space on the screen.
Command Description
Draw With this command, toolbar Draw can be switched on or off.
Input With this command, toolbar Input can be switched on or off.
Colors With this command, toolbar Colors can be switched on or off.
Alignment With this command, toolbar Alignment can be switched on or off.
Symbol With this command, toolbar Symbol can be switched on or off.
Zoom With this command, toolbar Zoom can be switched on or off.
Language With this command, toolbar Language can be switched on or off.
Tree view With this command the tree view for the objects can be switched on or off.
Menu Alignment
In this menu you find commands to align several objects at one reference object.
For this purpose first select the object, at which the other objects are to be aligned. Keep the CTRL-button
pressed and select with the left mouse button every object, which shall be aligned at the first object.
You can also select objects by drawing a selection rectangle around the object with the mouse. Also here
applies: first mark the reference object with a mouse click. The object, to which other objects are aligned, is
drawn with black tracker points, the other objects with gray trackers.
The commands for changing the z-order of the object, are only accessible, when only one object is selected.
The description of the commands you found in Alignment commands.
Menu Properties
In menu Properties, you can configure the Graphic Editor itself, project settings and the current picture.
The following commands can be selected:

Editor...
Project
Visualization...
Shortcuts
Fonts...
Flashing colors...
Rename elements in the project settings.
Picture
Picture properties
Shortcuts
Test input
Menu Window
New Window
Use this command to open a window, which has the same contents as the active window. You can open
several windows at the same time, which permits you to view different parts or views of a process picture in
parallel. When you make changes at the contents in one of the opened windows, these changes will be
taken over by all windows, which contain the same picture. When opening a new window, it will get the
active window and will be viewed in front of all other opened windows.
49
Cascade
Use this command to arrange the opened windows in overlapping order.
Tile windows
Use this command to arrange the opened windows in a parallel view.
Arrange icons
Use this command to arrange the symbols of the minimized windows in the bottom part of the main window.
If there is an opened picture window, it could be possible, that some or all of the symbols are covered by this
picture window.
Split
Use this command to split the currently opened window.
To show the picture again in one window, double-click on the split area.
Tip When you work at a monitor with a low screen resolution and when your target system has a high
resolution, you cannot see the complete picture on the monitor. To move or copy objects between parts of
such a picture, split the window into two parts. Fade in the objects to be moved or copied in one section and
fade in the insertion range in the other section. Now, mark the desired elements, and move them over the
window separator.
Editor
Dialog Properties Editor
In this dialog editor properties are defined. The last settings will be stored and used again at the next start of
the Graphic Editor.
The dialog contains the tabs

Grid
Object selection and
Insert
Tab Insert (Properties Editor)
On this tab you can define, at which position objects from the clipboard are pasted.
The offset always refers to the position of the object copied into the clipboard, thus is a relative offset
Examples (Original position 200, 100):

Horizontal and vertical offset 0: object will be inserted with the original position.
Horizontal and vertical offset 10: object will be inserted with position (210, 110).
Tab Object selection (Properties Editor)
Option Description
Multiple selection At the Multiple selection, a rectangle as selection area is drawn.
With this option you can define, when objects shall be considered as selected.
Partial in the An object is selected, when parts of the object are within the selection rectangle. In
selection rectangle the example below, all objects will be selected.
Complete in the When this option is highlighted, only objects will be selected, which are placed
selection rectangle completely in the selection area. In the example, this applies for objects 2 and 4.
50
Graphic
Option Description
Polygon selection With this option you can configure, when a Polygon- / Polyline object is highlighted
with a mouse click.
Only inner area When this option is highlighted, the polygon object will only be selected, when you
click directly on the inner area of the object. In the example, this is valid for the
yellow area.
Bounding rectangle When this option is highlighted, the polygon object will be selected, when the mouse
click is within the enclosing rectangle (see example).
Tracker With this option the size of the tracking points are defined. In the preview you see the
effect. Possible values are between 3 and 10.
Example multiple selection
Example Polygon selection
Tab Grid (Properties Editor)

On this tab you select the grid view and the orientation of objects at the grid.
Option Description
Show grid Activate this option to align objects at the grid. This option can also be switched on or
off in toolbar Alignment.
Align on grid Activate this option to align objects at the grid. This option can also be switched on or
off in toolbar Alignment.
Grid spacing
Horizontal / Here you define the space of the horizontal and vertical grid lines. Possible values are
vertical between 4 and 100.
Origin
Horizontal / Define the horizontal and vertical reference point. Possible values are between 0 and
vertical 100.
51
Using
Select objects
Use this command in the toolbar Draw to select an object. While holding the Ctrl key you can click several
objects with the mouse and thus mark them. The first highlighted object will get black editing points and is
the reference object, the following objects will have gray points.
Note When you want to select multiple objects, draw a marking frame with the mouse around the
objects. This function is predefined that way, that all objects are selected, that are partially in the
selection area. This option (Multiple selection) can be changed in tab Object selection.
Changing position and size of an object with the keyboard

You can modify position and size of objects via the keyboard. In this process, the changes correspond to the
currently highlighted objects. By means of the arrow-keys (direction keys) the highlighted objects will be
moved by one pixel in the corresponding direction.
Objects are adapted in size, when you press key CTRL and the corresponding arrow key simultaneously.
When more than one object is highlighted, the CTRL button will be ignored and the objects moved in their
position.
You can speed-up the moving or the change of the size: When you press the SHIFT-button in addition, the
highlighted objects will not be shifted or changed in their size by only one pixel, but by the current Grid
space.
Copying of objects
Highlighted objects can be moved or copied. There are two possibilities to copy objects: either Copy the
object(s) with pressed CTRL-key and with the left mouse button or by means of CTRL+C and CTRL+V. The
objects will be copied on the original position, from this point you can move them to the desired position.
Changing the z-order of objects

With the plus (+) and the minus (-) key, a selected object will be moved in the drawing order in direction to
the top or to the back.
When these keys are pressed simultaneously with the ALT key, the object will be moved to the topmost or
lowest position in the drawing order.
Edit polygon points

Select this command in the toolbar Draw, when you want to edit the points of a polygon or a polyline.
To edit individual polygon points, the following actions are necessary:

Select the polygon object (mark it).
Select the command Edit polygon.
To move a polygon point:

Move the cursor with the mouse over the point (the mouse pointer changes to a cross), click the
left mouse button and move the point by keeping the mouse button pressed.
To delete a polygon point:

Move the cursor with the mouse over the point (the mouse pointer changes to a cross), and press
key DEL.
52
Graphic
To insert a polygon point:

Move with the mouse close to a polygon line and press button INS.
See also
Polygon
Selecting objects
Press button Select objects in toolbar Draw in the Graphic Editor.
Clicking on an object with the left mouse button is the fastest method to select individual objects. Several
objects can be selected, by keeping the Ctrl-key pressed while single objects, object groups or several
object groups are clicked with the mouse.
Function Proceeding
Selecting one object Click with the left mouse button on the object.
Selecting several Keep the Ctrl-key pressed and click with the left mouse button on every object.
objects
Selecting a group Click with the left mouse button in the selection frame of the grouped objects.
Selecting several Keep the Ctrl-key pressed and click with the left mouse button in the selection
groups frames of all groups to be selected.
An alternative to select objects is drawing a frame around the desired objects with the left mouse button.
See also
Selecting polygons or polylines to edit their form
Arranging objects
The functions to arrange objects provide the possibility to arrange objects left-aligned or right-aligned, to
move them on the same horizontal line, arrange them with identical distances and to adjust their size.
For all functions to arrange objects, the following apply: first select the reference object, at which the other
objects are to be arranged. Keep the Ctrl-key pressed and select with the left mouse button every object,
which shall be arrange to the reference object.
You can also select objects, by drawing a selecting rectangle around the object with the mouse. Also here
applies: first mark the reference object with a mouse click. The first object, the reference object is painted
with black trackers, the other objects have gray trackers.
Function Button
Align Left, Centered, Alignment left, centered or right relative to the reference object.
Right,
Align Top, Center, Alignment top, center or bottom relative to the reference object.
Bottom
Same The horizontal/vertical space between all highlighted objects will be adjusted by
horizontal/vertical keeping the positions of the two outer objects and by dividing up the space among
spacing the other objects.
Same width All objects will be given the same width as the reference object. The left x-position
remains unchanged.
Same height All objects will be given the same height as the reference object. The upper y-
position remains unchanged.
Same size All objects will be given the same width and height as the reference object.
53
Resizing objects
You can resize objects in horizontal and vertical direction.
Select the object.
Function Proceeding
Resizing horizontally Click with the left mouse button on the right or left pulling point of the object.
Resizing vertically Click with the left mouse button on the upper or lower pulling point of the object.
Resizing simultaneously Click with the left mouse button on one of the pulling points at the corners of the
horizontally and object.
vertically
Grouping objects
With the command Group objects you can combine several objects to one unit. Each of the objects
assigned to the group will keep its properties. Beside this, the group objects can be assigned further group
properties. Objects should be grouped, when their relation to each other shall be protected of being changed
accidentally.
Click on button Select objects in toolbar Draw.
Select the objects with the left mouse button.
Select button Group objects in toolbar Draw.
With the command Ungroup the contained objects are separated and the group object is destroyed.
See also
Dynamic actions in a group
Edit grouped objects
Zooming a picture
For a better display of details and for a better picture configuration, the Graphic Editor has the possibility to
show image details magnified. You can magnify and minimize again the image details gradually.
Zoom in
Press button Zoom in in toolbar Zoom. Half of the screen contents will be displayed with twice
the size, i.e. the current zoom level value is multiplied by 2 up to a zoom value of 800%.
In field zoom-control you can select predefined zoom steps (25%, 50%, 75%, 100%, 200%, 400%
and 800%).
Zoom out
Press button Zoom out in toolbar Zoom. Half of the screen contents is now displayed with a 50%
reduction, i.e. the current zoom value is divided by 2, down to a zoom value of 25%.
AutoZoom
Select button AutoZoom in toolbar Zoom. Then mark the detail, which shall be magnified. The
current zoom value will be displayed in the zoom control.
In field zoom control you can enter desired zoom factors directly.
Define a flashing color

You define flashing colors in the Graphic Editor for the complete project. This means, you can access these
flashing colors also e.g. in the Eventjournal Editor. Up to 8 different flashing colors with different
flashing intervals can be defined.
Start the Graphic Editor (button Graphic Editor in toolbar Development in the Project Manager).
54
Graphic
Open an existing picture of the project for which you would like to define flashing colors. If you
want to create a new picture, give it a name and save it in the project. Before saving the picture, it
cannot be assigned to any project and project-related commands cannot be executed.
Select menu command Properties | Project | Flashing colors to open dialog Flashing colors.
Click on the color button below Color1 and select the desired color.
Click on the color button below Color2 and select the second color which shall flash intermittently
with Color1.
Define the time interval for the flashing frequency in seconds. Values of 0.5 to 5 seconds are
possible.
Define further flashing colors or close the dialog with Save.
Selecting a polygon or a polyline to change its form

Select button Show in toolbar Draw in the Graphic Editor and select the object with the mouse.
Select button Edit polygon in toolbar Draw in the Graphic Editor.
Now, all polygon or polyline points are displayed, so that they can be changed.
To move a polygon point:
Move with the mouse over the point (the mouse pointer will change to a cross), push the left
mouse button, keep it pressed and move the point.
To delete a polygon point:
Move with the mouse over the point (the mouse pointer will change to a cross) and press the Del-
key.
To insert a polygon point:
Move with the mouse over the desired position of a polygon line and press the Ins-key.
Create Metafiles from selected objects

A metafile (enhanced metafile or Windows metafile) is a standard format of Windows and can be used in the
visualization. It contains various drawing operations (pixel or vector graphics)..Moreover, it offers the
possibility to save complex graphics as one object and thus can optimize the time to paint a picture. In
addition, it permits the exchange of graphics with other programs, that support metafiles as well.
Every AMS Asset Graphics object can be stored in a metafile. In doing so, the individual objects lose their
properties, however, drawing of the meta object is considerably quicker.
With the command Create metafiles from selected objects (toolbar Draw) you save the drawing in a
metafile and open a Graphic object. This function is only available, when you have selected at least one
object before. Having pressed the button the dialog File selection appears. Metafiles will be stored as *.EMF
(Enhanced Metafiles).
See also
Display an object with different states (step-by-step instructions)
Working with symbols
Symbols are objects, grouped objects or also interleaved grouped objects, which are saved with their
complete functionality in the AMS Asset Graphics Graphic Editor. Simple geometric forms, display and input
elements are also part of this.
Symbols may be used in different pictures and projects. Stored symbols can be changed belatedly in their
size. With that, the effort of making similar pictures can be reduced considerably.
55
Create new symbols

Mark the objects which shall be part of a symbol (Mark objects).
Select button Save as symbol in toolbar Symbol.
Enter a name for the symbol and press Save.
Load symbols
Press button Load symbol in toolbar Symbol to open the dialog for file selection.
Select the desired symbol. To the right of the list of symbols you see a preview on the highlighted
symbol. Press button Open.
Place the symbol to the desired position on the screen.
Now, you have the possibility to resize the symbol and edit the properties of the object. If it is a grouped
object, you can ungroup it and go on editing the single objects (see Group objects).
Changes, which you have made after loading the symbol, are not referred to the stored symbol. If you want
to save the changes of the symbol, you have to proceed as described under Create symbols.
Note Metafiles can be saved in a procedure similar to that of symbols. The essential difference between
symbols and Metafiles is, that symbols save the complete functionality of objects, which Metafiles cannot
do. Moreover, Metafiles rather offer the possibility to save complex graphics as an object and thus to
reduce display update times. They can be used in pictures in the same way as symbols.
Objects
Overview Objects
The following objects can be used in the Graphic Editor:
Basic-Objects:
Line
Rectangle
Round Rectangle
Ellipse
Polygon/
Polyline
Text
Number
Graphic
Group
Operation-Objects:
Button
Graphic Button
Scrollbar
Slider
Dialog objects
Further Objects:
Window
Link-Symbol
(Time-)Trend chart
XY-Trend chart
OLE
56
Graphic
Working with different screen resolutions

Due to the vector- and object-oriented user interface it is possible to adapt the graphics on different screen
resolutions. This is e.g. helpful, when you work at a screen, that has a display resolution of 1024 * 768 pixel,
but during runtime the user can only work with a screen resolution of 640 * 480 pixel.
When designing the graphic, some special features must be taken into account.
If you create your picture with a resolution of 1024 * 768 and then switch to a resolution of 640 * 480, you
can see, that the partitioning of the picture agrees, but that single objects look partly different. The reason for
this is, that almost every second pixel gets lost due to the lower resolution.
When you intend to operate your project with a resolution of 640 * 480, it is recommended to design the
project already with this resolution. When you notice later, that you have to adapt the project on other
resolutions, or when the project is intended to run on different target systems, you possibly have to adjust
the objects. Thereby the functions in toolbar Alignment will help.
If the visualization must handle with different screen resolutions, its a good idea to use project fonts.
Line, Rectangle, Round rectangle, Ellipse

Select the appropriate command in toolbar Draw.
Draw the object.
With a double-click on the object or via the context menu you can open dialog Properties OBJECT.
The dialog contains 6 tabs to configure the properties of the Object. The standard tabs are described in
Using a property dialog.
At the object round rectangle you can change the roundness of the curve by moving the additional tracker.
Polygon, Polyline
Select command Polygon in toolbar Draw to draw a polygon. At every click with the left mouse button, a
new polygon point will be inserted (condition: the new point has different coordinates as the previous).
With a double-click on the left mouse button (or by pressing the enter-key) the drawing of a polygon is
completed. With the ESC key the drawing of a polygon is cancelled, i.e. the object will be deleted.
When you want to configure a polygon, open dialog Properties POLYGON with a double-click on the object
or via the context menu.
The dialog has the special tab Pipe.
The standard tabs are described in Using a property dialog.
See also
Edit polygon points
57
Text
Select command Text in toolbar Draw to place a text on the screen. A new text object has the default text
"Text".
With a double-click on the graphic or via the context menu you can open dialog Properties TEXT.
The dialog contains up to 9 tabs to configure the properties of the Text. The standard tabs are described in
Tab Text
Tab Input
Tab Touch Panel
See also
Show the current time (step-by-step instructions)
Number
Select this command to place a number on the screen. With a double-click on the graphic or via the context
menu you can open dialog Properties Number.
The dialog contains up to 9 tabs to configure the properties of the Number. The standard tabs are described
in Using a property dialog.
Tab Number
Tab Input
Tab Touch Panel
See also
Display a numerical value (step-by-step instructions)
OLE-objects
Originally, OLE was an acronym for Object Linking and Embedding (combining and embedding objects).
OLE-documents, traditionally called composite documents, integrate smoothly different data types or
components. Audio data, calculation tables and bitmaps are typical examples for components in OLE-
documents. For example, in the Graphic Editor it is possible to integrate an Excel-table into a picture,
without having to change to Excel. Via the OLE-functionality, the menu and the toolbars of Excel will be
displayed. Embraced by the term OLE-object are also the OLE-control elements, also designated as
ActiveX-Controls.
OLE-object are re-usable software-components, which support a great number of the OLE-functions and
which can be tailored to many software-requirements. They are based on the Common Object Model
(COM). An OLE-object is a COM-based object, that can draw itself in its own window, can react on events
(such as mouse clicks) and that can be configured via an interface, which contains properties and methods.
With the Graphic Editor you can integrate OLE-objects in pictures. At runtime, they will be shown at the
defined position. The Graphic Editor and the Visualization operate as so-called OLE-container.
An OLE-container interacts with the OLE-object by methods and properties. The embedded OLE-object is in
connection with the container also via events, to inform the container, that an action has occurred. The
properties of OLE-objects can be edited in the property dialog of the object. Calling of methods and
configuring of events is not yet possible.
58
Graphic
Behaviour at runtime
When loading pictures at runtime, OLE-objects will be loaded and stay in a loaded state.. In this state the
OLE-object cannot be operated. An activation with mouse or keyboard is not possible. You can activate the
object, by triggering an action). The successful loading of an OLE-object pre-supposes, that the object was
registered correctly on the local computer and that linked documents can be found on every computer.
An active OLE-object has the priority for the input, thus the operation via function keys maybe not possible,
since the OLE-object has the input focus.
It is possible, to execute all verbs of the OLE-object. However, there is a possibility, to get the visualization
into a condition by means of the OLE-object, that can only be terminated with program exit. When planning
projects with OLE-objects, you have to take care, to avoid such conditions (do not call the corresponding
verbs).
Furthermore it is possible at many OLE-objects to call the edit-action. This operation is only useful at linked
objects since at changes of pictures the changes of embedded objects will get lost.
The following sections describe the definition of OLE-objects:
Insert new object

With this command (menu Edit) you insert an OLE-object into the current picture.
A dialog appears to select one of the registered the OLE-objects.
Click on Create New, if you want to create a new object to insert it into the current picture.
Click on Create from file to insert a complete document into the currently opened picture. The file will be
inserted as object. You can edit it with the program, that was used to create it.
With the option Link you define, whether the file is linked or will be embedded into the picture.
When you link the file, changes of the connected file will have an effect also on the original file, and
changes of the original file will also affect the connected file.
When you embed the file (option Link not set), changes of the embedded file will have no effect on the
original file, that means a copy of the file is used. Changes with the Graphic Editor in the linked file will be
stored in the picture. Changes in the visualization are not useful, because they are not stored in the picture
and are lost after a picture change.
Ole link
This command in menu Edit is only available, when links with other documents are integrated in the picture
(see Insert new object).
All OLE-objects with links of the current picture are shown in a list.
To show the update status of a link, click on the link, then click on button Automatic or Manual.
If the source file for the link cannot be found, the Update column will read Unavailable. This typically
happens if the source file is on an unavailable network drive or if the file has been moved.
Object specific menu

This menu item in menu Edit is a dynamic menu item. When no OLE-object is selected in the picture, it will
be named Object and will be represented in gray color. With a selected OLE-object a menu item or a
submenu, depending on the selected OLE-object will be shown here. The description of these dynamic
menu commands you can find in the documentation for the OLE-object.
Properties of OLE-objects
The properties of an OLE-object will be configured with the following tabs:
Tab Action (OLE-OBJECT)
Note At dynamic changes of position and size during runtime, the characteristics of active OLE-objects are
not clearly defined, so the behavior depends also on the internal functionality of the OLE-object.
59
Graphic
Select command Graphic in toolbar Draw to show a graphic file in a picture. With a double-click on the
graphic or via the context menu you can open dialog Graphic.
The dialog contains 6 tabs to configure the properties of the Graphic object.
Tab Graphic files.
Group
A group is a container for objects.
When the group changes its position or size, the coordinates of the assigned objects will adjusted.
If a group is invisible, all included objects are also invisible
Command Group objects

With this command all currently selected objects will be arranged to a group. The coordinates of the group
are defined by the bounding rectangle of all single objects.
When you want to edit the group properties, open dialog Properties GROUP with a double-click on the group
or via the context menu.
The dialog contains 5 tabs to configure the properties of the Group object. The standard tabs are described
The properties of the individual objects of a group will be preserved at the grouping. You can go on editing
individual objects without disintegrating the group. Selection of objects is done in the Tree view.
When you have copied a group of objects, you possibly have to rename single data-elements. There is a
comfortable way for renaming data-elements, to avoid opening dialog Properties for every object. For this
purpose, select command Rename elements... in the context menu to open the dialog rename elements.
Command Ungroup
Use this command to de-arrange a group of objects.
When de-arranging a group, the group object is destroyed and the group properties are lost.
Note The de-arrangement of a group is not necessary, when you want to edit single objects. For this you
can use the tree view.
See also
Edit grouped objects in the Graphic Editor (step-by-step instructions)
Dynamic actions in a group (step-by-step instructions)
Button
A button is a control which can be clicked with the mouse and which triggers one or several actions.
Click on command Button in toolbar Input to place a button on the screen.
With a double-click on the graphic or via the context menu you can open dialog Properties Button.
The dialog contains up to 9 tabs to configure the properties of the Button. The standard tabs are described
Tab Design
Tab Design2
Tab Touch Panel
Tab Function
See also
Change to another picture (step-by-step instructions)
60
Graphic
Graphic Button
A graphic button is a picture range, which can be clicked with the mouse during runtime and which triggers
one or several actions.
Click on command Graphic button in toolbar Input to place a button on the screen. With a double-click on
the graphic or via the context menu you can open dialog Properties Graphic button.
The dialog contains up to 8 tabs configure the properties of the Graphic Button object. The standard tabs
are described in Using a property dialog.
Tab Design
Tab Touch Panel
Tab Function
See also
Define a graphic button (step-by-step instructions)
Checkbox
With a checkbox you can display and change the values of num-elements. With every click on a checkbox
the status changes between marked and unmarked. The corresponding num-element changes also its
value.
Radio Button
Radio buttons are used when you want to let the user select one - and just one - option from a set of
alternatives. Radio buttons are linked with a common num-element, whereas the single radio button
represents a dedicated value. With a click on a radio button the status changes to marked and the num-
element is set to the predefined value.
Select command Checkbox or Radio button in the toolbar Input to place a checkbox/radio button on the
screen. With a double-click on the graphic or via the context menu you can open the dialog Properties
CHECKBOX or RADIO BUTTON.
The dialog contains tabs to define the different settings of the object. The standard tabs are described in
Tab Design
Tab Design2
Tab Function
Scrollbar
A scrollbar control can display and change the value of a num-element. The value will be displayed via the
position of the thumb, which can also be used to change its value. In addition, the value can be changed
with the arrow buttons.
Select command Scrollbar in toolbar Input to place a scrollbar on the screen. With a double-click on the
graphic or via the context menu you can open dialog Properties SCROLLBAR.
The dialog contains up to 7 tabs to configure the properties of the Scrollbar. The standard tabs are
described in Using a property dialog.
Tab Design
Tab Function
61
Slider
A slider control can display and change the value of a num-element. The value will be displayed via the
position of the thumb, which can also be used to change its value. In addition, the value can be changed
with the arrow buttons. The slider can also be displayed with a scale.
Select command Slider in toolbar Input to place a slider on the screen. With a double-click on the graphic or
via the context menu you can open dialog Properties SLIDER.
The dialog contains up to 7 tabs to configure the properties of the Slider. The standard tabs are described in
Tab Design
Tab Function
Window
With a window object you can display an other process picture. This picture in picture has all display
features and several possibilities for operating of a "normal" picture. You can use it for example to get an
overview on another part of the plant or to provide configuration possibilities.
Select command Window in toolbar Draw, to place a window on the screen. With a double-click on the
graphic or via the context menu you can open dialog Properties WINDOW.
The dialog contains 7 tabs to configure the different settings of the window. The standard tabs are described
Tab Design
Tab Function
Functionality when changing sizes and positions of windows.

Similar to other objects, windows can be changed in position and size. However, this function will be
disabled, as soon as a user moves the window with the mouse or changes its size (option Movable on
tab Design (Window) is switched on).
At windows, that were invisible and are now shown again, the configured position will again be active.
See also
Display operation windows (show a picture in the picture) (step-by-step instructions)
Link-symbol
A link-symbol is an object, that refers on a symbol file. This means, by changing the symbol file, these
changes can be performed centrally for all link-symbols connected with it.
The data-elements and constants, used in the symbol, can be replaced in the link-symbol by ‚local‟
elements/constants.
Select command Link-symbol in toolbar Symbol to open an object of type link-symbol. First, a valid symbol
file must be selected with the file selection. The link-symbol will then be opened with its original size in the
center of the visible picture detail. With a double-click on the graphic or via the context menu you can open
dialog Properties LINK-SYMBOL.
The dialog contains 6 tabs to configure the properties of the Link-symbol. The standard tabs are described
Tab Link-Symbol.
62
Graphic
Special VBScript-functions
The properties of objects can be extended with the following VBScript-functions.
Various Functions
Function name Description Object
TextColorRGB Text color as RGB-value Number, Text
InputEleName Data input element Number, Text
InputMinEleName Data input Minimum Number
InputMaxEleName Data input Maximum Number
InputIncDecEleName Data input IncDec Number
EleName Position Slider, Scrollbar
MinRangeEleName Minimum Slider, Scrollbar
MaxRangeEleName Maximum Slider, Scrollbar
MinSelectionEleName Minimum range Slider
MaxSelectionEleName Maximum range Slider
Resolution Resolution as Number Slider, Scrollbar
ToolTipText Text, that shall be shown as tooltip Button, Graphic Button,
Scrollbar, Slider
ButtonColorRGB, Color of the button or the text color as Button (Color button activated)
TextColorRGB RGB-value
EleName Defines the element for the status. Checkbox, Radio button
ReferenceValue Defines the reference value for the status Checkbox, Radio button
checked.
GraphFilename Sets the filename of graphic file. Graphic
Note The functions InputEleName, InputMinEleName, InputMaxEleName and InputIncDecEleName are

also called, when a data input is started.
Example1:
Set ColorR = CreateObject("PMS.NumEle")
ColorR.SetName("ColorR")
Set ColorG = CreateObject("PMS.NumEle")
ColorG.SetName("ColorG")
Set ColorB = CreateObject("PMS.NumEle")
ColorB.SetName("ColorB")
function TextColorRGB
TextColorRGB = ColorB.Value * 256 * 256 + ColorG.Value * 256 + ColorR.Value
end function
63
Example2:
const MotorNr = 123
Set MotorSoll = CreateObject("PMS.NumEle")
Sub OnStart
MotorSoll.SetName("Motor" & MotorNr & "_Soll")
End Sub
function InputEleName
InputEleName = "Motor" & MotorNr & "_Soll"
end function
function InputMinEleName
InputMinEleName = "600"
end function
function InputMaxEleName
InputMaxEleName = "Motor" & MotorNr & "_SollMax"
end function
Function NumberValue
NumberValue = MotorSoll.Value
End Function
Example3:
const MachineNumber = 3
function ToolTipText
ToolTipText = "This is machine " & MachineNumber
end function
Status of data input

The condition of a data input can be evaluated by a VBScript, e.g. to indicate additional information on the
object.
For this purpose, the corresponding VBScript-function has to be defined in the VBScript:
Function name Description Object
OnChangeInputState Submit the new input condition as parameter InputState. Number,
The following conditions are possible: Text
0 No data input active for this object
1 Data input is active, but object is not selected
2 Data input is active, object is selected.
3 Data input is active; input window for this object will be
shown
4 As 3), but input was activated with mouse (single mode).
Example:
Set TEXT = CreateObject("PMS.TxtEle")
TEXT.SetName("TEXT")
sub OnChangeInputState(InputState)
if (InputState >= 2) then
TEXT.Value = "Eingabe 1"
end if
if (InputState = 0) then
TEXT.Value = ""
end if
end sub
64
Graphic
Mouse messages
Mouse messages can be processed with VBScripts for the objects picture (Properties picture), buttons and
graphic buttons.
For this purpose, the corresponding VBScript-function for the object has to be defined in the VBscript:
Message Function name

WM_LBUTTONDOWN OnLButtonDown
WM_LBUTTONUP OnLButtonUp
WM_LBUTTONDBLCLK OnLButtonDblClk
WM_RBUTTONDOWN OnRButtonDown
WM_RBUTTONUP OnRButtonUp
WM_RBUTTONDBLCLK OnRButtonDblClk
WM_MOUSEMOVE OnMouseMove
Each of the functions has the parameter:

Parameter Description
Flags Is a bit combination with the following information:
1, left mouse button is pressed
2, right mouse button is pressed
4, Shift-key pressed
8, Ctrl-key pressed
16, middle mouse button pressed
xPos X-Position in client coordinates
yPos Y-Position in client coordinates
Example1:
Set PositionX = CreateObject("PMS.NumEle")
PositionX.SetName("PositionX")
Set PositionY = CreateObject("PMS.NumEle")
PositionY.SetName("PositionY")
Sub OnRButtonUp(Flags, xPos, yPos)

PositionX.Value = xPos
PositionY.Value = YPos
end Sub
65
The scroll wheel of the mouse can be evaluated for picture-objects with the VBScript-function
OnMouseWheel.
The function has the parameters:

Flags Is a bit combination with the following information:
1, left mouse button is pressed
2, right mouse button is pressed
4, Shift-key pressed
8, Ctrl-key pressed
16, middle mouse button pressed
32, the first extended mouse button is pressed
64, the second extended mouse button is pressed
Delta 1, Wheel is scrolling up
2, Wheel is scrolling down
xPos X-position in client coordinates
yPos Y-position in client coordinates
Example:
Sub OnMouseWheel(Flags, Delta, xPos, yPos)
End Sub
Set the name of a graphic file

The filename to be displayed can be set with the VBScript function GraphFilename. When this function
defined the standard behavior with the selection with value and the table of filenames is deactivated. The
filename must completely be defined (with the full path name.
Example:
' Local project path
Set ProjectPathLocal = CreateObject("PMS.TxtEle")
ProjectPathLocal.SetName("_ProjectPathLocal")
' Element for selection

Set Filename = CreateObject("PMS.TxtEle")
Filename.SetName("Filename")
' Set the filename

Function GraphFilename()
GraphFilename = ProjectPathLocal.Value & "\Graphics\" & Filename.Value
End Function
66
Graphic
Dialogs
When you want to set properties of an object, open dialog Properties with a double-click on the object or via
the context menu. Depending on the object type it contains various tabs to define the various properties.
The first tab is tab Graphic, which contains the static properties.
Then follow tabs with the object-specific properties (e.g. Text at object Text, Number at object Number,
Trend line at object Trend chart).
The following tabs are tabs with general dynamic properties like Position, Size, VBScript.
See the general tabs:

Tab Graphic
Tab View options
Tab Position
Tab Size
Tab Fill
Tab Color
Tab Rotate
Tab VBScript
Tab Graphic
Here you assign the Object static properties.
Option Description
Name Enter a name for the object to identify. For example, the name helps you at grouped
objects, when you want to edit individual objects of the group via the tree view. New
created objects will be given an object-specific standard name.
Border
Width Determine here the width of the border. Valid values are between 0 and 100, whereat 0
indicates, that no border is shown.
Style At a width of 1 you can select different painting styles for the border.
Color A new object gets the border color, which is defined in toolbar Colors.
When you click here, Color selection opens and you can select a color.
Surface
Color A new object gets the inner color, which is defined in toolbar Colors.
When you click here, Color selection opens and you can select a color.
Coordinates Position and size of an object is defined here in screen coordinates. The top left corner of a
picture has the coordinates 0,0.
When the size of a picture changes, the coordinates will be adapted automatically.
Position Define here the position of the object.
Size Define here width and height of the object.
Description Here you can enter an additional description for the object.
Notes
Not all options can be used for every object, for example, sliders have no border.
At line objects the fields Position / Size are labeled with Position1 / Position2. As special feature, the
coordinates of both endpoints of the line have to be entered.
67
Tab View options

On this tab you configure view options for an object.
Option Description
Display at
(PMS Value Here you can define when the object shall be visible. (If no entry is made, the object will
Control) always be visible.)
If both of the following options are selected, both conditions must be fulfilled, to make
the object visible.
If the visibility of the object shall depend on operating states, enter here a dynamic input
quantity. The object will be visible, when the value is unequal to 0
The name of the corresponding VBScript-function is: ShowVisibleValue.
User has With this option the object will only be visible, when the current user has the
access right corresponding access right.
Right At objects, where no operator right can be assigned, (e.g. rectangle), it can be assigned
a right in field Right, at the other objects field Right will only show the currently
selected right.
Disabled when
(PMS Value Definite objects (buttons, graphic buttons, sliders and scrollbars), can be represented
Control) disabled, i.e. gray shaded. In this status the objects cannot be used.
An object will be represented disabled, if at least one of the following conditions is met.
The object will be disabled, when the value is unequal to 0.
The name of the corresponding VBScript-function is: ShowGrayedValue.
User has no When this option is set, the object is drawn disabled, when the current user does not
access right have the corresponding access right.
68
Graphic
Notes
At graphic buttons, the condition disabled can also be assigned an individual graphic.
The property View options is not at selectable at OLE-Objects.
During a data input the state of visibility of objects, that are involved in the data input, does not change.
Tab Position
On this tab you can configure a dynamic position for an object.
Option Description
Horizontal /Vertical
Active When you want to change the position of an object, activate this option.
You define the input value for the position via a PMS Value Control as a num-element or with a
VBScript function. The name of the corresponding VBScript-functions are: OffsetHorzValue and
OffsetVertValue.
Value / In these fields you define the range of values of the position. Predefined is a 1:1 scaling, this
Pixel means, a change by 1 of the element corresponds to a horizontal move by 1 pixel.
It is possible to enter also floating point numbers.
Note When changing the screen resolution, this value will be adjusted automatically.
See also
Let objects run over the screen (step-by-step instructions)
69
Tab Size
On this tab you can configure a dynamic size for an object.
Option Description
Active When you want to change the size of an object, activate this option.
You define the input value for the size via a PMS Value Control as a num-element or with
a VBScript function. The name of the corresponding VBScript-functions are: WidthValue
and HeightValue.
Origin As origin for the width you can select Left, Center or Right and for the height Top,
Center or Bottom.
Value / In these fields you define the range of values of the size. Predefined is a 1:1 scaling, this
Percentage means, a change by 1 of the element corresponds to a to a change in size of 1 percent.
In the example above, the object is always displayed with at least 50 percent of its width.
With a value change of 1, the width will be increased by 10 percent.
See also
Change the size of objects dynamically (step-by-step instructions)
70
Graphic
Tab Rotate
On this tab you configure rotation properties for an object.
Option Description
Active Activate the option.
You define the input value for the angle via a PMS Value Control as a num-
element or with a VBScript function. The name of the according function is:
RotateValue.
Rotation center Here you enter the x- and y-position of the center of rotation.
Value / Angle In these fields you define the range of values for the rotation. Predefined is a
scaling of values between 0 and 100 to angles between 0 and 360°, i.e. a value
change by 1 corresponds to a rotation by 3.6°.
Calculate rotation center If highlighted, the center of rotation will be calculated relatively to the object.
relative to the object This means, when the object changes in size, the center of rotation will be
adapted accordingly. If this option is not set, the center of rotation will remain
fixed and will thus not change when the object changes in size.
See also
Let an object (a pointer) rotate (step-by-step instructions )
71
Tab Color
On this tab you can configure the dynamic color settings for an object.
Option Description
Line color / Fill color
Active When you want to have dynamic changes of line or fill colors, activate this option.
You define the input value for the color via a PMS Value Control as a num-element or with a
VBScript function. The name of the corresponding VBScript-function for line colors is:
LineColorValue, the VBScript-function for fill colors is: FillColorValue.
Table In the table you assign ranges of values to various colors. The number of the ranges of values is
not restricted. The ranges must be defined in ascending order. If the range of values was not
defined in ascending order, the incorrect cell will be marked in red.
The range of values will be defined with the cells From and To. The expressions -INF and INF
are abbreviations for minus infinite and infinite. When a new value is entered in the cell with value
INF, a new line will be created automatically.
To start a color selection double-click on the color cell.
The buttons Insert and Delete operate line by line (without safety request).
Example
In the sample above a rectangle has a dynamic fill color. The fill color is e.g. blue, when the value of
num-element FillColor is greater than or equal to 4 and smaller than 400. At every value greater
than/equal to 1024, the fill color will be red.
See also
Assign a color change to a filling level indicator (step-by-step instructions )
72
Graphic
Tab Filling
On this tab you can configure the dynamic filling settings for an object.
Thereby the object is filled horizontally or vertically. The filling extends from a reference point up to a
maximum percentage rate to be defined in this tab. Filling is made with the color, which is defined on Tab
color for the corresponding range of values.
Option Description
Active When you want to have dynamic filling properties, activate this option.
You define the input value for the filling via a PMS Value Control as a num-element or with a
VBScript function. The name of the corresponding VBScript-functions are: FillHorzValue and
FillVertValue.
Origin At the horizontal filling, as reference point for the filling direction can be selected Left, Center
or Right and for the vertical filling Top, Center or Bottom.
Value / In these fields you define the range of values of the filling. Predefined is a 1:1 scaling, this
Percentage means, a change by 1 of the element corresponds to a filling of 1 percent. If, in the example
above, num-element Silo1 has the value 128, the rectangle will be filled to 12,5 % (from the
bottom).
See also
Design a filling level indicator (step-by-step instructions)
Tab VBScript
Here you enter mathematical and logical expressions. A detailed description can be found in VBScript.
By clicking the right mouse button, you get a context menu with commands to support your work.
73
Special dialogs
Tab Action (OLE-OBJECT)
On this page all actions (verbs) of the OLE-Object will be shown in a table. Each action can be assigned a
trigger-element. When the corresponding trigger-element changes its value the corresponding action of the
OLE-object will be executed.
Tab Design (Properties BUTTON)
Option Description
Text Here you set the text for the button. New buttons have standard text "Button".
(Static, Dynamic) If you select a static text for the button, you can also use variables in the text.
If you use the dynamic option, you define via a PMS Value Control the button text with
a text-element or with a VBScript function. The name of the according function is:
ButtonTextValue.
Alignment
Horizontal Here you configure, whether the button text has to be left-aligned, right-aligned or
center.
Vertical Here you configure, whether the button text shall be placed top, in the center or
bottom.
Font Here you define the font settings.
Project font A project font is a font with a fixed size. Properties of project fonts can be defined and
changed centrally.
When you select a project font, the following font options are disabled.
Name Click on the browse-button at the right of the font name to open dialog Font. Here you
select a font and the font style.
You can also enter the font name with the keyboard as well. The input is restricted to
max. 31 characters.
Note The settings of effects, color and size are not used.
Bold, These options define, whether the text is displayed bold or italic.
Italic
Number of lines With this parameter, you define, the number of lines to show the text. Valid values are
0.5 to 20.
Tooltip Here you set the tooltip text. You can also use variables in the text.
Shortcut In this field you can assign a shortcut to the button. While the assigned short is pressed
the function, defined on tab Function (button), will be executed. When pressing the key,
the button will also appear pressed.
Click on the Browse-button to the right of the field to open dialog Shortcut.
74
Graphic
Tab Design (Graphic Button)
Option Description
Graphic
(Table) In this table you can define the graphic files for the appearance of the graphic buttons.
Possible graphic formats are bitmaps (file extension BMP) and metafiles (file extension WMF
or EMF).
The definition of graphic files is not implicitly necessary. See the following paragraph Display
options for a Graphic Button.
In column Status, the button states normal (not pressed), pressed, and disabled (grayed)
are firmly predefined.
In columns File name / Library you enter the name (including extension) and library
directory for a graphic file. The name [Project] is a synonym for the current project directory.
If File name and Library do not specify an existing file, the text will be shown in red.
It is useful, not to enter the file and library name directly, but to select it from the dialog File
selection (open with right mouse click).
Cursor You can use a special pointer for the graphic button. The (special) mouse pointer will be
shown, whenever the mouse is moving over the graphic button. It is possible to use static
mouse pointers (file extension CUR) as well as dynamic mouse pointers (file extension ANI).
When selecting (standard), the standard Windows mouse pointer is used.
With 3D- When this option is activated, the graphic button will always be drawn with a 3D-frame. If the
border option is not activated, no frame will be drawn.
Tooltip Here you can enter a text, that shall be shown as tooltip. You have also use variables in the
text.
Shortcut In this field you can assign a shortcut to the graphic button. If the assigned shortcut is
pressed, the function, defined on tab Function (button) will be executed. When pressing the
shortcut, the graphic button will also appear pressed.
The key combination cannot be entered directly as text, you must use the browse-button to
open dialog Shortcut to define the key combination.
Display options for a Graphic Buttons

The graphical display of Graphic Buttons depends on the definition of graphic files for the states normal and
pressed.
1. No graphic file defined:
In the inner area of the button the graphic is shown from the background image. If the button is
pressed, the graphic will be displayed slightly staggered, to achieve a 3D-effect. When the
background image changes, due to changes of objects, this changes will also be visible in the
graphic button, since it is transparent.
2. Graphic file defined for Normal only:
In the inner area of the button the graphic Normal is shown. When the button is pressed, the
graphic will be displayed slightly slantwise staggered, to achieve a 3D-effect. However, this
applies only, if option With 3D-Frame was pressed before. Otherwise, the Normal-graphic will be
shown for the pressed state.
3. Graphic file defined for Normal and Pressed:
As at 2, in the inner area of the button, graphic Normal will be shown. When the graphic button is
pressed the Pressed-graphic will be displayed. In this way, "real" 3D-effects can be obtained.
4. Graphic file only defined for Pressed:
When the button is clicked, the Pressed-graphic will be displayed. Otherwise the graphic of the
background image, below the graphic button will be displayed.
Status disabled:
If the button is disabled, the corresponding graphic will be shown. If no graphic was defined for the
disabled state, the graphic button is drawn with an additional hatching pattern.
75
See also
Tab View options
Define a graphic button (step-by-step instructions)
Tab Design (Properties SCROLLBAR)

Option Description
General
Horizontal Activate this option, when the scrollbar shall be aligned horizontally.
Vertical Activate this option, when the scrollbar shall be aligned vertically.
Resolution Here you define, by which amount the corresponding data-element shall be increased or
reduced, when clicking on the arrow.
Tooltip Here you can enter a text, that shall be shown as tooltip. You can also use variables in the
text.
Tab Design (Properties SLIDER)

Option Description
General
Horizontal Activate this option, when the slider shall be aligned horizontally.
Vertical Activate this option, when the slider shall be aligned vertically.
Resolution Here you define, by which amount the corresponding data-element shall be increased or
reduced, when moving the slider.
Thumb
Active Activate this option, when the thumb shall be visible. When you do not want to display the
thumb, this is only useful, when show range is activated on tab Function. In this case, the
slider acts as simple indicator.
Direction Here you define, whether the thumb points to the right (at a vertical alignment) or to the
bottom (at a horizontal alignment), is arranged centered, i.e. does not have a tip, or points to
the left or to the top.
Scale
Active Activate this option, when you want to have displayed a scale.
Number The number of scale divisions can be entered here. It is possible to enter values between 1
and 500.
Tooltip Here you can enter a text, that shall be shown as tooltip. You can also use variables in the
text.
76
Graphic
Tab Design (Properties WINDOWS)

Here you configure design properties for a window.
Option Description
Picture name Select the name of the process picture, that shall be shown in the window. Press the
browse button to open the dialog for File selection.
The program will show exclusively pictures from the current project for choice.
Window type You can select between Child window and Popup.
A child window cannot be moved outside the current main window. As a maximum the
size of the main window can be reached.
A popup window is an independent window and will not be subordinated to the main
window, this means, it may be moved outside the current main window and may exceed
the size of the main window.
Border Here you can select between None and Thin or Thick frame line. The type none cannot
be selected, when a title bar was activated. With title bar activated and border type
None, the frame line will automatically set on Thin.
Options
Keyboard Set this option, if also shortcuts shall be processed in the window.
functionality
Top window If switched on, the window will be moved to the foreground at the following actions:
- a mouse click in the window
- the window just becomes visible
Window size Here you define, whether always the complete picture is shown or, if necessary with
scrollbars. When the complete picture is shown always, the resolution within a window
will be changed, this means, single objects will be drawn shown smaller or greater.
When scrollbars are displayed, the resolution within the window will remain constant.
If the mode Original window size is selected, the window size will automatically be
adapted on the original drawing size, defined for the sub window.
Title bar
Active When you want to display a title bar, activate this option. The following options can only
be selected, if a title bar is displayed.
Title Enter here a text for the title bar.
Color The color of the title bar can be changed by pressing this button.
System menu Activate this option, when you want to show the System menu.
Symbol field Activate this options, when you want to show the Symbol field / Zoom field in the title
Zoom field bar.
Note The options Symbol field and Zoom field can only be used, if System menu is
activated.
Movable Activate this option, when the window shall be movable by the user.
Consider also the functionality when changing sizes and positions.
77
Tab Design 2 (Properties BUTTON)

Option Description
Color button
Active When active, a colored button is shown instead of the standard button.
Color Defines the color of the button.
Text color Defines the text color of the button.
Disabled Defines the color for the disabled button.
External radius/ Color buttons will be drawn with a rounded frame. The external and the internal radius of
Internal radius the curvature are defined here.
Cursor The button can be assigned a special mouse pointer with this selection field. The
(special) mouse pointer will be shown, whenever the mouse is moving over the button. It
is possible to use static mouse pointers (file extension CUR) as well as dynamic mouse
pointers (file extension ANI).
Tab Design 2 (Properties Checkbox / Radio button)
Option Description
Status
Defines the condition, when the checkbox / radio button (in the following called control)
is displayed in the status checked.
Value Here you enter a num-element, which defines the status for the control or is changed by
the control.
Reference value Reference value must be an integer.
When Value and Reference value are equal, the control is displayed in the status
checked.
When the control is checked, Value will be set to the Reference value.
When the control is unchecked, Value will be set to 0 (1 if the reference value is 0).
Colors
Background Defines the background color for the control.
Text The text color
Disabled Defines the color, when the control is disabled.
Cursor The button can be assigned a special mouse pointer with this selection field. The
(special) mouse pointer will be shown, whenever the mouse is moving over the control.
It is possible to use static mouse pointers (file extension CUR) as well as dynamic
mouse pointers (file extension ANI).
Tab Function (Properties BUTTON)

Option Description
Operating management
Password protection Enter the access right, or click with the right mouse button to open dialog Select
access right and to select a user right.
Log level Enter here a Log level here.
Functions Here you define the action, that shall be triggered when pressing the button. As long
as no function was entered, an entry line is shown in the table. As soon as a
function is entered, another entry line will be generated, to define the next function.
The inputs, that you can make in individual columns, you can find in table Functions
of a button.
78
Graphic
Functions of a Button
Column Description
Element Enter here the name of the element, that shall be changed by pressing the button.
Action Here you define the actions for the button. An action can be entered with keyboard or mouse.
Click with the right mouse button in this column into the corresponding entry field. Dialog
Action appears. Select one action.
The short term of the selected action will be entered into the entry field of column Action.
Value The numerical constant or the variable is entered here, by means of which the action shall be
executed.
Minimum, Define here the minimum and maximum values, that may be reached. Constants as well as
Maximum num-elements may be entered here.
If no check shall take place, leave the corresponding entry field empty.
Type Into column Element you can enter num- or text-elements. Click the right mouse button on this
field to open dialog Select type.
Note When selecting type TXT the action SET is predefined and cannot be changed, because
text-elements can only be set with texts.
If a click with the left mouse button is made on a button, the VBScript-function OnLButtonClicked - if
configured - will be called.
The function is defined as follows:

Sub OnLButtonClicked(ButtonPressed, ButtonUpInRect)
Parameter ButtonPressed is true, when the left mouse button is just being clicked.
Parameter ButtonUpInRect is true, when the left mouse button is released over the button.
Tab Function (Properties SCROLLBAR)

Option Description
Range Here you define the value range for the scrollbar.
Value Enter the name of the num-element that shall be displayed or changed by the scrollbar.
Minimum Define here the minimum/maximum value, that may be reached. Constants as well as
Maximum num-elements may be entered here.
Password Enter the access right, or click with the right mouse button to open dialog Select access
protection right and to select a user right.
Log level Enter a Log level.
79
Tab Function (Properties SLIDER)

Option Description
Range Here you define the value range for the slider.
Value Enter the name of the num-element, that shall be displayed or changed by the slider.
Minimum Define here the minimum value, that may be reached. Constants as well as num-
elements may be entered here.
Maximum Define here the maximum value, that may be reached. Constants as well as num-
Show range Here you define the range of values, which is indicated with the slider.
Active Activate this option, when you want to use the slider as indicator as well.
Minimum Define here the minimum value, that shall be displayed. Constants as well as num-
Maximum Define here the maximum value, that shall be displayed. Constants as well as num-
Password Enter the access right, or click with the right mouse button to open dialog Select access
protection right and to select a user right.
Log level Enter here a Log level.
Tab Function (Properties Windows)

In the table you have the option, to replace elements and constants, used in the window picture, by 'local'
elements and constants.
With the command Autofill all in the picture used elements and constants are filled into the table. Table
entries with no equivalent in the picture will be deleted.
With the commands Insert and Delete you can insert or delete rows in the table.
Here is the description of the columns.
Column Description
Original Enter here the names of the elements, that you want to rename.
New Enter here the new name of the element, that shall be used in this window.
Type You can enter num- or text-elements. Click the right mouse button over this field and select
the type from the dialog.
Description Here you can give a detailed explanation for every line.
Tab Graphic files
Here you configure, which graphic files shall be displayed on which conditions.
Option Description
Value You define the value via a PMS Value Control as a num-element or with a VBScript function. The
name of the according function is: GraphicValue.
Files In the table you assign ranges of values to different graphic2s. The number of the ranges of
(Table) values is not restricted. The ranges must be defined in ascending order. If the range of values
was not defined in ascending order, the incorrect cell will be marked in red.
The range of values will be defined with the cells From and To. The expressions -INF and INF
are abbreviations for minus infinite and infinite. When a new value is entered in the cell with
value INF, a new line will be created automatically.
For the selection of graphic files, click with the right mouse button in a name- or library cell to
open the dialog for file selection. You can use different graphic files.
Note Library and file name will be drawn in red, when they graphic files are not accessible.
The buttons Insert and Delete operate line by line (without safety request).
80
Graphic
Tab Input (Properties TEXT or NUMBER)

On this tab you can activate the data input for the object.
Option Description
Active With this option you can activate a data input on the object.
Data input
Element Here you must enter the element, on which the data input is made.
Note This must not necessarily be the element, which is shown, but is useful in
many cases.
Minimum, Maximum Define here the minimum and maximum value, that may be reached.
(only for object Number) The value may be a constant or another num-element. If you try to enter a value,
during runtime, which is not within the limits, a warning will appear and the value
will not be accepted.
Inc/Dec Enter here the amount for changing the data value, when, during runtime, the
(only for object Number) keys PgUp or PgDn are pressed.
The value may be a constant or a num-element.
Buffer modifications Activate this option to apply all modifications after the regular end of the data
input.
When this option is not activated, all changes during the data input will be
written immediately into the database. Cancelling the data input will then abort
the data input, but the changed values have already been accepted and cannot
be made undone.
Password protection Enter the access right, or click with the right mouse button to open dialog Select
See also
Tab Input (Properties Pictures)
Define setpoints (step-by-step instructions)
Tab Link-Symbol
The special properties of a link-symbol are defined here.
Option Description
Symbol file Here you select the name of the attached symbol file.
The storage location of the symbol file is defined with name and library. The expression
[Project] at Library is a synonym for the graphic-directory in the current project (see AMS
Asset Graphics directory structure).
Press the browse-button to select a symbol file with the file selection dialog.
Rename In the table you have the possibility, to replace elements and constants, used in the
elements Symbol, by ‚local‟ elements and constants.
(Table) With the command Autofill all in the symbol used elements and constants are filled into
the table. Table entries with no equivalent in the symbol will be deleted.
With button Delete, the current row will be deleted without safety request.
Below you find the description of the columns.
81
Description of the columns in table Rename elements

Column Description
Original The name of the original data-element or constant can be found here. Constants will be
shown in blue. The entries in these columns cannot be edited.
New Enter here the name of the new data-element ora new constant value. Data-elements can be
selected from the reference list (click right mouse button). Num-constants will be displayed in
light red, text-constants in dark red.
Type The data type of the data-element/constant is shown here. This entry cannot be edited.
Description A description for an entry can be entered here.
Tab Number (Properties NUMBER)

Option Description
Value You define the displayed number via a PMS Value Control as a num-element or with a
VBScript function. The name of the according function is: NumberValue.
Note When you want to use the number object as input element, it is useful select the same
num-element as defined on tab Input in field Element.
Number format
Number Here you define the total number of characters, which shall be used for formatting.
Note At the total number of digits, the decimal point will be counted as one digit.
After digits The number of characters after the decimal point is entered here.
Unit You can enter here a unit text, which is displayed after the number value.
Leading With this option the display of leading zeros can be enabled.
zeros
Alignment Here you make the alignment settings for the text.
Angle For the display, the angles 90°, 0° and 90° may be selected.
Horizontal You can define whether the text has to be left-aligned, right-aligned or centered.
Vertikal You can define whether the text has to be vertically aligned from the top, from the bottom
or centered.
Font Here you define the Font types.
changed centrally.
Name Click on the Browse-button at the right of the font name, to open dialog Font types. Here
you determine font type and typeface.
Note The settings of font size, representation, color and font remain unconsidered.
Bold, These options define, whether the text is displayed bold or italic.
Italic
Alignment You can determine here whether the number has to be left-aligned, right-aligned or
centered.
Color To change the font color press the color button and select the new color from the Color
selection dialog.
82
Graphic
Tab Pipe (Properties POLYGON / POLYLINE)

On this tab you define the pipe properties of a polygons or a polyline.
When drawing a pipe you must consider the following settings on tab Graphic: The border width defines the
width of the pipe and the border color defines the inner color of the pipe.
Option Description
Active If this option is activated, the object will be drawn in a pipe style.
Definition The drawing options for pipe are defined here.
Color Defines the outer color of the of the pipe.
End cap Determines, how the endpoints are drawn. Possible options are Round, Square and Flat.
This setting is only valid at polylines.
Join cap Determines, how folding points shall be drawn. Possible options are Round and Flat.
Example
1) Endpoints round, folding points round
2) Endpoints square, folding points round
3) Endpoints flat, folding points flat
83
Tab Text (Properties TEXT)

Here you define text properties.
Option Description
Text
Static / Here you set the text for the text object. New text objects have standard text "Text".
Dynamic If you select a static text, you can also use variables in the text.
If you use the dynamic option, you define via a PMS Value Control the text with a text-
element or with a VBScript function. The name of the according function is: TextValue.
Note When you want to use the text object as input element, it is useful, to activate option
dynamic and to use the same text-element as defined on tab Input in field Element.
Alignment Here you make the alignment settings for the text.
Angle For the display, the angles 90°, 0° and 90° may be selected.
Horizontal You can define whether the text has to be left-aligned, right-aligned or centered.
Vertical You can define whether the text has to be vertically aligned from the top, from the bottom
or centered.
Font Here you define the font.
changed centrally.
Name Click on the browse-button at the right of the font name to open dialog Font. Here you
select a font and the font style.
You can also enter the font name with the keyboard as well. The input is restricted to max.
31 characters.
Note The settings of effects, color and size are not used.
84
Graphic
Option Description
Color If you want to change the color of the font, press the color button. The dialog Color
selection will be opened.
Wordwrap When you activate this option, words will be written into the next line, if they do not match
completely in a line.
Note This option must also be activated, if your text contains words, which are separated
by spaces.
Bold These options define, whether the text is displayed bold or italic.
Italic
Number of Here you define, in how many lines your text shall be shown. Valid values are 1 to 1000.
lines
Dialog objects
Dialog objects
Dialog objects in AMS Asset Graphics are special automation objects, which wrap modal dialogs.
While a modal dialog is open operation in the visualization is disabled. Therefore, the user must first close
the dialog, before he can go on operating the visualization again.
Dialog objects are configured with VBScript code (editing of VBScript codes see VBScript).
The following dialog objects are available:

MessageDialog
ListDialog
InputDialog
TextDialog
Note When one of the dialogs is open, the picture change is blocked.
Dialog object InputDialog
In the following figure shows an example:
The properties of the dialog are defined in a VBScript. First an object of the class InputDialog must be
generated with the HostCreateObject function.
85
Here is the source code for the example above:

HostCreateObject "PMS.InputDialog", "InputDlg"
Set SpeedEle = CreateObject("PMS.NumEle")

SpeedEle.SetName "Speed"
Sub CreateInput
InputDlg.Left = 100
InputDlg.Top = 100
InputDlg.Width = 300
InputDlg.Height = 50
InputDlg.Caption = "Value input"
InputDlg.Description = "Please enter the speed:"
InputDlg.Value = SpeedEle.Value
InputDlg.NumberOnly = True
InputDlg.Minimum = 20
InputDlg.Maximum = 4500
InputDlg.Value = SpeedEle.Value
InputDlg.Show
End Sub
Sub InputDlg_OnOk(bCloseDlg)
SpeedEle.Value = InputDlg.Value
End Sub
In the example the input dialog will be configured and displayed in subroutine CreateInput.
The PMS.InputDialog object has the following functions:

Function Type Description
Properties
Caption String Text, that is shown in the title bar of the dialog
Left, Top Short Upper left position of the dialog (in pixel)
Height, Width Short Height and width of the dialog (in pixel)
Description String Text, that will be shown as description above the input line.
NumberOnly Bool With this variable you determine, whether only numbers are to be entered
(NumberOnly = True). Default value of this variable is False.
Minimum Double If only numbers can be entered, this is the lower limit for the input. When entering
a smaller value, this will be shown with a message after the OK button was
clicked.
Maximum Double If only numbers can be entered, this is the upper limit for the input. When entering
a greater value, this will be shown with a message after the OK button was
clicked.
Value Variant Current value of entry field in dialog. With this variable you can read or predefine
the value.
Methods
Show Shows the dialog. Function does not wait until the dialog is closed.
Events
OnOK This event function will be called up when clicking button OK. Generally, the
(bCloseDlg) entered value will be evaluated here. With parameter bCloseDlg you can avoid
closing the dialog, by setting the parameter on False.
OnCancel Function is called up when clicking button Cancel. With parameter bCloseDlg you
(bCloseDlg) can avoid closing the dialog, by setting the parameter on False.
86
Graphic
Dialog object ListDialog

The ListDialog object will be used, when one possibility out of several possibilities must be selected. Typical
applications are e.g. dialogs for selecting pictures or products.
The properties of the dialog are defined in a VBScript. First an object of the class ListDialog must be

HostCreateObject "PMS.ListDialog", "ListDlg"
Sub CreateList
ListDlg.Caption = "Picture selection"
ListDlg.Left = 100
ListDlg.Top = 50
ListDlg.Width = 250
ListDlg.Height = 140
ListDlg.MultiSelect = False
ListDlg.Clear
ListDlg.AddItem "Overview"
ListDlg.AddItem "Production"
ListDlg.AddItem "Final Assembly"
ListDlg.AddItem "Washer"
ListDlg.ListIndex = 1
ListDlg.Show
End Sub
Sub ListDlg_OnOk(bCloseDlg)
Set NewPic = CreateObject("PMS.TxtEle")
NewPic.SetName "_NewPic"
NewPic.Value = ListDlg.List(ListDlg.ListIndex)
End Sub
In the example, the listbox is configured and shown over subroutine CreateList. At this picture selection
function it is assumed, that the pictures have got the corresponding names.
87
The PMS.ListDialog object has the following functions:

Properties
ListCount Short Contains the number of entries in the listbox. This value can only be read.
ListIndex Short Returns the position of the currently selected entry or sets the current
selection on another entry of the listbox.
List String Array In this array you find all expression of the listbox entries.
ItemData Long Array For every listbox entry, a number can be stored. With this array you can
read or set the values.
Selected Bool Array Selected is an array of boolean-variables. Every array element shows you,
whether the corresponding entry is selected in the listbox or not. The
selection may also be predefined over this array.
MultiSelect Bool With this boolean variable you can determine, whether in the listbox only
one entry can be selected (MultiSelect = False) or multiple entries. Default
value of this variable is False.
Methods
Show Shows the dialog. Function does not wait, until the dialog is closed.
Hide Hides and closes the dialog.
AddItem Function adds a new entry to the listbox. With parameter Item you transfer
(Item, [Index]) the text to be displayed in the listbox. With the second parameter you can
determine the position, where the new entry shall be placed. If the second
parameter is not defined, the text will be placed at the end of the listbox.
When using the second parameter, the value must be greater than 0 and
smaller than the number of the available entries.
Clear Deletes all entries in the listbox.
RemoveItem Delete a single entry from the listbox. The parameter Index defines the
(Index) position of the entry to be deleted. The value must be greater than 0 and
smaller than the number of the available entries.
Events
OnOK This event function will be called when clicking button OK. Its the best place
(bCloseDlg) to read the current selection and perform further actions. With parameter
bCloseDlg you can avoid closing the dialog, by setting the parameter on
False.
OnCancel Function is called when clicking button Cancel. With parameter bCloseDlg
(bCloseDlg) you can avoid closing the dialog, by setting the parameter on False.
Click Function Click will be called up at every mouse click of the left mouse
button.
DblClick Function DblClick will be called up at every double-click of the left mouse
button.
SelChanged Function SelChanged will be called up, when the selection in the listbox
changes.
88
Graphic
Dialog object MessageDialog

The MessageDialog object can be used for displaying of information, questions and messages. The function
is similar to the MsgBox function of VBScript. The dialog will be displayed in the center of the application
window.
The properties of the dialog are defined in a VBScript. First an object of the class MessageDialog must be

HostCreateObject "PMS.MessageDialog", "QuestionDlg"
Sub DoEnd
QuestionDlg.Show "Do you really want to end the visualization?",_
"Question", vbYesNo or vbQuestion
End Sub
Sub QuestionDlg_Closed (RetVal)

If RetVal = vbYes Then
Set SystemStop = CreateObject("PMS.NumEle")
SystemStop.SetName "_SystemStop"
SystemStop.Value = 1
End If
End Sub
The PMS.MessageDialog object has the following functions:
Function Description
Method
Show Shows the dialog, but in opposition to the VBScript MsgBox function, it
(Text, Title, Options) does not wait until the user has clicked a button.
Text, that is shown as message in the dialog.
Title, that is shown in the title bar of the dialog.
Options
Numeric value, that represents the combination (or-function) of the values
for the following definitions: Number and type of the buttons, type of icon
to be used, definition of the default button. Valid values are shown in table
Options.
Event
Closed Will be called up after closing of the dialog. RetVal contains a value that
(RetVal) shows which button was pressed in the dialog.
The possible value for RetVal can be found in table Return values.
89
Parameter Options of function Show

Constant Value Description
vbOKOnly 0 Display only button OK.
vbOKCancel 1 Display buttons OK and Cancel.
vbAbortRetryIgnore 2 Display buttons Cancel, Repeat and Ignore.
vbYesNoCancel 3 Display buttons Yes, No and Cancel.
vbYesNo 4 Display buttons Yes and No.
vbRetryCancel 5 Display buttons Repeat and Cancel.
vbCritical 16 Display Stop-icon.
vbQuestion 32 Display Question mark-icon.
vbExclamation 48 Display Alert-icon.
vbInformation 64 Display Information-icon.
vbDefaultButton1 0 First button is default setting.
vbDefaultButton2 256 Second button is default setting.
vbDefaultButton3 512 Third button is default setting.
vbDefaultButton4 768 Fourth button is default setting.
Parameter RetVal of function Closed

Constant Value Button
vbOK 1 OK
vbCancel 2 Cancel
vbAbort 3 Cancel
vbRetry 4 Repeat
vbIgnore 5 Ignore
vbYes 6 Yes
vbNo 7 No
Dialog object TextDialog

The TextDialog object is used to display text files or files in the Rich Text Format (RTF). It is also possible to
edit and save the text. The dialog can e.g. be used for maintenance hints on machine parts or for daily
comments for a plant.
90
Graphic
The properties of the dialog are defined in a VBScript. First an object of the class TextDialog must be

HostCreateObject "PMS.TextDialog", "EditDlg"
Sub CreateEdit
EditDlg.Caption = "Info"
EditDlg.Left = 200
EditDlg.Top = 100
EditDlg.Width = 500
EditDlg.Height = 300
EditDlg.Filename = "Text.rtf"
EditDlg.EnableEdit = True
EditDlg.Show
End Sub
In the example the text dialog will be configured and displayed in subroutine CreateEdit.
The PMS.TextDialog object has the following functions:

Properties
Filename String With this variable, you define the text or RTF-file, which shall be displayed
or edited. The definition of the file must be made with the file extension.
When the file name is indicated without path definition, the file will be
opened in the project directory.
EnableEdit Boolean When you want to allow editing of the file, set this variable on True.
TextMode Boolean When you want to display the file in the text mode, set this variable on
True. In the text mode, only the text will be read without formatting.
TextFileFontName String This font is used when displaying text files.
TextFileFontSize Short This font size is used when displaying text files.
Methods
Show Shows the dialog. Function does not wait, until the dialog is closed.
Events
OnSave This event function will be called up when clicking button Save. With
(bCloseDlg) parameter bCloseDlg you can avoid closing the dialog, by setting the
parameter on False.
OnCancel Function is called up when clicking button Cancel. With parameter
(bCloseDlg) bCloseDlg you can avoid closing the dialog, by setting the parameter on
False.
91
Picture
Picture
Select menu command Properties | Picture to configure the settings for the current picture.
The following commands can be used:
Picture properties
Shortcuts
Test input
Dialog Properties PICTURE

This dialog can be accessed with menu command Properties | Picture | Picture properties.
The dialog contains 3 or 4 tabs, to define the different properties of the picture.
Tab Graphic
Option Description
Picture name Enter a name for the picture, it do not have to be identical to the file name.
Background
Color Activate this option, to show a color in the background. When pressing button Color
you can select a color in the Color selection dialog.
Bitmap Activate this option, to show a bitmap in the background. When clicking browse-
button the dialog File selection appears. You can select only bitmaps, which belong to
the current project.
The selected bitmap will be shown tiled in the background.
Picture size In field Window size you can select, whether the window with the process picture is
shown as sub window on the complete screen. When you display the window on the
complete screen, thus, when option Sub-window is deactivated, you cannot make
inputs here.
The options for Relative, Complete picture and Absolute have no consequences
on the runtime behavior, it only serves the assistance for project planning in the
Graphic Editor.
Sub picture Set this option, if you want to display the picture as a sub picture (picture in the
picture). Now you can select, whether the picture size is calculated relative or
absolute or has the full screen size.
Relative With this option the picture size is calculated relative to the current screen resolution.
Full screen With this option the picture size has the same size as the screen resolution.
Absolute With this option the picture size is fix and predefined in pixel.
Screen resolution The current screen resolution is shown here. In this field you cannot be edited.
Window size When you have selected relative or absolute, in the first field you define the width
and in the second field the height of the window.
Keep object If this option is set, the objects in a picture keep its positions and size, when the
positions picture size is changed in the Graphic Editor.
92
Graphic
Tab Input
In every picture data input fields can be assigned, so that the user can change the values of data-elements
(e.g. setpoints) directly in a picture. The data input functionality can be set for objects of type Text and
Number.
The user can change all entry fields and select freely the field for data input with the arrow-keys or with the
mouse. The data input will be started by toggling the system-element _InputStart or by the key combination,
defined on this tab. Thus it is possible to start the data input with a button or a key combination.
For the definition of function keys see also
Shortcuts (Project/Picture)
While a data input is active the system-element _InputActive has value 1 (otherwise value 0).
Every object can be configured so, this changed values get buffered until the data input is finished.
In order to find the individual entry fields on the screen and to select one of them for the input, different
background and text colors are assigned to every data input field.
Depending on the status of the data input, the entry field will drawn in one of the four background or text
colors.
Status Description
Active The data input is active.
Selection The corresponding entry field is selected.
Input In the entry field a direct data input can be performed.
Modified A change of values, caused by the data input, will be buffered.
When the data input was started, the active entry field can be selected with the help of the arrow-keys (this
field will then have the color Selection.). With the keys Pg up and Pg down the value of the entry field can
be increased or decremented in predefined steps with consideration of the minimum- / maximum conditions.
The steps are defined with the option Inc/Dec in tab Input.
When a direct input of the value is preferred, you can press the Enter key or click with the left mouse button
on a field (the entry field will then have color Input). With the Enter key the entered value will be accepted,
with the Esc key the initial value will be restored.
The data input can be aborted with the Esc key. If on tab Input the option Takeover changes at the end of
data input is activated, all performed changes are discarded. Without this option all value modifications are
executed immediately.
The data input will be ended with a defined shortcut or by toggling the system-element _InputStop. In this
case all buffered changes will be transferred to the database.
During the data input are for data input objects possible dynamic color modifications not recognizable.
During the data input, other operations such as buttons and keys are possible, only the picture change is
disabled. In case _NewPic was changed during the data input, the picture change will be executed after the
data input has ended.
The system-element _Input will be toggled at every change of a data-element during the data input.
On tab Input you can define the data input settings for the picture. You determine, which notification-trigger
shall be used, in which colors the entry field shall be shown during the data input and the shortcuts to start
and end the data input.
93
Option Description
Trigger (The following triggers are notification-trigger. If you do not want this information, leave
the field empty.)
At start input Here you define the data-element, that is triggered at the start of the data input.
At end input Here you define the data-element, that is triggered at the end of the data input.
At abort input Here you define the data-element, that is triggered, when the data input was aborted with
the Esc key.
Color
In order to find the individual entry fields on the screen and to select one of them for the
input, different background and text colors are assigned to every data input field. The
colors are dependent on the current data input status of the object.
Click with the mouse on the color fields to select a color from the color palette.
Active The colors for background and text, in active status.
Selection The colors for background and text show, that this entry field is selected.
Input The colors for background and text show, that a direct input is currently performed in
this entry field.
Modified The colors for background and text show, that the changed value in this entry field will
be buffered.
Password level Enter the access right, or click with the right mouse button to open dialog Select access
right and to select the right.
Keyboard Here you can define the keys to start and end the data input.
Start Click on the browse-button to open dialog Shortcut.
End
Tab Touch panel

On this tab you define touch panel properties for a picture.
This tab is only visible, if for this project the touch panel option for numbers is activated.
Option Description
View options
Always visible If highlighted, the touch panel input window will always be visible.
Visible at A num-element can be entered here, to control the visibility of the touch panel
window.
Coordinates
Use project The project settings will be used.
definition
Absolute With this option, the touch panel window will be set to a fixed position.
(Position X and Y)
See also
Touch panel (Step-by step instructions)
Touch panel Project properties
Touch panel Object properties
94
Graphic
Tab VBScript
Note The VBScript, written here, is called picture script, because it is active as long as the picture is picture
is loaded.
See also
Tab Input for objects
Testing data input
Shortcuts (Project/picture)
Select menu command Properties | Project | Shortcuts or Properties Picture Shortcuts to define
shortcuts for the complete project or picture. The shortcuts can be programmed with actions, which are
executed, when the corresponding shortcut is pressed.
Dialog Project shortcuts or Picture shortcuts will appear.

Define here actions for single buttons or key combinations, which shall be executed at runtime.
As soon as you have entered a key combination, another empty line will be generated, to define the next
shortcut.
You can define several different actions in several lines for the same shortcut.
Option Description
Shortcut Click with the right mouse button to open dialog Shortcut and select a key combination.
Element Enter the name of the data-element, whose value you want to change with the shortcut.
Action Here the action type is defined. Click with the right mouse button in this column, to open dialog
Action and select one.
Value Enter here a constant, a num- or a text-element as parameter for the action.
Minimum/ Define here the minimum or maximum values, that may be reached. Constants or num-
Maximum elements may be entered here.
field to open dialog Select Type.
Note At type TXT only the action SET is possible.
P-Level Enter the value for access right, or click with the right mouse button to open dialog Select
Log Enter here a Log level.
Note These shortcuts are only active, if the shortcuts are pressed, when the visualization has the input
focus.
See also
Define functions keys (step-by-step instructions)
95
Testing data input

With this function the data input can be tested in the Graphic Editor.
When you activate this menu command, all objects with an activated input option are drawn in the color for
the status Active and one field is drawn in the color for the status Selection. Now you can select another
fields with the arrow keys and test the color for the direct input with the Enter key. The test mode is aborted
with the End key.
Project
Project
In menu item Properties | Project you find commands to set project properties. A project property is for
instance a global VBScript or the size of the main window of the visualization.
When you have made changes here, you will be asked before leaving the Graphic Editor, whether the
changes of the project settings shall be saved.
The following commands can be selected here:
Visualization...
Shortcuts
Fonts...
Flashing colors...
With the command Rename elements... elements used in the project properties can be renamed.
Note The commands are only selectable, when a picture of a project is open.
Properties Visualization
Select command Properties | Project | Visualization... to define the properties of the visualization of the
current project. The dialog Properties Visualization appears.
Tab Design
On this tab you define the start picture and the size of the visualization window on the screen.
Option Description
Start picture Press the browse-button to open the dialog File selection. Select the picture that you
want to have opened first, from the pictures stored in the current project. Confirm the
dialog with Open.
The predefined picture name is Main. If you have now created a picture Main, this will
be shown first when starting the visualization.
Picture size Here you can define, whether the visualization window shall cover the total screen or
only over a part of it.
Note When you define another size for the absolute or relative window size as was
set before, the contents of the window will also be adjusted, thus will be greater or
smaller correspondingly.
Relative Select this option, when size of the window shall be set relative to the screen
resolution.
Full screen Select this option, when the visualization window shall have the same size as the
screen resolution.
96
Graphic
Option Description
Absolute With this option you define an absolute size for the visualization window.
Position Enter the x-position of the window into the left entry field and the y-position into the
right field.
Size Enter the width of the window into the left field and the height into the right field.
Note It is possible to enter greater values here as the current screen resolution. In this
case scrollbars will be shown, if the screen size is smaller than the window. This
option is also helpful, when the project planning is made at a smaller screen, as will
be used later during runtime.
See also
Working with different screen resolutions
Information The options, outlined here, serve the information on the currently selected screen
resolution and the drawing area, available for AMS Asset Graphics.
Graphic resolution In the left field, the x-expansion of the current screen resolution appears and in the
right field the y-expansion.
Window size Here you see the drawing area, available for AMS Asset Graphics. It corresponds to
the screen resolution, when the window size complete picture was selected and when
no title bar is displayed (See also tab Window styles). When no complete picture was
selected, it corresponds to selected window size. When a title bar was displayed, the
height of the drawing area will be reduced by the vertical expansion of it.
Tab Window styles

Here you define, whether the visualization window shall have a title bar and what its contents shall look like.
Option Description
Title bar
Active Activate this option, when you want to show a title bar. When you do not activate the
option, you cannot make further entries here.
Title Enter the text for the title bar. Variables may also be used in the text.
System menu Activate this option, when the system menu shall be displayed to the top left of the screen.
Note When this option is not activated, the other options (symbol field, zoom field, thick
frame and movable) will also remain inactive.
Symbol field Activate this option, when the symbol field shall be displayed in the title bar. With the
symbol field you have the option to minimize the visualization window.
Zoom field Activate this option, when the zoom field shall be displayed in the title bar. With the zoom
field you have the option to maximize the visualization window or to restore its previous
size.
Thick border Activate this option, when a thick frame shall be drawn around the window. This is
necessary if you want to resize the window with the mouse.
Movable Activate this option, when the user shall have the possibility to move the window manually.
Tab VBScript
Note The VBScript, written here, is called project script, because it is active as long as the visualization is
running. That means you can write functionality, which is independent from pictures.
97
Shortcuts (Project/picture)
Select menu command Properties | Project | Shortcuts or Properties Picture Shortcuts to define
shortcuts for the complete project or picture. The shortcuts can be programmed with actions, which are
executed, when the corresponding shortcut is pressed.
Dialog Project shortcuts or Picture shortcuts will appear.

Define here actions for single buttons or key combinations, which shall be executed at runtime.
As soon as you have entered a key combination, another empty line will be generated, to define the next
shortcut.
You can define several different actions in several lines for the same shortcut.
Option Description
Shortcut Click with the right mouse button to open dialog Shortcut and select a key combination.
Element Enter the name of the data-element, whose value you want to change with the shortcut.
Action Here the action type is defined. Click with the right mouse button in this column, to open dialog
Action and select one.
Value Enter here a constant, a num- or a text-element as parameter for the action.
Minimum/ Define here the minimum or maximum values, that may be reached. Constants or num-
Maximum elements may be entered here.
field to open dialog Select Type.
Note At type TXT only the action SET is possible.
P-Level Enter the value for access right, or click with the right mouse button to open dialog Select
Log Enter here a Log level.
Note These shortcuts are only active, if the shortcuts are pressed, when the visualization has the input
focus.
See also
Define functions keys (step-by-step instructions)
Dialog Flashing colors

In this dialog up to 8 various flashing colors can be defined global for a project. A color can flash in intervals
between 0.5 and 5 seconds.
This dialog can be accessed with command Properties | Project | Flashing colors.
Option Description
Color1 Click with the left mouse button, to open dialog Color selection. Select the color, that shall flash
in change with Color2.
Color2 Click with the left mouse button, to open dialog Color selection. Select the color, that shall flash
in change with Color1.
Interval Here you define the flashing interval. Possible values are .0.5 to 5 seconds.
98
Graphic
Dialog Project fonts

This dialog can be accessed with command Properties | Project | Fonts... .
In this dialog, fonts of a constant size are defined centrally for a project. Every font has a name. With this
name, the font can again be used.
The definition of a font consists of the font type (e.g. Arial), the size and the font attributes bold and italic.
The fonts are summarized to so called font sets. The currently used font set can be controlled with the
system-element _ViFontset. Possible values are between 0 and 4, whereat with 0 the type set Standard
and with 4 the type set 4 will be selected.
Option Description
Name Name of the font, e.g. ButtonLarge.
Font Name of the font.
Size Size of the font as type size.
Bold Attribute bold.
Italic Attribute italic.
Comment Possible comment for the font.
Visualization
Purpose of the visualization is the presentation of the static and dynamic objects, which were defined in the
Graphic Editor.
There are some predefined basic functions.

First all pictures are loaded to initialize the contained data-elements in the AMS Asset Graphics
database.
Then the start picture will be activated. It is defined in the dialog Properties Visualization on tab
Design.
If no special start picture is defined, the visualization tries to load the picture MAIN as start picture.
Note The visualization stops, if the start picture cannot be loaded.
As long as the data input is active, it is not possible to switch to another picture.
The data input can always be terminated with the END-key and aborted with the ESC-key.
If you try to switch to an incorrect or not existing picture, the current picture stays active.
When you close the Visualization with Alt+F4 or with the system menu, all other tasks remain
active.
When you close the Runtime with the num-element _SystemStop (e.g. via a button), all other
AMS Asset Graphics programs will also be closed.
During the runtime of the project you can edit pictures with the Graphic Editor. When a picture is
stored, the Visualization reloads the picture, if it is the current displayed picture. This means, you
can change pictures online without having to close the Visualization.
99
Using
User interface of the Graphic Editor

Beside the standard toolbar, the Graphic Editor provides further toolbars, which can be switched on or off
depending on the requirements. The toolbars can be moved and placed to the left side, the right side, in the
top or in the bottom part of the editor window. For this, click on a small, vertical gripper in the toolbar. Keep
the left mouse button pressed and move the toolbar to the desired position.
If you want, you can change the toolbar to a small popup window, which always remains in the top level. For
this, do not move it to the sides of the editor window, but more to the center or outside the center.
With the help of the grid you can line up objects in your picture. At the first start of the Graphic Editor, the
grid is not displayed automatically.
To switch-on the grid, click on button Grid display in toolbar Alignment.
To align picture objects at the grid, click on button Grid capture.
When starting the Graphic Editor the next time, the grid will be shown automatically.
If you would like to modify the settings for the grid, e.g to reduce or increase the grid space, open
dialog Properties Editor.
Drawing basic forms

The Graphic Editor provides any kind of support to draw standard geometric forms. The fundamental
sequence of operations is identical for all basic forms.
How to proceed to draw Line, Rectangle Ellipse or a Button:

Select the wanted type in toolbar Draw.
Click the left mouse button in the picture (start point).
Keep the mouse button pressed and move the mouse pointer to the endpoint.
How to proceed to draw Polygon / Polyline:

Click on button Polygon or Polyline in toolbar Draw and place the cursor at the
position where the polygon or the polyline shall appear.
Click the mouse button once, release it again and move the mouse to draw the polygon or the
polyline. With every mouse click (left mouse button) a new polygon or polyline point will
be created (condition: the point must not be on the same position as the last polygon or
polyline point).
With a double-click the drawing of a polygon or a polyline will be terminated.
Changing the position of objects dynamically

Draw the object with the Graphic Editor, which you want to let run over the screen, e.g. a forklift truck
moving a barrel.
Group all objects, which are part of the fork truck and which shall be moved together (button Group objects
in toolbar Draw, see also Group objects).
Double-click on the group object to open dialog Properties GROUP.
Select tab Position.
100
Graphic
Activate checkbox Active below horizontal.

Into the field to the right of it, you have to enter the num-element which value shall control the
horizontal position of the object.
Enter into fields Value and Pixel, which change in value shall correspond to which position on the
screen. In the example above, the range of values of the num-element GroupOffsetX is 0 to 100.
These values will be transformed into a pixel range between 0 and 400. For example, value 100
corresponds to a shift of the object by 400 pixel (400 pixel to the right) related to the original
position.
Confirm the dialog with OK and save you changes.
Changing the size of objects dynamically

Draw an object which size you want to change dynamically, e.g. a text, which shall get larger and smaller in
order to attract the attention of the operator.
Select button Text in toolbar Draw in the Graphic Editor.
Draw a text object. A text field is drawn like a rectangle (see Drawing basic forms). The text field
will automatically be assigned the contents Text.
Double-click on the text field to open dialog Properties TEXT and select tab Text.
Set the option Static. and enter the text into the input field below.
Select horizontal alignment Centered.
Select tab Size.
101
Activate the option Active in group Horizontal. Into the entry field on the right you have to enter the
name of the num-element, which value shall control the horizontal size. In the example above,
origin Center was selected to change the size of the text simultaneously to the right and to the left.
With fields Value and Percentage it can be defined, which change of the value shall correspond to
which change in percent of the horizontal size. In the example, the range of values of the num-
element TextSizeX is 0 to 5 which is scaled to a percentage of 50% to 100%.
According to this value 2 corresponds to 70%.
The text shall change in both directions, horizontally and vertically. For this reason you have to
activate also the switch Active below text Vertical. In this example, the vertical size will be
controlled by the same num-element as the horizontal size.
Confirm the dialog with OK and save you changes.
Display an object with different states

A machine can have different states, e.g. switch and valve positions or states of motors and pumps. The
presentation of different states is made with the help of metafiles. Depending on the value of the assigned
data-element a particular metafile will be displayed. Metafiles are generated with the AMS Asset Graphics
Graphic Editor or with other Windows-programs, which support format *.emf (Enhanced Metafile)- or *.wmf
(Windows Metafile).
First, open a metafile with the Graphic Editor. In this example, a circle with two various colors (red
and green) and texts (ON, OFF) shall represent the condition of an engine (switched on or off).
Draw two circles with corresponding colors and texts (see Drawing basic forms).
102
Graphic
Mark the first circle and click on button Create metafile from selected objects in toolbar Draw
and save the metafile, in this example with name Engine1_ON. With this, a new graphic-object
was generated, which is highlighted now. Delete it with key Delete.
Proceed in the same way with the second circle and name the metafile Engine1_OFF.
Double-click on the graphic object to open dialog Properties graphic.
Select tab Graphic files.
Into the entry field on the right, you have to enter the name of the num-element, which shall
control the appearance of the graphic files, in this example Engine1_OFF.
Click on button Insert.
Into the second line below metafiles you have to enter the file, which shall be displayed, when
the Num-element Engine1 has got value 1, in this example Engine1_ON.
Confirm the dialog with OK and save your changes.
Let an object (a pointer) rotate

Construction of an object, which shall rotate (see Drawing basic forms).
Note You can let rotate lines, polygons and polylines.
In the following example a line is drawn, which shall rotate as pointer by 90° around its bottom right
endpoint.
103
Double-click on the line to open dialog properties.

Select tab Rotate.
Activate the option Active. Into the entry field on the right you have to enter the name of the num-
element, which value shall control the rotation of the line.
Enter the bottom right endpoint of the line in field Rotation center. In tab Graphic you can check
the coordinates of the bottom right endpoint.
With fields Value and Angle it can be defined, which change of the value shall correspond to the
rotation angle. In the example above the range of values of the num-element LineAngle is 0 to
90, which is scaled to a change of the angle of 0° to 90°. Therefore, a change of the num-element
LineAngle by 35 corresponds to the change of the angle of 35°.
Confirm the dialog with OK. The pivot point is displayed as a little cross.
Save your changes.
104
Graphic
Dynamic actions in a group

Each of the grouped objects keep its properties. In addition, the group objects can be assigned group
properties. With this, complex objects can be created which can move over the screen or which are changed
in size. If the size of the group object changes, the size of the single grouped objects will be adjusted
automatically.
You could e.g. create a grouped object, which displays the text, "Attention! Check the pH hourly." and which
shows a clock with a minute-pointer making one turn every 60 minutes. The grouped object could be
enlarged continuously to remind operators of its task, the more the full hour comes closer.
The minute-pointer shows on 0, the grouped object has a size of 100%.
Group the objects in the Graphic Editor.

Double-click on the new group object to open dialog Properties GROUP and select tab Size.
105
Set the option Active below Horizontal. Enter system-element _Min01 into the edit field to the
right of it, the value of this element will be increased every minute from 0 to 59 and shall thus
control the horizontal change of the size. In the example above, Origin center was selected to
change the size of the group object simultaneously to the right and to the left. With fields Value
and Percentage it can be defined, which change of the value shall correspond to which change in
percent of the horizontal size. The value range of system-element _Min01 is 0 to 60, which is
scaled to a percentage change of 100% to 160%. According to this, value 30 corresponds to a
horizontal width of 130%.
The group element shall change in both directions, horizontally as well as vertically. For this
reason you have to activate also the checkbox below Vertical. The vertical expansion will also be
controlled with system-element _Min01. The remaining interface settings in field Vertical are the
same as in field Horizontal.
Changing colors of graphic objects

Mark the objects in the Graphic Editor which shall get another color.
Click with the left mouse button in toolbar Colors on the desired new line color or click with the
right mouse button, if the fill color shall be changed.
Define other standard painting colors

If the wanted color is not shown in the choice of the 22 colors in the toolbar, click on the color and keep the
CTRL-key pressed. Now, select the color with the left mouse button.
This color is now shown in the toolbar Color.
106
Graphic
Displaying a numerical value

Select button Number in toolbar Draw in the Graphic Editor.
Draw a numeric object on the painting area. A numeric object is drawn like a rectangle (see
Drawing basic forms).
Double-click on the numeric object to open dialog Properties Number.
Select tab Number.
Enter the num-element (or a VBscript) which value shall be displayed as number into field Value.
Select alignment Right.
With Numerical format you define the total number of digits that are displayed and the number of
After digits. Please note, that the decimal point is included in this number. In the example above,
the num-element Silo1 will be displayed with 3 digits and without digits behind the decimal point.
The selected dimension is m ³.
107
Constructing a filling level indicator

With a filling level indicator an analog value (e.g. a temperature or the contents of a storage tank) can be
displayed in graphical form.
Draw a rectangle in the Graphic Editor (see Drawing basic forms).
Double-click on the rectangle to open dialog Properties RECTANGLE.
Select tab Filling.
Activate Vertical filling.

Into the entry field on the right you have to enter the name of the num-element, which value shall
be displayed as filling level e.g. Silo1.
If the filling level shall indicate the smallest value at the bottom and the largest value at the top,
select Bottom in field Origin.
Enter the values into the field below Value which shall correspond to these values into field
Percentage. It would be the easiest, if you typed in the lowest value to be displayed into the left
part of field Value and the maximum value into the right part of this field. In this case you could
leave the values below percentage on the default setting 0 and 100. In the example above, value
0 corresponds to 0% and 1024 to 100%, i.e. at value 0, the filling level indicator shows an empty
tank and at 1024 a completely filled tank.
108
Graphic
Assigning a color change to a filling level indicator

In many applications with filling level indicators it is useful to show exceeding of limit values in a graphical
way. For this purpose a color change is often used.
At first, design a filling level indicator (see Constructing a filling level indicator).
Double-click on the rectangle to open dialog Properties RECTANGLE.
Select tab Colors.
Set option Active below Fill color to control the fill color dynamically.
Enter the name of the same num-element, which you have entered on tab Fill, into the entry field
to the right, in our example FillColor.
Enter the value ranges for the different colors and the corresponding colors into the fields below.
In this example, the filling level indicator shows the black color in the range < 4, between 4 and
400 blue, as of 400 the color green, etc. and as of 1024 the indicator will always be red.
Note The range of values must have an ascending order.
109
Define setpoints
AMS Asset Graphics offers a comfortable possibility to enter data directly in the picture into special
configured fields. For this, numbers or text objects are defined that way, that they can take up numerical
values or texts. It will be defined for the total picture, how the user activates and deactivates the input and
with which colors the input fields will be shown.
This could e.g. look like this:
Draw an object of type Number in the Graphic Editor. At first you have to proceed as if you just
would like to display the number (see Displaying a numerical value).
To permit a data input, select tab Input and set the option the option Active.
With Element you specify the name of the num-element, which shall be changed with the data
input.
Note You should enter the same num-element that was also entered on tab Number in field
Value.
With Minimum and Maximum you can limit the value which can be entered.
In field Inc/Dec you have to define, by which amount the data-element shall be
increased/decreased when the operator presses the key PgUp or PgDn.
With this definitions you have created an entry field. Now, you can define further entry fields of type
Number or also of type Text. The definition of text entry fields correspond to those of the text-
elements, with the only difference that not num-elements but just text-elements are changed.
Now define how the data input shall be activated and deactivated and how it shall be represented
visually.
Select in the main menu Properties | Picture | Picture properties... or click the right mouse button
and select Picture properties in the context menu. Select tab Input.
Select in field Colors different colors for the background and the text for the entry fields. The
color, which you enter into field Active will be displayed when the input is activated, this applies
for all entry fields except for the currently selected one. You define the color of this field upon the
moment of Selection. The color, which you enter into field Input, is shown in the selected field,
namely if this field was enabled for the input with the Enter-key.
In field Keyboard you define the shortcuts for starting and ending the data input. Select the
browse-button beside Start and click on the wanted key or key combination in dialog Shortcut.
Confirm the dialog with OK. The button will be shown directly beside Start. When you press the
shortcut in the visualization the data input will start.
Proceed likewise for the key to end the data input.
110
Graphic
Note The definitions you have made for the input, shall only valid for the picture for which you have
saved them. If other pictures shall have the same input properties, these properties must be saved in a
default project or defined again newly.
Changing to another picture

The change to another picture can be realized for example via a button.
Select command Button in toolbar Input in the Graphic Editor.

Draw a button on the screen. A button is drawn like a rectangle (see Drawing basic forms). The
button will be given automatically the description "Button".
Double-click on the button to open dialog Properties BUTTON and select tab Design.
Enter another name for the button into entry field Text, preferably the name of the picture to
which you want to switch, in this example Mixture. The name of the button is selected
independently of the file name of the picture to which you want to change.
Select tab Function.
Enter system-element _NewPic into the first cell of column Element, this system-element
controls the change from one picture to another. Click with the right mouse button on the cell to
open dialog Element selection. Select type Runtime elements and data type Text. Select
system-element _NewPic from the list of elements and confirm the dialog with OK.
Note Runtime elements will be shown in the list of elements not before the runtime was stopped
once. If this list is empty, start and stop the runtime first.
Type TXT will appear automatically in column Type and action SET in column Action, since this
is the only action that is possible at text-elements.
Enter another name for the picture into entry field Value, which shall be switched on during
runtime when button Mixture was pressed, in this example "Mixture".
Attention This has to be the file name of the picture.
111
Constructing a graphic button

A graphic button is a picture range, which can be clicked with the mouse and which triggers one or several
actions, like a text button.
In our example the operating window shall not be opened anymore via button Operator console (see
Display an operating panel), but by a mouse click over the forklift. To indicate the special function of the
mouse in this picture range to the operator, the form of the mouse pointer changes over the forklift.
Click on command Graphic button in toolbar Input to place a graphic button above the fork
truck.
A button is drawn like a rectangle (see Drawing basic forms). The graphic button will
automatically be provided with a 3D border.
With a double-click on the graphic or via the context menu you can open dialog Properties
graphic button.
Select tab Design.
Select another mouse pointer in menu Cursor, e.g. a hand. if you want you can deactivate the
option With 3D border.

Into the first cell of column Element you have to enter a num-element which shall control the
visibility of a panel, in this example the element ShowPanel.
Make sure that NUM has been entered in column type.
In the next column Action you define the action, which is executed when graphic button is
pressed. For this click with the right mouse button on the first cell of the column. Dialog Action
will be opened.
Select action SWP. At this action, the value of the element changes between a minimum and a
maximum, i.e. when the value is on minimum, it will be set on maximum by pressing the button and
vice versa. Enter 0 in column Minimum and 1 in column Maximum. In doing so the value of
ShowPanel changes between 0 and 1. At 1 the operating window will be opened and at 0 closed
again. You do not have to enter any value into field Value.
112
Graphic
Displaying the current time

There is a system element that contains the current time. This element shall be displayed in a text field.
During runtime, this element could e.g. look like this:
Select button Text from toolbar Draw in the Graphic Editor.

Draw a text object on the drawing area. A text field is drawn as a rectangle (see Drawing basic
forms). The object will get the default text "Text".
Double click on the Text field to open dialog Properties TEXT and select tab Text.
Set option Dynamic. This is important, because system-element _TimeStr, which contains the
current time, changes dynamically and shall be displayed this way.
Enter system-element _TimeStr into the entry field below.
Select horizontal orientation Centered.
Confirm the dialog with OK and save the changes.
113
Display an operating panel (sub picture)

With AMS Asset Graphics you can display a picture as a child picture. As an example specific setpoints of a
machine or a plant must be defined newly from time to time. These values shall not always be visible
and shall only be displayed in a separate window and then be configured there.
In our example, a fork truck shall be moved horizontally and the fork with a barrel vertically with the help of
an operation window.
To generate a picture in the picture, first draw and define this picture in the Graphic Editor like
every other picture. An operation window could e.g. look like this:
To avoid deformations, you have to define the picture size that way, that it corresponds to the size
of the operation window in the large picture. For this you have to select the menu command
Properties | Picture | Picture properties.
Define the picture as a sub picture in the group Picture size. The picture size can be configured
Relative, Full screen or Absolute.
The size of the sub picture has to be entered under option Window size.
Enter a name for the picture and open the parent picture in which the operation window shall be
opened.
Select command Window in toolbar Draw.
Draw a window on the screen. A window is drawn like a rectangle (see Drawing basic forms). As
long as no properties have been defined you will see an empty window with a frame.
Double click on the window to open the dialog Properties Window.
Select tab Design.
Press the browse-button next Picture name to show the dialog for File selection and to select
your sub picture.
Select the Window type. If you select Popup, the operation window will be placed in front of the
other picture objects, by selecting Child window it will be placed behind them.
You may draw the window with either no frame or with a thin or a thick frame line.
If necessary the window can display Scrollbars or always shows the complete picture. When
selecting the option Original window size the sub picture uses the size defined for the sub
picture.
114
Graphic
If you want to display a title bar, set the relevant checkbox and enter the Title into the entry field.
Select a color for the background of the headline. If you want to display System menu, Symbol
field or Zoom field or if you want to move the total window, you have to activate the relevant
options.
Select tab View options in dialog Properties Window.
Enter a num-element into the entry field beside Visible at to control the visibleness, e.g.
ShowPanel. If element ShowPanel is set on 1, the window will be opened, if it is set on 0,
the window will be closed again.
Your sub picture is now ready. To control the picture there are more options. As an example, the
picture could be made invisible and be shown, only if required. After the set values or positions
have been defined completely, the window could be closed again. To open and close the window
you can use a button to execute this task.
To control element ShowPanel via a button select the command Button in toolbar Input.
Draw a button on the screen. A button is drawn like a rectangle (see Drawing basic forms). The
button will automatically be given the name "Button".
Double click on the button to open the dialog Properties Button.
Select tab Design and enter another name for the button into the entry field below Text, e.g.
Operator panel.
Enter into the first cell of column Element the element which controls the visibility of the operating
window, in our example the element ShowPanel.
Make sure that type NUM has been selected.
In the next column Action you define the action, that shall be started with this element by
pressing button Operator console. For this, click with the right mouse button on the first cell of
the column. Dialog Action will be opened.
Select action SWP. At this action, the value of the element changes between a minimum and a
maximum, i.e. when the value is on minimum, it will be set on maximum by pressing the button and
vice versa. Enter 0 in column Minimum and 1 in column Maximum. In doing so the value of
ShowPanel changes between 0 and 1. At 1 the operating window will be opened and at 0 closed
again. You do not have to enter any value into field Value.
115
Start the runtime program. A picture of your project could look like this:
116
Graphic
When pressing button Operator panel your picture could be like that:
Enter the new set values and positions in the operating window. By pressing button Operator
console the window will be closed again.
If you have in mind to use several operating windows for different set values or data-elements,
AMS Asset Graphics can ease your work.
Copy the first window and rename the element names, used here. Thus, you do not have to create
a new picture that you want to use as sub picture.
For this mark the original window and copy it (button Copy in toolbar Standard).
Then select button Paste. The new window can be inserted in any other picture as well.
Move the new window to the desired position.
Double click on the new window to open dialog Properties Window.
In case your window has got a headline which clearly refers to the original window, change the
title on tab Design.
Select tab View options.
If you have entered an element that controls the visibility, use another control element.
Select new names for the elements of your original window under Rename elements, so that the
new window can use other data-elements than the original window.
Enter the name of the element into column Original, which has been defined in the picture on
which the window does refer.
Enter a new name into column New, that shall be valid for this window.
Define in column Type, whether the element shall be a num- or a text-element.
117
Configure function keys

User may use function keys or shortcuts to change to another picture, bring the Eventjournal in the
foreground or to show a trend diagram - in short, to execute operation functions. For this, there are not only
the real function keys F1 - F12 at disposal, but almost all keys of the keyboard.
With the Graphic Editor you can define, which key or key combination shall trigger which action. You have
the option to define global shortcuts which apply for the complete project and picture related shortcuts which
apply only in the relevant picture.
Global shortcuts
It is useful, first to define the buttons which shall apply for the total project, e.g. bringing the Eventjournal in
the foreground in every picture with the key F9 (see Project shortcuts).
Picture related shortcuts

Then define the buttons, which shall be valid only in the picture. For example, an operating window shall be
displayed when pressing key combination ALT+B (see Picture shortcuts).
Note When you have defined the same button for a project as well as for a picture, the function for the
picture will be executed.
Configure shortcuts for a picture

Open an existing picture or draw a new one.
Select menu item Properties | Picture... | Shortcuts to open dialog Picture shortcuts.
Define the first key combination by clicking the right mouse button in the first line of column Key
combination. Dialog Key/key combination appears.
Push the desired key combination, e.g. ALT+B.
The possible key combinations are shown in dialog Shortcut.
Confirm the dialog with OK. The key combination will be entered into the cell.
Enter the element into column Element, that shall be changed with the key, in this example the
num-element visible. This element will be used at the definition of a window, to make it visible or
invisible.
See also Display an operating panel
Click with the right mouse button in column Action to open dialog Action.
Select button SWP to get action Swap into the table. If action SWP was selected, the value of the
element will be set on 1 if it was 0 and it will be set on 0 if it was 1. As a consequence, the
operating window will be opened and closed again.
118
Graphic
Columns Value, Minimum and Maximum may remain empty.

Column Type is pre-defined with NUM and should remain unchanged, since element visible is a
num-element.
Define further key combinations, or confirm the dialog with OK.
Save your changes.
Configure shortcuts for a project

Open an existing picture of the project for which you would like to define shortcuts. If you would
like to create a new picture, enter a name for it and save it in the desired project. Before that, it
cannot be assigned to any project and the project related commands are not applicable.
Select menu command Properties | Project | Shortcuts to open dialog Project shortcuts.
Define the first shortcut by clicking the right mouse button in the first line of column Shortcut.
Dialog Shortcut appears.
Press the intended key combination, e.g. function key F9.
Information about the possible key combinations you find in dialog Shortcut.
Confirm the dialog with OK. The key combination will be entered into the cell.
Enter the element, which shall be changed by pressing the key, into column Element, in this
example the system-element _SetTopEJ.
Click with the right mouse button in column Action to open dialog Action.
Press button TGL to select the action Toggle. If action TGL has been selected, the value of the
element will be changed and the Eventjournal Runtime will be placed in the foreground.
119
Columns Value, Minimum and Maximum may remain empty.

Column Type is predefined with NUM and should remain unchanged, since element _SetTopEJ
is a num-element.
Define further shortcuts or confirm the dialog with OK.
Save the settings with the menu command File | Save project settings.
Note These shortcuts are only active, if the Visualization has the input focus.
Calling the Eventjournal Runtime
Calling the Eventjournal Runtime can be realized e.g. via a button.

Select command Button in toolbar Input of the Graphic Editor.
Draw a button on the screen. A button is drawn like a rectangle (see drawing basic forms). The
button will be given automatically the name "Button".
Double-click the button to open dialog Properties Button.
Select tab Design.
Enter another name for the button in the entry field below Text, e.g. Eventjournal.
Enter system-element _SetTopEJ into the first cell of column Element, this element controls the
calling of the Eventjournal. Click with the right mouse button on this cell to open dialog Element
selection. Select type Runtime elements and data type Num. Select system-element
_SetTopEJ from the list of the elements and confirm the dialog with OK.
Note The cross reference list for runtime elements is stored, when the runtime is stopped. If this list
is empty, start and stop the runtime one time.
Type NUM will appear automatically in column Type.
In the next column Action you define the action that shall be triggered with this element when
pressing button Eventjournal. Click with the right mouse button on the first cell of the column.
Dialog action will be opened.
Select action TGL. At this action, the value of _SetTopEJ will be increased automatically by 1and
set to 0 again when reaching 255. The system detects this change and will bring the Eventjournal
Runtime into the foreground. At action TGL you do not have to write anything into the columns
Value, Minimum and Maximum.
120
Graphic
To call the Eventjournal Runtime, the program must be started together with the other runtime programs.
This setting is made in the Project Manager.
Make sure that the project that you want to edit is opened in the Project Manager.
Open dialog Runtime configuration with the corresponding button in the toolbar.
Select the program Eventjournal from the list of the standard programs into the program list.
Note If the Eventjournal Runtime is the last program in the program list, it will be opened as topmost
program on the screen.
Calling the Recipe Runtime
Calling the Recipe Runtime can be realized e.g. via a button.

Select command Button in toolbar Input of the Graphic Editor.
Draw a button on the screen. A button is drawn like a rectangle (see drawing basic forms). The
button will be given automatically the name "Button".
Double-click the button to open dialog Properties Button.
Select tab Design.
Enter another name for the button in the entry field below Text, e.g. Recipes.
Enter system-element _SetTopRZ into the first cell of column Element, this element controls the
calling of the Recipe Runtime. Click with the right mouse button on this cell to open dialog
Element selection. Select type Runtime elements and data type Num. Select system-element
_SetTopRZ from the list of the elements and confirm the dialog with OK.
Note The cross reference list for runtime elements is stored, when the runtime is stopped. If this list
is empty, start and stop the runtime one time.
Type NUM will appear automatically in column Type.
In the next column Action you define the action that shall be triggered with this element when
pressing button Recipes. Click with the right mouse button on the first cell of the column. Dialog
action will be opened.
Select action TGL. At this action, the value of _SetTopRZ will be increased automatically by 1and
set to 0 again when reaching 255. The system detects this change and will bring the Recipe
Runtime into the foreground. At action TGL you do not have to write anything into the columns
To call the Recipe Runtime, the program must be started together with the other runtime programs. This
setting is made in the Project Manager.
Make sure that the project that you want to edit is opened in the Project Manager.
Open dialog Runtime configuration with the corresponding button in the toolbar.
Select the program Recipe from the list of the standard programs into the program list.
Note If the Recipe Runtime is the last program in the program list, it will be opened as topmost program on
the screen.
121
Closing the runtime

Closing the runtime can be controlled via a button or a function key. Every runtime task, e.g. the
Eventjournal Runtime or the Data Storage Runtime can be terminated separately. By using system-
element _SystemStop, all runtime tasks will be closed at the same time.
Select command Button in the Graphic Editor in toolbar Input.
Draw a button on the screen. You draw a button as a rectangle (see draw basic forms). The
button will be given automatically the description "Button".
Double-click on the button to open the Property dialog.
Select tab Design.
Select another name for the button in the entry field below Static e.g. End.
Enter into column Element the system-element _SystemStop, whose change will terminate all
runtime programs. For this, click with the right mouse button on the cell to open dialog Element
selection. Select type Runtime elements and data type Num. Select system-element
_SystemStop from the list of the elements and confirm the dialog with OK.
Note Runtime elements will be displayed not before the runtime was started. If this list is
empty, start the runtime first.
Type NUM appears automatically in column Type.
In the column Action you define the action which shall be triggered with this element by pressing
button End. For this, click with the right mouse button on the first cell of this column. Dialog
Action will be opened.
Select action TGL. With this action, the value of _SystemStop will automatically be increased by 1
and reset to 0 when reaching 255. The system takes notice of this change and triggers the
termination of all runtime tasks. At action TGL you do not have to write down any value into column
Trend charts
Editor
Trend chart
Trend charts display the course of one or several datapoints as curve over a horizontal axis. Trend charts
use the data storage as a data source. Every diagram can display up to 28 data-elements at the same time,
shown in different colors. The scaling can be selected separately for every curve. Also a second Y-axis can
be displayed.
The divisions of the horizontal X- and vertical Y-axis are configured separately. Optional a grid can be
shown in the diagram. During the runtime, you can print trend lines and modify the scaling of the
coordinates, thus you can also access on historical data. In addition you can select one or several stored
datapoints and to display them as a trend line.
Select command Trend chart in toolbar Draw to place a trend chart on the screen. With a double-click on
the object or via the context menu you can open dialog Properties Trend chart.
The dialog contains several tabs to define the different properties of the object. The properties Graphic,
View options, Position, Size and VBScript are described in section using a property dialog.
122
Graphic
Tab Trend lines

Here you configure the data-elements to be displayed.
Option Description
Data storage Select here the data storage table, which data shall be displayed as trend chart.
Suppress When this marking is activated, the milliseconds from the time stamp of the
milliseconds datasets in the data storage files will not be taken into account.
Data item In these two columns you can enter the variable with the corresponding data
Datastorage/Variable storage table. With the right mouse button, you can open a dialog to select the
variable which data shall be displayed as trend chart. Up to 28 lines can be
displayed. The scaling of the first curve is shown at the left Y-axis. If more than two
curves are shown, the right Y-axis is displayed too. A variable gets a red text color,
if it is not found in the corresponding data storage file.
Range Every variable may have an individual range of values, that you have to enter here.
From / To The various ranges of values will then also be visible in the scaling. You can also
enter num-elements to achieve a variable scaling.
Color Every variable should be assigned an individual color.
Opt. You can configure further properties for a line with command ....
Single scaling If all variables are in the same range of values, activate this option. In this case, all
variables will have the same scaling. Define here the color and the ranges of
values.
Tab X-axis
Option Description
Period Here you define the time period for the scaling of the x-axis. Time periods from one
second up to several years can be used.
Suppress When this marking is activated, the milliseconds from the time stamp of the datasets
milliseconds in the data storage files will not be taken into account.
Text
Color Here you define the color of the axis text.
Alignment Here you define the alignment of the text with an angle between 0 and 90°.
Format
Number Here you define the number of the vertical grid lines and of the appropriate
labeling. An input is only possible, if option Automatic has been deactivated.
Automatic If you want to have an automatic labelling, activate this checkbox.
Hour, Min, Sec, Milli By activating the relevant checkbox, you can define whether the x axis shall be
Year, Month, Day, labeled with year, month, day, hour, minute and/or second.
Dynamic period
Update This num-element provides the information, whether the automatic update of the
trend chart is on (1) or off (0). By writing the element the status can be changed
correspondingly.
Original size This control-trigger restores the initial range settings (this applies for the period and
the value ranges).
Width This num-element provides the information about the current used time period in
seconds. By writing the element the time period can be changed correspondingly.
Offset This num-element is used to scroll relative within the trend chart. In doing so the
automatic update of the trend chart will be disabled. Positive values (in seconds) will
scroll to future times, negative values to the past. After the scrolling the element will
automatically be set to 0.
123
Tab Profile
A so called profile is used to save the current settings of a trend chart, e.g. the value range, the displayed
datapoints or the line colors. These settings can be restored by loading the profile..
In the runtime profiles can be used by menu commands (loading and saving profiles).
Option Description
Designation You must enter here a string to enable the use of profiles. Profiles are stored with this
designation.
You can combine profiles of different trend chart, if you use the same designation.
Profile name You can enter here a text-element for the profile name, if you want to control the loading
externally, e.g. the profile name is set via a button.
AutoLoad Enter here the name of a profile, which shall be automatically loaded, when the trend chart
is created.
AutoSave Enter here the name of a profile, where the last settings are automatically be saved, when
the trend chart is destroyed.
The description of the tabs Y-axis, Help lines, Grid and Miscellaneous you find here.
Tab VBScript
Inside the VBScript of the trend chart the object name ThisObj can be used to access functions and
properties.
Functions and properties with VBScript.
Name Parameter Description
Functions
SetDataSource DSFileName Use this function to set the name of the data storing file.
As parameter a file name with the file extension iDSF or
an extension of a data storing archive (000 to 999) can be
used. If you address a filename without an extension, the
extension iDSF is used. If the parameter DSFileName is
only a file name without path, the data storing path is
used.
SetDateTime DateTime This function is used to set the displayed time at the right
corner of the trend chart. The parameter DateTime takes
the absolute date and time information.
OffsetX Seconds This feature moves the time. The parameter in seconds. A
positive number changes the time to right field. The
update of the timeline is automatically switched off.
ShowTrackingDlg This feature displays the tracking display.
HideTrackingDlg The tracking display is closed.
Print Print the trend chart on the default printer.
ShowSettingsDlg This feature displays the dialog properties trend chart.
Unzoom The display range, which is designed with the Graphic
Editor, is reinstated.
124
Graphic

SetVariable LineNumber, Use this function to assign the curve to another data point.
VariableName LineNumber (started with 0) is the requested line.
VariableName is name of the new data point.
SetVariableEx LineNumber, Same function as SetVariable. For DSName you can use
DSName, a file name with the file extension iDSF or an extension of
VariableName an data storing archive (000 to 999). If you pass a
filename without an extension, the extension iDSF is
used. If the parameter DSName is only a file name without
path, the data storing path is used.
GetVariable LineNumber This function returns the current assigned data point of the
line with the number LineNumber (started with 0).
LoadStandardSettings This function restores the data file storage and the range,
as they are defined in the Graphic Editor.
LoadProfile, ProfileName Use these functions to open, save and delete a profile.
SaveProfile, The parameter is the name of the profile.
DeleteProfile
Refresh With this function, a reconstruction of the trend chart is

enforced.
SetRedraw bEnable This member function sets or clears the redraw flag. While
the redraw flag is cleared, the contents will not be updated
after each change and will not be repainted until the
redraw flag is set again. For example when setting
multiple variables (function SetVariable) it makes sense
to clear the redraw flag with ThisObj.SetRedraw false.
After setting all variables the redraw flag is enabled with
ThisObj.SetRedraw true.
Properties
TimeActual This property indicates/controls the automated update of
the time axis.
Width This property indicates/controls the width in seconds of
the trend chart.
ProfileIdentification Use this property to get or set the current profile
identification.
ProfileElementName This property indicates/controls the element with is used
to switch the between the profiles.
UseDataSourceInProfile With this property you control if the data storing file can be
changed with loading a profile. Set this property to true, if
the data storing file can be changed. The default value is
false.
XAxisMinimum, Minimum and maximum from the X-axis. Both variable
XAxisMaximum contain a value of type Date (see VBScript help).
Example:
ThisObj.XAxisMaximum = Now
ThisObj.XAxisMinimum = ThisObj.XAxisMaximum
- 1 / 1440
YAxisMinimum, LineNumber Minimum and maximum from the Y-axis. LineNumber
YAxisMaximum (started with 0) is the desired line.
Example:
ThisObj.YAxisMaximum(0) = 50
ThisObj.YAxisMinimum(0) = 10
125

AutoScale LineNumber With this property the auto scale function is activated.
LineNumber (started with 0) is the requested line.
Example:
ThisObj.AutoScale(0) = true
RulerOn Property to activated or deactivated the ruler function.
Example:
ThisObj.RulerOn = true
RulerPos This property stores the current position of the ruler. The
type of the value is Date. It's also possible to set the
position with this property.
EnableZoom With this property the zoom function is enabled/disabled.
The default value is true.
EnablePopupMenu Use this property to enable/disable the popup menu at
runtime. The default value is true.
LineColor LineNumber This property can be used to read the color (RGB value)
of a line. LineNumber (started with 0) is the requested
line. The property is read only.
Example:
Set ArchiveDate = CreateObject("PMS.TxtEle")
ArchiveDate.SetName("ArchiveDate")
dummy = ArchiveDate.IsChanged
Sub OnRun
If ArchiveDate.IsChanged Then
ThisObj.SetDataSource ArchiveDate.Value
ThisObj.TimeActual = true
End If
End Sub
In the above example, the data storage file is changed by a text-element.
Function ChangeLabelStr
The function ChangeLabelStr is called during the drawing of the trend. With this function the labels on the X
and Y axis can be modified.
Name Parameter Beschreibung

ChangeLabelStr LabelStr This function has 4 parameters.
LineNumber The first parameter LabelStr includes the text, which is used for the
LabelNumber axis labels. You can assign a new value to this parameter.
Value LineNumber contains the number of the trend line. For the X axis -1
is used.
The third parameter LabelNumber contains the number of the label.
On the Y axis the labels are numbered from bottom to top. The X axis
numbers the labels from left to right. Both parameters LineNumber
and LabelNumber are zero based.
Value is the fourth parameter and contains the value at the position of
the label as a number.
126
Graphic
Example:
Sub ChangeLabelStr (LabelStr, LineNumber, LabelNumber, Value)
If LineNumber = -1 Then
LabelStr = "X: " & LabelNumber & "; Value: " & Value
Else
LabelStr = "Y-" & LineNumber & ": " & LabelNumber & "; Value: " & Value
End If
End Sub
You can also use functions OnStart (initialization), OnRun (cyclical) and OnEnd (end of Operation Log
Runtime). A detailed description of the possible functions can be found in section VBScript.
See also
Trend chart runtime
Displaying a trend chart
XY-trend chart
XY-trend charts display the course of one or several datapoints as curve over a horizontal axis. Differently to
the time related trend charts, the horizontal axis is not a time axis, but a value-axis (such as the vertical
axles). XY-trend charts use a CSV file as data source.
Note By means of the CSV-Export of the data storage data storage files can also be used indirectly as data
source.
For the representation of the data all datasets of the CSV-file will be read. One value of the dataset defines
the X-value, up to 28 values, marked with different colors, can be displayed as Y-value over the X-value. A
line will be drawn with all data from first to the last dataset. The scaling can be selected separately for every
curve.
For every XY-trend chart the properties of the horizontal X- and vertical Y-axis are defined separately. As an
option a grid can be shown in the diagram.
You can print XY-trend chart and modify the scaling of the coordinates, thus you can also access on other
ranges of values. In addition, you have the possibility, to select one or several stored datapoints and to
display them as one of the 28 lines.
Select command XY-trend chart in toolbar Draw to place a XY-trend chart on the screen. With a double-
click or via the context menu you can open dialog Properties XY-trend chart.
The dialog contains several tabs to configure the different properties of the object. The properties Graphic,
View options, Position, Size and VBScript are described in section using a property dialog.
127
Tab Data source

XY-trend charts use a CSV file as data source. A CSV-file may contain different separators. In addition, at
the beginning of the files there may be two lines with a description of the columns. These CSV-files with
description will also be generated by the Export function of the Data storage.
On tab Data source you can define, on which CSV-file shall be accessed under which conditions.
Option Description
Source file Enter here the name of the CSV-file including directory, from which the trend lines
shall be loaded at runtime. Use button Browse, to select an existing file. For the input
you can use also variables e.g.: @_ProjectPathCSV_files\DATA.CSV. The file
name has to be entered with extension.
Format
CSV separator Here you configure the separator char, which shall be used when reading the CSV
file. The following chars are possible: comma, semicolon, tabulator and space.
Trigger
Start reading Enter here the name of a data-element, which starts the reading of the CSV-file
(control-trigger), as soon as the data-element changes.
Reading complete Define here the name of a num-element, which has to change when reading of the
CSV-file and drawing is complete (notification-trigger). The element will also be
changed in case of an error. The element will be increased by 1 and reset on 0 when
reaching 255.
Error
Number This num-element will be set on 1 after completing the action successfully and on -1 in
case of an error.
Example for a CSV-file without description ( separator ; )

1;3;5;2;4
2;4;22;77;2
8;4;5;22;3
4;5;2;5;3
At a CSV-file without description, all columns will be interpreted as number. A text (e.g..:1;abcde;1) will be
converted to value 0.
Example for a CSV-file with description ( separator ; )

DATE;TIME;NUM;NUM;NUM
Date;Time;X-Value;Min-Value;Max-Value
2000-02-17;13:49:28:478;-1;-0.8;0.2
2000-02-17;13:49:29:478;-0.5;-0.6;0.7
2000-02-17;13:49:30:478;0;-0.2;0.3
2000-02-17;13:49:31:478;0.5;-0.8;0.2
2000-02-17;13:49:32:478;1;0;0.1
At a CSV-file with description, only the columns with type NUM will be evaluated. If the first line contains one
of the following identifiers such as NUM, TXT, DATE or TIME, the second line will be interpreted as
definition line with column name.
128
Graphic
Tab Trend lines

On this tab up to 28 trend lines are configured. In addition, the data assignment and the range of values for
the X-axis are configured.
Option Description
Variable Enter here for the X- and Y-values the name of a column in the CSV-file. If on tab Data
source a file is indicated with parameter Source file, which can be read also by the editor
(file already available and no variable used), a choice of the column name is possible via a
selection list. CSV-Dateien without description have the following column names [1] for
the first column, [2] for the 2. column etc.
At CSV-files with description, the column name must be indicated.
Name Here you enter a name for the value column. If a name is indicated, this name will be used
instead of the variable name for the label of the axis (X-Axis) or for the legend text (Y-
axis).
Color Each of the 28 lines can be assigned an individual color.
From / To Every variable may have an individual range of values, that you have to enter in field
From / To. The various ranges of values will then also be visible in the scaling. You can
also use num-elements, to achieve a variable scaling.
Single scaling If all variables are in the same range of values, activate this option. In this case, all
variables will have the same scaling. Define here the color and the ranges of values.
You can configure further properties for a line with command Options....
Tab X-axis
On this tab you configure the properties of the horizontal X-axis.
In group Format you define the angle of the axis text. You can select in this group, whether the number of
the scale-subdivisions of the X axis shall be defined automatically. Alternatively you enter a number
manually. By choosing the automatic description, the number of scale subdivisions will be adjusted
automatically to the range of the trend line. In addition, you decide the format of the number at the X-axis.
Option Description
Label
Alignment Here you define the alignment of the text.
Color In this color the text of the axis will be drawn.
Automatic If you want to have an automatic labeling, activate this option.
Number Here you define the number of the horizontal grid lines and of the appropriate labeling. An
input is only possible, if the option Automatic is deactivated.
Format
Automatic Here you can enable the automatic calculation of the number of digits.
Decimal If you have deactivated option Automatic, you define here the decimal digits.
digits
129
Tab Min/Max curve

In addition to the 28 XY lines, two further lines can be shown in one diagram. These lines can e.g. provide
minimum or maximum or display a reference curve. The data of the curve will be loaded from an own CSV-
file. The display range for the X-axis is the same range that is also used for displaying the 28 trend lines.
The Y-range applies for both curves.
The both additional diagrams will be entered into the diagram without scale.
Option Description
Display active Here you enter a num-element to control the visibility of the Min/Max-curves at runtime. If
the element has got value 0, the curve will be hidden. With value 1 will the curve is
shown.
Source file Enter here the name of the CSV-file including the path, from which the data for the
presentation of the both curves shall be loaded. Use the browse-button to select an
existing directory or an existing file. For the input you can use also variables e.g.:
@_ProjectPath\CSV_Files\MinMax.CSV. The file name has to be entered with
extension.
Y-range
From, To Define the range of values, that shall apply for both curves. Num-elements can be
entered as well.
Format
CSV separator Here you define the separator char for the CSV-file. The following separators are
possible: comma, semicolon, tabulator and blank.
Minimum curve, Maximum curve
Legend If the option legend is activated, you can enter here the legend text for the minimum and
maximum curve.
Line properties Define the properties of the line. You can configure line style, line color and line size.
The description of the tabs Y-axis, Grid and Miscellaneous you find here.
Tab VBScript
Inside the VBScript of the XY-trend chart the object name ThisObj can be used to access functions and
properties.
Functions and properties with VBScript.
Functions
SetRedraw bEnable This member function sets or clears the redraw flag. While the
redraw flag is cleared, the contents will not be updated after each
change and will not be repainted until the redraw flag is set again.
For example when setting multiple variables (function
SetVariable) it makes sense to clear the redraw flag with
ThisObj.SetRedraw false. After setting all variables the redraw
flag is enabled with ThisObj.SetRedraw true.
SetSize LineNumber, Set the number of points used for the line assigned with
nValues LineNumber (starting with 0). When setting the values by
VBScript this function has to be used. nValues is the number of
requested points.
SetXAxisVariable VariableName This function is used to set the variable for the X-axis. If the CSV
data is used, all data curves are using the data from this variable.
SetVariable LineNumber, Use this function to assign the curve to another data point.
VariableName LineNumber (started with 0) is the requested line. VariableName
130
Graphic

is name of the new data point.
SetXYValue LineNumber, With this function one data point is set of the curve assigned with
Index, LineNumber (started with 0). Index (started with 0) is used to
x, assign the point. The parameter x and y are used to display the
y point.
PlotXvsY LineNumber, This function set the data from all points with two arrays. The first
x, parameter selects the curve (starting with 0). The second includes
y all X values, and the third all Y values.
PlotXvsY2 LineNumber, The same function as PlotXvsY, but the two arrays are passed as
x, pointers.
y
Refresh This function forces a redraw of the XY-trend chart.
Unzoom The display range, which is configured in the Graphic Editor, is
reused.
Properties
UseCsvFile This variable indicates whether the projected CSV file is used or
not. Set this variable to false, the CSV file is no longer read, and
the data can be set via VBScript.
AutoScaleX With this property the auto scale function of the X axis is
activated.
Example:
ThisObj.AutoScaleX = true
XAxisMinimum Minimum and maximum from the X axis.
XAxisMaximum Example:
ThisObj.XAxisMinimum = -20
ThisObj.XAxisMaximum = 20
AutoScale LineNumber With this property the auto scale function of the Y axis is activated.
LineNumber (started with 0) is the desired line.
Example:
ThisObj.AutoScale(0) = true
YAxisMinimum LineNumber Minimum and maximum from the Y axis. LineNumber (started with
YAxisMaximum 0) is the desired line.
Example:
ThisObj.YAxisMinimum(0) = 10
ThisObj.YAxisMaximum(0) = 50
EnableZoom With this property the zoom function is enabled/disabled. The
default value is true.
EnablePopupMenu Use this property to enable/disable the popup menu at runtime.
The default value is true.
LineColor LineNumber This property can be used to read the color (RGB value) of a line.
LineNumber (started with 0) is the requested line. The property is
read only.
131
Example:
ThisObj.UseCsvFile = False
ThisObj.SetSize 0, 1024
dim xValues(1024)
dim yValues(1024)
PI = 4 * Atn(1)
delta = 2*PI / 1024
phi = 0
Sub OnRun
For i = 0 To 1023
xValues(i) = sin(phi*15) * i/1023
yValues(i) = cos(phi*15) * i/1023
phi = phi + delta
Next
phi = phi + delta*2
ThisObj.PlotXvsY2 0, xValues, yValues
ThisObj.Refresh
End Sub
In the above example, in each program cycle 1024 points are calculated and set to the XY-trend chart
Function ChangeLabelStr
The function ChangeLabelStr is called during the drawing of the trend. With this function the labels on the X
and Y axis can be modified.
Name Parameter Beschreibung

ChangeLabelStr LabelStr This function has 4 parameters.
LineNumber The first parameter LabelStr includes the text, which is used for the
LabelNumber axis labels. You can assign a new value to this parameter.
Value LineNumber contains the number of the trend line. For the X axis -1
is used.
The third parameter LabelNumber contains the number of the label.
On the Y axis the labels are numbered from bottom to top. The X axis
numbers the labels from left to right. Both parameters LineNumber
and LabelNumber are zero based.
Value is the fourth parameter and contains the value at the position of
the label as a number.
Example:
Sub ChangeLabelStr (LabelStr, LineNumber, LabelNumber, Value)
If LineNumber = -1 Then
LabelStr = "X: " & LabelNumber & "; Value: " & Value
Else
LabelStr = "Y-" & LineNumber & ": " & LabelNumber & "; Value: " & Value
End If
End Sub
See also
Displaying a XY-trend chart
XY-trend chart runtime
Access to data storage files
132
Graphic
Commons tabs for trend charts

The following tabs are used by Time- and XY-trend charts.
Tab Y-axis
Option Description
Text alignment
Left axis Here you enter the alignment for the text at the left Y-axis. Valid values are -90 to 90°.
Right axis Here you enter the alignment for the text at the right Y-axis. Valid values are -90 to 90°.
Format
Automatic If you want to have an automatic labeling, activate this checkbox. In this case, the
number of horizontal scale subdivisions will be adjusted automatically to the range of the
trend chart.
Number If the option Automatic is disabled you can enter here number of the horizontal grid
lines manually.
Tab Grid
On this tab you define the design of the grid of the trend chart. The number of vertical main grid lines you
configure on tab X-axis, the number of the horizontal main grid lines you configure on tab Y-axis in group
Format.
Minor grid lines subdivide the main grid in addition and are shown as dotted lines.
Option Description
Horizontal Here you define the design of the horizontal grid lines.
Active If the horizontal grid lines shall be shown, activate this checkbox.
Main grid Define the color of the horizontal main grid lines by pressing this button.
color
Line Define the thickness of the horizontal lines with a number between 1 and 9.
thickness
Minor grid Defines the color of the minor grid lines.
color
Minor grid If you want to have displayed minor grid lines in between the horizontal main grid lines,
lines enter the corresponding number here.
Vertical Here you define the design of the vertical grid lines.
Active If the vertical grid lines shall be shown, activate this checkbox.
Main grid Determine the color of the vertical main grid lines by pressing this button.
color
Line Define the thickness of the vertical lines with a number between 1 and 9.
thickness
Minor grid Defines the color of the minor grid lines.
color
Minor grid If you want to have minor grid lines in between the vertical main grid lines, enter the
lines corresponding number here.
Border color With this command you change the border color.
133
Tab Help lines

In this dialog you can define lines, to be displayed additionally to the trend chart. Every line of the table
describes one line.
Option Description
Color Color of help line
X1, The both endpoints of each line are defined with these four columns. Two respective columns
Y1, define one point with X and Y value. In the trend chart, the bottom left corner is defined by X=0
X2, Y2 and Y=0, the top right corner is defined with X=1 and Y=1. Instead of constant numbers, you can
enter here also num-elements.
Opt. With this command you open dialog Line. Here you define style and width of the line.
Tab Miscellaneous
Option Description
Legend The legend shows besides the names of the variables, lines in the corresponding
color and thickness.
Active Activate this option to show the legend.
Text color With this command you can configure the text color of the legend.
Tracking lineal
Color Select here the color for the tracking lineal. You should select a color, which has a
good contrast with the values (drawn in the colors of the lines).
Trigger elements Here you can configure optional control-triggers to start several actions. Thus, these
actions are available, even without using the mouse.
Tracking dialog Enter here a num-element to switch on displaying of the tracking dialog, e.g. system-
element _F9.
Tracking lineal Enter here a num-element, to switch on displaying of the tracking lineal, e.g. system-
element _F10.
Edit properties Enter here a num-element, to open the property dialog of the trend chart.
134
Graphic
Properties line
This dialog contains one tab to configure properties for a drawing line.
Tab Standard
Option Description
Line Define here line style and size of the line. The line style can be set to no line.
Symbol Here you select a symbol, which distinguishes this line from the other lines by its color
(important for printouts on monochrome printers).
Surface You can assign another color to this symbol.
color
Number format
Automatic Activate this option, to activate the automatic calculation of the number of digits at the Y-
axis.
Total digits When you deactivate option Automatic, you have to define the number of total digits here.
At the total number of digits, the decimal point will be calculated as one digit. Enter here a 0,
if no labelling for the Y-axis is desired.
After digits When you deactivate option Automatic, you determine here the number of digits after the
decimal point.
Unit Enter the unit of the variable into the entry field.
Note When you have selected a single scaling on tab Trend lines, only the unit of the 1.
line in the scale will be used.
Not If the dimension shall not be shown, activate this parameter switch.
displayed
Assign to Y- If the dimension shall be shown at the scale, activate this option.
axis
Legend Enter here a text, which is used in the legend instead of the variable name. If no entry is
made here, the variable name is used.
Data point selection

Select a data storage with upper list box. After selection is changed all variables of the data storage are
offered in the lower list box. Double-click on a variable or select it and press OK.
At runtime an additional archive selection is offered to select further data storage files as source.
135
Runtime
Trend chart
Trend charts display the course of one or several datapoints as curve over a horizontal axis. Trend charts
use data-elements, that were stored before in a data storage table.
Every diagram can display up to 28 data-elements at the same time, shown in different colors. The scaling
can be selected separately for every curve. Also a second Y-axis can be displayed.
To record data, the Data Storage Runtime must be entered into the program list in the Project Manager in
dialog Runtime configuration.
By clicking with the right mouse button on a trend chart window, a context menu will be opened, where the
scaling of the axes and presentation designs can be changed and historical data shown. The program will
continue to record the current data.
Zoom-in
With the zoom function a part from the trend chart will be displayed enlarged. At that, the automatic update
of the trend chart will be switched off automatically.
1. Click with the left mouse button in the trend chart, and keep the mouse button pressed.
2. Move the mouse pointer, till the desired range has the correct size. The range will be shown inverted.
3. Release the mouse button. The selected range will now be represented enlarged.
See also
Display archived data in a trend chart
Dialog Trend chart
Tab General
Here you change the period and the data-elements to be displayed.
Option Description
Update When this function is switched on, changes in the data storage are represented immediately
in the trend chart. When the function is switched off, at the time indication the last time will be
shown that shall be represented.
Period Here, the time period is defined, that shall be displayed. The time period is entered in
seconds, minutes, hours, days, weeks, months or years.
Time/Date Here, the end time of the period is defined, that shall be displayed.
Lines The scaling of the lines can be predefined separately for every variable.
Variable Here, the data-elements are selected, which shall be presented. There are all data-element
for choice, which are used in the data storage table. If a curve shall not be shown, select (no
line).
From, To From defines, with which value the element starts at the origin. To is the maximum value to be
represented.
Color Every variable should be assigned an individual color.
Opt. You can configure further properties for a line with command ....
Press button Archive to open dialog Archive selection.

With command Original all options are set on the values, which were configured in the Graphic Editor. In
contrary to function Original range in the context menu, beside the loading of the original ranges also the
variable-assignment and the data storage file will be reset on their original values.
136
Graphic
Tab Tracking
Option Description
General
Calculate intermediate Set this option to display not only the recorded values, but also interpolated
values values.
Ruler
Color Select a background color for the tracking lineal.
Delete all positions All historical lineal positions will be deleted. The displayed historical rulers are
deleted.
Tracking views
Tracking dialog
A vertical line in the trend chart shows the position of the values to be indicated. By moving the mouse
pointer this position can be changed.
Option Description
Time Here you see the time stamp of the ruler at the current mouse position
(table) The table displays variable names and the values at the current position.
Cancel closes the tracking dialog
Tracking ruler
Another option to see numerical values at different positions is the tracking ruler. The tracking draws a
vertical ruler at the current mouse position. The current values are displayed on the line.
This menu command Tracking ruler shows or hides the ruler.
Set fixed ruler positions

By pressing the CTRL-key and a left-click with the mouse an additional tracking ruler is drawn. This ruler is
then fixed at the time stamp the mouse was clicked
You add up to 10 fixed tracking rulers. When inserting the 11. ruler the first ruler is removed again. All fixed
tracking positions can be deleted in the tab Tracking.
Dialog Select archive
Option Description
Directory Select here the archive directory, where the desired archive is to be found.
Data storage files Here, the archive files are listed.
Archive file Here you can see the name of the archive file with the counted-up number.
Oldest time stamp Here you see the time of the first dataset.
Most recent time stamp Here you see the time of the last dataset.
137
Context menu for the trend chart
By clicking with the right mouse button on a trend chart, a context menu will be shown.
The property dialog, the Tracking dialog, the Tracking ruler and the command Print can be called also
over a function key or a button (see tabs Miscellaneous and Print).
Command Description
Update When this function is on, changes in the data storage are displayed immediately in the
trend chart.
Note When you zoom in a part of the trend chart, the update will be switched off
automatically. Switch the update on again, to show up-to-date data.
Default range With this command the original ranges of time and values, as defined in the Graphic
Editor, are restored. If the update is switched off, the end time (time at the right side) will
remain unchanged. With the update switched on, the end time will be set on the time of
the most current dataset in the data storage file.
Tracking dialog The Tracking dialog displays the values of a trend chart as numerical values.
Tracking ruler This command shows or hides the tracking ruler.
Print Select this command, when you want to print the trend chart.
Trend charts will be printed colored on color printers. On monochrome printers, the lines
are printed in different patterns.
Profile This submenu is displayed, if the profile mode is enabled for the trend chart. You can
load, save and delete profiles.
The selection of a profile is made in the dialog Profile selection.
Properties With this command the dialog Properties trend chart is opened.
XY-trend chart
XY-trend charts display the course of one or several datapoints as curve over a horizontal axis. Differently to
the time related trend charts, the horizontal axis is a value-axis (such as the vertical axles).
XY-trend charts use a CSV file as data source.
By clicking with the right mouse button over a XY-trend chart, the context menu is opened. Here you find the
commands to restore the original range, to show the tracking dialog or to print the chart.
Zoom-in
With the zoom function a part of the XY-trend chart will be displayed enlarged.
1. Click with the left mouse button in the XY-trend chart, and keep the mouse button pressed.
2. Move the mouse pointer, till the desired range has the correct size. The range will be shown inverted.
3. Release the mouse button. The selected range will now be represented enlarged.
138
Graphic
Dialog Properties XY-trend chart

In this dialog you can change the range of values for every line and for the X-axis. In addition, it is possible
to select other variables from the CSV-file or to remove lines. With the archive function you will access on
other CSV-files.
Option Description
X-Axis
Variable Here a variable from the CSV-file is selected, which is used for the X-axis. All variables of the
CSV-file are for choice.
From, From defines, with which value the X-axis starts at the left. To is the maximum value to be
To displayed.
Y-Axis
Variable Here variables from the CSV-file are selected, which shall be displayed. All variables of the
CSV-file are for choice. If a line shall not be shown, select (no line).
From, The scaling of the lines can be defined separately for every variable. From defines, with which
To value the element starts at the origin. To is the maximum value to be displayed.
With the command Archive you open a dialog to select a CSV-File. The start directory of the CSV-file
selection is the directory of the CSV-file, currently shown in the XY-trend chart.
If another CSV-file is selected, the column assignment in dialog Properties XY-Trend chart will be
readapted. At this, the column names, presently selected, will be searched for in the new CSV-file and, if
possible, pre-selected in dialog Properties XY-Trend chart. If the variable name is not found, no line will be
selected.
With the command Original all XY-trend chart settings will be reset again on their original values. In
difference to function Original range in the context menu, beside the loading of the original ranges also the
column assignment and the CSV-File will be reset on their original values.
If in the definition, a file name with variables is defined as data source, the program will "switch" on the file,
which is currently defined by the variables.
Tracking dialog (XY-trend chart)
A cursor (cross) in the XY-trend chart shows the position of the values to be indicated. By moving the
mouse pointer this position can be changed.
Option Description
X The X value at the current cursor position is displayed.
value
Y The Y values at the current cursor position are displayed here. A unit will be shown behind the
value value, if it is configured for the Y-axis.
Cancel closes this dialog.
139
Context menu for the XY-trend chart
By clicking with the right mouse button on a XY-trend chart, a context menu will be shown.
The property dialog, the Tracking dialog and the command Print can be called also over a function key or
a button (see tabs Miscellaneous and Print).
Command Description
Default range With this command, the original range of values at the X-axes and Y-axes, that was
defined in the Graphic Editor, can be restored. If no constant but variable elements are
defined, the current values of the elements define the original range.
Tracking dialog The Tracking dialog displays the values of a XY-trend chart as numerical values.
Print Select this command, when you want to print the XY-trend chart.
XY-trend charts will be printed colored on color printers. On monochrome printers, the
lines are printed in different patterns.
Properties With this command the dialog Properties XY-trend chart is opened.
Dialog Profile selection
A profile stores various settings like value range, variables name or the line color.
With this dialog you select a profile
140
Graphic
Using
Displaying a trend chart
Trend charts access on stored data and display them online or show historical diagrams for a selected time
period.
For example, a trend chart could look like this:
To display a trend chart, you have to define a data storage first.

Start the Data Storage Editor via toolbar Development in the Project Manager.
Select button New to create a new data storage table.
Press button Edit properties the table specific toolbar to open dialog Properties.
With option Start saving (tab General, group Trigger) you define when your data shall be saved.
Data are saved depending on definite events. Select an event, that occurs cyclically in order to
save the data cyclically. In the example below, the data are saved every 30 seconds due to
changes of the system-element _Sec30.
In group Definition you define the size of the ring buffer, where the data shall be stored. In group
Definition you define, how many elements a dataset shall contain and how many datasets
shall be saved at most. If the number defined here is reached, the oldest dataset is overwritten. In
the example below, every dataset consists of 4 elements and a maximum of 2880 datasets can
be stored. This means, if a dataset is stored every 30 seconds, the oldest dataset will be
overwritten after exactly 24 hours. Below both entries, the size of the defined ring buffer is shown.
141
Close dialog Properties with OK.

Enter the data-elements which shall be saved, into column Element of the table.
In column Type you have to define whether the element is a num- or a text-element. For this,
click with the right mouse button on the cell.
When you have entered all elements, save the table (button Save in the toolbar of the Data
Storage Editor).
With this you have defined a data storage table.
For the next, draw the trend chart and assign it to this data storage table.
Select the picture, in which the trend chart shall be displayed or open a new picture.
Press button Trend chart in toolbar Draw in the Graphic Editor.
Draw a trend chart in the picture. A trend chart is drawn like a rectangle (see Drawing basic
forms).
Double-click on the trend chart to open dialog Properties trend chart.
On tab Graphic you can change the color of the border and the surface.
Select tab Trend lines.
Select a data storage table with option Data storage.
In the table you can enter up to 28 variables, which data shall be displayed as lines.
Into the fields From and To you configure the range for the data-elements.
Then you define the Color for a line.
Press button Option to configure more properties for the line.
Define here line style and thickness and the Number format for the Y-axis. With Unit you define
whether the unit of a data-element shall be shown or not.
Make your definitions for as many data-elements as you want to have displayed in the trend
chart.
142
Graphic
Select tab X-axis.

With Period the definition is made for which period the stored values shall be displayed.
With parameter Text you determine color and alignment of the X-axis labels.
In group Format you configure if the number of the scale-subdivisions of the X-axis shall be defined
automatically. Alternatively you enter a Number manually. With the automatic format, the number
of scale subdivisions will be adjusted automatically to the range of the trend chart. Here you can
also decide about the description (Second, Minute, Hour, Day, Month, Year).
Select tab Y-axis.
Here you configure Text alignment and Format of the Y-axis.
Select tab Grid.
The number of main grid lines varies depending on the number of subdivisions of X- and Y-axis.
At this point you can define for the horizontal and vertical grid, whether it shall be active, which
color shall have major and minor grid lines, the line thickness and the number of grid lines.
Moreover, the border color of the internal border of the trend chart can be configured.
Confirm the dialog with OK, and save the picture.
In order to activate the data storage for the runtime, and to display the stored values as trend chart,
the data storage tasks have to be started together with the other runtime programs. This must be
configured in the Project Manager.
Open dialog Runtime configuration - via the corresponding button in the toolbar.
Add the program Data storage into the program list (see Add programs).
143
Displaying a XY-trend chart

XY-trend charts access on stored data of CSV files and display them as diagram. Different from time related
trend charts, the data are not shown in their temporal course, but in their direct relationship.
For example, during runtime an XY- trend chart could look like this:
The CSV file Force_Displacement, this XY- trend chart is based on. CSV looks like this:
NUM;NUM
Force;displacement
1950;44.2
1678;38.8
1400;29.5
1250;40
1200;50
1080;53
950;69
750;81
550;95
500;77
320;42.2
200;46
150;67
100;88
50;49
0;0
The first line of the CSV file is a definition line in which the contained types are indicated. For num-elements
the token NUM is used, for texts the token TXT. All types are separated by the selected separator char. After
the last type a new line starts, without typing a separator. Possible separators are ',' or ';' or space or a
tabulator, in the example it is a ';'. The CSV file can be edited with MS-Excel or with a text editor.
In the second line of the CSV file the names of the elements are shown, which values follow below, in the
example, force and displacement.
144
Graphic
Now, draw the XY- trend chart and assign it to this CSV file.
Select the picture, in which the XY-trend chart shall be displayed or open a new picture.
Select button XY-trend chart in toolbar Draw.
Draw an XY-trend chart on the screen. An XY-trend chart is drawn like a rectangle (see Drawing
basic forms).
Double-click on the XY-trend chart to open dialog Properties XY-trend chart.
On tab Graphic you can change the color of the border and the surface.
Select tab Data source.
Select the a CSV file with option Source file. Click browse-button Browse to select the file in
dialog Open.
Select the CSV separator, which is used in the selected CSV file.
In field Trigger you indicate a data-element with Start reading, which change triggers the loading
of the CSV file.
You have the possibility to select the data-element from the reference list. Click with the right
mouse button on the edit field to open dialog Element selection.
Select tab Trend lines.
In group X-value you enter the variable, which shall be applied at the X-axis.
In field Name you can enter another expression for the element, which will then be shown at the
right end of the X-axis.
In group Y-value you can configure up to six elements, which values shall be displayed as lines.
Beside this, you can enter another description for the elements below Name which will then be
shown in the legend, if it is activated on tab Miscellaneous.
Beside this field, you can define the color of the respective line in field Color.
Into the fields From and To you configure the range for the data-elements.
When pressing button Options, a dialog opens and shows the properties of the respective line.
Define here line style and thickness and the Number format for the Y-axis. With Unit you define
whether the unit of a data-element shall be shown or not.
Make your definitions for as many data-elements as you want to have displayed in the XY-trend
chart.
Select tab X-axis.
In group Label you configure color and format of the X-axis description.
In group Format you configure if the number of the scale-subdivisions of the X-axis shall be defined
automatically. Alternatively you enter a Number manually. With the automatic format, the number
of scale subdivisions will be adjusted automatically to the range of the XY-trend chart.
Select tab Y-axis.
Here you configure Text alignment and Format of the Y-axis.
Select tab Grid.
The number of main grid lines varies depending on the number of subdivisions of X- and Y-axis.
At this point you can define for the horizontal and vertical grid, whether it shall be active, which
color shall have major and minor grid lines, the line thickness and the number of grid lines.
Moreover, the border color of the internal border of the trend chart can be configured.
Confirm the dialog with OK and save the picture.
145
Display archived data in a trend chart

You can display archived data in trend charts.
At first you have to open a picture with a trend chart (see display trend chart).
Make sure that the program Data Storage has been included in the program list of the Project
Manager (see create a data storage).
Start the runtime program (Button Runtime in toolbar runtime of the Project Manager).
Select the picture with the trend chart.
Click with the right mouse button on the trend chart.
Select command Edit in the context menu to open dialog Properties trend chart.
Press button Archive to open dialog Select archive.
You can identify archive files at the numbered file extensions. To the right of the file name the
time of the oldest and newest data record is shown.
Select an archive and confirm the dialog with OK.
Also confirm the dialog for Properties trend chart with OK. Now, you see the selected historical
values in the trend chart.
146
Graphic
Touch Panel
Touch panel
A touch panel permits the input of numerical values or texts at PCs, which are not provided with a keyboard
but only with a touch screen.
The Touch Panel input can be activated for buttons, graphic buttons, numbers and texts.
For the definition of the touch panel you have to proceed in the following way:
1. Project settings
Open the project (button Open in the standard toolbar).
Select menu command Configuration | Touch panel to open dialog Touch panel (project).
Activate the touch panel functionality by setting the option Active.
Enter Position and Size of the touch panel. The position can be adjusted individually as picture
or object property.
If the touch panel operation shall be supervised (i.e. if a data input was started, it will be aborted
automatically when the operator inputs have stopped) enter a Life time unequal to zero.
Close the dialog with Save.
2. Picture settings
(Only for the touch panel dialog for numbers)
Start the Graphic Editor.
Open the relevant picture (button Open in the standard toolbar).
Select command Picture properties in the context menu.
Select tab Touch panel.
You can configure the visibility of the touch panel in 2 ways:
1) If option Always visible is set, the touch panel will always be shown. If the touch panel input is
not active, the touch panel control elements are grayed out.
2) With a num-element that you can enter in field Visible at. If this element has a value different
from 0, the touch panel will always be visible in the picture.
Enter the position of the touch panel. At graphic objects, the position can be adjusted
individually.
147
3. Object settings
Select the object, which shall have a touch panel input. This is possible at numbers, texts, buttons
and graphic buttons. Open dialog Properties with a double-click.
Select tab Touch panel.
Set the option Active.
At buttons and graphic buttons select data type (NUM or Text) for the touch panel input.
Set the texts for description and the unit at number objects. Variables may also be used in the
texts.
Set the Element which value shall be set with the touch panel input. Minimum and Maximum
can be entered optionally. At number and text objects no entries can be made here, since the
settings from tab Input will be used for the touch panel input.
When entering a number, you have then to define the position of the touch panel. With the option
Use picture definition the position from the touch panel picture settings is used. With the option
Relative to the object the touch panel is shown directly at the object.
See also
The touch panel input dialog for numbers
The touch panel input dialog for texts
Touch panel
By means of the touch panel it is possible to enter numbers and texts via a touch screen. For numbers and
texts there are different input dialogs (see input dialog for Numbers and Texts).
Input of numbers
This input possibility can only be used for the visualization. The input dialog may be always visible or only
visible, if required.
The input of numbers can be configured at:
Buttons , Graphic Buttons and Numbers.
Input of texts
This input dialog will be displayed automatically if an input is necessary and if the function is switched on.
For the activation, the left mouse button must be clicked on an entry field.
The input dialog appears at:
At password-dialogs for the login, changes of the password and in the dialog User table.
At the visualization of Buttons, Graphic Buttons and Texts (can be configured for every object).
In the Eventjournal, the Filter name can be edited.
In the Recipe Runtime when creating new recipes (name of the recipe) and when editing new
recipes.
148
Graphic
In this dialog you have the possibility, to activate the touch panel-input (separated for Number and Text) for
a project and to make general settings for the touch panel.
Option Description
Active Set this option to activate the touch panel functionality for a project.
Only if this option is activated, inputs for the touch panel can be made in the Graphic
Editor.
Coordinates Position and size of the touch panel dialog will be defined here.
Position X, Y The position (upper left corner) of the touch panel dialog is defined here in pixels.
Note At the input of numbers, the position can be configured per picture or also for single
graphic objects.
Size X, Y The size of the touch panel dialog is defined here in pixels.
Life time [s] With the lifetime, the touch panel dialog can be watched.
At every operation in the dialog, the lifetime starts running anew. After the lifetime has
elapsed, the touch panel dialog will be closed automatically (a takeover of already existing
changes is not made).
If this functionality is not wanted, enter as lifetime 0.
Per default, the lifetime is predefined on 0 seconds. With this option, it can be changed in
the range 0 to 3600 seconds. Enter the desired value either directly with the keyboard or
use the arrows to the right of the entry field.
See also
Step-by-step instructions Touch Panel
Touch Panel Definition for a picture
Touch Panel Definition for an object
Tab Touch panel (picture settings)

On this tab you define touch panel properties for a picture.
This tab is only visible, if for this project the touch panel option for numbers is activated.
Option Description
View options
Always visible If highlighted, the touch panel input window will always be visible.
Visible at A num-element can be entered here, to control the visibility of the touch panel
window.
Coordinates
Use project The project settings will be used.
definition
Absolute With this option, the touch panel window will be set to a fixed position.
(Position X and Y)
See also
Touch panel (Step-by step instructions)
Touch panel Project properties
Touch panel Object properties
149
Tab Touch panel (Object)

On this tab you activate the touch panel data input for the object.
This tab is only visible, if for this project the touch panel input was activated. At the text input, all options,
which are not required, will be switched off.
Option Description
Active Activate this option, to permit a touch panel data input on the object.
Data type At buttons and graphic buttons, the data type (NUM or TEXT) for the input is defined here.
At a numeric input the following options are available:

Option Description
Texts
Description, Here you enter texts, which describe the input value and its unit. You can also use
Unit variables in the texts.
Data input
Element Here you see the element, on which the data input is made.
Minimum, Here you see the minimum and maximum value, that may be reached.
Maximum
Position
Use picture For the touch panel the position, that was defined in the picture properties, will be
definition used.
Relative to the The touch panel dialog will be placed relatively to the object. A reference point of the
object object must be selected.
At a text input, the following options are available:

Option Description
Texts
Description Here you enter text, which describe the input value. You can also use variables in the text.
Data input
Element Here you see the element, on which the data input is made.
See also
Touch Panel (step-by-step instructions)
Touch Panel Project properties
Touch Panel Picture properties
150
Graphic
Touch panel input dialog for numbers
Example of an input dialog:
The touch panel dialog for numbers has the following components:
1. Description ('speed')
2. Unit ('rpm')
3. Minimum ('0')
4. Maximum ('3000')
5. The current input ('2800'), up to 15 characters possible
6. 12 input button: (10 numbers, sign and decimal point)
7. Backspace-button (deletes the last character of the input).
8. Cancel-button (input will be discarded)
9. OK-button (value is accepted)
Start of the data input

At the start (when activating the input) the components 1- 5 will be set with the current values.
All components are displayed normally.
Exception If for minimum or maximum no limits are defined, the appropriate fields of the dialog are grayed
out.
Data input
With of the 12 input buttons the value is entered into the input field, by pressing the backspace-button, the
last character will be deleted. The decimal point may be entered only once. The input is performed, when
the button is released. There is no repeating function.
At the first input after the activation (except backspace-key) the edit field will be deleted and filled- in with the
new value.
151
End of data input

The input value will be accepted with OK, if the limit check was successful. If the check was not successful,
a message box is shown and the input dialog will remain active.
Cancelling the input is always possible: the input value will not be accepted and the dialog deactivated.
If the dialog is visible, but no input is active, all components will be grayed out, the contents of the
components 1..5 will be empty.
While an input is active the dialog acts like a modal dialog.
Touch panel input dialog for texts
Example of an input dialog:
The text touch panel dialog includes the following components

1. Description ('Recipe name')
2. The current input ('Strawberry cake'), up to 80 characters possible
3. The on-screen keyboard
4. Red cancel-button (input will be discarded)
5. Green OK-button (value is accepted)
Start of data input

At the start (when activating the input) the components 1 and 2 will be set with the current values.
The input marker is placed at the end of the text.
All components are displayed normally.
Data input
The input of values operates the same way as with a normal keyboard.
The input is performed, when the button is released. There is no repeating function.
End of data input

The input value will be accepted with OK or with the enter-button, without checking the input.
Cancelling is always possible: the input value will not be accepted and the dialog deactivated.
While an input is active the dialog acts like a modal dialog.
152
Process Assignment
Introduction
The process assignment connects AMS Asset Graphics data-elements with the real process values. Thus,
the visualization can display current process data at the screen. Data-elements, which were changed by an
user or by calculations, can be transferred to the control unit.
Receiving and sending data is event-driven. The conditions (trigger) are defined in tab Communication.
Cyclical events can also be used and are predefined with time-dependent system-elements.
To get the real values from the process, there must be an communication interface to the process. This is
realized with so called drivers. There are different drivers for the most common PLCs (programmable logic
controller) available. Beside the PLC-drivers, there are also other driver, e.g. for bus systems or other
process interfaces. A description of available drivers can be found here.
The Process Assignment Editor is designed as MDI-application, this means, several documents (process
assignment tables) can be edited at the same time.
In so called Driver profiles the behavior of the of a specific driver is defined.
In process assignment tables data-elements are assigned to memory addresses in the PLC. During the data
transfer an adaptation to different value ranges can be performed.
See also
Organization and procedure of process assignment tables
Behavior of the process assignment at runtime
Define the process assignment (step-by-step instructions)
Insertion of programs
Organization and optimization of process assignment tables

In order to get a fast communication with the partner device, you should follow the instructions:
1. Use tables as big as possible

Every data exchange causes a loss of time due to the transmission protocol. The relationship protocol time
and data time is much better at big tables. If possible, you should organize the data, which are needed at the
same time, in a continuous address range.
2. Exchange data only, when data are required

If data are required in one picture only, enter the picture name into field Active at picture on tab
communication in dialog Properties Process assignment table.
If setpoints shall be sent, use trigger _Input or a trigger, that you have defined at the data input as
notification-trigger for the end of the data input. When the setpoints shall be read again for verification,
define an notification-trigger for sending and use this trigger as control-trigger for receiving.
If many data are used for the alarm monitoring, form a common trigger in the PLC, which changes its value,
when an alarm condition has changed. This common trigger will then be read cyclically and used as control-
trigger for corresponding receiving tables. The disadvantage is, that the alarm data in the PLCs must be
combined with their old state. Possibly it is useful, to use several common triggers for different groups of
alarm messages.
153
3. Planning the data exchange

If a great number of data has to be exchanged, you should plan the arrangement of the data in the PLC. It is
a good idea to use separate ranges for data to be read and data to be written.

When starting the Process Assignment Runtime (TPZ32.EXE), all driver profiles, defined in the Process
Assignment Editor, will be loaded automatically. If a driver profile cannot be loaded, you will get a message
and the Process Assignment Runtime will be stopped. There are different reasons, why a driver profile
cannot be loaded.
1. The driver cannot allocate enough memory.
2. The Process Assignment Runtime cannot find the driver in the driver directory.
3. The driver cannot initialize the hardware, e.g. it cannot access a defined serial port.
If all driver profiles were loaded successfully, the tables are loaded. The tables will be assigned to the driver
profiles or rejected, if they shall not be used on this station in a network project.
First all tables will be initialized as defined.

For every driver profile a dialog will be generated, which provides information on the initialization of the
tables (reading data at program start). If an error occurs during the startup, a dialog with the corresponding
error message will appear. At this time, the program is still running in the initialization phase (system-
element _InitPZ is not reset). The procedure, describe here, will be listed in the main window of the Process
Assignment Runtime. You can see, which tables and profiles are currently processed.
After finishing the initialization phase, the Process Assignment Runtime will start the cyclical processing of
the tables.
The Runtime checks with the start sending and receiving triggers, whether the table shall be processed or
not. In case, that both triggers are active at the same time, the priority setting is used.
When closing the runtime program, the process assignment will de-install the drivers again.
The processing sequence of the tables can be influenced with the names of the tables. The tables will be
loaded, sorted in alphabetic order and then assigned to the profiles.
User interface
The Process Assignment Editor is designed as MDI-application, this means, several documents (process
assignment tables) can be processed at the same time.
In menu File you can use the following commands:
New
Select command File | New to open a new process assignment table. Dialog Table New appears.
Select the project for the new table. When you confirm the dialog with OK, it will be checked, whether a valid
driver profile is available. If no valid profile does exist, the dialog Driver profiles (project name) will be
opened. If this dialog is closed without opening a new driver profile, a new window with an empty process
assignment table will be opened. Here, all fields and buttons are shaded in gray, as long as a valid driver
profile was selected for this table.
When there is a valid profile, when opening a table, dialog Properties will be opened.
154
Process Assignment
Driver profile
Driver profiles summarize some settings which describe precisely the behavior of the process assignment
when editing a definite driver. For every driver an arbitrary number of profiles may be generated. A driver
profile can be assigned to a user-defined number of process assignment tables.
Select a command in the submenu File | Driver profiles to deal with driver profiles:
Command Description
Open The dialog Open driver profiles will appear. Here you select the project, which driver profile
shall be opened.
Save All edited profiles are stored.
Edit Select this command to edit the driver profiles for the currently selected project. Dialog Driver
profiles (project name) appears.
See also
General operation
Dialog Properties
The dialog has 5 tabs, in which general parameters of the table, the address range to transfer with the
partner device, the error handling, conditions of the communication and VBScript are configured.
Tab General
On this tab you define, which driver profile shall be used by the table.
Option Description
Driver
Profile Select the driver profile that shall be used by the table from the list of profiles that you
had defined.
Attention When you enter no profile or an incorrect one, you cannot make entries in
the table.
Use profile Activate this option, when the table shall use the defaults, that you have made at the
presettings definition of the driver profile on tab Table presettings.
In this case the corresponding options are disabled for input (in tab Error handling
Repeat and Log level and in tab Communication Program start).
Number The internal number of the driver is displayed here.
155
Tab Addressing
This tab is specific to the selected driver. Exemplarily, the Siemens PG-driver is described.
Here you define, which address ranges in the partner device shall be accessed. You can address relatively
or absolutely.
Option Description
Relative / Absolute With absolute addressing, all address definitions are referred to absolute addresses
in the partner device.
At the relative addressing, all entries are calculated relatively to the first address
(from data word). This means, in this case the data word serves as pointer to the
first address of the range in the partner device.
Example
In field from data word value 20 is entered registered. With the entry 0 in column
Word 1, (see tab Range in the process assignment table) address 20 is mentioned.
At word 1 = 17, address 37 will be addressed.
Data type Select the data type from the list of data types, supported by the driver.
The Siemens-PG-driver (SIPG) can process the data types DB = data block and DX
= extended data block.
Data block Enter here the number of the data block.
From word The first and the last address are defined here.
To word
(or Number at
relative addressing)
Tab Communication
Here you define the conditions for sending and receiving data.
Option Description
Active at
Element The data of the table will only be transferred, when the num-element, that you enter
here, has a value unequal to zero.
Picture You can enter a picture name. The data of the table will only be sent or received,
when the picture is displayed.
Network station The data of the table will be processed only on the given network station.
Automatic
Priority If the table shall be sent as well as received, you can decide here, whether sending
or receiving shall be carried out prior-ranking. This definition is important, when both
control triggers change simultaneously.
Send at change Set this option, when the table shall be sent, when the content of a data-element,
used in the table on the PC side, has changed.
Note When the parameters Send at change and Priority are both activated,
changed elements in the system will not be overwritten, when reading a table. With a
change of the elements (already before reading of the table) the table will be sent to
the hardware. This behavior is only activated in the combination of the settings as
described. This is necessary, to avoid overwriting of the inputs in the system by
reading a table (e.g. time controlled).
156
Process Assignment
Option Description
Trigger
Start sending Enter here the name of the num-element, which shall start sending of the table when
the data-element changes its value (control trigger). The amount of the change is
irrelevant.
Sending complete Define here the name of a num-element, which has to change when sending of the
table was completed (notification-trigger). The element will be increased by 1 and
reset on 0 when reaching 255.
Start receiving Enter here the name of the num-element, which shall start receiving of the table
when the data-element changes its value (control trigger). The amount of the change
is irrelevant.
Receiving complete Define here the name of a num-element, which has to change when the table was
received completely (notification-trigger). The element will be increased by 1 and
reset on 0 when reaching 255.
Program start
Receive Here you define, what shall apply for the table at the start of the program: Receive
required, unnecessary or try.
When receiving of the table at the program start was defined as necessary, the
program will try again and again to receive the table when a receiving has failed. The
program will not be initialized further.
When the receiving is defined unnecessary, the table will not be received at the
program start.
When the program shall try to receive the table, the program will skip this table after
an unsuccessful attempt.
In dialog Driver profile on tab Table presettings you can make the definitions for the
program start. When you have activated option Use profile presettings on tab
General, you cannot make an input here.
Tab Error handling

On this tab you define the data items, which provide detailed information on the error at the communication.
You can also define conditions, to deactivate and reactivate the table.
Option Description
Error
Counter Enter here a num-element, which increments its value at every error in the data
communication of this table.
Status Enter here a num-element, which is set after every data transfer (sending and
receiving). When the communication was successful, the element contains the value 0.
If not, it will get value 1.
Repeat This value defines how often a not correctly transferred telegram is repeated. The
telegram is only then regarded as faulty if the number of predefined repeats is reached.
Note When you have activated the option Use profile presettings on tab
General this field will be shaded in gray, thus you cannot enter parameters.
Number This num-element contains the number of the last error that has occurred in this table.
The meaning of the error numbers can be found in the description of the drivers.
Text In this text-element the last error is reported as plain text.
Log level Enter a Log level greater than 0, is an incorrect telegram shall be recorded in the
activity log.
Note When you have activated option Use profile presettings on tab General this
field will be shaded in gray, thus you cannot enter parameters.
157
Option Description
Deactivation
Number of errors Here you set the number of errors, when the table shall be deactivated. With a 0 the
table is always active.
Status You can enter a num-element for the deactivation status. The element has the value 1,
if the table is deactivated, otherwise it will have value 0.
Reactivation Here you enter a num-element to control the reactivation of the table. If this element
changes its value, the table will be reactivated.
Tab VBScript
On this tab you define further functions, to be called in this table.
OnStart This function will be called once, when the table is generated.
OnRun This function will be called cyclically.
OnEnd This function will be called, when the table is terminated.
OnCommError This function is called in case of an error, e.g. to disable the driver.
(ErrCode)
OnSendStart This function will be called before sending the table.
OnSendReady This function will be called after a successful sending of the table.
OnReceiveStart This function will be called before receiving the table.
OnReceiveReady This function will be called up after successful receiving of the table.
Information on syntax and definition of variables you find in section VBScript.
See also
Dialog Driver profile profile name (project name)

Depending on the driver, the dialog contains different tabs, on which the driver can be selected and the
driver characteristic defined. The tabs Profile, Logging, Error handling, Table presettings and VBScript are
always available. As soon as the driver selection changes, the tabs are readjusted.
A description of the specific tabs can be found at the description of the drivers in Section Driver. As
example, the driver for the Siemens Simatic PG-Interface, a serial driver, has been selected in this section.
Tab Ser. Interface in this dialog is driver-specifically.
158
Process Assignment
Tab Profile
General settings can be made on tab Profile.
Option Description
Use When you activate this option, the driver profile will be used. If this option is not set, all tables,
that use this profile, will be deactivated. This is useful e.g. at commissioning.
In the dialog for selecting different driver profiles, an unused profile is marked graphically with a
red line between two devices.
Driver Select here a driver from the list.
Name Enter an appellative name for the driver profile. With this name you can select the driver profile
at other places.
Active Here you enter a num-element, if you want to activate/deactivate the profile dynamically. When
at the value of the num-element is 0, the profile will not processed, when the value is different to 0,
the profile will be processed.
If you do not want this function, leave the field empty.
Timeout This option defines the maximum time (in milliseconds) for the exchange of data, before the
transfer order is aborted. After that, the repetitions will start. The number of possible repetitions
will be predefined on tab Table presettings in option Error handling Repeat.
Number The driver profile has an assigned internal number, which cannot be changed. With this number
a profile is explicit identified in a project.
Version Here you see the version information about the driver.
Tab Logging
On this tab you define a log file, which records messages on the communication between PC and partner
device.
Option Description
Log file
File name Here you enter the name for the log file. The file name may include a directory path.
max. size Enter here the maximum size for the log file. If the log file is full, the logging stops.
[kB]
Open new file If this option was activated, a new log file will be opened at every start of the Process
at start Assignment Runtime. In doing so, the old log file will be overwritten. If the old log file has to
be analyzed before, it must be copied to another place.
Type
Hardware When you activate this option, the data, that were transferred between driver and
hardware, will be entered into the log file in form of hex values. (At serial drivers, the
ASCII-characters will be logged).
Status When you activate this option, the status commands, exchanged between process
assignment and driver, will be entered into the log file.
Option
Only at errors If this option is set, only reading or writing orders, which finished with an error, are
recorded in the log file.
159
Tab Error handling

On this tab you define the data-elements, which provide detailed information on the error at the
communication.
You can also define conditions to deactivate a driver profile on communication errors and to reactivate it.
Option Description
Error
Counter Enter here a num-element, which increments its value at every error in the data
communication.
Status Enter here a num-element, which is set after every communication (sending and
receiving). When the communication was successful, the element has the value 0. If
not, it will get value 1.
Show error dialog When you activate this option, communication errors will be displayed in a message
dialog.
If several errors occur at the same time, only the last error will be shown. The error
message can be confirmed with OK.
This function is a useful help function during the commissioning of a plant and is
recommended to be used to show directly the errors that have occurred.
Number This num-element contains the number of the last error, occurred in this driver profile.
The meaning of the error numbers can be found in the description of the drivers.
Text This text-element gets the last error, occurred in this driver profile, in plain text.
Deactivation
Number of errors Here you set the number of errors, after which this driver profile shall be deactivated.
When entering a 0, the profile will never be deactivated.
Message Enter a num-element here to get the deactive status of the driver profile.. This element
element has value 1, if the profile is deactivated, otherwise it has value 0.
Reactivation Enter here a num-element to control the reactivation of the driver profile. As soon as
the num-element changes its value, the driver profile will be reactivated.
Tab Table presettings
On this tab you define the presettings for the process assignment tables, which use this driver profile. In
order to activate the presettings, option Use profile presettings on tab General must be enabled.
Option Description
Error handling
Repeat Here you define, how often a faulty telegram has to be repeated. The error counters, which are
defined on tab Error handling, will be changed not before the number of repetitions are reached.
Log level Enter a log level > 0 to record faulty telegrams in the activity log.
Program start
Receive Define here the default setting for the behavior of tables at program start. See tab
communication.
Note This defaults can also be used, to make temporarily settings invalid, which you have made in individual
process assignment tables, e.g. at a commissioning, where receiving of the tables at the program start is not
required under some conditions.
160
Process Assignment
Tab VBScript
On this tab you can define VBScript functions for the driver profile.
OnCommError This function is called in case of an error, e.g. to disable the driver.
(ErrCode)
See also VBScript
Dialog Driver profiles (project name)

Here you create a new driver profile, or you can edit or delete an existing one.
Valid and activated driver profiles have the icon with a green line between two devices.
The icon for a deactivated driver has a red line between two devices.
Driver profiles with no selected driver are displayed with the crossed-out circle.
Changed driver profiles are marked with an asterisk behind the profile name.
With the commands New or Delete you can create a new or delete an existing driver profile.
To edit a profile select the profile and press Edit or double-click on the profile. You can then edit the profile
settings in the dialog Driver profile.
Press Save to save the changes for all profiles.
Note This dialog can also be opened by pressing button Edit profile in the table specific toolbar.
See also
161
Process assignment table

In the process assignment tables, the data items are assigned to the addresses in the partner device.
To edit the properties of the table press the button Edit Properties in the table specific toolbar.
The table has the following tabs:
Tab Data mapping

On this tab you map data-elements to address ranges in the partner device. In column Function you define
how the data must be interpreted.
The labels of the columns depend partly on the selected driver profile and on the setting, that was made
under option Data type on tab Addressing.
Depending on the selected function, some fields are not needed and drawn in gray.
Note Incorrect entries will be highlighted in red.
Column Description
Element Enter here the names of the data-elements, which shall be used with this table.
Function Click with the right mouse button, to open dialog functions.
The description of the functions can be found in table functions.
Note When you want to change the functions of several lines at the same time, mark the
required fields, and click with the right mouse button on one of the highlighted fields. The
function selection will then refer to all highlighted fields.
Address 1 Enter here the address, that shall be transmitted. Or set the start address for a range.
Bit 1 Enter here the bit to be transmitted. If not used this field is gray.
Address 2 Enter here the address, that shall be transmitted. Or set the end address for a range. If not
used this field is gray.
Bit 2 Enter here the bit to be transmitted. If not used this field is gray.
Type Depending on the function the data type (NUM or TXT) of the data-element is shown here.
Tab Scaling
On this tab you define the value ranges in AMS Asset Graphics and in the partner device. During the data
transfer the values are automatically scaled.
Column Description
Element In this column you find the names of the Elements, which shall be used with this table.
Internal (from to In these columns you have to enter the value range of the data in AMS Asset Graphics.
)
External (from In these columns you to enter the value range in the partner device.
to) If the values, entered here, are outside of the possible range of values, it will be shown
in blue letters.
Type See tab Data mapping.
162
Process Assignment
Tab All
On this tab you find all elements in common, which are contained on the other tabs. By means of this, tab
All offers the possibility to exchange the complete process assignment table, using the clipboard or drag &
drop, with other programs. In addition, all information are available at a glance.
See also
Define the Process assignment (step-by-step instructions)
Functions of the process assignment table

Signed
Char This function works with an 8 bit data range. The first bit is interpreted as leading sign.
Int (bit number) This function works with a dynamic data range, adjusted to the driver profile and the
data type. The number of used bits is shown in parenthesis. The first bit is interpreted
as leading sign.
Range This function works with a data range of up to 40 bit. The range is defined from the
entry in column Address 1, Bit 1 up to the column Address 2, Bit 2. The first bit of
the first word is interpreted as leading sign.
Unsigned
Byte This function works with an 8 bit data range without sign.
UInt (bit number) This function works with a dynamic data range, adjusted to the driver profile and the
data type, without sign.
URange This function works with a data range of up to 40 bit. The range is defined from the
entry in column Address 1, Bit 1 up to the column Address 2, Bit 2.
Text
Text This function interprets data as text. This function works with a data range, defined
from the entry in column Address 1 up to the column Address 2.
Text-Swap This function interprets data as text. This function works with a data range, defined
from the entry in column Address 1 up to the column Address 2.
The function swaps high- and low-bytes.
At a text transfer with a Siemens PLC, this function must e.g. be used, since the
memory arrangement in comparison to the PC memory is swapped.
This function requires an even number of bytes (the range of Address 1 up to
Address 2). If this does not apply, the swap does not run for the byte-types!
Special
(depends on Select a special function with the selection arrow next to the lower field. The selected
slection) function is shown on the button above and can then be selected directly.
The description of the special functions can be found in table Special Functions.
Others
Bit This function contains a data range, which consists of only 1 bit.
2 Bit This function comprises a data range, which consists of 2 bit. It will be used, to assign
4 values to elements of two bits. Thereby the bits are connected as follows:
Value = 2 * (Address 1, Bit 1) + (Address 2, Bit 2)
Float (32) With this function, floating point numbers in the float format in the range -3.4e+38 to
3.4e+38 will be transferred. The float-format uses 4 byte, which start with Address 1.
Double (64) With this function, values in the double format in the range -1.7e+308 to 1.7e+308 will
be transferred. The double-format uses 8 bytes, which start with Address 1.
163
Special functions of a process assignment table

Special Function Description
BitNot This function uses a data range of 1 bit. The value is the negation of the transferred
bit.
Siemens KG Simatic-floating point number from double word in S5 PLCs.
Word 1 = High-Word, Word 2 = Low-Word.
Int32(HiLo) This function calculates a 32-bit-integer-value.
Int32(LoHi) This function calculates a 32-bit-integer-value. At this, the upper 16 bits will be
swapped with the lower 16 bits.
BCD-Byte This function uses an 8 bit data range. At this, the lower 4 bits will be interpreted as
unit and the upper 4 bits as decade (BCD-coding). For example, the BCD byte 0110
1001 corresponds to the decimal value 69. Every of the 4 bytes does only use values
of 0 - 9. The function returns values between 0 and 99.
BCD-Word This function has the same functionality as BCD-Byte, but uses 16 bits instead. The
function returns values between 0 and 9999.
HighByte This function uses an 8 bit data range. It is only available for 16-bit exchange
telegrams and uses the upper 8 bits (the upper byte) of the exchange elements.
(Function Byte uses the lower 8 bits).
FloatSwap This function provides a 32-bit-float-value. At this, the upper 16 bits will be swapped
with the lower 16 bits. This function is necessary, since some control devices store
float values in this form.
S5Time (0,01s) This function works with data in the Siemens S5TIME format. The functions assumes
S5Time (0,1s) that the values have in AMS Asset Graphics the unit seconds. e.g. the time is
S5Time (1s) transferred in AMS Asset Graphics as 0.44 for 440 ms.
S5Time (10s At writing the specified timing resolution is used. Too high values are limited on the
maximum value automatically, e.g. at the timing resolution's 0.1 second until 9.99
seconds. The minimal value is 0 (seconds).
S7DateAndTime The this function works with data in the Siemens DATE_AND_TIME data type. The
value is transformed in the num-element in the data type DATE. This type can be
used directly in VBScript with date and time functions.
The DATE type is implemented using an 8-byte floating-point number. Days are
represented by whole number increments starting with 30 December 1899, midnight
as time zero. Hour values are expressed as the absolute value of the fractional part
of the number. S
Sample
5.00 represents 4 January 1900, midnight
5.25 represents 4 January 1900, 6 A.M.
S7DateAndTimeMilli This function works with the millisecond part in the Siemens data type
DATE_AND_TIME. The milliseconds are transferred as integer in the range 0 .. 999.
164
Process Assignment
Tab Serial interface (Driver profile)

This tab is driver specific. Standard settings, at which you need to change generally nothing, are predefined
here. Only the Interface No. must be specified.
Option Description
Standard settings When you activate this option, the standard settings of the serial interface are used for
this driver and cannot be changed. If you want to use other settings, you have to
deactivate the option.
Interface No. In this line you enter the number of the serial interface (COM port), where the partner
device is connected.
Baud rate Select the required baud rate for the communication from the possible baud rates of a
serial interface.
presetting: 9600
Parity Select the parity mode of the interface from possible settings (EVEN, ODD, NO).
presetting: EVEN
Number of Bits Select the number of bits of the interface from possible settings (7-bit, 8-bit).
presetting: 8 bit
Stop bits Select the number of stop bits for the interface from possible settings (1 -bit, 2 -bit).
presetting: 1Bit
Process assignment
The process assignment connects the data-elements used in the visualization with real process values.
Thus, it looks after updating the process data at the screen and, in the other direction, that data-elements,
which were changed by the user or by calculations, will be transferred to the partner device.
See also
Initialization
For every profile of the project, an initialization dialog will be shown at start. In the table on the left, all
process assignment tables, assigned to this profile, are listed. Depending on the project planning in the
editor, tables has to be read. When the reading of such a table has failed, this has to be repeated as often,
till the reading action was successful or the user has deactivated the table. Beside this, the user has the
possibility to deactivate all tables of this profile simultaneously. This could be useful, when the hardware,
which is part of this profile, is not connected and therefore a processing is not possible.
Note Another possibility is the Process Assignment Editor to deactivate all tables in common, that access on
the same profile. In this case, deactivate the option Use on tab Profile in Dialog Driver profile.
With respect to the deactivation, all other settings in the editor do not have influence on the handling of a
table at the initialization. Here, only the configuration point Receive at program start.... will be taken into
account.
Caution When a table was deactivated and when in its properties no reactivation element (tab Error
handling in dialog Properties Process assignment table) was scheduled, this table can only be reactivated
with a new start.
165
The success of the reading action is shown by different symbols.

Configuration Editor Action Reading successful Reading not successful
Reading required Reading Marking with a green hook repetition of the reading operation
Try reading Reading Marking with a green hook Marking with a green hook
No repetition of the reading operation
No reading required None Marking with a green hook Marking with a green hook
Symbols Description
Black arrow Current table
Green hook Action successful (see table above)
Red cross Table deactivated
When an error occurs when reading a table, the error will be shown to the right of the table listing. The last
error message will remain on the screen. It can be clearly assigned to a table, since the table is always be
listed together with the error message.
Sample process assignment

Task:
From the data block 13 of a S7-300 the first 10 bytes shall be read via Ethernet every second.
Start the Process Assignment Editor (button Process Assignment Editor in toolbar development
in the Project Manager).
Define a driver profile first. For this, select menu command File | Driver profiles | Open. Dialog
Open driver profiles will be shown.
Select the project in which you want to define the process allocation and confirm the dialog with
OK. Dialog Driver profiles will be opened. If you start first with the definition of the process
assignment, the dialog will be empty. If you have already defined driver profiles, they will be
shown here.
Press button New to create a new driver profile. Dialog Driver profile will be opened automatically
to configure the properties for the new profile.
The dialog contains tabs, which are adapted depending on the selected driver. The tabs Profile,
Logging, Error handling, Table presettings and VBScript are always available.
The selection of the driver is made on tab Profile in the option Driver. Click on the selection
arrow to the right and select S7_Ethernet.
The tabs will automatically be adapted to this driver. Driver-specific tabs are in this case PLC and
Connection.
In field Name you can define a name for the driver profile in order to address it at further process
assignments.
Set the option S7-addressing mode on the PLC tab.
Select tab Connection and enter the IP address of the CPs into field Address and select ISO-
on-TCP as Connection type.
Configure the PLC software in the S7.
Further settings can be made on the other tabs. However, this is not necessary to communicate
with the PLC.
166
Process Assignment
Confirm the dialog with OK. In dialog Driver profiles, the driver profile including the name, you
have just defined, is indicated valid with a green icon. The asterisk behind the driver name means
that changes have been made which are not yet saved. Here you can open further driver profiles,
which may also have access on the same driver.
Save the driver profile and close the dialog.
Now, open a new process-assignment table (button New in the toolbar). Dialog Table new will be
opened.
Select the project. A new table window will be opened in the Process Assignment Editor. Entries
can be made not before a valid driver profile has been selected.
Dialog Properties opens automatically to select the driver profile. The dialog has 5 tabs: General,
Addressing, Communication, Error handling and VBScript. Tab Addressing is specific to the
selected driver.
Select the driver profile with the selection list Profile on tab General.
Select tab Addressing. Here you can define, which data range of the PLC shall be addressed.
Activate the corresponding option, depending on whether you want to address relatively or
absolutely, in this example the addressing is set to absolute.
At absolute addressing, all address definitions (e.g. from address, to address) are referred to
absolute addresses in the PLC. At the relative addressing, all entries are calculated relatively to
the first address (e.g. from address).
Set the options:
Data type: DB
Data block: 13
from address: 0
to address: 9
Select tab Communication. Here you define the conditions, when data shall be sent or received.
In our example the receiving of the table is controlled with system-element _Sec01, so that the
data will be received every second. If the table was received successfully, the notification-element
ReadOK will be increased by 1 and can thus control further actions.
In group Program start the option Receive is set to Required. If the table cannot be received, the
program will try again and again receiving the table, thus the initialization will not go on.
167
Now assign data-elements to the data in the PLC. The Process assignment table includes 3 tabs,
in which data mapping and value scaling can be defined.
Enter the data-elements that shall be assigned with the PLC into column Element on tab Data
mapping.
You can also select elements from the reference list. Click with the right mouse button on the cell in
column Element to open dialog Element selection.
With the selection from the reference list the element type is entered automatically into column
Type.
Select the desired function in column Function, by clicking with the right mouse button on the cell
to open dialog Functions.
Select one of the offered functions.
Depending on the selected function the columns Address 1, Bit 1, Address 2 and Bit 2 are
shaded in gray or white. Enter the addresses or the bits, which shall exchange data with the PC,
into the white cells. In the example above, analog measuring values are received in form of
individual bytes.
The entry in column Type cannot be edited, with the selection of the function it will be set
automatically.
168
Process Assignment
Select tab Scaling. Here you can match the possibly different ranges of the PLC data on the
value ranges of the PC.
Enter the range of values of the PC data into the columns Internal from/to. Enter the range of
values of the PLC data into the columns External from/to. If you leave the default setting
(everywhere 0), the data will be transferred 1:1. In the example above, the data of the PLC are
stored in the 4. line in the range 0 to 100 and will be scaled to range 0 to 50 in the PC.
Save the settings, you have made in the table. Now configure additional tables or exit the Process
Assignment Editor and test the communication.
Driver
Introduction
Driver are programs, that realize the data exchange between the Process visualization and external devices
(e.g. PLC) or plug-in cards. The connection between Data-elements and physical addresses are defined in
the Process Assignment Editor.
The drivers will be started and terminated automatically by the process assignment (Runtime). In a Project it
is possible to use several drivers.
Siemens
S5-CP-Interface
S5-PG-Interface
S7 PPI (S7-200)
S7 MPI (S7-300/400)
S7 Ethernet
S7 Softnet
S7-PG-Interface (S7 300 and 400)

H1TCP
AEG
A120/A250
169
Mitsubishi
FX-Series
Phoenix
Interbus-S for Win NT
Miscellaneous
Apex
Modbus / ModbusTCP
Note The list of available drivers is being extended continuously. If you need a driver, that is not listed here,
please contact us.
See also
Driver specific settings
Logging the communication

In the process assignment, driver specific settings can be made on specific tabs for every driver. After the
selection of the driver, the tabs will be updated dynamically, suitable for the corresponding driver.
Example: Serial Interface
The possible settings depend on the selected driver. In the example, these are the settings of the serial
interface, the interface number and the baud rate.
170
Process Assignment
Example: CP-settings
This is a specific tab for the Siemens CP-driver. The character delay time for the protocol can be set here.
Logging the communication
In every driver, a logging function can be enabled. The protocol will be written in the ASCII-format into the
specified file in the project directory.
Logging means additional efforts for the driver, for this reason it should only be activated in case of problems
with the communication.
171
The configuration of the protocol is made on tab Logging:
Option Description
Log file
Name Enter here the name of the log file. The file is written in the current project directory.
Max size The maximum size of the file
Create on start If this option is set, the file is delete at every program start.
Type
Hardware The hardware logging writes the data, transmitted between driver and hardware, as
hexadecimal value into the protocol.
Status The status logging writes the status commands, exchanged between process assignment
and driver, into the protocol file.
Option
Only at errors This option defines, that the file logging is only done, if there was an error in the
processing of the last order.
See also
Structure of the protocol file
Structure of the protocol file

In the first line, date and time of the driver start are printed.
In the second line, the started driver inclusive version information are printed.
In the third line, the first status command with are printed.
After that, the hardware protocol in Hex-code follows with the definition of the difference time in milliseconds
since receiving of the command.
172
Process Assignment
After the end of the hardware protocol, the status answer of the driver is registered.
The next order will follow.
Example for a protocol

23.01.07 12:58:00:593: P R O T O C O L S T A R T
Driver=D:\Output\Debug\Driver\Driver32_S7_Ethernet.DLL, Version=5.3.9.0 RC1
23.01.07 12:58:00:640: ORDER: READ Type='DB' Data
block=13 Address=14000 Number=4
00000016: HARDWARE: Send Connect Read: 172.16.201.7
00000031: HARDWARE: Fetch socket connected: IP=172.16.201.7, remote
port=102, local port=0
00000047: HARDWARE: WRITE 03 00 00 22 1D E0 00 00 00 01 00 C0 01 0A C1 08
49 4E 56 49 53 55 52 44 C2 08 49 4E 56 49 53 55 52 44
00000047: HARDWARE: READ 03 00 00 22 1D D0 00 01 44 31 00 C0 01 0A C1 08
49 4E 56 49 53 55 52 44 C2 08 49 4E 56 49 53 55 52 44
00000047: HARDWARE: Request Connect Read: 172.16.201.7
00000078: HARDWARE: WRITE 03 00 00 17 02 F0 80 53 35 10 01 03 05 03 08 01
0D 36 B0 00 02 FF 02
00000110: HARDWARE: READ 03 00 00 1B 02 F0 80 53 35 10 01 03 06 0F 03 00
FF 07 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 CC
23.01.07 12:58:00:765: ORDER: OK Type='DB' Data
23.01.07 12:58:01:359: ORDER: READ Type='DB' Data

00000016: HARDWARE: WRITE 03 00 00 17 02 F0 80 53 35 10 01 03 05 03 08 01
0D 36 B0 00 02 FF 02
00000047: HARDWARE: READ 03 00 00 1B 02 F0 80 53 35 10 01 03 06 0F 03 00
FF 07 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 CC
23.01.07 12:58:01:421: ORDER: OK Type='DB' Data
APEX
APEX
With the Apex driver you can connect to PLCs, which are equipped with Apex components. In the PC you
must install the special PAD PC card.
The configuring of the bus is done with the Apex program NetPro.
Installation
The driver uses the function interface from Apex (PAD interface) to access via the PC card (PAD-PC) the
programmed VDM data cells.
The interface delivered with the Apex driver and is named PADITF32.DLL. This interface accesses to a
special device driver, which is delivered with the PC card.
Under Windows NT/XP you must install the device driver PADITF32.SYS.
Under Windows 98/Me you must install the device driver PADITF32.VXD.
Please read the installation instructions from the Apex manual.
173
Functioning
The driver accesses directly to so called PV numbers.
The driver checks, wether the numbers are correctly configured in NetPro as read cell (when reading) or as
write (when writing) cell.
The driver can handle with the following data types:

Byte, Word and Online Status.
Tab Apex in the driver profile

With PAD PC you select the card number of the PAD PC card.
Addressing in the process assignment

(Tab Addressing in dialog Properties of the process assignment table)
Data type Byte

PV numbers with data cells of type BYTE can be read or written.
Option Description
From PV number First PV number.
To PV number Last PV number.
Data type Word

PV numbers with data cells of type WORD can be read or written.
Option Description
From PV number First PV number.
To PV number Last PV number.
Data type online status

With this type the online status of the stations 1 to 255 can be read ( 0 = offline 1 = online).
Option Description
From station First station number.
To station Last station number.
AEG_PG
AEG PG Interface
Description
Driver for the connection of an AEG PLC by using the programming cable.
The following PLCs can be connected with the driver: A120 and A250.
174
Process Assignment

Data type Input-bit

Option Description
Slot Slot position of the input circuit, valid values: 1-18
From bit First input bit to be read, valid values: A120 = 1-16 A250 = 1-32
To bit Last input bit to be read, valid values: A120 = 1-16 A250 = 1-32
Data type output-bit

Option Description
From bit First output bit to be read, valid values: A120 = 1-16 A250 = 1-32
To bit Last output bit to be read, valid values: A120 = 1-16 A250 = 1-32
Data type input-byte

Option Description
From byte first input byte to be read, valid values: A120 = 1-16 A250 = 1-32
To byte. last input byte to be read, valid values: A120 = 1-16 A250 = 1-32
Data type output byte

Option Description
Slot Slot position, valid values: 1-18
From byte First output byte to be read, valid values: A120 = 1-16 A250 = 1-32
To byte. Last output byte to be read, valid values: A120 = 1-16 A250 = 1-32
Data type Input-word

Option Description
From word First input word to be read, valid values: A120 = 1-16 A250 = 1-32
To word Last input word to be read, valid results: A120 = 1-16 A250 = 1-32
Data type output word

Option Description
From word Output word to be read first, valid values: A120 = 1-16 A250 = 1-32
To word Output word to be read last, valid values: A120 = 1-16 A250 = 1-32
175
Data type input-double word

Option Description
From double word First input double word to be read, valid values: A120 = 1-16 A250 = 1-32
To double word Last input double word to be read, valid values: A120 = 1-16 A250 = 1-32
Data type output-double word

Option Description
From double word First output double word to be read, valid values: A120 = 1-16 A250 = 1-32
To double word Last output double word to be read, valid values: A120 = 1-16 A250 = 1-32
Data type flag bits

Option Description
From bit First flag bit to be read, valid values: A120 = 1-4000 A250 = 1-5000
To bit Last flag bit to be read, valid values: A120 = 1-4000 A250 = 1-5000
Data type flag byte:

Option Description
From byte First flag byte to be read, valid values: A120 = 1-3970 A250 = 1-5000
To byte Last flag bit to be read, valid values: A120 = 1-3970 A250 = 1-5000
Data type flag word

Option Description
From word First flag word to be read, valid values: A120 = 1-1985 A250 = 1-5000
To word Last flag word to be read, valid values: A120 = 1-1985 A250 = 1-5000
Data type flag-double word

Option Description
From double word First flag-double word to be read, valid values: A120 = 1-992 A250 = 1-2000
To double word Last flag-double word to be read, valid values: A120 = 1-992 A250 = 1-2000
Data transmission
(Tab Ser. interface in dialog Driver profile)
Option Description
Baud rate 9.600
Number of bits 8
Parity ODD
Stop bits 1
176
Process Assignment
H1TCP
Siemens H1TCP
By means of driver H1TCP, the Simatic control devices S5 and S7 can be connected to AMS Asset
Graphics. The hardware connection between PC and PLC will be realized via Ethernet. Data blocks and
flags can be read from the PLC or written to them.
Note When communicating with an S7 PLC, you should use the driver S7_Ethernet. With this driver, the
addressing is byte oriented according to the S7-Standard.
For our tests we have used the following structure:
Make the driver specific settings on the following tabs:

Dialog Driver profile (H1TCP)
Tab Addressing
See also
Required hardware
Special error messages
Installation of the PLC software
Tab Addressing (driver H1TCP)
With the driver, the following data types can be read and written:
Data type Description
DB Data block DB
DX Extended data block DX
Flag byte Flag byte
177
Data block DB/DX

Option Description
Data type Select here data type DB or DX.
Data Enter here the number of the data block (1 - 255), which shall be transferred with the process
block assignment table.
From Enter here the number of the first data word (0 – 2047) which shall be transferred with the
word process assignment table.
To word Enter here the number of the last data word (including) or the number (0 – 2047), which shall
(or be transferred with the process assignment table.
number)
Flag byte
Option Description
Data type Select here data type Flag byte.
From byte Enter here the number of the first flag byte (0 – 255) which shall be transferred with the
process assignment table.
To byte Enter here the number of the last flag byte (including) or the number (0 – 255), which shall be
(or transferred with the process assignment table.
number)
Required hardware (H1TCP)
Connection
By means of driver H1TCP, Simatic control devices (S5 and S7) can be connected to AMS Asset Graphics
via Ethernet. For the connection, the corresponding CPs (communication processors) are used in the PLCs.
The computer uses a network card with TCP/IP-protocol.
PLC Types:
SIMATIC S5 with CP 1430 TCP

SPS Configuration software
* S5-115U/H NCM COM 1430 TCP
S5-135U NCM COM 1430 TCP
S5-155U/H NCM COM 1430 TCP
178
Process Assignment
SIMATIC S7-300 with CP 343-1

* CPU 312 IFM Step7/NCM Industrial Ethernet as of V2.x
CPU 313 Step7/NCM Industrial Ethernet as of V2.x
CPU 314 IFM Step7/NCM Industrial Ethernet as of V2.x
CPU 315-2 DP Step7/NCM Industrial Ethernet as of V2.x
CPU 318-2 Step7/NCM Industrial Ethernet as of V2.x
SIMATIC S7-400 with CP 443-1

* CPU 413-1 Step7/NCM Industrial Ethernet as of V2.x
* Test environment, that was used when writing the driver.

Dialog driver profile (H1TCP)
Tab Profile
Select here the driver H1TCP.
Tab PLC
Depending on the used PLC type, select S5 or S7.
Possibly, the option S7-addressing mode must be set on S7-PLC, if the CP interprets takes the start
address as byte address.
179
Tab Connection
Option Description
Address Enter here the IP address of the PLC to be connected, e.g. 192.168.1.1.
Read
TSAP Enter here the identification text for the read connection to the PLC. It must correspond to
(ASC) the setting in the PLC.
TSAP Displays the length of the TSAP text.
length
Write
TSAP Enter here the identification text for the write connection to the PLC. It must correspond to
(ASC) the setting in the PLC.
TSAP Displays the length of the TSAP text.
length
See also Installation of the PLC-Software

Installation of the PLC-Software (H1TCP)
Simatic S5
Simatic S7
S5 PLC software (driver H1TCP)
The preparation of the PLC consists of two parts: for the first, the CP has to be prepared with the software
COM 1430 TCP and on the other hand, the PLC has to be programmed that way, that data can be
exchanged with the CP.
Programming the CP
1. Adjust the MAC address (CP basic initialization)
2. Set the own IP address and the subnet mask (TCP/IP initialization)
3. Program the CP
Fetch Transport Connection with the TSAP „INVISURD"
Receive Transport Connection with the TSAP „INVISUWR"
File „TCP1430.DAT" shows an example configuration and is contained in the scope of supply of the driver.
Steps in the PLC

1. In the startup OBs the synchronization module must be configured for the synchronization
between CPU and CP.
2. In OB1 the SEND-ALL- and RECEIVE-ALL-module must called cyclically.
At the configuration of function modules, you have to take into account possible errors, that are indicated in
the message word or as configuration error.
S7 PLC software S7 (driver H1TCP)
To configure the CP 443-1 TCP with the Step7-software for a S7-400 and the CP 343-1 TCP for a S7-300,
the software NCM S7 Industrial Ethernet must be installed.
Prerequisite is a Fetch-/Write-capable CP.
Setting up a communication of the PLC, consists of the following steps:
Overview
1. Configure the CP for the Ethernet.
2. Configure the connections of the CP in the CPU.
180
Process Assignment
Configure the CP for the network

1. Open dialog Object Properties of the CP.
2. Press on tab General in the group Interface the button Properties....
3. Configure the IP address of the CP and the Subnet mask.
Configure the connections for the CP in the CPU

For the data exchange with H1TCP-driver, 2 connections have to be prepared as follows:
1 The Fetch-Connection
Make a new connection with connection type ISO-on-TCP connection and the station definition
(unspecified).
In dialog Properties of the ISO-on-TCP connection, the following definitions have to be made
Tab Settings
General Enter e.g. AG-read as name.
The Active connection establishment has to be switched off.
Addresses Enter here the IP address of the AMS Asset Graphics PC.
As TSAP you have to enter twice INVISURD.
Options The operating mode has to be set on Fetch passive.
If available, set the option S7 addressing mode.
2 The Write-Connection
(unspecified).
Tab Settings
General Enter e.g. AG-Write as name.
The Active connection establishment has to be switched off.
Addresses Enter here the IP address of the AMS Asset Graphics PC.
As TSAP you have to enter twice INVISUWR.
Options The operating mode has to be set on Write passive.
If available, set the option S7 addressing mode.
181
Special error messages (H1TCP)

The driver provides the following special error messages:
Error message Description

Incorrect Q/ZTYP in handling When the job was triggered, the handling block had an invalid TYPE
block! identifier assigned to it.
Area does not exist in PLC! The specified DB does not exist in the PLC.
Area in PLC too small! The sum of start address and length exceeds the limits of the area.
Timeout on the PLC! Access in the PLC on not available or memory is defect.
Status word error! The assigned status word (ANZW) cannot be processed.
No valid ORG format! Invalid data destination/data source for a job.
No free data buffer! The CP signals "buffer overflow".
No free transport connections! The maximum transport connection capacity has exceeds.
Remote error! An error has occurred in the communication partner during a
READ/WRITE job.
Connection error! The connection for the job is not or not yet established or could not be
established.
Handshake error! Either the data field is too long or a system error has occurred.
Termination after RESET! Reset was executed.
Job does not exist! The specified job is not defined on the CP
IBSNT
Phoenix Interbus-S Windows NT (IBSNT)
Description
With driver IBSNT, can be exchanged word oriented with an Interbus-S circuit.
As indicated in the name, driver IBSNT can only be used with Windows NT. By means of it, IBS FC cards
can be connected directly and IBS Remote field controllers (RFC) via Ethernet. In the profile of the process
assignment, the hardware (RFC- or FC Card), the connection mode (Bus master or Co-processor) and the
address (station- or card number) can be selected.
Further information
Dialog Driver profile
Addressing
Settings FC Card
Settings RFC
Commissioning
Addressing of process assignment tables (IBSNT)
In the Process Assignment Editor you can select the data types Inputs, Outputs, Ext. Input words and
Ext. Output words.
Data type Input words:

Input words (DTA_MPM) will be read directly from the bus (only in the bus master operation). Possible are
values between 0 and 1023.
182
Process Assignment
Data type output words:

Output words (DTA_MPM) will be written directly to the bus (only in the bus master operation). Possible are
values between 0 and 1023.
Data type Ext. Input words:

Ext. input words (EXT_DTA_MPM) will be read from the Ext. DTA memory range. Possible are values
between 0 and 4095.
Data type Ext. Output words:

Ext. output words (EXT_DTA_MPM) will be written into the Ext. DTA memory range. Possible are values
between 0 and 4095.
See also
Tab Addressing in the process assignment
Dialog Driver profile (IBSNT)
Tab Profile
Select here driver IBSNT.
Tab Connection
On this page of the profile, the hardware (RFC Ethernet or FC Card), the address of the hardware (station or
card number) and the mode of connection (bus master or co processor) can be selected.
Option Description
Hardware A connection is made via Ethernet with a Remote field controller.
RFC Ethernet A connection is made via Ethernet with a Remote field controller.
The station number of the Remote Field controller is set here (0-99).
FC Card A connection is made by means of an Interbus-S PC-card.
The number of the Interbus-S card can be selected here (1-8).
Bus
controlling
Bus Master At the login, AMS Asset Graphics is started as bus master and takes over the complete
bus control. This means, that with starting and stopping of AMS Asset Graphics, the
Interbus-S will be started and stopped.
Co Processor AMS Asset Graphics will be logged-in at the co-processor of the RFC. No bus control is
carried out. Only data of the DTA memory range can be exchanged.
Check Offers a possibility to supervise the hardware configuration. The supervision of the
number of modules is only possible in the bus master mode.
Module number With this, the number of modules can be checked, this means, the driver will only
provide values, if the current number of modules agrees with the selected number
(otherwise error messages will be printed).
If the number of modules is 0, no check is done.
183
Notes at the bus master operation

The bus control of the driver can be selected in the profile (tab mode of connection in dialog
Properties driver profile) with selection bus master. This is only useful if there is no co-
processor program.
At the activated bus control and started visualization, the driver determines the currently
connected hardware configuration of every connected Interbus unit and switches them to the
RUN-mode.
When terminating the driver, an alarm-stop sequence will be sent to every connected Interbus,
thus all outputs will be set on 0 and all busses will stop operating.
Settings FC Card (IBSNT)
The card must be mounted and the Phoenix Contact driver for the card must have been installed.
Card name Configuration software
IBS ISA SC/I-T System controller without co-processor
IBS ISA FC/I-T Field controller without co processor
* IBS ISA FC/486DX/I-T Field controller with co processor
* Test environment, that was used when writing the driver.
DIP-Switch: Addressing
Default setting 120 hex
Meaning of the switch positions:
PC-IO-Address Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 5 Switch 6 Switch 7 Switch 8

200 hex 100 hex 80 hex 40 hex 20 hex 10 hex 8 hex
100 hex OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
108 hex OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
120 hex OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
3F8 hex ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
Remark of Phoenix:
Upon delivery, switch 1 is in the off-state. Please do not change this setting.
The PC-address is set on 120 Hex and can be adjusted individually on your demands by means of the
switches 2 to 8.
Copy file IBDDIWIN.INI of Phoenix into the Windows directory, and match it to your hardware environment.
Copy file IBDDIWNT.DLL into the Windows system32-directory.
184
Process Assignment
Settings RFC (IBSNT)

This connection requires an operational network board with TCP/IP protocol in the PC and a 10 M/bit
network connection for the RFC. In addition, the Phoenix Contact driver (PC WORX Version 2.01 or higher)
for the RFC must have been installed.
Card name Configuration software
* IBS ISA RFC/486DX/ETH-T Remote field controller with co-processor
* Test environment, that was used when writing the driver

Notes for commissioning (IBSNT)
Up-to-date Interbus S drivers of Phoenix (as of PC WORX 2.01!) must have been installed.
The driver works with the settings, that were made under PC WORX.
For this reason, before commissioning of the driver, a communication of PC WORX with the hardware (FC
card / RFC) must working.
Frequent errors
If the error message E0070002 or E0078532 appears, probably the Interbus S drivers of Phoenix
driver are not installed.
The settings in file IBDDIWIN.INI in the Windows-directory are not adapted or it was missed to
adapt them after changing the hardware.
The entries for several RFCs in the registration are not available. Presently, the settings have to be
made manually, since the program PC WORX of Phoenix does not apply them automatically.
When accessing inputs and outputs, the program does not show the current values. This might
happen, if no physical addressing runs on the Interbus. With logical addressing it is only possible to
address the extended inputs and outputs, since the normal input and output ranges are not
updated anymore by the IBS firmware.
Special error messages (IBSNT)
The driver provides the following special error messages.

This driver can only be used under Windows NT When the driver is operated under a Windows Version,
4.0 and higher! different to NT 4.0, this message appears.
File IBDDIWNT.DLL of Phoenix couldn't be found The Phoenix Contact driver is missing or not installed
in the Windows system directory! correctly.
Interbus-S error messages See manual Interbus-S
185
MIFX
Mitsubishi FX
With the driver MIFX you can transfer data with control devices of the FX family of Mitsubishi.
The hardware connection between the PC and the PLC units will be realized by the SC 07-converter of
Mitsubishi. Data registers, special data registers, inputs, outputs, flags, special flags, C contacts, counters
(16 and 32 bit), T contacts, timers and sequencer be read or written.
Make the driver specific settings:

Tab Addressing
See also
Required Hardware
Required hardware (MIFX)
SC 07-Converter
The connection between PC and FX control unit is done via a special cable with a converter from RS232 on
RS422 standard.
In the test, the following converter cable was used:
Mitsubishi SC 07-converter-cable
PLC types
Mitsubishi FX-Series
PLC
FX
FX0
FX0N
FX0S
Dialog Driver profile (MIFX)

Tab Profile
Select here driver MIFX.
Tab Serial interface

Option Description
Interface No. Here you enter the number of the serial interface, where the control device is connected.
Possible values are 1 to 128.
Baudrate 9600 (This setting cannot be changed).
Parity EVEN (This setting cannot be changed).
Number of select the desired number of bits.
bits
Stop bits 1 bit (this setting cannot be changed).
186
Process Assignment
Tab Addressing (Properties Process assignment table MIFX)

With the MIFX-driver the following data types can be read and written:
Data type Minimum Maximum

Data register 0 511
Special data register 0 255
Input 0 15
Output 0 15
Flag 0 127
Special flag 0 31
C Contact 0 31
T Contact 0 31
Counter (16 bit) 0 199
Counter (32 bit) 0 255
Timer 0 255
Sequencer 0 123
187
Modbus / ModbusTCP
Modbus (serial) / ModbusTCP
The modbus driver communicates with the modbus protocol (in the so called RTU mode) serial or over
ethernet (TCP/IP) with partner devices.
Possible data type are Coils, Discrete Input, Holding Register and Input Register.
For the communication you need either a standard serial port or a network connection to the partner device.

Tab Addressing
Dialog Driver profile (Modbus)

Tab Profile
Select as driver Modbus.
Tab Modbus
Option Description
Data model starts If this option is set, data addressing begins with 1 (otherwise start address 0 is used).
with address 1
Tab Serial Interface

Option Description
Interface In this line you enter the number of the serial interface (COM port), where the partner
No. device is connected. Possible value are 1 to 128.
Baud rate Configure the same settings as in the partner device.
Parity The number of bits must be 8.
Number of
bits
Stop bits
Dialog Driver profile (ModbusTCP)

Tab Profile
Select as driver ModbusTCP.
Tab Modbus
Option Description
Address Enter here the IP address of the partner device.
Port Enter here the port number (502 is the default Modbus port).
Unit Enter here the unit number (possible value 0 .. 255).
Data model starts If this option is set, data addressing begins with 1 (otherwise start address 0 is used).
with address 1
188
Process Assignment
Registerkarte Adressierung (Properties Process assignment table MODBUS)

With the Modbus driver you can read and write the following data types.
Coils
Coils are addressed bit by bit and are read with the Modbus function 1 and written with function 15.
Option Description
Data type Select here the data type Coils.
from address Enter here the first address (0 – 65535), which shall be transferred with the process
assignment table.
to address (or Enter here the last address (0 – 65535) or the count, which shall be transferred with
count) the process assignment table.
Discrete Inputs
Discrete Inputs are addressed bit by bit and can only be read (Modbus function 2).
Option Description
Data type Select here the data type Discrete Inputs.
from address Enter here the first address (0 – 65535), which shall be transferred with the process
assignment table.
to address (or Enter here the last address (0 – 65535) or the count, which shall be transferred with
count) the process assignment table.
Holding Register
Holding Register are addressed word by word and are read with the Modbus function 3 and written with
function 16.
Option Description
Data type Select here the data type Holding Register.
From register Enter here the first register (0 – 65535), which shall be transferred with the process
assignment table.
To register (or Enter here the last register (0 – 65535) or the count, which shall be transferred with the
count) process assignment table.
Input Register
Input Register are addressed word by word and can only be read (Modbus function 4).
Option Description
Data type Select here the data type Input Register.
from register Enter here the first register (0 – 65535), which shall be transferred with the process
assignment table.
to register (or Enter here the last register (0 – 65535) or the count, which shall be transferred with the
count) process assignment table.
189
S7PG
Siemens S7 PG-Interface (S7-300 and S7-400)
With the driver S7 PG, Simatic S7-300 and S7-400 PLCs can be connected to AMS Asset Graphics. The
hardware connection between the PC and the PLCs of the MPI-network is realized by the PC-adapter of
Siemens. Data words will be read from or written to the data blocks. By means of the driver it is possible to
address up to 126 stations (S7-300 or S7-400).

Tab Addressing
See also
Required hardware
Note To exchange Real-values with an S7-PLC, the special function FloatSwap must be defined in the
process assignment tables.
Required hardware (S7PG)
PC-Adapter
The connection between PC and MPI-network consists of a special Siemens PC-adapter-cable with level
converter RS232 to MPI-standard.
In the test, the following PC-adapter was used:
PC adapter SVPJ7301022
Order number: 6ES7 972-0CA21-0XA0
Dialog Driver profile (S7PG)
Tab Profile
Select driver S7PG here.

Option Description
Interface no. In this line you enter the number of the serial interface, where the PLC is connected.
Baudrate Select the required baudrate for the communication from the list of possible baud rates.
Possible values are 38400 or 19200.
Parity ODD (This setting cannot be changed)

Number of 8 Bit (This setting cannot be changed)
bits
Stop bits 2 Bit (This setting cannot be changed)
190
Process Assignment
Tab MPI settings

Option Description
Highest MPI the highest MPI address must be unique in the complete MPI-network. It may have
Address four values:
15, 31, 63 or 126.
Own MPI The own MPI address of the PC may be between 0 and 126. It must not be used by
Address any other device in the network.
Tab Addressing (Properties Process assignment table S7PG)

By means of the S7 PG driver data blocks can be read and written.
Option Description
Station Set here the station number of the PLC (0 - 126).
CPU slot number Set here the number of the CPU slot number (0 - 18). In general, the default value of 0
do not have to be changed. At some CPU-types, this definition must explicitly be made
(symptom: communication does not work). In this case, you have to enter the correct
number of the CPU slot number.
Data type Here you can only select data type Data block.
Data block Enter here the number of the data block (1 - 8192), which shall be transferred with the
From word Enter here the number of the first data word (0 - 32767), which shall be transferred with
the process assignment table.
To word Enter here the number of the last data word (including) or the number (0 - 32767),
(or number) which shall be transferred with the process assignment table.
Special error messages (S7PG)
The driver can display the following special error messages:
Initialization of the station has The initialization of the station number in the PC-adapter has failed
failed! (incorrect station number)
Connection telegram has failed! The connection with the MPI station has failed (no station with this MPI
number in the network)
Life-telegram has failed! The life telegram of a station was not received.
Data telegram not terminated Incorrect data transmission to a station (e.g. because of a missing data
correctly! block).
191
S7_Connection
Siemens S7_Connection
With the driver S7_Connection Simatic S7 PLCs can be connected to AMS Asset Graphics. The hardware
connection between PC and PLC units will be realized via Ethernet. As protocol S7-connection is used.
Data blocks and flags can be read from the PLC or written to it. The addressing is made according to the
S7-standard as byte address.
See also
Driver specific settings (S7_Connection)
Make the driver specific settings in the dialog Driver profile on the tabs Profile and Connection.
See also
Process assignment tables at driver S7_Connection
Dialog Driver profile (S7_Connection)
Tab Profile
Select here the driver S7_Connection.
Tab Connection
Option Description
S7-300 / S7- Enter here the PLC type.
400
S7-200
S7-300 / S7-400
Connection Choose here the connection type for the communication.
type You can select: PC (default), OP or PG.
Note The communication only can be established if a connection resource of the chosen
type is available in the PLC.
Rack Enter here the rack number.
Slot Enter here the slot number.
S7-200
Local TSAP To communicate with a S7-200 TSAPs have to be entered as 4-digit hexadecimal number
Remote TSAP according the configuration in the S7-200.
The value 4D57 (hex) is predefined and can be used without configuration in the S7-200.
192
Process Assignment
Process assignment tables (S7_Connection)
With the driver, the following data types DB (Data block) and flags can be read and written:
On tab Addressing in Table properties, the following settings can be made.

Option Description
DB (Data block)
Data type Select here data type DB.
From address Enter here the address of the first data byte (0 – 65535), which shall be transferred with
To address Enter here the address of the last data byte (0 –65535) or number of bytes, which shall
(or Number) be transferred with the process assignment table.
Flag
Data type Select here data type Flag.
From byte Enter here the address of the first flag byte (0 – –65535), which shall be transferred
with the process assignment table.
To byte Enter here the address of the last flag byte (0 – –65535) or number of bytes, which
(or Number) shall be transferred with the process assignment table.
Note In a S7-200 the variable memory area can be accessed as data type DB and the data block number 1.
The following functions can be used in a process assignment table.

Data type Function
Bit Bit, 2Bit, BitNot
Char and Byte (8 Bits) Char, Byte, BCD-Byte
Integer (16 Bits) Int, UInt
Integer (32 Bits) Int(32)HiLo
Floating point (32 Bits) Float
Texts Text
Note ‟Range‟-functions must not be used.

Special error messages (S7_Connection)

Memory area too small. The sum of start address and length exceeds the limits of the area.
Data block does not exist. The specified data block does not exist in the PLC.
193
S7_PPI
Siemens S7 PPI
Description
The driver S7_PPI substitutes the driver S7_200_PG.
By means of driver S7_PPI, Simatic S7 200 PLCs can be connected to AMS Asset Graphics. The hardware
connection between the PC and the PLC units of the MPI-network will be realized by the PC-PPI adapter of
Siemens. It is possible to read from or write to variable memories, flags, special memory, counters, inputs
and outputs. It is possible to address up to 31 stations.

Tab Addressing
See also
Required hardware
Dialog Driver profile (S7_PPI)
Tab Profile
Select here the driver S7_PPI.
Tab Configuration
Select here the station number of the PC (default value 1).

Option Description
Interface no. In this line you enter the number of the serial interface, where the control device is
connected. Possible values are 1 to 128.
Baud rate Select the required baud rate for the communication from the list of possible baud rates.
Parity EVEN (this setting cannot be changed)

Number of 8 bit (this setting cannot be changed)
bits
Stop bits 1 bit (this setting cannot be changed)
Tab Addressing (driver S7_PPI)
The driver S7_PPI can read from and write to variable memory, flags, special memory, counters, inputs and
outputs.
Option Description
Data type Select here required data type.
Station Set here the station number of the PLC (2 - 126).
number
From byte Enter here the number of the first byte, which shall be transferred with the process
assignment table.
To byte Enter here the number of the last byte (including) or the number of bytes to be
(or number) transferred.
194
Process Assignment
Required hardware (S7_PPI)

PC-PPI-adapter
The connection between PC and S7 200 is made with a special Siemens PC-PPI-adapter-cable.
In the test, the following PC-PPI-adapter was used:
Order number: 6ES7 901-3BF00-0XA0: Release 01
S7_Ethernet
Siemens S7_Ethernet
With the driver S7_Ethernet Simatic S7 PLCs can be connected to AMS Asset Graphics. The hardware
connection between PC and PLC units will be realized via Ethernet. As protocol, an ISO-on-TCP connection
or a TCP-connection can be selected. Data blocks and flags can be read from the PLC or written to it. The
addressing is made according to the S7-standard as byte address.
See also
Required hardware
Dialog Driver profile (S7_Ethernet)
Tab Profile
Select here the driver S7_Ethernet.
Tab PLC
Option Description
PLC type Presently PLC type S7_BYTE is defined and cannot be changed.
S7 addressing Option S7 addressing mode must be set, if the CP interprets the start address as
mode byte-address.
If this option is not offered in the S7-software, it must not be selected here.
Tab Connection
Option Description
Connection type The connection protocol ISO-on-TCP-connection or TCP-connection is selected
here.
ISO-on-TCP- The TSAPs for the ISO-on-TCP-connection are entered here..

Connection
See also
Fetch TSAP (ASC) Enter here the identification text for the read connection to the PLC. It must
correspond to the setting in the PLC.
Write TSAP (ASC) Enter here the identification text for the write connection to the PLC. It must
correspond to the setting in the PLC.
195
Option Description
TCP-connection The necessary port numbers for a TCP-connection are entered here.
See also
Fetch Ports Enter here the port numbers for the read connection to the PLC. Local stands for
the PC, Partner for the PLC.
Explanation of Partner* see below.
Write Ports Analogous to the read connection, the port numbers for the write connection to the
PLC are entered here.
Explanation of Partner* (Type of connection TCP-Connection):

(The entry is only relevant in the redundant network mode).
In the redundant mode there is the problem that the PLC cannot communicate simultaneously with
both masters, since the PLC can use every port number only once at any one time. For this reason, at
the secondary master the port number will be used, that is registered under Partner*.
Consequences for the project planning:

The primary master operates with port number Partner,
the secondary master operates with port number Partner*,
in the PLC you must configure an individual connection for each of the masters.
Process assignment tables (S7_Ethernet)
With the driver, the following data types DB (Data block) and flags can be read and written:

Option Description
DB (Data block)
Data type Select here data type DB.
process assignment table. Due to restrictions in the protocol, data blocks with higher
numbers cannot be processed.
From address Enter here the address of the first data byte (0 – 65535), which shall be transferred with
Note If option S7-addressing mode is not set, the start address of a telegram has to be
an even number, because an odd start address cannot be processed in the data
telegram!
To address Enter here the address of the last data byte (0 –65535) or number of bytes, which shall
(or Number) be transferred with the process assignment table.
Note The connection protocols can only handle an even number of transferred bytes.
At an odd number, an additional byte will be transferred by the driver and thus also
overwritten in the PLC!
Flag
Data type Select here data type Flag.
From byte Enter here the address of the first flag byte (0 – –65535), which shall be transferred
with the process assignment table.
To byte Enter here the address of the last flag byte (0 – –65535) or number of bytes, which
(or Number) shall be transferred with the process assignment table.
196
Process Assignment
The following functions can be used in a process assignment table.

Data type Function
Texts Text

Driver specific settings (S7_Ethernet)
Make the driver specific settings in the dialog Driver profile on the tabs Profile, PLC and Connection.
See also
Process assignment tables at driver S7_Ethernet
Required hardware (S7_Ethernet)
Connection
With the driver S7_Ethernet Simatic S7 programmable logic controller can be connected to AMS Asset
Graphics. For the communication the PLC must have a communication processor module (CP). The
computer uses the standard ethernet network interface.
It is required that the CP can handle a ISO-on-TCP-connection or -TCP-connection.
Samples are:
CP 343-1, CP 343 Lean.
Installation of the PLC software (S7_Ethernet)

Prerequisite is a Fetch-/Write-capable CP.
To configure the CP443-1 TCP with the Step7-software for a S7-400 and the CP343-1 TCP for a S7-300,
the software NCM S7 Industrial Ethernet must be installed.
Setting up a communication of the PLC, consists of the following steps:
Overview
Configure the CP for the Ethernet.
Configure the connections of the CP in the CPU.
Configure the CP for the network.

Open dialog Object Properties of the CP.
Press on tab General in the group Interface the button Properties....
Configure the IP address of the CP and the Subnet mask.
Configure ISO-on-TCP connections for the CP in the CPU.

For the data exchange with S7_Ethernet-driver, 2 connections have to be prepared as follows.
1 The Fetch-connection
(unspecified).
197
Tab Settings
General Information Enter e.g. AG-read as name.
The option Active connection establishment has to be switched off.
Addresses Enter here asRremote IP the IP address of the AMS Asset Graphics PC.
As TSAP you have to enter twice INVISURD.
Options The Mode has to be set on Fetch passive.
If available, set the S7-addressing mode.
(unspecified).
Tab Settings
General Information Enter e.g. AG-write as name.
Addresses Enter here as Remote IP the IP address of the AMS Asset Graphics PC.
As TSAP you have to enter twice INVISUWR.
Options The operating mode has to be set on Write passive.
Configure the TCP-connections for the CP in the CPU

For the data exchange with S7_Ethernet-driver, 2 connections have to be prepared as follows
1 The Fetch-connection
Make a new connection with connection type TCP-connection and the station definition (unspecified).
In dialog Properties of the TCP-connection, the following definitions have to be made
Tab Settings
General Information Enter e.g. AG-read as name.
Addresses Enter the IP address of the AMS Asset Graphics PC in field Remote.
In addition the Local and Remote port number has to be entered.
Options The Mode has to be set on Fetch passive.
Make a new connection with connection type TCP connection and the station definition (unspecified).
In dialog Properties of the TCP connection, the following definitions have to be made
Tab Settings
General Information Enter e.g. AG-Write as name.
Addresses Enter the IP address of the AMS Asset Graphics PC in field Remote.
In addition the Local and Remote port number has to be entered.
Options The Mode has to be set on Write passive.
198
Process Assignment
Special error messages (S7_Ethernet)

Wrong type specified in block When the job was triggered, the handling block had an invalid TYPE
(Q/ZTYP)! identifier assigned to it.
Memory area does not exist on the The specified memory area does not exist in the PLC.
PLC!
Memory area too small! The sum of start address and length exceeds the limits of the area.
Timeout on PLC! Access in the PLC on not available or memory is defect.
Status word error! The assigned status word (ANZW) cannot be processed.
No valid ORG format! Invalid data destination/data source for a job.
No free data buffer! The CP signals "buffer overflow".
No free transport connections! The maximum transport connection capacity has exceeds.
Remote error! An error has occurred in the communication partner during a
READ/WRITE job.
Connection error! The connection for the job is not or not yet established or could not
be established.
Handshake error! Either the data field is too long or a system error has occurred.
Termination after RESET! Reset was executed.
Job does not exist! The specified job is not defined on the CP
The start address must be an even When the ‟S7 addressing mode‟ is not set, only even start addresses
address! can be used for DBs.
S7_Softnet
Siemens S7_Softnet
With the driver S7-Softnet you can exchange data Simatic PLCs.
The communication is done via the so called SAPI software interface (Siemens software package), which
realizes the communication.
Precondition is a correctly installed Simatic PC station.
Further information you can get from Siemens, e.g. with the following articles:
Communication with CP 5611 via MPI, Entry ID:16513313
Communication with CP 5611 via ProfiBus, Entry ID:16518259
Communication via Industrial Ethernet, Entry ID:17532609
SIMATIC NET Commissioning PC Stations, Entry ID:13542666
The following data types can be read or written:

Data blocks, inputs, outputs, flags, peripheral outputs, peripheral inputs, counter and timer.
The addressing is made as byte address, timer and counter are transferred as word.

Error messages, generated by Softnet, are insert in plain text in the protocol file.
199
Dialog Driver profile (S7_Softnet)
Tab Profile
Select driver S7_Softnet here.
The Timeout should be set to a value bigger than 5000 ms, because the initializing of a connection can
spend a few seconds.
Tab Addressing
Option Description
Access point Via the name of an access point applications can access communications
components. The access points are configured with the Simatic program
Configuration Console.
Application name Here you must enter the name of a user application, which was configured in
the HW Config for the PC station.
Connection identification Here you must enter the name of the connaction, which shall be used.
Connections are configured in NetProt.
Process assignment tables driver S7_Softnet
With the driver you can read and write the following data types:
Data type Description
DB Data block
A Output
E Input
M Flag
PA Peripheral output
PE Peripheral input
T Timer
C Counter

Option Description
Data type Select here the data type.
From Enter here the number of the first address (0 - 65535), which shall be transferred with the
address process assignment table.
To address Enter here the number of the last address (including) or the number (0 -65535), which shall
(or number) be transferred with the process assignment table.
Timer and counter are transferred in the BCD format (16 Bit).
For processing timers you can use the function S5Time, at counters you should use BCD-Word.
200
Process Assignment
The following functions can be used in a process assignment table:

Data type Function
Integer (16 Bits) Int, Uint
Texts Text
Note ‟Range‟-function must not be used.
S7_MPI
Siemens S7_MPI (S7 300 and S7 400)
With the driver S7_MPI AMS Asset Graphics can exchange data with Simatic S7 300 and S7 400 PLCs. The
hardware connection between the PC and the PLCs of the MPI-network can be realized by the PC-adapter
of Siemens. Data will be read from or written to the data blocks. With this driver it is possible to address up
to 126 stations (S7 300 or S7 400).

See also
Required hardware
Note To exchange floating point values with an S7-PLC, the special function FloatSwap must be defined in
the process assignment tables.
Dialog Driver profile (S7_MPI)
Tab Profile
Select driver S7_MPI here.

Option Description
Interface no. In this line you enter the number of the serial interface, where the control device is
connected. Possible values are 1 to 128.
Baud rate Select the required baud rate for the communication from the list of possible baud rates.
Parity ODD (this setting should not be changed)
Number of 8 Bit (this setting should not be changed)
bits
Stop bits 2 Bit (this setting should not be changed)
201
Tab MPI settings

Option Description
Highest The highest MPI address must be uniformly in the complete MPI-network. It may have
Address four values:
15, 31, 63 or 126.
Address The own MPI address of the PC may be between 0 and 126. It must not be used by any
other device in the network.
Required hardware (S7_MPI)
PC-Adapter
The connection between PC and MPI-network consists of a special Siemens PC-adapter-cable with level
converter from RS232 on MPI-standard.
In the test, the following hardware was used:
- CPU 312 IFM
- PC adapter V5.1 (Order number: 6ES7 972-0CA23-0XA0)
Process assignment tables driver S7_MPI

Option Description
MPI address Set here the MPI address of the PLC (0 - 126).
CPU slot number Set here the number of the CPU slot (0 - 18). In general, the default value of 0 do not
have to be changed. At some CPU-types, this definition must explicitly be made
(symptom: communication does not work). In this case, you have to enter the correct
number of the CPU slot.
Data type Here you can only select data type Data block.
From address Enter here the number of the first address (0 - 32767), which shall be transferred with
To address Enter here the number of the last address (including) or number (0 - 32767), which
(or number) shall be transferred with the process assignment table.
The following functions can be used in a process assignment table:

Data type Function
Texts Text
202
Process Assignment
Special error messages (S7_MPI)

The driver can display the following special error messages:
Initialization of the station The initialization of the station number in the PC-adapter has failed (incorrect
failed! station number).
The connecting telegram The connection with the MPI-Station has failed (no station with this MPI-
failed! number in the network).
The life telegram failed! The life telegram of a station was not received.
Error in data exchange! Incorrect data transmission to a station (e.g. because of a missing data
block).
SICP
Siemens S5 CP-Interface
Description
The data are exchanged via a communication processor CP. At the CP the procedure 3964R and the
interpreter RK512 has to be set.
Addressing in the process assignment (Tab Addressing in dialog Properties of the process
assignment table)
It is possible to address both data types DB and DX.
Data type DB
Option Description
CPU number Enter here the number of the CPU. Possible values are 0 to 4. At this, the following
applies:
0 = all CPUs are possible
1 - 4 = CPU-number
Data type Select here data type DB = Data block.
Data block Enter here the number of the data block. Possible value are between 0 and 255
DB
From word Number of the first data word
To word Number of the last data word (including)
Data type DX
Option Description
CPU number Enter here the number of the CPU. Possible values are 0 to 4. At this, the following
applies:
0 = all CPUs are possible
1 - 4 = CPU-number
Data type Select here data type DX = extended data block.
Data block Enter here the number of the extended data block. Possible value are between 0 and 255
DX
203
Data transmission (tab Ser. interface in dialog Driver profile)

Option Description
Baud rate 9.600 (19.200 Baud)
Word length 8
Parity Even
Stop 1
Further Information
Cable connection
Special settings
Siemens S5 CP-Interface (Installation of the PLC software)
The CP has to be programmed as follows:
1. Program the CP with by using the procedure 3964R and interpreter RK512.
2. Set the priority on low.
3. Select the desired baud rate.
The following steps are necessary in the PLC:

4. Configure the synchronization module in the start-up OBs for the synchronization between CPU
and CP.
5. In the OB1, the SEND-ALL and RECEIVE modules must be called up cyclically.
At the configuration of function modules, you have to take into account possible errors, that are indicated in
the message word or as configuration error.
Siemens S5 CP-Interface (Cable connection)
Siemens S5 CP-Interface (Special settings)

Option Standard Description
Character lag 300 Time between two characters (in ms) that may pass, without indicating an
time error.
204
Process Assignment
SIPG
Siemens S5 PG-Interface
Description
The data will be exchanged via the programming interface of the PLC. Data words will be read from or
written to the data blocks.
The followings PLCs can be used:
PLC Driver
90U SIPG
95U SIPG
100U SIPG
115U CPU 941 - CPU 944 SIPG

Data type DB
Option Description
Data type Select here data type DB = Data block.
Data block DB Enter here the number of the data block. Possible value are between 0 and 255
Data type DX
Option Description
Data type Select here data type DX = extended data block.
Data block DX Enter here the number of the extended data block. Possible value are between 0 and 255
Data transmission (Tab Ser. interface in dialog Driver profile)

Option Description
Baud rate 9.600
Word 8
Parity Even
Stop 1
Level 20 mA
205
OPC
Editor
Introduction
OPC (OLE for Process Control) is based upon the Windows-based technology of OLE (Object Linking and
Embedding), COM (Component Object Model) and DCOM (Distributed Component Object Model).
A client-server architecture classifies the software components in OPC Server and OPC Client. An OPC
Server provides data via the OPC interface, for example it collects data via a field bus system and offers
them to other clients. The OPC Runtime (client) has access on measuring points via so called OPC items.
The OPC items have logical names (such as "Filling level" or "Weight") and can be combined to a group.
The access for reading and writing will proceed on this group level.
At the data point assignment you can look for available servers, also for the AMS Asset Graphics OPC
Server. You can start the servers, if they are not yet active and select variables via a browser. At hierarchical
OPC Servers you can change between the individual branches. The indication of the data points can be
specialized by using filters.. If a data point is included into the assignment list, the complete Server-ItemID
will be accepted as OPC tag name and the data point description as data-element.
See also
User interface
OPC table window
Define an OPC Client
User interface
The OPC Editor is designed as MDI-application, this means, several documents (process assignment
tables) can be processed at the same time.
Non-standard commands in menu Edit are
Connect
Select this command to connect the current OPC table with the selected OPC Server. This command is only
at disposal, if a server is selected.
Disconnect
Select this command to disconnect the current OPC table from the selected OPC Server. This command is
only at disposal, when the table is connected with a server.
Append item
Select this command to open dialog Append item.
See also
General Operation
207
Dialog Properties (OPC)

Dialog Properties contains tabs to define the different parameters of an OPC table.
Tab OPC
On tab OPC you determine the local server or the remote computer.
Option Description
Server
Name Select one OPC Server from the list of servers.
Note This place, also the AMS Asset Graphics OPC Server can be attached.
Server in Activate this option, when you start an OPC Server not on the local computer.
network In the field Computer name you enter here the name of the computer or its IP address.
Computer Here you enter the name of the computer or its IP address.
name
Group
Name Enter here a name for the group of OPC items. The access for reading and writing will take
place on this group level.
Update [ms] Here you enter the shortest update time in milliseconds, the server can inform the client
about changed data. The value 0 means: as fast as possible.
Tab Connection
On tab Connection the settings for activation and check of the server connection are entered.
Option Description
Active at
Element Enter here the name of a num-element, which determines whether the OPC table is active or
not. If the value of the data-element is 0, the OPC table is inactive, otherwise the OPC table is
being processed.
If no element name is entered here, the OPC-table is always active.
Station With this option you define on which network station the OPC table shall be processed (0 for the
master, 1 – 31 for the desired station).
This field is only available at a network project. For this, you must have activated the option
Network project in the dialog Runtime Configuration in the Project Manager.
OPC server status
Active Enter here the name of a num-element, which shows the status of the connection to the OPC
Server. The element will be set on 1, when there is a connection. If the connection is inactive or
broken the element will be set on 0.
Note Only the connection between OPC Server and Client will be checked. The connection
between OPC Server and the communication hardware will not be checked.
Update This field defines the update time in seconds to test the connection to the OPC Server.
Tab Logging
208
OPC
Tab VBScript
In this VBScript you enter a Sub Routine named OnDataChanged. This Routine is called on every change
message from the OPC Server.
The first parameter of this Sub Routine is the name of the num-element, which is entered in the OPC table.
The second parameter is an OPC tag. This OPC tag has the following 5 properties:
Property Description
Name Name of OPC tag.
Quality Quality of the OPC tag. This value is a 16bit number, where the two upper bits of the
lower byte represent the quality. If both bits are 1, the quality is good. To mask the
quality from this 16 bit value use an AND gating with the value 192 (hex C0).
Value Value of the OPC tag.
TimeStampLocal Date and time of the OPC tag as locale PC time.
TimeStampUTC Date and time of the OPC tag as UTC time.
Example:
Sub OnDataChanged(Element, OpcTag)
Set NameEle = CreateObject("PMS.TxtEle")
NameEle.SetName(Element & "_Name")
NameEle.Value = OpcTag.Name
Set QualityEle = CreateObject("PMS.NumEle")

QualityEle.SetName(Element & "_Quality")
QualityEle.Value = OpcTag.Quality
Set ValEle = CreateObject("PMS.NumEle")

ValEle.SetName(Element & "_Val")
ValEle.Value = OpcTag.Value
Set TimeStampEle = CreateObject("PMS.TxtEle")

TimeStampEle.SetName(Element & "_TimeStamp")
TimeStampEle.Value = OpcTag.TimeStampLocal
End Sub
OPC table window

In this table OPC tags are assigned to AMS Asset Graphics data-elements.
209
The table has the following columns:
Column Description
Element Enter here the data-element, which shall be transmitted to the OPC Server.
OPC tag name Enter here the OPC tag name, that shall correspond to the data-element.
Internal Enter here the value range for the data in the PC.
(From / To)
External Enter here the value range for the data in the OPC Server.
(From / To) If the entered values are not in the valid range, the text will be printed in blue.
Type The data type (NUM or TXT) of the data-element is shown here.
When you enter an element via dialog Append item the element name and OPC tag name will automatically
be entered. As OPC tag name, the complete Server ItemID will be accepted and the data point description
as data-element.
If the same element name is used in multiple lines, the concerned lines will be highlighted in red.
Note Furthermore, you have to take the rules for element names in AMS Asset Graphics PMS into account.
See also
Define an OPC Client
Dialog Append item

This dialog is called with Command Edit | Append item.
In this dialog you can select an OPC project, mark one single or all indicated OPC elements and add
(command Add) the highlighted or all (command All) displayed elements to the OPC table.
Option Description
Project list In this list all available OPC projects are shown in a tree structure. All branches of the tree,
which have got a '+' -sign, can be expanded with a click on the '+' -sign. The single
elements of the active branch will be shown in the Element list to the right of it.
Element list In this list, all elements of the active branch of the Project list are shown.
Select here the desired element and press Add to accept the element into the OPC table.
View There are different filters at disposal, by means of which the choice of the indicated
options elements can be reduced.
Hierarchical At hierarchical OPC Servers you can change between the individual levels.
Only readable Activate this option to show only the read-variables in the Element list.
Sort Set this option to display the OPC items in alphabetical order.
Filter Enter here a text, which shall contained in the element name. With the wild-card * you can
leave the beginning and / or the end of the text undefined.
Element name by script
Active Activate this option, if the AMS Asset Graphics element name shall be processed via the
VBScript function BuildElementName
Edit... Here you can edit the function BuildElementName (see description below). This function is
only used to construct AMS Asset Graphics element names in the editor.
Parameter Here you can enter texts or numbers, which will be passed as parameter to the VBScript
1, function.
Parameter 2
210
OPC
The function BuildElementName has the following parameters:

Para1, Para2 The values of this parameters are fetched from the edit fields in the dialog Append item.
OpcTagName This is the OPC tag name as it is entered in the OPC table.
The function returns an element name.
Example:
'Parameter 1' is used as prefix for element names.
Function BuildElementName(Para1, Para2, OpcTagName)
BuildElementName = Para1 & OpcTagName
End Function
OPC Runtime (client)

At the start the OPC Runtime reads the OPC definitions defined with the OPC Editor, if necessary the
corresponding server will be started and the bidirectional data exchange is activated.
Between the OPC Runtime and the AMS Asset Graphics database, a bidirectional connection will be
established. An active data exchange is only done, when a data point in the server or in the PMS database
changes.
The OPC Runtime program has not a special user interface like the Eventjournal Runtime. Status messages
are displayed in the program window, though.
Define AMS Asset Graphics as OPC client

Start the OPC Editor (command OPC Editor in toolbar Development in the Project Manager).
Press button New in the toolbar of the OPC Editor to open dialog New table.
Select your current project and confirm the dialog with OK. A new table will be displayed.
Press button Properties of the table specific toolbar to open dialog Properties and select tab
OPC.
Select the wanted OPC Server which is installed on your system (selection list in group Server,
option Name).
Click button Connect to get the connection to the OPC server. Command Append item is now
enabled.
Select button Append item to open dialog Append item.
Select one or all data points from the displayed tree structure, and add them to the table. The
complete item name will be used as OPC-Tag-name, the item name (last part) will be used
as Element.
Close the dialog with Close.
You can change the automatically generated element names in the table. Or you can click with
the right mouse button in column Element to select elements from the reference list.
Save the OPC table and close the OPC Editor.
211
OPC-Server
Introduction
The AMS Asset Graphics OPC Server has access on all data-elements of the AMS Asset Graphics
database. Thus it permits devices from other companies, to access on AMS Asset Graphics data simply via
a standard-Interface. The OPC-version 2.03 will be supported. In addition it permits the junction of several
projects to a comprehensive project. Thereby, single projects may also be stored on different computers in
the network, since AMS Asset Graphics OPC Servers can be remote controlled.
All data-elements can be read and written. The num-elements will be at disposal as data type „VT_R8" (8
bytes, this corresponds to a double-value) and the text-elements as „VT_BSTR". The server supports
browsing and filtering of items, for fast results at searching elements. The data are represented, as they are
available in the reference lists. This means, that elements which appear in different reference lists, will be
listed several times.
At any one time, exactly one project can be connected with the server. The project will be selected in dialog
Options. In case of a change, the data exchange will take place.
Registration
Before the use, OPC Servers must be registered once. The AMS Asset Graphics OPC Server will be
registered by parameter /RegServer and unregistered by parameter /UnregServer.
for example
„C:\AMS Asset Graphics\InvOPCServer32.exe" /RegServer
When you install the AMS Asset Graphics OPC Server with the help of the setup, all necessary OPC-
components are installed, and the OPC Server registered automatically.
User Interface
The AMS Asset Graphics OPC Server offers the user the normal AMS Asset Graphics runtime-user
interface. The server can be terminated over menu command file Exit. Via menu command Options | Global
Settings... the Start project for the server can be selected.
Program start
The OPC Server is usually started automatically from the OPC Client, which wants to access on the server.
If the server has already been started, it will be used. However, the server can also be started manually. At
the program start, a connection to the current runtime project or to the selected start project is made.
Program end
Usually, the OPC Server is terminated automatically from the last client, which is connected to the
server. The server can also be terminated manually over menu item File exit. If there are still some clients
connected to the server, a warning will be output.
Configure Start project

Select in the OPC Server the command Options | Global settings... to configure the project for the
program start.
Option Descriptions
Start project
Current runtime Set this option to configure the current runtime project as start project.
project
Fixed project Set this option to configure a fixed project as start project. When clicking the browse-
selection button to open the dialog Project selection.
212
OPC
Remote-operation
Prerequisite for the remote-operation is the network connection of the computer via TCP/IP.
IMPORTANT NOTE
You have to make sure, that the user accounts (user-profiles) on both computers have access on the
same working group or the same domain.
The behavior of the OPC Server in the local mode is the same as in the remote operation (client and server
on one computer).
To use the OPC Server in the remote operation, some settings in the Windows system configuration have to
be made. The program part, where the settings must be carried out, is called DCOM (Distributed
Component Object Model).
The following description is related to the operating system Windows XP.
To configure DCOM, start program DCOMCNFG from directory WINNT\SYSTEM32 of the environment of
your operating system. Start this program on both computers, to configure the OPC-remote operation.
There are different settings necessary on server and client-computer.

DCOM-Settings on Server and Client
DCOM-Settings on the Server only
DCOM-Settings on the Client only
213
DCOM Settings on Server and Client

Define the settings in the same way on the server- as well as on the client-computer.
1. Select tab Standard properties.
2. Activate option Activate DCOM (Distributed COM) on this computer.
3. Select tab Standard security

4. Define in the single categories the rights for the computer, with which you want to communicate.
214
OPC
DCOM Settings only on the client

1. Select tab Applications.
2. Mark the entry inVISU PMS OPC Server.
1. Press button Properties...

2. Select tab Location.
3. Activate option Run application on the following computer:.
215
4. Select the desired domain via the Browse button.
216
OPC
DCOM settings only on the Server

1. Select tab Applications.
2. Mark the entry inVISU PMS OPC Server.
1. Press button Properties...

2. Select tab Location.
3. Activate option Run application on this computer.
217
218
Events
Editor
Eventjournal Editor
The Eventjournal provides information for the user of a plant, when a measuring value has violated a
predefined limit value, when a malfunction was indicated, a valve opened or closed etc. The individual
events will be entered at runtime into a list: the Eventjournal.
The Eventjournal Editor offers the user of the development version a user interface to configure the events
for a project. An event is the message on the condition of a data-element under specific, previously defined
conditions. This message will be entered into the Eventjournal and can be watched there.
Events can be written simultaneously on up to three printers and into one file.
Depending on the state of the event and the optionally required acknowledgement, events can have up to 4
different states, which are marked in the Eventjournal Runtime with (freely selectable) colors of the entries.
Properties of the events are defined in up to 100 groups. Every event is assigned to a group.
At the definition of the alarm texts it is possible, to design them depending on the language. The possible
languages are defined in dialog Used languages in the Language Editor. When generating an alarm text
during runtime, the texts will be shown depending on the current language (see system-element
_Language).
The Eventjournal Editor offers the support for the definition of the events. Thereby, event definitions of
several projects can be opened at the same time.. An exchange of definitions can be made via the clipboard
and drag & drop.
Moreover, the Eventjournal offers the possibility, to generate databases with historical alarms. This is a
group property (see: tab General in dialog Group). The data are stored in a SQL database.
Runtime function
If an event occurs, it will be entered into the Eventjournal as text. After the event has gone again, or if it was
acknowledged, the entry in the journal will be actualized (by removing from the journal or adding the time
and changing the text color).
The Eventjournal is activated by changing the system-element _SetTopEJ (e.g. via a function key). While
watching this list, the entries will be actualized.
An event, which is no longer active and has already been acknowledged or an event, which is no longer
active and need not be acknowledged, will be removed from the Eventjournal.
Thus, the Eventjournal only contains active and not acknowledged events and therefore presents the current
state of event messages.
The Eventjournal comprises a maximum of 5000 events. When reaching 90% of this limit, a warning will be
output, at 100% a message is output and no more events will be detected. Therefore you have to take care,
that events, which are not removed automatically from the list, will be acknowledged regularly.
When activating the Eventjournal, the system-elements _AlarmCome and _AlrmGone are set on 0.
See also
Define an event (Step-by-step instructions)
219
User Interface
The Eventjournal Editor is designed as MDI application, i.e. the event configuration of several projects can
be edited at the same time.
Non-standard commands in menu Edit are:

Groups
Printer
Printer assignment
See also
General operation
Groups
Various properties of alarms are defined in up to 100 groups. Every alarm belongs to one group
You can select the colors for the outputs of the event texts. In addition you can activate the event history,
stored in a SQL database. You can select one or more printers for the output.
You define, whether events of a group has to be acknowledged or not and you can define an automatic
change of pictures, when an event occurs. In this way you can define definite priorities for various events
with the help of different groups.
An active alarm indicates that the reason for the message is still available, at an inactive alarm, the reason is
not available anymore and the message is not yet acknowledged.
With the menu command Edit | Groups, the dialog Group selection will be opened. Select a group and edit
then the properties in the dialog group.
Dialog Group
On three tabs, the properties of an alarm group are defined.
Tab General
On the tab General, the following settings are made for a group:
Option Description
Group
Name Enter here a name for the alarm group.
Automatic picture Activate the option, if the visualization shall change automatically to an alarm picture
change when an alarm occurs. The alarm picture is configured in the event definition
window on tab Extras in column Alarm picture.
Group elements With group elements its is possible, to summarize information of all messages which
are part of a group.
Alarm detected The element, entered here, will be set on 1, if an alarm of this group is active.
Otherwise it will be set on 0.
220
Events
Option Description
Alarm text The text-element, defined here, contains the alarm text of the last occurred alarm of
this group. If there is no alarm of this group, the contents of this element is empty.
Acknowledgment
Necessary Activate the option, if an event of this group must be acknowledged.
Password Enter here a password level, or click with the right mouse button to open dialog
Select access right and to select the password level.
Log level Enter here a log level between 0 and 99. When log level 0 is entered, no record is
made in the activity log.
History
Old mode (Compatibility option, use for new projects option Active)
Activate this option, if an alarm of this group shall be written in a historical database (
Access format).
At every status change (Coming, Going, Acknowledged an new entry is made in the
database (one database per day, see Historical alarms).
Active Set this option to active the storing of events in the SQL database for events.
Include alarm texts With this switch you decide, whether the alarm texts shall also be written into the
historical table of the SQL database. At static alarm texts (no dynamic text via the
parse function) this option is not necessary. The required memory space in the
database is smaller without alarm text.
Delete data after... Define here, when the historical data shall be deleted. After each change of the day,
the system checks whether data have to be deleted. At 0, the data will never be
deleted.
Export data before Mark the field to export the data into a CSV file before deleting them.
deleting
Destination Define here the name of a destination file to export the data. You can also use
variables in the text, example:
D:\export\$_Year\$_Month\daten.csv.
Attention If you use special characters, consider that not all characters can be used
for as file name.
If the file does already exist, the data will be appended to the end of the files.
Tab Color settings

On the tab Color settings, the colors for specific events can be selected:
Option Description
For active alarms
Acknowledgment expected Select here the color, to display the alarm text of this group for the
condition: Alarm active and not acknowledged (requirement for
acknowledgement must be set).
Acknowledgment done Select here the color, to display the alarm text of this group for the
condition: Alarm active and acknowledged (requirement for
Acknowledgment not required Select here the color, to display the alarm text of this group for the
condition: Alarm active. No requirement for acknowledgement.
For inactive alarms
Acknowledgment expected Select here the color, to display the alarm text of this group for the
condition: Alarm inactive and not acknowledged (requirement for
221
Tab Printer settings

On the tab Printer settings you define if the events of the are printed.
Option Description
Print on status change
Coming Activate this option, if the alarm shall be printed, as soon as it has occurred.
Going Activate this option, if the alarm shall be printed, as soon as the alarm condition has
disappeared.
Acknowledged Activate this option, if the alarm shall be printed, as soon as it was acknowledged.
Print to
Printer 1, 2, 3 Set this option to activate the output of an alarm on the named printer 1 (2, 3). The printer
are configured in dialog Printer assignment.
File When you activate this option, an alarm of the group will be written into the file, entered in
the edit field below (incl. disk drive, path and name e.g.
"C:\AMS_ASSET_GRAPHICS_Alarm.txt"). New alarms will always be appended at the
end of this file. This file can then be printed at a later time.
You can also use variables in the text, example:
@_ProjectPath\ALARM.TXT.
Attention You have to take into account that the file size increases with every new entry!
Tab Alarm forwarding

Alarm forwarding is realized with the product PageControl. In this tab you configure e.g. prefix texts for
messages specific to the group.
Option Description
Text prefix
Alarm came in, Here you can configure prefix texts for messages. Prefix texts can be different for coming
Alarm went out and going alarms.
Acknowledgment
Delete If this option is on and an event of the group was acknowledged, the message will also
messages be deleted in PageControl.
Dialog Group selection

This dialog appears in two situations:
1. When you edit a group.
With a double-click on a group name or by selecting a group and pressing button Edit, dialog
Group: n will be opened.
2. When you select a group.
If you click on button OK, the selected group will entered into the selected cells.
222
Events
Printer
With the menu command Edit | Printer the dialog Printer properties will be opened.
The dialog has three tabs to configure the printer. The title bar of the dialog shows the physical printer, for
which the settings are just made.
Tab General
On the tab General the following parameters can be set:
Option Description
Print title This entry contains the headline for the printout. It may contain also data-elements.
Margins
Left Here you can define the width of the left margin. The definition is made in characters. possible
values: 0 - 10.
Top Here you can define how many lines at the beginning of the text shall be left free. The
definition is made in lines. possible values: 0 - 10.
Bottom Here you can define how many lines at the end of the page shall be left free. The definition is
made in lines. possible values: 0 - 10.
Printing mode
Direct You can select between two printing modes. The Direct mode sends the events to be printed
directly to the printer. This print mode is suitable especially for dot-matrix printers.
Note If two defined logical printers use the same physical printer and if one of them was
defined for direct printing, at the time scheduling for the print jobs (advanced printer properties,
see operating system) the option Start printing after after last page is spooled must be
activated, since otherwise the function Direct printing will be blocked.
Windows The second print mode will print the pages after terminating the Eventjournal Runtime or by
request from the runtime program. Depending on the printer setting in the operating system
(see Direct print) every complete page will be printed.
Test page With this command you can print a test page by using the current settings (mode, margins,
color, etc.).
Note If you have changed the parameters before, press Apply to use the changed settings.
Tab Color selection

On the tab Color selection, the colors for different events states can be configured.
Option Description
Activate color printing If this option is set, the Eventjournal runtime prints in colors or in gray scales. If this
option is off, the other settings of this tab will be ignored.
Windows printing
Title Defines the print color of the title.
Coming Defines the color for a coming alarm.
Going Defines the color for a going alarm.
Acknowledged Defines the color for an acknowledged alarm.
Direct printing
In the table under this point, you enter escape sequences in the form "1b 72 A3".
The colors in the left column correspond to all possible colors, that can be used in
the group definitions for the status of an event. To print in colors, you have now to
enter sequences for the colors, that you want to use (please watch your printer
manual), which arrange your printer to print the following characters in specific
colors. Before an event is output on the printer, the defined sequence is sent to the
printer.
223
Tab direct printing

On the tab Direct printing special settings for the direct printing mode are made.
Option Description
General
Line character Here you configure, which character shall be used for printing a line.
Page layout When activating this option, a page formatting is made for direct printing. At the activated
page layout, every new page will start with the title and headings for the columns.
Lines per page Here you define the number of lines per page. Valid values are 32 - 1000 (fanfold paper)
Initialization-sequences
Start printing This escape sequence will be sent to the printer before printing is started. This permits to
switch the printer to a definite print mode.
Stop printing This escape sequence will be sent to the printer after printing was finished. This permits
to reset the printer to a definite print mode.
Printer assignment
You open the dialog Printer assignment with the menu command Edit Assign Printer.
Here you can assign up to three physical printers to logical names. In addition, the orientation can be
selected (Portrait or Landscape).
If option Standard is set, the program uses the current standard printer of Windows, defined at the program
start. Moreover, a name can be defined for the printer, which will then be used also for the group and printer
settings.
Event definition window

General
All events of a project are configured in the event definition window. In the event table you can configure up
to 20000 different events.
An event has occurred, when a num-element has violated the alarm limits. The valid range is defined with
minimum and maximum in the table. It is possible to define multiple events for a num-element.
In order to avoid permanent messages in the limit range between valid and invalid, e.g. at analog values, a
hysteresis can be defined. An event condition is not cancelled before the hysteresis range is left again.
The alarm text, the group, optional alarm element and optional alarm pictures are further definitions for every
event. The acknowledging element offers the possibility, to acknowledge an alarm via a num-element. An
acknowledging information element supplies information, how many alarms are not acknowledged. If the
notification and alarm system PageControl is installed, you can specify receiver for alarm forwarding.
For every event an additional text can be defined.
The tabs
The event definition-window has of a toolbar and six different tabs.
On individual tabs various settings will be made, which will be explained in the following part. Every tab
contains the element name in the first column. The width of the first column is identical on all tabs. When
you want to change the width of a column with the mouse in the head line.
224
Events
Tab Parameter
Column Description
Element Here you must enter the element to be monitored.
Bit At the definition of an alarm, a bit number between 0 and 31 can be selected. If a bit was
declared, it will only be regarded for the calculation of a range violation, this means for the
minimum-/ maximum evaluation: only the values 0 and 1 can appear.
Minimum Enter here a limit. If the value is below this limit, an event will be triggered. Constants or
num-elements may be entered here. If no lower limit is wanted, you do not have to enter a
value here.
Maximum Enter here a limit. If the value is above this limit, an event will be triggered. Constants or
num-elements may be entered here. If no upper limit is wanted, you do not have to enter a
value here.
Alarm range
A range for an active alarm can be defined by a maximum less than the minimum.
Example:
An alarm shall be active, when an element has the value 38.
Define and 38.1 for the minimum and 37.9 for the maximum.
Alarm group Select with the right mouse button a group from dialog group selection or enter the group
number directly in the cell.
Note You can also select and change several cells at the same time.
Def-ID Here, the unique identification number for the alarm definition is shown in this column. This
ID is used in the historical alarms to identify an alarm.
Tab Alarm Text

Column Description
Language The alarm text is entered here for the language, which name is written at the top the column.
You can use variables in the text.
The maximum length of the text is 100 characters. If this number is exceeded, the color of the
text changes to dark red. This is a hint, that the text could be too long. If no system-element is
contained, the text is too long. If system-elements are contained, an exact definition is not
possible.
Note The program shows columns for the languages, which were defined in the Language
Editor as used languages (see dialog Used languages in the Language Editor). If you have not
yet defined languages, the language, that was defined as current language when opening the
Eventjournal Editor, will be shown as column.
225
Tab Extras
Column Description
Alarm element A num-element will be entered here, which has the value 1 as long as the alarm is
active. If the alarm is inactive, the Alarm element has value 0.
This alarm element can be shown in every process picture.
If an alarm element was set on 1 by several events, it will be reset on 0, not before all
events are inactive again. Thus, the alarm element is an OR operation of the active
events.
Alarm picture It is possible to define pictures, which will be displayed, when an alarm occurs. The
name of the picture is entered here.
If in the group the option Automatic picture change is activated, at the appearance of
the event in the visualization, the picture with the contained name will be shown. In
the Eventjournal the change of pictures can also be performed with button alarm
picture.
See also
Automatic change of pictures in alarm situations (step-by-step instructions)
Alarm forwarding If PageControl is installed, you can select a separate receiver (defined in
Coming, PageControl) for coming and going alarms. Receivers have to be defined in
Going PageControl in advance.
The input of an alarm receiver will be checked in the following. With the right mouse
you open dialog receiver selection, where one receiver can be selected.
Note With the connection of PageControl to the Eventjournal, there are extended
possibilities for the notification of persons in case of alarm situations.
In this process, the receiver will be informed by a voice message (call on mobile
telephone or telephone and output of the alarm as spoken text), SMS-message, E-
mail, fax or Scall, etc.
At the start of the Eventjournal the runtime, all registered receivers will be compared
with the receivers, defined in PageControl. If a receiver does not exist, this will be
indicated.
Ackn. element The acknowledging element offers the possibility, to acknowledge an alarm via a
num-element. With this, an alarm can also be acknowledged from a PLC.
If an alarm occurs, it will be acknowledged, as soon as the acknowledging element
changes its value.
If the acknowledgement is password protected, it will not be requested in this case.
If the group property Acknowledgment necessary isn't set, the entry will be shown in
gray. In this case it has no function.
Ackn. information The acknowledgement information element provides information, how many
alarms are not yet acknowledged.
Enter here a num-element, which is initialized with 0 at the start of the journal. When
an alarm occurs, that has to be acknowledged, the value of this element is increased
by 1. By acknowledging the alarm, the value of the element will be decreased by 1. If
an element is used by several alarms, the value of this element provides information
about how many alarms have still to be acknowledged.
If the group property Acknowledgment necessary isn't set, the entry will be shown in
gray. In this case it has no function.
226
Events
Tab Hysteresis
Column Description
Value hysteresis To avoid generating events permanently in the transition range between permitted and
inadmissible ranges (at fluctuating values), a value hysteresis can be defined here. At
this, the following functionality applies: If the limit value is reached exactly, within the
range of ± switching hysteresis, it is considered to be outside of it any longer. If this
behavior is not desired, leave the hysteresis on the default value 0.0.
Detecting time An alarm will be only created, if the alarm condition is permanent given for the entered
time. The time is configured in seconds.
If no detecting time is wanted, you do not have to enter a value here.
Resolving time An alarm will be only resolved, if the alarm condition is not permanent given for the
entered time. The time is configured in seconds.
If no resolving time is wanted, you do not have to enter a value here.
Tab Additional text

Column Description
Additional text The Eventjournal offers the possibility, to display an additional explaining text for every
event. This text will be displayed in the Eventjournal in a window below the event table.
Here you enter the number of the additional text that shall be displayed, when the event is
selected in the event table.
The texts itself are defined in a text file with name ALZUSx.TXT, which must be stored in
the project directory. At this, the x corresponds to the current language, i.e. that is
ALZUS0.TXT for German or ALZUS1.TXT for English.
The assignment of an additional text to an event is done numbers. Every additional text in
the text file will be introduced by a special line in the format ##xx, whereby xx describes
the number of the additional text. At the additional text-number 0, no additional text is
shown.
Example for an additional text file:
##1
This is the additional text, which will be shown as additional
text with number 1.
All lines up to the next special line are part of additional text
1.
##3
This is the text, which will be shown as additional text with
number 3.
Edit the additional texts with an editor, e.g. NOTEPAD.EXE. Create the file with the
additional text in plain ASCII-format.
Tab All
Tab All presents a summary of the other tabs.
With tab All you can paste all events completely into the clipboard or to copy it by drag & drop into other
programs or to load from other program.
In addition, all information are available at a glance.
See also
Define an event
Define events for other languages
227
Dialog Select receiver

This dialog appears, when you click the right mouse button in column Alarm receiver of the Event definition
window.
Here you assign a receiver or a receiver group from PageControl to an alarm definition. Groups and
receivers will be distinguished by various symbols.
When you press OK the selected cells will be assigned with a receiver or group.
SQL database for events

The Eventjournal Runtime uses the program TEJ_DM32.exe to enter data in the database. This process will
be started invisibly in the background, when the history is active in at least one group of the definition. If this
process is already started, before the Eventjournal runtime is started, no further start will be carried out by
the Eventjournal.
Configuration of the database

As database, the local SQL server instance of AMS Asset Graphics will be used as a standard. Here, the
data are entered into the database Events. See Structure of the database.
However, it can also be used another SQL server. For this purpose, the section EventDatabase has to be
configured in the Project.ini.
[EventDatabase]
Server=.\inVISU_PMS
Catalog=Events
User=InvisuSystem
;Password=
SubProjectName=Werk Berlin
SubProjectNumber=0
The entries Server, Catalog, User and Password are used for the database connection. Via the entries
SubProjectName and SubProjectNumber you can store additional information to the event data in the
database. So it is possible to store the event data of several AMS Asset Graphics projects centrally in one
database.
Furthermore, it is possible to store the data simultaneously in several databases by a multiple start of the
TEJ_DM32.exe. For this purpose, another section with the same key name has to be configured in
Project.ini. The name of the section has to be passed as parameter at the start of TEJ_DM32.exe.
Example:
Tej_dm32.exe DB2
Tej_dm32.exe DB3
[DB2]
Server=172.16.31.22\inVISU_PMS
...
[DB3]
...
228
Events
Structure of the database

The database Events has the following tables:
Table Description
Def_Table Here, the data of the definition are stored. For every definition line of the Eventjournal
Editor one dataset is generated.
Def_Groups The group properties will be stored here.
ExtraText Every additional text of the additional text file will be stored here as dataset.
SubProjects In this table, all sub projects are entered with name and sub project number.
DataManagers Every instance of an Event Data Manager (Tej_DM32.exe), connected with this
database, will be shown in the table with a dataset.
CurrentState This table contains an image of the active and unacknowledged events of the
Eventjournal.
InfoCurrentState This table contains an change counter which changes, when new data are entered in
table CurrentState or when data have changed.
EventHistory Every change of the state (coming, going and acknowledged) will be entered into this
table with a time stamp.
AcknowledgeJobs Datasets in this table are used to acknowledge events.
Tab VBScript
In this VBScript window you can implement different functions such as OnStart (initialization), OnRun
(cyclic) and OnEnd (end of Eventjournal Runtime). A detailed description of these three functions is given in
the section VBScript.
Apart from the standard functions the following functions and objects can be used:
Object Application to read information and to generate new events.
Function OnEventStateChanged is implemented here. This function is called with the status
change of an event.
Handle mouse events from the Eventjournal.
Object Application
The Application object has following properties and methods:
Property/Method Description
SetAlarmOn(DefID, DateTime) This function creates a new event from the alarm definition with the
definition ID DefID. The second parameter is the time in the UTC time
format, which is shown under column Coming in the Eventjournal runtime.
The function returns 0 for success. On errors an error code is returned.
SetAlarmOff(DefID, DateTime) This function resets an event, which was set by the function SetAlarmOn.
The two parameters are the same as with the SetAlarmOn function. The
Eventjournal Runtime displays the DateTime in the column Going.
AcknowledgeAlarm(DefID, With this function all events of the definition ID DefID are acknowledged.
DateTime, Comment) The 2. parameter DateTime is used as acknowledging time. The
parameter Comment is used in the activity log as comment to the
acknowledge message.
Definitions Definitions is a collection of all definition lines. Every definition line can be
read by an item of the array. An access for writing is not possible.
Events Events is a collection all events from the event journal. An access for
writing is not possible.
229
Examples:
In the following example an event is produced for the definition ID 1173.
Application.SetAlarmOn 1173, PmsLocalDateTime2Utc("2005/07/15 08:34:23")
Rücksetzen aller Alarme der Gruppe 16.

Set Events = Application.Events
For i = 1 To Events.Count
If Events.Item(i).Definition.GroupNumber = 16 Then
Application.SetAlarmOff Events.Item(i).Definition.DefID,
PmsLocalDateTime2Utc(Now)
End If
Next
Set Events = Nothing
OnEventStateChanged
This function is called each time when a event is coming, when it is acknowledged and when it's going.
The OnEventStateChanged functions has the following parameters:
NewState This value indicates the new state of the event.
1, event comes
2, event goes
3, event is acknowledged
EventObj Is a variable of the type EventObject. This variable represents information to the event. Some
properties are writable.
Example:
The coming and going time of the events from group 6 is changed. Instead of the current time the time of a
data-element is used.
Sub OnEventStateChanged(NewState, EventObj)
If EventObj.Definition.GroupNumber = 6 Then
Set EventTime = CreateObject("PMS.TxtEle")
EventTime.SetName(EventObj.Definition.ElementName & "_Time")
'set time stamp
If NewState = 1 Then EventObj.Coming = EventTime.Value
If NewState = 2 Then EventObj.Going = EventTime.Value
End If
End Sub
Mouse events
Mouse messages from the Eventjournal Runtime can be handled in this VBScript
To do this the appropriate VBScript function must be defined:
Message Function name

WM_LBUTTONDOWN OnLButtonDown
WM_LBUTTONUP OnLButtonUp
WM_LBUTTONDBLCLK OnLButtonDblClk
WM_RBUTTONDOWN OnRButtonDown
WM_RBUTTONUP OnRButtonUp
WM_RBUTTONDBLCLK OnRButtonDblClk
230
Events
Each of the functions has the parameters:

WndType This value indicates, in which windows mouse-click took place.
1, Event window
2, Additional text window
EventObj Is a variable of the type EventObject. This variable represents information to the event, on that
mouse-click took place. The variable is write protected.
Example:
Open a PDF document when the right mouse button is clicked in the event window.
Set WinExec = CreateObject("PMS.TxtEle")
WinExec.SetName("_WinExec")
Set ProjectPath = CreateObject("PMS.TxtEle")
ProjectPath.SetName("_ProjectPath")
Sub OnRButtonDown(WndType, EventObj)

If WndType = 1 Then
WinExec.Value = ProjectPath.Value & "\PDF_Docs\Doc_" &
EventObj.Definition.ExtraTextNumber & ".pdf"
End If
End Sub
Type Events
This type is a collection of EventObject's.
Option Description
Count Count is a field, where the number of the EventObject variables is stored. This field is read
only.
Item(Index) With this function the individual EventObject variables can be accessed. Every value is of
type EventObject . The access on one of the EventObject variables is made via the index
(example: Item (5)). The index must have any value between 0 and Count.
Type EventObject
This type contains the data of an event.
Option Description
AlarmText Is the text, which is displayed in the event window and recorded in the database for events.
This text can be also changed, if you have write access to the EventObject (in function
OnEventStateChanged).
Coming This variable contains the time in the UTC time format at that the event arose. This value can
be changed, if you have write access.
Going Time (UTC time format) the event disappeared. This value can be changed, if you have write
access
Acknowledged Acknowledgement time in the UTC time format.
Definition Is a variable of the type EventDefinition.
231
Type Definitions
This type is a collection of EventDefinition's.
Option Description
Count Count is a field, where the number of the EventDefinition variables is stored. This field is
read only.
Item(Index) With this function the individual EventDefintion variables can be accessed. Every value is of
type EventDefintion. The access on one of the EventDefintion variables is made via the
index (example: Item (5)). The index must have any value between 0 and Count.
DefID(ID) With this function, the individual EventDefinition variables can be accessed as well.
However, the access on one of the EventDefintion variables is made via the definition ID.
The definition ID must be valid, otherwise a zero will be returned.
Type EventDefinition
This type contains the definition data of an event.
Option Description
DefID Definition ID
ExtraTextNumber Additional text number
ElementName Name of the num-element
GroupName Name of the group
GroupNumber Number of the group
Picture Alarm picture to the event
Minimum Lower limit
Maximum Upper limit
BitNumber Bit number
Error codes
Code Description
-1 Eventjournal Runtime isn't initialized yet.
-2 Event journal is full.
-3 The definition ID couldn't be found.
-4 Event is still active.
-5 Event is still inactive.
-6 The parameter DateTime is invalid.
232
Events
PageControl
The product PageControl is an extension for the Eventjournal Runtime to alarm via SMS, E-Mail or voice.
Brief instruction
Install PageControl with the Setup program.
Copy the configuration file PageCtrl.cfg in the AMS Asset Graphics project directory. Otherwise
PageControl will work only in the demo mode. You find the file in the PageControl installation
directory, e.g. C:\Program files\informel\PageControl.
Open in the Project Manager the corresponding project and start PageControl (toolbar Add Ins).
Create at least one receiver (or group) in PageControl.
Now you can select for every alarm a receiver (single person or group) in the event definition
window, which shall be notified.
The Eventjournal Runtime automatically starts and stops PageControl, if at least one alarm receiver
is configured.
Runtime
Overview
The Eventjournal offers the user a user interface, which shows him the events , that appear during runtime.
By means of the Eventjournal, these events can be administrated, printed and acknowledged.
The events will be entered into the Event window in the order of their appearance.
The Eventjournal can include up to a maximum of 5000 events. When reaching 90% of this limit, a warning
will be given, at 100% a message displays that no more new events can be processed. Therefore you have
to take care, that events, which are not removed automatically from the list, will be acknowledged regularly.
On the user interface of the Eventjournal, there are four different possibilities for the different actions, to
achieve the same result. This redundancy results from the fact, that the commands are at disposal over
function keys, with menu commands, with the toolbars Alarm or Alarm buttons.
The Eventjournal can generate databases with historical alarms. This option can be enabled as option
Active in group History on the tab General.
Commands Eventjournal
The Eventjournal can be operated in different ways: with the menu Alarm, with shortcuts or with commands
in the toolbars Alarm and Alarm buttons.
The following commands can be selected:
Visualization (F2)
With this command, the visualization can be moved to the foreground.
Alarm picture (F3)

With this command the alarm picture for the currently selected alarm can be loaded in the
visualization.
233
Options (F4) and Filter (F5)

See Options and Filter
Set all marks (F6)

This command sets a mark for all events in the journal. Actions, such as acknowledging, are
obtained on marked events, if no event is marked, on the currently selected event. With this
command it is possible, to deal with a great number of events at the same time.
Note An event can also be marked in another way. By pressing the left mouse button over the
numbering labels, the marking state of an event will change. When the left mouse button is clicked
on the topmost field of the numbering column, the markings for all events will be set or deleted,
depending on the previous condition (when the marks were available, they will be deleted, if they
were not available, they will be set). By holding the left mouse button pressed, it is possible to mark
a section. If the CTRL key is pressed simultaneously, it is possible to mark alarm messages at
different locations.
Delete all marks (F7)

All markings will be deleted.
Acknowledge (F8)
At this action, all highlighted events will be acknowledged. When no event is highlighted, the action
is obtained on the actually selected event. When the acknowledged events are not valid anymore,
they will be deleted from the Eventjournal.
Print (F9)
At this action, all highlighted events will be printed on the standard printer.
The following data will printed:
1 Coming time
2 Acknowledging ting
3 Going time
4 Alarm text
If no event is highlighted, actual printouts (defined by group definitions) will be terminated. With this,
a printout of the events, that have occurred up to this time, can be forced. At the appearance of a
new alarm of the group, the respective print job will be started anew.
Note In case, there are marked alarms, the actions Acknowledge and Print are related to the
highlighted alarms. With the help of marks it is possible, to deal with a big number of alarms
simultaneously.
Beep
When the option Beep is enabled you will hear a beep at every new event.
Tip Provided that you a sound card installed in your system, you can output a wave file in case that
an event has occurred. At coming events, the WAV-file will be processed, which is assigned to the
standard signal in the system control in menu Acoustical signals.
234
Events
Event window
In this window, the individual events are displayed. All events are displayed in one table or, filtered over five
different filters, displayed in five different tabs.
The table consists of at least one column with the line numbers and column Alarm text. Depending on,
which additional information are desired for the events, up to six further columns are shown.
Column Description
Alarm text This column shows the alarm texts of up to 5000 received events.
Came in In this column the time appears, when the alarm has come.
Went out In this column the time appears, when the alarm has gone.
Alarm group In this column the group of the alarm is shown.
Alarm picture In this column the name of the alarm picture is shown.
Acknowledged In this column the time appears, when the alarm was acknowledged.
Element In this column the name of the alarm element is shown, when an alarm element was
defined for this alarm.
The additional text-window can display, for a selected event, additional text.
(see tab Additional text).
Options and filter

With the dialogs the display options for alarms are configured.
Options
With this dialog, you can define, which additional columns shall be shown. The description of the columns
can be found in the event window.
The settings apply for the respectively active tab.
Filter
With this dialog it will be defined, which alarms shall be indicated in the current tab.
Filter condition is the association to a group. In the list field, those groups are highlighted, which alarms shall
be shown. If no name has be assigned for a group, instead of this, the group number will be shown in
square brackets. In addition, also the name for the tab can be entered. At this, variable texts (e.g. for
changing the language) can be used.
Qith the commands All marks Set/Delete all groups will be selected or de-selected simultaneously.
For tab All alarms in the event window, no filters can be selected.
All following operation actions, (print, acknowledge) are always obtained on the alarms, shown in the current
tab.
235
Historical alarms (old mode)
The Eventjournal generates databases with historical alarms, if the option Old mode is enabled. The
database will be generated in the MDB-format (MS Access). The database contains entries on coming,
going and acknowledging of an alarm.
For every day, a new database will be generated. The databases will be generated in a directory with name
EJ as subdirectory of the project directory. Furthermore, a directory will be generated automatically for every
year and every month. The file gets an EJ_ followed by the number of the current day as name and gets the
ending .MDB. Therefore, the following structure results for the file with the historical alarms from August 14,
2000 in the project directory:
Project directory\EJ2000\08\EJ_14.MDB.
The database has a table with the name historical events.

The meaning of the columns of the table is explained followingly:
Column name Explanation

DayIndex This column contains auto-increment entries, for a unique identification of every line
in the day database.
ID ID of the alarm, will also be shown in the editor and is a clear identification for an
alarm. The IDs for the definition start at number 1000, if smaller values are indicated
here, they have the same meaning as in column State.
state Here, the status for the database record is entered. The values have the following
meaning
0: Normal entry of an alarm
1: At this entry, the alarm has disappeared from the journal.
2: Entry due to system start (program started)
3: Entry due to system stop (program terminated)
4: Entry due to day change
At a system stop and at the day change, all entries currently listed in the journal, will
be stored in the database. At state, they will then get the respective entry. Before
this entry, the event will be registered into a separate line (ID < 1000).
event state In this column, the actual state of the alarm is shown. The following states are
possible:
0: Alarm active must be acknowledged
1: Alarm active is acknowledged
2: Alarm active must not be acknowledged
3: Alarm inactive must be acknowledged
4: Alarm inactive must not be acknowledged, this is no entry any more
5: Alarm is no entry any more
group number In this column the number of the group is shown.
group name In this column the name of the group is shown.
must confirm If there is a 0 in this column, this alarm do not have to be acknowledged. If there is a
-1, this alarm has to be acknowledged.
element The name of the element, that is monitored.
event element The name of the element that was defined in the editor as alarm element.
picture The name of the picture, that was defined in the editor as alarm picture.
come time The time, when the alarm has got active.
gone time The time, when the alarm has got inactive.
236
Events
Column name Explanation

confirm time The time, when the alarm was acknowledged.
exist period The time period in seconds, when the alarm was active.
unconfirmed period The time period in seconds, when the alarm was not acknowledged.
total period The time period in seconds, when the alarm was shown in the journal.
languageX The alarm text is shown in language X (0 for German; 1 for English; ... see Language
definitions). For every defined language of the project an own column will be
generated.
If an error occurs when writing an entry, this error can be evaluated by two system-elements:
_AlarmHistoryError and _AlarmHistoryErrorText (see: system-elements for the Eventjournal).
Summarizing historical alarms

To evaluate historical alarms and messages of several days, there is a function to summarize the day-
databases to one database. Thus it is easier to evaluate the data of several days with external programs
(such as e.g. MS Access or Crystal Reports).
The maximum time period for a summary is 2 years (731 days) and includes the current day. In the same
way as the day-databases, the summary will be stored in the MDB-format (MS Access; DAO-Version 3.0).
The structure of the database corresponds to the structure of the current day databases. It will be stored in
the following path: Projectdirectory\EJ\EJ.mdb.
This function is only active if in at least one group definition the history was activated.
The summary of the day databases is controlled with four elements:
_AlarmHistoryJoinStart
_AlarmHistoryJoinReady
_AlarmHistoryJoinDays
_AlarmHistoryJoinError
A description of these elements can be found in chapter System-elements for the Eventjournal.
During the processing of the summary, an available summary must not be opened, since the ‚old„ database
will be deleted and a new one generated. In the network system the function is only active on the master.
237
Viewer
Overview
The Eventjournal offers the user a user interface, which shows him the events that appear during runtime.
By means of the event viewer, these events can be administrated, output and acknowledged.
There are two view methods for choice.
In the event view all active and not acknowledged events are shown. In this view the events can be
acknowledged. By using the profile properties, you can sort, filter, remove table columns and define the print
lay-out. These profiles can be stored under a name and simply selected directly over the toolbar.
If the status of an event changes the view is automatically updated.
In the historical view are shown all status changes with a time stamp, such as come, gone and
acknowledging all events. By using the profile properties, you can sort, filter, remove table columns and
define the print layout as well as the period. The historical view can show the events also in form of groups,
to represent number and total duration of the events. These grouped historical views are called statistics.
The Historical view can also display the data as statistic, classified by events or groups.
In the status bar, in the bottom right part, a green light symbol shows that the connection to the database
and to all sub-projects is ok. If this symbol is red, either the database connection is broken or all subprojects
are inactive. When the database connection is ok and only one subproject is broken, the light symbol will get
yellow.
With a left mouse click on the symbol, you can open a dialog with more details.
The Event Viewer can be moved to the foreground with element _SetTopEJViewer.
View Events (current)

In this window, the individual events are represented.
The table consists of the following columns.

Column Description
Alarm text This column shows the alarm texts of the received events.
Element The name of the alarm element is shown in this column.
Came in In this column the time appears when the alarm has come.
Went out In this column the time appears when the alarm has gone.
Acknowledged In this column the time appears when the alarm was acknowledged.
Project In this column it is shown, from which system the event was received (only relevant at
several subprojects).
Alarm group In this column the group is shown, which belongs to the alarm.
Alarm picture In this column the name of the alarm picture is shown, when a picture was defined for this
alarm.
In the additional text -window, additional text will be shown for the selected event.
238
Events
Operation
Via the list in the toolbar to the left, several different profiles can be loaded. To the right of the list there are
two buttons to Edit and Save the current profile. If in the table, at least one event is marked, that is not yet
acknowledged, it can be acknowledged via button F8 or via the button with the green hooklet. A printout or
export of the table is possible via the printer button.
Views History
In this window three different views can be displayed. Which view is active, you can define Tab Table in the
profile properties.
Views 1: History
Here are shown all status changes with a time stamp, such as come, gone and acknowledging all events.
The table consists of the following columns:

Column Description
Time Time
Alarm text In this column the alarm text of the event is shown.
Status The new status is shown here (come, gone or acknowledged).
Period The duration, how long the event was active, is shown here in seconds.
Project If you use subprojects, the name of the plant can be displayed here (see table column
SubProjects).
Alarm ID In this column the internal Id for an alarm is displayed.
System status This column contains a 1, when the system runs or a 0, when the alarm was registered
at the termination of AMS Asset Graphics.
Not In this column it is shown, how long the event had been not acknowledged.
acknowledged
Definition ID Event ID of the definition.
Views 2: Statistics (Events)

All entries of the historical data are summarized here (grouped). For every event definition, the number is
counted and the total duration summed up.

Column Description
Project If you use subprojects, the name of the plant can be displayed here.
Alarm text In this column the alarm text of the event is shown.
Period The total period, how long the event was active, is shown here.
Number The total number, how often the event was active, is shown here.
Definition ID Event ID of the definition.
Views 3: Statistics (Groups)
239
All entries of the historical data are summarized here (grouped). For every alarm group, the number is
counted and the total duration of the events of the group summed-up.

Column Description
Project In this column it is shown, from which system the event was received (only relevant at
several sub-projects).
Alarm In this column the group is shown, that belongs to the alarm.
group
Period The total period, how long the event was active, is shown here.
Number The total number, how often the event was active, is shown here.
Operation
Via the list in the toolbar to the left, several different profiles can be loaded. To the right of the list there are
two buttons to Edit and Save the current profile. A printout or export of the table is possible via the printer
button.
Tab View properties
Tab General
On this tab you make general settings for the profile as well as setting of parameters for printing. The
printout is configured with the AMS Asset Graphics Report Designer. In the designer the columns of the
table are at disposal as field-variables.
Option Description
Title Enter here a name for the current profile. This name will be shown in the title of the views.
Password Enter the access right, or click with the right mouse button to open dialog Select access right
protection and to select a user right. By means of the selected access right, opening of the profile
properties is protected.
Log level Enter here a Log level for storing the profile file.
Tab Time period

On this tab you determine the size of the displayed period and whether it shall be shown as relative or
absolute period.
Option Description
Relative Activate this control field, if the period shall be shown as relative period.
Period Here you define, how many days shall be displayed.
End of period Here you determine the end of the displayed period. For example, if you leave the default
before setting Before 0 days, the data will always be displayed including the actual day.
Absolute Set this option, if the period shall be shown as absolute period.
From Defines the first day to be displayed. Press the arrow to the right of the date, to open a
calendar and to select the desired date.
To Defines the last day to be displayed. Press the arrow to the right of the date, to open a
calendar and to select the desired date.
240
Events
Tab Table
In selection box Type you can select one of the following views:
Type Description
History Here are shown all status changes with a time stamp, such as come, gone and
acknowledging all events.
Statistics All entries of the historical data are summarized here (grouped). For every event definition,
(event) the number is counted and the total duration accumulate.
Statistics All entries of the historical data are summarized here (grouped). For every alarm group, the
(group) number is counted and the total duration of the events of the group accumulate.
Choice of the table columns

Option Description
Available Here, the possible columns of the views are shown, which are still available and which
columns are not shown.
Selected Here, the columns of are shown, which are selected and which are shown.
columns
If you want to display a further column, mark the desired column at the available columns. Press the
button with the arrow (->), to pass on this column to the selected columns.
If a selected column shall not be displayed anymore, you have to proceed the other way round.
Tab Sort
On this tab you define, whether and how entries shall be sorted. Three criterion can be selected for the
sorting. If the first criterion does not show a difference at several entries, the second criterion will be used,
then the third. For every criterion, you can select one of the table columns.
Tab Filter
In this tab you can set filter options, this means, only those entries will be shown, which agree to the filter
option. For every table column, one filter can be entered. You may also use the keywords or and and.
Example: 1or 2
The maximum number of events, that shall be indicated, will be set in the entry field to the top right of the
dialog.
Having entered the data of a filter, in the dialog below SQL WHERE will be shown. This can also be edited
freely, when you activate marking field Edit SQL-WHERE string. With this, also complex filters are possible.
241
Description of the filter options in views 'Current Events'

Column Type Example Comment
Alarm text Text Speed Motor
Element Text Temperature_Oven
Came in Date/time 18.06.2009 08:24:39
Went out Date/time > 13:54 If, as shown in the example, only one time is
entered, the current system time will be
used.
Acknowledged Date/time >= 18.11.2009 08:20 and <=
18.11.2009 08:30
Project Text Mixed mode
Alarm group Text Disturbances
Alarm picture Text Overview_Inlet
Description of the filter options in the 'History view'

Column Type Example Comment
Time Date/time > 11:00 and < If, as shown in the example, only one time is entered, the
14:00 current system time will be used.
Alarm text Text Oven 1
Status Text come Possible texts: come, gone and acknowledged
Project Text Drying
Alarm group Text Inlet
Alarm ID Integer = 58
System status Integer 1 Possible values: 0 or 1
Period Integer > 3600
Not Integer > 300
acknowledged
Definition ID Integer = 1011
At a time filter it has to be taken into account, that the data are already filtered due to the settings on tab
Period.
Example for a free SQL-Where string (show all events between 15:11 and 15:18):
WHERE DATEPART(hour, EventTime) = 15 AND DATEPART(minute, EventTime) BETWEEN
11 AND 18
Tab Print
242
Events
Dialog Status / Connections

In the first group of this dialog you can find information on the SQL server. In field Status you can find the
status of the server or an error description for a disturbed connection.
In the table, all sub projects are listed, which are known to the sub projects. The green lines present an
operational connection to the sub-project. Disturbed connections will be represented in red.
As database, the local SQL server instance of AMS Asset Graphics will be used as a standard. Here, the
data are stored into the database Events.
However, it can also be used another SQL server. For this purpose the section EventDatabase has to be
entered in the Project.ini.
[EventDatabase]
Server=.\inVISU_PMS
Catalog=Events
User=InvisuSystem
;Password=
AcknowledgeStationNumber=40
The entries Server, Catalog, User and Password are for the database connection. With the
AcknowledgeStationNumber you define the station number, which is to use for the acknowledgement of
events.
View events from multiple projects

Furthermore it is possible to start the Event Viewer multiple times, to view the events from different projects.
For this a new section (structure like EventDatabase) must be created in Project.ini.
The name of the section must be passed as a start parameter, when Event Viewer starts.
Example:
TEJ_Viewer32.exe DB2
TEJ_Viewer32.exe DB3
[DB2]
...
[DB3]
...
243
Using
Events (alarms, failures, messages)
What do you want to do?
Calling the Eventjournal

Define an event
Acknowledge an event
Printing an event
Display additional text for an event
Automatic change to the Eventjournal in alarm situations
Display an event in one line in the visualization window

Display in the visualization window that a new event has occurred
Let an object flash in the visualization in the alarm case
Acoustic messages with new alarms
Automatic change of pictures in alarm situations
Define an event
Events are defined in the Eventjournal Editor

First start the Eventjournal Editor (with the corresponding button in toolbar Development in
the Project Manager).
Open the project for which you want to define one or more events (button Open in the toolbar).
The event definition window will appear on the screen.
Select tab Parameter.
Enter the num-element into column Element, whose value you want to monitor.
You can select the elements from the reference list. For this, click with the right mouse button on
the cell in column Element to open dialog Element selection.
In the columns Minimum and Maximum you define the alarm conditions. You can use both
columns, however, only one value is required. In most cases it is useful to enter only one value,
because the alarm text can then explicitly be taken on exceeding or underrun of the limit value.
With the entry in column Alarm group you can define, which group your event does belong
to. Click with the right mouse button on the respective cell of this column to open dialog Group
selection. Select the wanted group.
All events being part of an alarm group, are displayed in the Eventjournal in the same color. You
can define for every alarm group whether the events must be acknowledged or printed and whether
there shall be an automatic change of picture, when the event occurs.
If you have not yet defined alarm groups, you can do that now. Press button Group properties in
the toolbar with alarm-specific functions. Select a group in dialog Group selection and press Edit to
open dialog Properties group.
Select tab General.
Enter a name for the group, e.g. Alarms. Decide, whether an acknowledge is required and
whether an automatic change of the pictures shall take place and set the corresponding options.
244
Events
Select tab Color settings and configure the different colors for the alarm group.
When the events of this group shall be printed automatically, select tab Printer settings.
Define, whether the coming, going or acknowledged alarms are to be printed and set the
corresponding checkboxes.
Alarms can be printed on several printers and simultaneously into a file. Activate the
corresponding checkboxes.
Note The assignment of the physical printer devices to the logical printer Printer 1, Printer 2 and
Printer 3 can be defined with the menu command Edit | Printer assignment.
Close the group window with OK. Go on editing other groups or close dialog Group selection.
Now enter the desired alarm text. For this select tab Alarm text.
Enter the desired alarm text into column English. This text may have a length of up
to 100 characters. If you dispose of a license for the option Language selection, you can enter
the alarm text in other languages as well. According to the settings in the Language Editor you can
enter the required languages beside column English in further columns.
Save your settings (command Save in the toolbar) and close the Eventjournal Editor.
Notes
Remember to enter the Eventjournal into the program list of the runtime tasks in the Project Manager (see
Add Programs).
Pop up the Eventjournal Runtime via a button (see Calling the Eventjournal).
Printing an event
Bring the Eventjournal Runtime in the foreground.
Mark the event that you want to print. Print several events at the same time by selecting the
corresponding lines in the numbering column.
Then press the function key F9 or button Print in the toolbar Alarm buttons or button Print
alarms in the toolbar Alarm.
Acknowledging an event
There are several ways to acknowledge an event:
In the Eventjournal Runtime
In the Event Viewer.
With an acknowledgment element (e.g. controlled from the visualization or a PLC)
In the Eventjournal Runtime you can acknowledge events as follows:

Mark the event, that you want to acknowledge. Acknowledge several events simultaneously by
selecting the corresponding lines in the numbering column.
Now press the function key F8 or press button Acknowledge or button Acknowledge alarms in
the Alarm toolbar.
In the Event Viewer you can acknowledge events as follows:

Mark the events, that you want to acknowledge, with the mouse.
Now press the function key F8 or press button button Acknowledge alarms in the toolbar.
The acknowledgment element is defined in the Eventjournal Editor.

Start the Eventjournal Editor (with the corresponding button in toolbar Development in
Open the respective project (button Open in the toolbar).
Select tab Extras in the alarm definition-window.
245
Enter a num-element into column Ackn. element, whose change in value will acknowledge the
event. The change can be triggered by a partner device or from the visualization from an
operator (e.g. by means of a button or a function key).
Display additional text for an event

The alarm text may have up to 100 characters. These characters are shown in one line. To give detailed
information on an open event, there is the option to show an additional text in a separate window within the
Eventjournal.
Start the Eventjournal Editor and Define an event.

Select tab Additional text.
You can see the num-elements which you want to monitor in column Element in the Eventjournal.
Enter the number of the additional text that shall be loaded, when the alarm is selected, into
column Additional text. The texts read from a text file named ALZUSx.TXT. At this, the x
corresponds to the current language, i.e. that is ALZUS0.TXT for German or ALZUS1.TXT for
English. Create and save the additional text file with a standard text editor in the current project
directory.
##0001
Close the valve at the drain of basin 1.
##0002
##0003
Save your changes.

Define an event.
Start the Language Editor (command Language Editor in the Project Manager).
Open the language definition for the current project in the Language Editor.
Press button Language properties in the table specific toolbar to open dialog Used languages.
Activate the desired languages, e.g. German and English.
Save your changes.
Return to the Eventjournal Editor.
Close the Eventjournal for your current project and open it then again. The Eventjournal Editor
has read the new configuration for the used languages.
Select tab Alarm text.
Enter the alarm texts into the column(s) for the other language(s).
Save your changes.
The language can be switched with the of changes of system-element _Language. This can e.g. be realized
with a button.
246
Events
Display an event in one line in a visualization picture

A possibility of informing the operator permanently about events that have occurred currently, is the
indication of the last occurred event in an alarm line in the visualization window.
Define an event.
Start the Graphic Editor (command Graphic Editor in the Project Manager).
Open the picture, in which the alarm line with the event, that have occurred last, shall be
displayed.
Select button Text in toolbar Draw and place the cursor at the position where you want to have
the alarm line.
Click the mouse key and drop the cursor to draw a frame around the text.
Double click on the rectangle to open dialog Properties TEXT.
Select tab Text and activate option Dynamic.
Enter system-element _AlarmText into the text field below, which always contains the text of the
event that has occurred last.
Note If you intend to display the alarm line in every picture, it is advisable to make at the beginning a picture
of your work with a standard layout which you can use as a basis for every further picture. This standard
layout then can contain the alarm line and other standard elements which shall be displayed in every picture.
Automatic change of pictures in alarm situations

At the appearance of an event it can be useful to change automatically to a specific alarm image. This
picture could e.g. show the exact location of a failure on a site plan or a scanned photo.
Note This option should be used very carefully. In there are too many events, which trigger a picture switch,
there would possibly be not enough time to look exactly enough at individual pictures!
At first draw a picture in the Graphic Editor which shall be displayed in the alarm situation.
Start the Eventjournal Editor and define an event.
Before you close the editor open tab Extras.
In column Element you can find the num-elements which are monitored. Enter the name of the
picture into column Alarm picture which shall be displayed in the alarm situation.
Save your changes.
Automatic change to the Eventjournal in alarm situations

An option to indicate the user immediately that an event has occurred, is to bring the Eventjournal Runtime
automatically into the foreground.
Start the Eventjournal Editor and define an event.

Select tab Extras.
Use system-element _SetTopEJ into column Alarm element. If this element changes because
an event has occurred, the Eventjournal will be called automatically.
Save your changes (button Save in the toolbar).
247
Show in the visualization window that a new event has occurred

The Eventjournal Runtime is not always the topmost window on the screen. To show the user, that a new
event has occurred, you can e.g. activate a text in the visualization window, which is usually invisible. When
the Eventjournal Runtime is called by the user, the text will again be invisible.
Define an event (see Output of events in the Eventjournal Runtime).
Start the Graphic Editor (Button Graphic Editor in the Project Manager).
Open the picture, in which the text for the new event shall be displayed.
Select button Text in toolbar Draw and place the cursor at the position, where the text shall
appear.
Click the mouse button, and move the mouse cursor to draw a frame around the text.
Double-click on the rectangle to open dialog Properties TEXT.
Select tab Text.
Select option Static. Enter into the field below the text, that you want to display, e.g. "Attention!
New alarm"
Select tab View options.

Enter in the PMS Value Control in the group Visible at the system-element _AlarmCome, which
will be set to 1 when a new event has come and which will be reset on 0, when the Eventjournal
Runtime gets the input focus.
Confirm the dialog with OK, and save your changes.
Let an object flash in the visualization in the alarm case

To give a clear indication to the operator that a specific new alarm has occurred, you could e.g. let an alarm
object in the visualization flash, which is usually invisible.
Define an event.
Before closing the Eventjournal Editor select tab Extras.
Enter the name of a num-element into column Alarm element. This element is set from 0 to 1 in
case of alarms and thus can controls flashing of a visualization object.
248
Events
Save your changes (command Save in the toolbar).

Start the Graphic Editor (command Graphic Editor in the Project Manager).
Open the picture, which shall show the the status of the alarm element.
Draw an object to display the occurrence of the event, e.g. a circle.
Double click on the object to open dialog Properties and select tab View options.
Enter the name of the alarm element into the entry field in group Visible at.
Acoustic messages with new alarms

To draw the attention of the operator on a new event not only visually, there is the possibility of acoustic
notifications.
Start the Runtime program (command Start Runtime in toolbar Runtime of the Project
Manager).
Change to the Eventjournal Runtime.
Activate command Beep in the menu Alarms.
Tip If you have a sound card in your system, you can play a WAV file at incoming events. The system plays
the WAV file, which is assigned to the Standard signal in the Windows System control under Acoustic
signals.
249
Data Storage
Editor
Introduction
AMS Asset Graphics does not only give you information about the current state of a plant, it can also store
process values and can access on the stored data. This functionality is called Data Storage.
With the Data storage, every num- and text-element can be stored to configurable times (e.g. every 2
minutes) or depending on events (e.g. when an error or an value change occurs). These stored data can be
accessed with the trend charts. So the user can watch the status of his plant as temporal trend and to
archive the data for later evaluation.
In addition, the stored data can be exported in CSV-files (Comma Separated Values files) or in MDB-files
(MS Access format) to permit viewing and further processing with external programs.
Data with a time stamp can be imported in form of CSV-files. With that, the user can also view historical data
of remote stations with his visualization system and archive or export these data.
Moreover, the data storage file can be stored redundantly at two independent places, also in the network.
This is to prevent a data loss due to hardware defects.
Several data-elements are summarized in datasets and stored at the same time. The datasets are stored in
data storage files in form of ring buffers. Every data storage file can contain up to 100.000 datasets. This
means, if a dataset of a data storage table consists of 5 elements, the values of all 5 elements including the
time stamp will be written 100.000 times, before the first dataset is overwritten.
The Data Storage Editor offers the user a user interface, to define data storage tables. Thereby, several
data storage tables of several projects can be opened at the same time. An exchange of definitions can be
made with the clipboard and drag & drop. The most important properties of a data storage table are the
definitions on the size of the ring buffer and which data-elements shall be stored at what time.
Runtime function
During runtime certain data are stored, when the defined trigger event occurs. The trigger may be initiated
on events (e.g. function key) or on the time (e.g. system-element _Sec01, every second).
See also
Creating a data storage (Step-by-step instructions)
251
Dialog Properties
Dialog Properties
On tab General you define the general settings for a data storage file.
On tab Archive you define files and conditions for archives.
On tab Export you can determine, when and on which conditions the data shall be exported to which
location,
on tab Import you make the corresponding specifications to import a file.
On tab VBScript you can define a num-element for an external timestamp.
See also
Creating a data storage (Step-by-step instructions)
Tab General
On this tab you make general settings for a data storage table. You determine, when data shall be stored,
whether the storage of data shall be stopped, e.g. in case of special situations. You can enter trigger to
delete all datasets in the data storage file. You can also activate the use of a second data storage file at any
location in the network.
Here you define the size of the data storage file. Data storage is internally organized via a ring buffer. When
the ring buffer is filled with data, the oldest data will be overwritten, i.e. for processing there are always the
most current data available.
Via the options Elements per dataset, Max. nr of datasets and the Type you define the size of the ring
buffer (max. size approx. 50 MB, assuming type NUM).
The behavior after changing the definition is as follows:
An existing data storage file will be renamed and gets in the file name the extension
_YYMMDD_hhmmss.
Sample: Test.iDSF ir renamed to Test_061208_080912.iDSF.
A new data storage file will be created and useful data will be read from the old data storage file.
Option Description
Active at
Element Enter here the name of a data-element,if you want to control dynamically whether
the data storage is active or not. If the value of the data-element is 0, the data
storage table is inactive, otherwise data can be stored.
Note If no element name is entered here, data can always be stored.
Station With this field you define, on which network station the data storage table shall be
processed (0 for the master, 1 – 31 for a station).
This field is only accessible at a network project. For this, you must have activated
the option Network project in dialog Runtime configuration.
Definition
Elements per dataset Define here how many elements shall be stored at the same time (max. 128).
Max. nr of datasets Define here, how many datasets shall be stored in the ring buffer until the first
stored dataset will be overwritten (max. 100.000).
File size With the definitions Element per dataset, Max. nr of datasets and Type, the size
of the ring buffer will be calculated and displayed here.
252
Data Storage
Option Description
Trigger
Save on change If this option is set, a new dataset of the table will be stored, when the value of one
element has changed.
Start saving Enter here the name of a num-element, which triggers the storage of data as soon
as its value changes (control-trigger). The amount of the change is not important.
You can use a num-element, which changes continuously (e.g. system-element
_Sec01, which changes its value every second). However you can use also num-
elements, that changes discontinuously.
Saving complete Define here the name of a num-element, which has to change its value, when a
dataset was successfully stored (notification-trigger). The element will be increased
by 1 and reset on 0 when reaching 255.
Start deletion Enter here the name of a num-element, which triggers the deletion of data, as soon
as its value changes (control trigger).
You can use a num-element which changes continuously (e.g. system-element
_Day); however, you can use a num-element, that changes discontinuously (e.g. a
function key).
After deletion, the current data storage file does not contain any dataset. You can
use this function to delete all entries at the end of a time period. With that, the file
does only contain data of a selected time period (e.g. a day, a shift etc).
Deletion complete Define here the name of a num-element, which change its value, when the data in
the table are deleted (notification trigger).
Redundancy
Active Set this the option, if you want to save a redundant data storage file at a second
location. This is useful, when the stored data has to remain available even in case
of a destroyed data storage file (possibly at a defect of the hard disk).
Destination folder Define the directory, where the redundant data storage file shall be stored. Use the
browse-button to select an existing directory.
Note Pay attention, that the destination directory is located on another hardware
(fixed disk or computer) as the original data storage file.
Tab Archive
The data storage offers the possibility of creating archives of data storage files. You can create two archive
files. With that, redundancy is even possible at archives. If an archive of the runtime file is created, the data
storage file will keep all entries. With that, the current data will be at disposal and can be displayed in a trend
chart.
If an error occurs upon the creation of an archive, it will be reported with a special error element. Archives
can be created automatically when the ring buffer is full or with of a trigger.
While creating an archive the data storage will save furthermore data in an internal buffer. The buffered
writing procedure avoids loss of data when creating new archives. However, since also this buffer has a
limited size, loss of recording data could occur, when the archive is stored on a slow device (e.g. floppy
disks, CDRW, slow network).
Option Description
Trigger
Buffer full If this option is activated, the data storage file will be archived exactly at that moment,
when the ring buffer is full, i.e. when the last (physical) dataset of the data storage file
was written with values.
Start archiving Enter here the name of a num-element to start the archiving (control-trigger). The
archiving will be started, as soon as the num-element changes. Beside this you can
also archive discontinuously (for example via of a function key) or depending on a
specific process variable.
If no controlled archiving is desired, the field remains empty.
253
Option Description
Archiving complete Define here the name of a num-element, which has change its value when archiving
was completed successfully (notification- trigger). The element will be increased by 1
and reset on 0 when reaching 255.
Error
Number This num-element contains the number of the last error that has occurred during
archiving.
If the error has occurred at File 1, the fraction part is a 1; if the error has occurred at
File 2, the fraction part is a 2. If both files have produced an error, error code refers to
File 2. The integer part of the value corresponds to the error number (see error
codes).
Number
Max. This option defines how many archives are generated for a data storage table.
Example:
If 7 was entered as maximum number of copies, the program will create
archives with the extension numbers 000 to 006.
Destination
File 1 Enter here directory and file name for the archives. Use the browse-button to select
an existing directory or an existing file.
For the input you also can use variables e.g.
@_DataStoringPath\Basin
The file name is defined without extension, because the file extension will be
generated as continuous number at every copy action, beginning with 000.
If an error occurs during archiving, it will be reported via the error element (or entered
into the activity log).
If no archiving is wanted, the field remains empty.
Attention Not all special characters can used for a file name.
File 2 Here you can enter a second destination. The functionality is identical to that of File
1.
See also
Archiving data (step-by-step instructions)
Tab Export
The data storage offers the possibility, of exporting data of the data storage file. For this, there are two
different formats at disposal. These data can be exported as MDB-files (MS Access Format) or as CSV-files
(Comma Separated Values files), to be read e.g. with MS Excel).
Export into MDB-files

When exporting into a MDB-file, a table with the name of the data storage table will be created in the MDB-
file.
The first column contains the time stamp in the format date/time. Num-elements are generally exported as
double values. Text-elements are exported as text with a restricted length. The program inserts as many
lines into the export file as there are datasets in the data storage file.
254
Data Storage
Export into CSV-files

When exporting a CSV-file, the first line of the CSV-file is a definition line in which the contained types are
specified.
For date entries DATE will be used as identification, for time entries TIME. For num-elements NUM is used,
for texts the TXT. All types are separated by the defined separator.
Every entry in a CSV-file is separated from the next one with a separator char. Possible chars are comma,
semicolon, space or tabulator.
The last entry in a line has no following separator.
The CSV-file can be edited with MS Excel or with a text editor.
The second line contains the element names. For the type DATE, the name Date is used, for type TIME the
name Time. The names of the other elements will be written in the order they are defined in the Data
Storage Editor. Every entry will be separated from the next one with a separator char.
Now, the lines with the values begin.

The program enters as may value lines into the CSV-file as there are datasets in the data storage file.
The value for the date has the following syntax: 1999-11-26 = YYYY-MM-DD (Y = year, M = month, D =
Day).
The value for the time has the following syntax: 18:54:20:123 = HH:MM:SS:mmm (H = hour, M = minute, S =
second, m = millisecond).
The syntax for a double-value is as follows: 123.456 or 12.456e+078 or 0.78e-012.
Text entries will be enclosed in quotation marks, thus it is possible to use also separator chars in the text.
Text entries may have a maximum length of 80 characters (without quotation marks).
Example CSV-file (separator ','‘)
DATE,TIME,TXT,NUM
Date,Time,TextEle,NumEle
2006-01-01,00:00:00:000,"END",50012
2005-12-31,23:59:59:999,"contain a separator char",1.2345
2005-11-26,14:05:37:281,"entry, which can also",258.123e-028
2005-11-26,14:05:36:279,"Hello this is a text",1.2e+039
While exporting the data storage will save furthermore data in an internal buffer. The buffered writing
procedure avoids loss of data. However, since also this buffer has a limited size, loss of recording data could
occur, when the export is made on a slow device (e.g. floppy disks, CDRW, slow network).
Option Description
Trigger
Buffer full If this option is activated, the data storage file will be exported into the target file
exactly at that moment, when the ring buffer is full, i.e. when the last (physical)
dataset of the data storage file was filled with values.
When archiving If this option is activated the data storage file will be exported into the target file
exactly at that moment, when the data storage file was archived as well. This means
you can also create an export file together with the Archive function.
Start exporting Enter here the name of a num-element, by means of which the export shall be
started (control-trigger). The export will be started, as soon as the num-element
changes. Beside this you can also export discontinuously (for example via a function
key) or depending on a specific process variable.
If no export is desired, the field remains empty.
Exporting complete Define here the name of a num-element, which change its value, when exporting of
the table was completed successfully (notification-trigger).
255
Option Description
Destination file Define here the name of a destination file to export the data. Use browse-button to
select an existing directory or an existing file.
In the text you also can use variables, e.g.
@_DataStoringPath\$_Year\$_Month\Data$_Day.csv
Thus you have a possibility for a structured storing of export files. If an error occurs
during export, it will be reported via the error element.
Attention If there are already exported files with the same name in the target
directory, they will be overwritten.
Format
MDB If you have activated this option, the data storage file will be exported as MDB-file.
This file can then be edited with MS Access or other database programs, which
support this format, to evaluate the data according to your requests.
CSV If you have activated this option, the data storage file will be exported as CSV-file.
This file can then be edited with MS Excel or other programs, which support this
format, to evaluate the data according to your requests.
CSV Separator This option defines the separator used for the export into a CSV-file.
Decimal marker This option defines the decimal point used for the export.
Format date Enter formatting codes to specify the date values (Default: %Y-%m-%d).
Format time Enter formatting codes to specify the time values (Default: %H:%M:%S:).
Append Check this option to append milliseconds to the time stamp.
milliseconds
Error
export (see error codes).
Tab Import
The data storage offers the possibility of importing datasets into a data storage file. The datasets to be
imported must be contained in a CSV-file.
Format of a CSV-file
see tab Export
Example of a CSV-file ( separator , )
DATE,TIME,TXT,NUM
Date,Time,TextEle,NumEle
2006-01-01,00:00:00:000,"END",50012
2005-12-31,23:59:59:999,"contain a separator char",1.2345
2005-11-26,14:05:37:281,"entry, which can also",258.123e-028
2005-11-26,14:05:36:279,"Hello this is a text",1.2e+039
The time may be defined with resolutions up to nanoseconds. Very fast events can be captured with a
special hardware and the data stored in a CSV-file. In the following the CSV-file will be imported in a data
storage file to be viewed in the visualization system.
The separator char for importing can be selected freely. The individual entries must correspond exactly to
the syntax. Element names and types must agree with the defined data storage table. With that it can be
guaranteed, that the imported data are compatible to the definition table.
As decimal marker the point will always be used.
Before importing a CSV-file its syntax is checked. If an error occurs during import, it will be reported via the
error element.
256
Data Storage
Even if an import is defined, it is furthermore possible to save datasets. If saving of data was started during
an active import, the dataset will temporarily be written into an internal buffer. After the import is completed,
the datasets will be written from the buffer into the data storage file. The buffered datasets are appended to
the file (not sorted by the time stamps).
If an Export or Archive of data is activated while the Buffer full, this will also be processed during the data
import (in case, the buffer has got full during import). For this, the import procedure will be interrupted.
Exporting or archiving of data activated by a start trigger will not interrupt an active import..
Option Description
Trigger
Start importing Enter here the name of a num-element, by means of which the import shall be
started (control-trigger). The import will be started, as soon as the num-element
changes. Beside this you can also import discontinuously (for example by means of
a function key) or depending on a specific process variable.
If no import is desired, the field remains empty.
Importing complete Define here the name of a num-element, which change its value, when the import
is successfully completed (notification-trigger).
Source file Enter here directory and file name, to read the data to be imported. Use the
browse-button to select an existing directory or an existing file.
For the input you also can use variables e.g.
@_DataStoringPath\ImportFile.csv
The file name may be entered with or without file extension.
Delete after import If this option is set, the CSV-file will be deleted after a successful import.
Format
CSV separator This option defines the separator used for the export into a CSV-file.
Decimal marker This option defines the decimal point used for the export.
Error
import (see error codes).
Tab VBScript
In this VBScript window you can implement different functions such as OnStart (initialization), OnRun
(cyclic) and OnEnd (end of Data Storage Runtime). A detailed description of these three functions is given
in the section VBScript.
Using an external timestamp

When appending a new data record the Data storage sets the current time as timestamp for this record.
With the function TimeStampEleName an alternative num-element can be set, which defines the timestamp
for the record set. The function is called once and sets the name of the num-element.
This sample sets the element name to DsTimestamp:

function TimeStampEleName
TimeStampEleName = "DsTimestamp"
end function
The time stamp can now be set in a user-defined VBScript.
257
Sample: (July 14, 2009 11:58:10 and 300 milliseconds)

Set DsTimestamp = CreateObject("PMS.NumEle")
DsTimestamp.SetName("DsTimestamp")
sub OnRun
MyDate = "14.7.2009 11:58:10"
DsTimestamp.Value = CDate(MyDate) + _
300 / 24 / 3600 / 1000 ' 300 milliseconds
end sub
Data storage tables

In data storage tables, the data-elements are configured, which shall be stored during runtime. Text-
elements can be saved as well. Storing of text-elements can result in very big files (up to approx. 315 MB).
Make sure, that there is sufficient storage capacity for this.
The modification of an existing table could have the consequence, that an already written .iDSF-file with its
old data will not be accepted and a new file has to be created (at changes Element per dataset, Max. nr of
datasets and Type of a data-element).
To avoid this situation, you have to make sure, that no elements must be added later on. It is possible to
create rows without element names, in order to use them later. However you must define the type of
element that you want to use later. The change of an element name will result in the loss of the data of the
previous element in the .iDSF file because now the new element will be stored and due to that, the data in
all data sets be initialized.
The conditions for the storage of data are defined in the dialog Properties.
Column Description
Element Enter here the names of the elements to be stored.
Description For the use of the data for the trend chart every element will be assigned a description.
Type Into column Element you can enter num- or text-elements. Click the right mouse button over
a cell and select from the dialog NUM (for num-elements) or TXT (for text-elements).
Note You can also mark and change several cells at the same time.
Error codes
At the processing of data storages the following errors can occur:
Wrong parameters when creating

Error code Description
100 Invalid number of elements
101 Invalid number of datasets
258
Data Storage
File operations
104 An unspecified error occurred.
105 The file could not be located.
106 All or part of the path is invalid.
107 The permitted number of open files was exceeded.
108 The file could not be accessed.
109 There was an attempt to use an invalid file.
110 The current working directory cannot be removed.
111 There are no more directory entries.
112 There was an error when trying to set the file pointer.
113 There was a hardware error.
114 SHARE.EXE was not loaded, or a shared region was locked.
115 There was an attempt to lock a region that has already been locked.
116 The disk is full.
117 The end of file was reached.
118 Unknown file version or file is not a data storage file.
119 File could not be deleted.
120 The set to be read is not contained in the file.
121 ASCII / UNICODE-Error (File was created with the other version).
General errors
155 The passed element type was different to the type of the data storage file.
157 The file name has a wrong extension.
Import errors
160 Requested memory could not be defined.
161 Separator could not be found.
162 Date entry has invalid syntax or is not at first position.
163 Time-entry has invalid syntax or is not at second position.
164 Data type does not correspond to the definition file.
165 Element name does not correspond to the definition file.
166 Number of elements different from definition file.
167 Invalid date format.
168 Invalid time format.
169 Invalid NUM format.
170 Invalid TXT format.
259
Export errors
230 DAO error occurred during export of data.
Data Storage Runtime

With the Data Storage Runtime num- and text-elements can be stored in definable intervals (e.g. every 2
minutes) or depending on events (e.g. the status of a device has changed). These stored data can be
accessed with the Trend charts.
The program Data Storage Runtime has no special user interface. However, during the start, messages
about the performed actions will be printed in the program window.
At the first start for every defined data storage definition a corresponding data file will be created (Message:
Create file: Filename).
The data storage files will be started in alphabetic order. The regular processing of the tables is also done in
an alphabetical order.
The data files will be created in a separate directory with name DS under the project directory. The name of
a runtime file results from the name of the data storage table, it will be given the extension iDSF.
If the runtime is started another time, Data Storage Runtime will open the already existing data storage file
(Message: connect file: Filename).
If the runtime is started another time after an element name was changed in the definition of a data storage,
the data storage file will be adapted. The changed elements will be set on 0 or "empty string" in the
complete ring buffer. The information, previously stored at these locations will be lost (message: File:
Filename adjusted.
At network projects you define for every data storage definition the station number, where the data storage
shall be processed. If the Data Storage Runtime is started on an other station the file is not processed at this
station (message: SKIP file: Filename on this station).
Using
Creating a data storage

The datasets are defined in data storage tables in the Data Storage Editor.
Start the Data Storage Editor (button Data storage in the Project Manager).
Select button New in the toolbar of the Data Storage Editor to create a new data storage table.
Press button Edit properties the table specific toolbar to open the dialog Properties.
In tab General with parameter Start saving you define the condition when your data shall be
saved. Data are saved depending on definite events. Select an event, that occurs cyclically in
order to save data cyclically. In the example below, the data are saved every half minute due to
changes of the system-element _Sec30.
Enter into group Definition how many elements a dataset shall contain and how many datasets
shall be saved at maximum. If the max. number of datasets is reached, the oldest data will be
overwritten. In the example below every dataset contains 4 elements, up to 2880 datasets can be
saved. This means, if a dataset is stored every 30 seconds, the oldest dataset will be overwritten
after exactly 24 hours. Below both entries, the File size of the configured ring buffer is shown.
260
Data Storage
Close the dialog with OK.

Now enter the data-elements, which shall be saved, into column Element of the table.
Here you can select the elements from the reference list. For this, the table must have been
assigned to a project. Therefore, save the table in your project first (command Save). If your table
has not got any name before, dialog Save as will be opened. Enter a name for the new table in field
File name. Confirm the dialog with OK.
Now, click with the right mouse button on the cell in column Element to open dialog Element
selection.
With the selection from the reference list, the element type will automatically be entered into
column Type. If you have entered the element name manually, you have now to define in column
Type, whether the element is a num- or a text-element. Click with the right mouse button on the
cell, to open the dialog for the type selection.
Save the data storage table.
In order to activate the data storage during runtime, the Data Storage Runtime must be entered into the
program list of the Project Manager (see Add programs).
261
Saving data
With this function, arbitrary num- and text-elements are saved in predefined time periods (e.g. every 2
minutes) or depending on events (e.g. when a failure occurs). These data may be visualized with trend
charts or external programs for presentation or further processing.
Several data-elements, which shall to be saved at the same moments, are combined integrated in datasets.

Creating a data storage
Modifying a data storage
Archiving data
Display archived data in trend charts
Archiving data
Since the data are stored in ring buffers, the oldest values will be overwritten as soon as the buffer is full. To
avoid loss of data, the program offers the option to archive them.
Start the Data Storage Editor (command Data storage in the Project Manager).
Press button Open in the toolbar of the Data Storage Editor to open that data storage
table, which data you want to archive.
Press button Edit properties in the table specific toolbar (see Start archiving data) to open dialog
Properties.
Select tab Archive.
262
Data Storage
In group Trigger you define the conditions for copying the ring buffer data into archive files. In the
example above the buffer will always be copied when it is full. The program makes up to seven
copies (Number). Then, the oldest copy will be overwritten. So the archive always contains the
data of one week.
In group Destination files you have to enter in File 1 the name of the archive file. Enter the
name without extension, because during copying the file extension will be generated
automatically with a continuous number sequence.
Attention Make sure that the defined disk drive has enough free space during runtime.
Modifying a data storage
Start the Data Storage Editor (button Data storage in the Project Manager).
Select button Open in the toolbar of the Data Storage Editor to open an existing data storage
table.
If you activate the data storage with other conditions or if you want to change the definition of the
ring buffer, select button Edit Properties of the table specific toolbar (see Create a data storage).
Save your changes (button Save in the toolbar of the Data Storage Editor).
Attention If you want to modify the number of data-elements or datasets in the ring buffer or if text-elements
have to be exchanged with num-elements or vice versa, the ring buffer must be recreated.!
This is done automatically when the Data Storage Runtime starts:
An existing data storage file will be renamed and gets in the file name the extension
_YYMMDD_hhmmss.
Sample: Test.iDSF ir renamed to Test_061208_080912.iDSF.
A new data storage file will be created and useful data will be read from the old data storage file.
Note If you already know, when programming the data storage table, that later on you want to save further
elements which names are not yet defined, first create lines without element names for the later use.
However, you must already define the type of future elements.
Note In case you change belatedly the name of an element, the data of the previous element in the .iDSF
file will get lost, since the new element is now saved at that location and the data will therefore be initialized
in all datasets.
263
Recipes
Editor
Introduction
Often the same data have to be transmitted to the partner device, e.g. during running-in of complex plants
or at the definition of mixture ratios. Especially, when big amounts of data have to be handled, the Recipe
Runtime of AMS Asset Graphics is a helpful tool. It permits the user to load and save groups of data as
recipes.
The Recipe Editor is designed as MDI-application, this means, several documents (recipe tables) can be
edited at the same time.
In the Recipe Editor you define recipe groups, which are used as templates to load and save recipes.
During runtime an unlimited number of recipes may be saved for every recipe group.
For every recipe group a special recipe can be defined, which is loaded or saved automatically by the
Recipe Runtime.
See also
General operation
Define a recipe group (step-by-step instructions)
Recipe group window

These windows are used to prepare Recipe groups.
Enter the num- and text-elements which shall be included in this recipe group, into the recipe table.
Column Description
Element Enter here the names of the elements which shall be part of the Recipe.
Type You can enter num- or text-elements into column Element. Click the right mouse button on
this field and select from dialog Select type.
Description For a more detailed explanation, every element can have a description.
The conditions, on which the recipes shall be loaded and stored, are defined in dialog Properties RECIPE
GROUP.
See also
Define a recipe group (step-by-step instructions)
265
Dialog Properties RECIPE GROUP
Dialog Properties RECIPE GROUP has 5 tabs, to define the properties of a recipe group.
Tab Trigger
The loading and saving of data in recipes can be controlled by triggers. The trigger are used, if recipes shall
not only be loaded or saved via operator actions in the Recipe Runtime.
Option Description
Recipe name Enter here a text-element, to determine the recipe, on which one or more of the
following trigger actions shall be related.
If you leave this field empty, the system-element _RecipeName will be used. This
element will only be used, if recipes shall be loaded or saved automatically during
runtime (i.e. not with the menu-driven Recipe Runtime).
Start loading Enter here a num-element to start the loading/saving of a recipe (control-trigger).The
Start saving recipe name is specified by the content of the text-element, entered in option Recipe
name.
Loading complete Enter here a num-element, which changes its value, if a recipe was loaded or saved
Saving complete successfully.
See also
Save a recipe directly with a function key
Tab Automatic
On this tab you determine a dedicated recipe for this recipe group, which shall be loaded automatically at
the start of Recipe Runtime or saved automatically when the program ends.
This functionality can be used e.g. to go on operating with the data of the last runtime session in case of a
restart of the visualization.
Option Description
Autoload Enter here the name of a recipe of the recipe group, which shall be loaded automatically when
starting the Recipe Runtime.
Autosave Enter here the name of a recipe, which is saved automatically when the Recipe Runtime ends.
See also
Save a recipe automatically at program end
266
Recipes
Tab Diagnosis
On this tab you can define notification-elements, which contain information about the recipe processing.
Option Description
Recipe loaded Enter here a text-element, which is set with the name of the last loaded recipe.
Recipe saved Enter here a text-element, which is set with the name of the last saved recipe.
Error text- Enter a text-element to get the error text, when an error has occurred during loading or
element saving a recipe. The contents of the text element will not cleared, if an action for a
recipe was executed successfully.
The description of the possible error numbers and texts you can find in table Error
list Recipe Runtime.
Error num- Enter here a num-element here to get the error number, when an error has occurred
element during loading or saving a recipe. The contents of the num-element will not be set to 0,
if an action for a recipe was executed successfully.
If no error has occurred, the element has the value 0, in case of an error, the value will
be > 0.
See also
Detecting errors when loading or saving recipes
Tab Operation
On this tab you define whether recipes shall be indicated and operated during runtime, which access
authorization shall be required for this and whether these actions shall be entered into the activity log.
Option Description
Operation Here you define, which action with which authorization (P-level) may be performed and
management whether these actions have to be recorded in the activity log (Log).
New Define here password and log level for creating a new recipe.
Load With this line you define password and log level for loading an existing recipe.
Note For loading a recipe there are three variants: automatically, trigger-controlled
and user-controlled. According to this, a corresponding remark 'Trigger' or 'User' will
be written into the activity log at the actions 'Autoload' and 'Autosave'.
Save Define here password and log level for saving a recipe.
Functionality see description for Load.
Delete Define here password and log level for deleting a recipe.
Edit Define here password and log level for editing recipe data in the recipe table.
View options
Recipe group Set this option, when the recipe group shall not be displayed in the Recipe Runtime. In
invisible this case there is no possibility, in the Recipe Runtime to change a recipe in any form.
Tab VBScript
On this tab you can define VBScript functions for a recipe group.
Information on syntax and definition of variables you find in section VBScript.
267
Error list Recipe Runtime

Error messages will be output in the following format:
Error text [Recipe name] Date time
Number Text Description

26500 Cannot create new An error has occurred when creating a new recipe (MDB-file).
recipe-database Possible reasons: DAO not correctly installed.
26501 Cannot create new This error may occur when creating a new recipe. 2 tables for num- and
table text-elements must be opened in the database. The error has occurred
upon creating this table.
26502 Cannot open the An error has occurred during access on a recipe (MDB-file).
recipe-database Possible reasons:
The recipe has been opened exclusively by an external program or there
is an error in the database.
26503 Cannot create all New lines have to be inserted in the database for not available element
new rows entries (there are different possibilities, when a new line has to be
inserted).
The insertion of at least one new line has failed.
26504 Cannot open NUM An error has occurred during access on a recipe when trying to access
table the table for num-elements.
26505 Cannot open TEXT An error has occurred during access on a recipe when trying to access
table the table for text-elements.
26506 Cannot close NUM Error when terminating the use of the table for num-elements.
table
26507 Cannot close Error when terminating the use of the table for text-elements.
TEXT table
26508 Recipe doesn't Before loading a recipe, it will be checked, whether the recipe file does
exist exist. This does not apply
Possible reasons:
An incorrect name was entered for the recipe or the recipe was deleted.
26509 Cannot save: It was tried, to save a recipe, but the recipe is write-protected.
recipe is read only
Example
Cannot save: recipe is read only: [exhibition configuration] 24.05.06
13:53:03
268
Recipes
Runtime
Overview Recipe Runtime

By means of the Recipe Runtime, you load, edit and save recipes for the recipe groups, which were
generated with the Recipe Editor.
There is an internal „invisible" functionality and another one, visible at the user interface in dialog Recipe
runtime.
The internal functionality is controlled with triggers, which are defined in the Recipe Editor. It is possible to
load and store recipes. By the definition of a new recipe name, it is also possible to generate new recipes.
Dialog Recipe Runtime can be opened by changing system-element _SetTopRZ.
This can be configured with a button in the Graphic Editor.
List field Description

Recipe The names of all recipe groups are shown, that are part of the project and which are
group configured to be visible.. The entries in the list fields are sorted in alphabetic order.
When recipe groups shall not be shown, see also tab Operation in the Recipe Editor.
Recipe The names of all recipes which are part of the selected recipe group, are shown. The entries
in the list fields are sorted in alphabetic order.
Command Description
Visualization When you press this button, the Recipe Runtime window will be moved to the background
and the visualization window to the foreground.
New Having pressed this button dialog New recipe appears.
The values of the selected recipe group will be stored automatically with the name of the
new recipe.
You can also define the name of an existing recipe. After a safety request, it will be
overwritten.
Load Press the button, to load the selected recipe.
The corresponding values are read from the recipe database and copied into the data-
elements of the selected recipe group.
Data-elements, which are not part of the recipe (this is e.g. possible, when the recipe
definition was extended, after the recipe was already stored), will be not changed.
Save Click the button, to save a recipe.
The current values of the data-elements of the selected recipe group are stored under the
selected recipe name in the recipe database.
Delete Click this button, to delete the selected recipe.
After a safety request, the selected recipe will be deleted.
Edit In addition to the input of recipe values in the visualization, you can edit the values in a
table.
This command opens the dialog Recipe.
You can see the data- elements of the recipe and their contents, which can also be
changed.
For the operation you can also use function keys instead of buttons. The abbreviation of the accompanying
button is part of the documentation.
Notes
Prerequisite for the functionality of the recipe runtime is a correct DAO installation!
269
The database -access on recipe files is done non-exclusively by the recipe runtime.
See also
Create a new recipe
Save a recipe
Load a recipe
Dialog New Recipe (Recipe Runtime)

Enter the name of the new recipe into the entry field and confirm it with OK or press the Enter-keybutton.
The name of the new recipe will then appear in the recipe list.
Dialog Edit (Recipe Runtime)

In this dialog you can edit the values of a recipe.
In the title bar you find the name of the recipe, just edited, in square brackets.
The dialog can be changed in position and size. At the next start the dialog appears at the last used display
position.
Column Description
Element This column contains the elements, which are part of the recipe. You cannot make any
change.
Type Here you see the type of the data-element (num- or text-element). You cannot make any
change.
Contents The contents of the data-element is shown here. You may change it and take it over into the
recipe with button Save. When you click on button Cancel, the old contents of the element
will be restored.
Description Here you see the description defined in the Recipe Editor for this element. You cannot make
any change.
270
Recipes
Using
Using recipes
Recipes are groups of values of data-elements (e.g. setpoints for a machine control device or mixing ratios
in the building or construction trade and the chemical industry) which are loaded and saved as group.
Recipe groups are defined in the Recipe Editor as empty templates for recipes. During runtime, several
recipes with specific values can be used for a recipe group.

Define a recipe group
Create a new recipe
Save a recipe
Load a recipe
Define a recipe group

Recipe groups are defined in the Recipe Editor.
Start the Recipe Editor (command Recipe Editor in toolbar development in the Project Manager).
Select button New in the toolbar of the Recipe Editor to open the Recipe group window.
Enter the individual data-elements (variables), which will be part of your recipe into
column Element.
Also here, you have the possibility of selecting the elements from the reference list. For this, click
with the right mouse button on the cell in column Element to open dialog Element selection.
At the beginning of your work, you can only see one line in the table. If you have entered the first
element, another line will be added automatically. To insert another line above the line actually
selected, press the button Insert line in the toolbar.
In column Type you define, whether the data-element is a num- or a text-element. Click the right
mouse button to open the dialog Select type. If you have selected the data-element from the
reference list, the type will be inserted automatically.
If some of the element names are insignificant you can enter a description (column Description).
Save the recipe group document.
Create a new recipe

During runtime you assign certain values to the individual variables of your recipe. You have two options:
If you have defined objects in the visualization, which can display and change the variables of the
recipe, enter the values directly here. Then call the Recipe Runtime to create a new recipe, which
automatically uses the current values of the variables.
Another option would be, to assign the values to the new recipe via a table which can be edited in
the Recipe Runtime.
The Recipe Runtime can be called e.g. via a button (see Calling the Recipe Runtime).
Select that group from the list of the available recipe groups, in which you want to create a
recipe. The existing recipes are shown in the list of recipes.
Select button New to create a new recipe. Dialog New Recipe will appear.
Enter the name of the new recipe and confirm the dialog with OK.
The name will be inserted into the list of recipes.
271
Return to the visualization (button Visualization), when the data-elements are edited in the
visualization.
If the components of the recipe are not yet assigned to values or if you want to modify them, select
button Edit to edit the recipe. Dialog Edit will be shown.
Enter the values of the new recipe into column Contents.
Save your changes (button Save). The dialog will be closed now.
Go on creating further recipes or return to the visualization (button Visualization).
Note Do not forget to enter the program Recipe Runtime into the program list (see Add Programs).
Load a recipe
You have several options of loading recipes during runtime.
Note Don't forget to enter the program Recipe Runtime into the program list in the Project Manager (see
Add programs).
Loading a recipe via the user interface of Recipe Runtime

During runtime you can load an existing recipe with the help of the Recipe Runtime.
Activate Recipe Runtime e.g. via a button (see calling the Recipe Runtime).
Select the group from the list of the available recipe groups from which you want to load a recipe.
The existing recipes are shown in the list of recipes.
Select the recipe you want to load from the list of recipes.
Click button Load.
Return to the visualization (button Visualization).
Loading a recipe with a function key

In the Recipe Editor a recipe can be defined for each of the recipe groups which will be loaded automatically
in case the trigger changes. It is also possible to select a variable recipe name, by entering a text-element at
the relevant position. The trigger, which starts the loading, can as well be e.g. a function key.
Define a recipe group in the Recipe Editor (see also Define a recipe group).
Press button Properties in the table specific toolbar.
272
Recipes
Select tab Trigger in dialog Properties RECIPE GROUP.
Enter a text-element into field Recipe name. This text-element can be changed with a text input
field in the visualization.
See also Define setpoints.
Define the num-element in field Start load, which starts the loading of the recipe, in this example
_F4.
Confirm the dialog with OK and save your changes in the Recipe Editor.
Loading a recipe automatically at program start

In the Recipe Editor you can define a recipe for every recipe group that shall be loaded automatically when
starting the program.
Define a recipe group in the Recipe Editor (see Define a recipe group).
Select button Properties in the table specific toolbar.
Select tab Automatic in dialog Properties recipe group.
Write the name of the recipe, which shall be loaded automatically at program start, into edit field
Autoload.
Save a recipe
During runtime you can assign other values to the individual variables of an existing recipe. How to create a
new recipe can be found under (Create a new recipe).
Saving a recipe via the user interface of Recipe Runtime

When saving an existing recipe via the Recipe Runtime window, you have two options:
If you have defined objects in the visualization, which take up the values of those data items,
which are part of the recipe, you can enter the values directly here. Then call the Recipe Runtime
to save the existing recipe with the new values.
273
Another possibility consists in assigning the values to the existing recipe via a table, which is
called up from the Recipe Runtime.
Activate Recipe Runtime e.g. via a button (see calling the Recipe Runtime).
Select the group in which you want to save a recipe from the list of the existing recipe groups.
The available recipes are shown in the list of recipes.
Select the recipe, you want to save, from the list of recipes.
If you have already entered the values of the data items in the visualization, which are part of the
recipe, press Save. After that, you can return to the visualization (button Visualization). If you still
want to change the components of the recipe, select button Table to edit the recipe. Dialog
Recipe group: recipe name will be displayed.
Enter the new values of the recipe into column Contents.
Save your changes (button Save). The dialog will be closed.
Change additional recipes or return to the visualization (button Visualization).
Saving a recipe with a function key

In the Recipe Editor a recipe can be defined for each of the recipe groups which will be saved automatically
in case the trigger changes. It is also possible to select a variable recipe name, by entering a text element at
the relevant position. The trigger, which releases the saving, can as well be e.g. a function key.
Select tab Trigger in dialog Properties recipe group.
Enter a variable text-element into edit field Recipe name. This text-element can be opened as
edit field in the Graphic Editor, to enter the name of the recipe, that shall be saved with the
function key, during run time.
See also Define setpoints
Define the num-element in field Start save, which starts the saving of the recipe, in this example
_F5.
274
Recipes
Saving a recipe automatically at program exit

In the Recipe Editor you can define a recipe for every recipe group that shall be saved automatically when
the Recipe Runtime stops.
Define a recipe group in the Recipe Editor (see define a recipe group).
Select button Properties in the table specific toolbar.
Select tab Automatic in dialog Properties recipe group.
Enter the name of the recipe, to be saved at program (with the current values) into edit field
Autosave.

The Recipe Editor offers the possibility to define notification-elements for every recipe group which include
the name of the recipe which was loaded or saved last. In addition, error texts can be indicated.
Select tab Diagnosis in dialog Properties RECIPE GROUP.
Enter a text-element into edit field Recipe loaded, which contains the name of the last loaded
recipe. adopts the name of the recipe of this recipe group that was loaded last.
Enter a text-element into edit field Saved recipe which contains the name of the last saved
recipe.
In option Error text-element you have to enter a text-element which includes an error message
when an error has occurred during loading or saving of a recipe.
In option Error num-element you can enter a num-element which indicates, when an error has
occurred during loading or saving of a recipe. If no error has occurred, the element has the value
0, in case of an error the value is > 0.
The description of the possible error numbers and texts you can find in table Error list Recipe
Runtime.
275
DDE
Editor
Introduction
The abbreviation DDE stands for the expression Dynamic Data Exchange. DDE is a mechanism of
Windows, which permits the data exchange between different applications.
With the AMS Asset Graphics DDE task, arbitrary data-elements are transmitted to other DDE-capable
Windows applications (e.g. Excel or Word) at defined times (e.g. every 2 minutes) or depending on events
(e.g. when an error occurs). The data exchange may take place in both directions, this means, data-
elements are transmitted to other applications as well as data are received from other applications.
In addition, there is the possibility, to send commands to other applications to trigger certain actions (e.g.
loading a file).
Several data-elements, that has to be transmitted at the same time, are organized in tables. AMS Asset
Graphics distinguishes between two table types, the tables for the data exchange and that for the command
transfer. In a data exchange table, up to 1000 num- and text-elements will be stored. A command table may
contain up to 1000 command lines.
The most important properties at the specification of the dynamic data exchange are the definitions, which
data-element shall be transferred to which location and at what time.
Runtime function
During runtime certain data or commands are sent or received if the defined condition (Trigger) raises. The
trigger may be activated depending on events (e.g. function key) or depending on the time (by a system-
element like _Sec01).
Which data are sent and received, or which commands shall be sent, is defined in the DDE Editor.
When starting the runtime program, all DDE-tables belonging to the current project will be loaded. After
loading the tables, the DDE Runtime tries to start the applications, which are entered as Application name
on tab DDE connection.
See also
Exchange data via DDE (Step-by-step instructions)
Dialog Properties (DDE)

Depending on whether you configure a data exchange table or a command table, the dialog includes 5 tabs
(at data exchange tables) or 3 tabs (at a command table) where you can make different settings.
277
Tab Connection
On this tab you make basic settings for a DDE connection.
Option Description
Application
Name Enter here the name of a Windows application, with which you want to exchange data. The
application with which you want to exchange data must be capable for DDE.
In addition, the program should be stored in the search path, that it can be started
automatically from the DDE Runtime. If it was not entered in the search path, it must have
been started before arrival of the connecting trigger (see also tab Trigger (data exchange)),
started manually or entered into the program list of the Project Manager (see also Runtime
configuration).
Note The DDE-expression for the application topic is Server.
Topic To established a DDE connection, you need the name of the application as well as a topic
supported by this application. For example, if you would like to exchange data with an MS
Excel table, the table name corresponds to the topic of the DDE connection.
At command tables, this field may remain clear. It should remain clear, if you want to
address several topics with the same command table.
At a data exchange table a DDE-connection can only be established, if a valid topic is
configured. For MS-Excel this means, that the corresponding table must have been loaded.
This can for example be realized by creating a command table before.
Example
If you define a DDE connection with MS Excel and if you have entered a table name as topic, the DDE
connection will refer only on this table. However, if you leave this field clear, a DDE connection will be
established with all possible topics of MS Excel. This option is useful when you want to send commands to
several topics of an application, e.g. to load different tables in Excel.
See also
Data exchange via DDE (Step-by-step instructions)
Tab Diagnosis
On this tab the notification-elements can be entered, which contain information about possible errors during
the communication..
Option Description
Notification-elements
Error text-element Enter a text-element here, which takes up an error message, when an error has
occurred during loading or saving of a command table.
The "Error num-element" should always be 0. If an error occurs, this element will be
given a definite value >0. With this value an error can then be diagnosed.
Error num- Enter a num-element here, to take up an error message, when an error has occurred
element during loading or saving of the command table. If no error has occurred, the element
has the value 0, in case of an error, the value will be >0.
Deactivation
Number of errors Here you indicate the number of errors, when the table shall be deactivated. With a 0,
the table is not deactivated, thus will always be active.
Notification- Enter a num-element here, to signal when the table was deactivated. This element will
element be given value 1 if the table was deactivated, otherwise it has value 0.
Reactivation Here you indicate a num-element to control the reactivation of the table. If this element
changes its value, the table will be reactivated.
278
DDE
Tab Activation
On this tab you define, on which conditions the data or the command transfer is active.
Option Description
Active at
Element The data of the table will only be transmitted or received, when the num-element, that you
enter here, has a value > 0. If the value is 0, the connection will be deactivated. If you do not
enter an element name, the connection will always be active.
Picture The data of the table will only be transmitted or received, when the picture, whose name you
enter here, is shown in the visualization as main picture.
Station This field only is active, if you edit a network project. For this, you must have activated the
option network project in dialog Runtime configuration in the Project Manager.
If you want to restrict the processing of a DDE-table to a definite station, enter the number of
the station here (0 for the master, 1 -31 for a station).
Registerkarte Trigger (data exchange)

Into this tab, num-elements can be entered, which operate as control-trigger and notification-trigger to
control the exchange of data over DDE.
Option Description
Start receiving Enter a num-element here, whose change will start the reading of data from a DDE
server to AMS Asset Graphics.
Receiving Enter a num-element, whose value changes, when reading of data from a DDE server
complete is completed.
Start sending Enter a num-element, whose change will start the sending of data from AMS Asset
Graphics to a DDE server.
Sending Enter a num-element, whose value changes, when sending of data to a DDE server is
complete completed.
Tab Replace (data exchange)
Option Description
Replace dot with AMS Asset Graphics uses "." as decimal point. Set this option, if you would like to
comma replace the decimal point by a decimal comma in another Windows application.
Remove 'carriage Other applications may mark the end of a text with CR. Activate this switch if this
return' at end of line string shall not be transferred. This behavior appears e.g. at connections with some
versions of MS-Excel.
Data exchange tables

In these DDE tables, the combinations between the data-elements of the database and the elements of
other windows applications are defined.
The conditions, on which the data shall be exchanged are defined in dialog Properties data exchange.
Column Description
Element Enter here the names of the elements which shall be part of the data exchange table.
this field and select from the dialog NUM (for num-elements) or TXT (for text-elements).
Field Enter here the elements of the other Windows applications with which the data items of the
database shall be combined.
Description For a more detailed explanation, every element can have a description.
279
Example
To combine the data-element pH_value_Basin1 in the first line of the dialog above with the cell of the
second line and second column of an MS-Excel-table, enter Z2S2 for this field.
Regarding the name conventions of elements in other applications, the corresponding operating manuals
have to be contacted.
See also
Exchange data via DDE (Step-by-step instructions)
Command tables
In DDE command tables you configure commands, which can be sent to another application.
The application is defined in dialog Properties command.
Column Description
Element Enter here the name of the data-element, which shall start the sending of the related
command (control-trigger).
Command Enter here the command, that you want to send. The instruction must be enclosed in
square brackets.
Notification- Define here the data-element, which change sits value, when the command was
element executed successfully (notification-trigger).
Comment For a more detailed explanation, every command instruction will be assigned a
comment.
Example of a command table

With the command [Open("C:\MAPPE1.XLS")], which was started by the trigger Excel_FileOpen, the file
C:\Mappe1.xls will be opened in program MS-Excel.
The square brackets, which enclose the macro instruction in this example, are independent from the
respective program, to which you want to send the commands.
Note The macro instructions, used in this example, are subject to the conventions of MS-Excel.
See also
Data exchange via DDE (Step-by-step instructions)
Runtime
DDE-connection
The DDE Runtime combines the functionality of the DDE-Client with the functionality of the DDE-Server.
With a DDE-client you can request data from other applications (DDE server) and send them data or
commands. The DDE-client processes the data exchange and command tables, configured in the DDE
Editor.
The DDE-server provides the values of the AMS Asset Graphics data-elements for other applications. It will
be started automatically at runtime by entering the DDE (Client/server) in the program list in the dialog
Runtime configuration in the Project Manager and do not have to be configured.
280
DDE
DDE Runtime (Client)

With data exchange and command tables, any DDE-server or DDE-applications can be addressed.
Depending on the DDE server, data items can be read and written or DDE-commands can be transmitted.
Address and commands are different for every server, for this reason they have to be configured for every
data exchange and command table.
For a data exchange table a DDE server is absolutely required on the opposite side (application to be
requested), MS-Excel, for example, has an integrated DDE-server.
For the DDE-client the logging of the data exchange and command tables is possible for the error diagnosis.
For every definition file a separate logging window can be opened (menu command Logging). In the
Logging window all actions will be shown, which are caused by the triggers of the table.
The logging is recorded only temporarily, but can be pasted in the clipboard. The size of the logging is
restricted, old dataset will by typed over by new ones.
DDE Runtime (Server)

The server functions of the DDE Runtime program is an additional option to perform the data exchange
between AMS Asset Graphics and other programs. This kind of data exchange is not controlled via the
DDE-tables, but over the server functionality.
To start the data exchange, you have to demand the required data from other applications. When these data
change, they will be updated automatically in the application.
The following topics are defined in the AMS Asset Graphics DDE server:
General topics
Topic Function
NumEle Topic for reading and writing a num-element
TxtEle Topic for reading and writing a text-element
NumRead Topic for reading a num-element
NumSend Topic for writing a num-element
TextRead Topic for reading a text-element
TextSend Topic for writing a text-element
Theme ’System’
Element Contents
SysItems returns the system-topics of the DDE- TopicItemList; Formats; Topics; SysItems
server
Topics returns all topics of the DDE-server System; NumEle; TxtEle; NumRead; NumSend;
TextRead; TextSend
TopicItemList returns the elements of the TopicItemList; Formats
system
Formats returns the supported data TEXT
interchange formats
See also
Examples DDE-Server
281
Using
Data exchange via DDE

The abbreviation DDE stands for Dynamic Data Exchange and does literally mean "interchange of dynamic
data". DDE is a mechanism of Windows which permits a data interchange between different applications.
The DDE Runtime program combines the functionality of a DDE client with the functionality of a DDE server.
The DDE client permits requesting other applications which take over functions of a DDE server and send
them data or commands. The DDE client processes the data exchange and command tables, which are
defined in the DDE Editor.

Client-Functions
Sending commands to Excel
Sending data from AMS Asset Graphics into an Excel sheet
Receiving data in AMS Asset Graphics from an Excel sheet
Server-Functions
Requesting data from AMS Asset Graphics into an Excel sheet
Note Enter the program DDE Runtime into the program list (see inserting programs). Enter also
the application into the program list, which shall exchange data via DDE, in this example EXCEL.EXE.
Sending data into an Excel sheet

In this example, actual filling levels are written into an MS-Excel 2000 sheet with an DDE data exchange
table.
Start the DDE Editor (command DDE Editor in the Project Manager).
Select button New in the toolbar of the DDE Editor. Dialog New for choosing the table type will be
opened.
Select Data exchange table and confirm the dialog with OK.
Save the new data exchange table in the current project in order to have access to the reference
list when entering data items (button Save in the toolbar of the DDE Editor). Dialog Save as will
be opened. Enter a name for the new table in field File name, in this example SendFillingLevel.
Press button Edit properties in the table specific toolbar to open dialog Properties Data
exchange.
282
DDE
On tab Connection in field Name you have to enter the name of the application, which shall
receive data from this table, in this example Excel.exe. Enter the name of the Excel document
with which data shall be exchanged into field application Topic, in this example FillLevel.xls.
Select tab Trigger. Enter the name of an data-element into field Start sending which change
shall trigger the sending of a data exchange table to Excel, in this example the system-element
_F1.
Enter the data items into column Element, which values shall be written into the Excel sheet.
Here you can also select elements from the reference list. Click with the right mouse button on the
cell in column Element to open dialog Element selection. Select the element and confirm the
dialog with OK. The type of data-element is entered automatically into column Type.
Indicate in column field the corresponding field of the Excel sheet.
Save the data exchange table.

Open further data exchange tables or exit the DDE Editor.
Before you start the runtime, do not forget to enter the DDE Runtime into the program list in the
Project Manager, to start Excel and to open the corresponding Excel document.
See also
283
Receiving data from an Excel sheet

In this example, setpoints from an MS-Excel 97 table are read into AMS Asset Graphics by means of a DDE
data exchange table.
opened.
Select Data exchange table and confirm the dialog with OK.
Save the new data exchange table in the current project in order to have access to the reference
list when entering data items (button Save in the toolbar of the DDE Editor). Dialog Save as will
be opened. Enter a name for the new table in field File name, in this example LawnFertilizer.
Press button Edit properties in the table specific toolbar to open dialog Properties of data
exchange.
Enter the name of the application which shall receive DDE-commands from this table on tab
Connection into field Name, in this example Excel.exe. Enter the name of the Excel table with
which data shall be exchanged into field Topic, in this example LawnFertilizer.xls.
Select tab Trigger. Enter an num-element into field Start receiving, which triggers the receiving
of the data exchange table from Excel, in this example num-element _F2.
Enter the data-elements into column Element, which values shall be read from the Excel table.
Here too, you have the possibility to select the element from the reference list. Click with the right
mouse button on the cell in column element to open dialog Element selection. Select the
element and confirm the dialog with OK. The type of data-element is entered automatically into
column Type.
284
DDE
Indicate the corresponding field of the Excel table in column Field.
Save the data exchange table.

Before you start the runtime, do not forget to enter the DDE Runtime into the program list in the
Project Manager, to start Excel and to open the relevant Excel-table.
See also
Sending commands Excel

In this example, an already existing table of MS Excel 2000 will be opened with the help of a DDE command
table, when starting the runtime.
opened.
Select Command table and confirm the dialog with OK.
Save the new command table in the current project in order to have access to the reference list
when entering data items (button Save in the toolbar of the DDE Editor). Dialog Save as will be
opened. Enter a name for the new table in field File name, in this example OpenExcelTable.
Press button Edit properties in the table specific toolbar to open dialog Properties of command
exchange.
285
Enter the name of the application which shall receive DDE-commands from this table on tab
Connection into field Name, in this example Excel.exe.

Enter a num-element into column Element, which is the start trigger for the macro command.
You can also select the elements from the reference list. Click with the right mouse button on the
cell in column Element to open dialog Element selection. Select the element and confirm the
dialog with OK.
Enter the command into column Command, which shall be executed upon changes of the
element, in this example file FillLevel.XLS shall be opened.
Note The macro/command instructions depend to the syntax of the selected application program.
Save the command table.

Open further command tables or exit the DDE Editor.
Before starting the runtime, remember to enter the DDE Runtime into the program list in the
Project Manager and to start Excel.
286
DDE
Examples DDE server

Requesting data from AMS Asset Graphics
As prerequisite for requesting data from AMS Asset Graphics in an Excel table, the DDE Runtime program
must have been started.
To display the num-element Silo1 in Excel, enter the following term into one cell:
=TDDE32|NumEle!Silo1
To show the text-element TEXT1 in Excel, enter the following term in one cell:
=TDDE32|TxtEle!TEXT1
The so-called pipeline symbol "|" stands between program name and topic name, it is a syntax of Excel.
The exclamation mark behind the topic name separates the topic from element name.
Writing a data-element from MS-Excel

To write data-elements from other applications, you have to use also the topics NumEle or TxtEle.
To write num-element Element1 (from cell C3) from the Excel sheet into the database, you have to write the
following macro in Excel 2000:
Sub DDE_Test()
channelNumber = Application.DDEInitiate(app:="TDDE32", topic:="NumEle")
Set rangeToPoke = Worksheets("Sheet1").Range("C3")
Application.DDEPoke channelNumber, "Element1", rangeToPoke
Application.DDETerminate channelNumber
End SubSub
Note The syntax of the program releases is partly different. Please use the Excel manual for further
information.
Example for MS-Word: AMS Asset Graphics Element in MS-Word

To present the text-element Text1 in Word for Windows, insert the following field in a document:
{DDEAUTO TDDE32 TxtEle Text1}
Note Word does not update the fields continuously, but when opening the document. The syntax of the
program releases is partly different. Please use the Word manual for further information.
287
ODBC
Introduction
General information on ODBC

The ODBC interface (Open Data Base Connectivity) permits applications to access on data of several
databases via SQL commands, e.g. ORACLE, MS SQL-Server, INFORMIX, PARADOX, dBase or ACCESS.
This interface offers a maximum in portability, one application can access on different data bases. This
permits the application designer to develop applications without the need to commit on one definite
database management system (DBMS). Then, the end user can add the so called database drivers, which
realize the connection between the application and the database.
General information on the ODBC Editor

By means of the AMS Asset Graphics ODBC Editor, those actions will be defined, which are executed by
the ODBC Runtime program during runtime. In this editor the data sources are configured by defining driver
and table name and by providing them with the corresponding user name.
In the ODBC Editor an arbitrary number of tables can be defined with column and field names. Trigger-
elements are also defined here, which perform a read and write access on the database. For the read
access, a filter can be defined with the help of SQL-commands. To scroll within the tables scroll elements
can be configured for scrolling line by line or page by page.
User Interface
The ODBC Editor is designed as MDI application, this means an arbitrary number of documents (in the
following called ODBC tables) can be processed at the same time.
In menu File the following non-standard commands are at disposal

ODBC-Administrator...
Use this command to configure a connection to a database in the ODBC-Administrator. Dialog ODBC
Data Source Administrator will be opened, which you can also reach via the Windows Control panel.
When you open the dialog, first the tab User DSN appears. Here you can add a new data source.
The following non-standard commands are at disposal in menu Edit:

Sort and Filter options
Click this command to open dialog Filter / Sorting. For the read access, a filter can be determined with
the help of SQL-commands.
Fill column
Use this command to fill the definition file automatically with all columns, defined in the table on tab
Connection. At this, the lines Database column, Variable type, Value size and Element type can be
filled with the information from the database.
See also
General operation
289
Dialog Properties (ODBC)

In this dialog you define the properties of the ODBC table on different tabs.
Tab Connection
On this tab define database and table for the ODBC-connection and the conditions for opening. In addition,
the database connection can be protected by user name and password.
Option Description
ODBC Database
Connect Click this button to select an ODBC database and to connect it with this document.
The name of the selected ODBC database will be shown in the entry field behind
button Connect.
Open write When you activate this option, the database will be opened write-protected and
protected changes in the database are not possible. Other applications may open the database at
the same time.
Table Enter here a table of the above mentioned database. When you are connected with the
database, you may select a table.
Authorization You may enter user name and password for the database connection here.
Name Enter here user name for the database connection.
Password Enter here the password for the user name.
Tab Connecting trigger

On this tab define the conditions, on which the connection to the previously defined database and table will
be established or closed.
Option Description
Establish connection
Start Define a control-trigger to set up the connection to the database. The data are not yet be loaded.
Ready Define a notification-trigger whose value will be increased by 1, when the connection to the
database is established.
Close connection
Start Define a control trigger to close the connection to the database.
Ready Define a notification-trigger whose value will be increased by 1, when the connection to the
database was closed.
290
ODBC
Tab Connection status

On this tab you define all elements, which shall provide information on the status of the connection to the
database.
Option Description
Diagnostic These elements make information available on the status of the connection to the
elements database. If e.g. errors have appeared, they will be shown in these elements.
Information text- Enter here a text-element, which shows you the ODBC messages in plain text.
element
Information num- Enter here a num-element, which shows you ODBC messages as numbers for
element diagnosis purposes.
Cursor Enter here a num-element, which indicates the current cursor position (line number) in
the ODBC definition table.
Tab Data trigger

On this tab you define the condition, on which datasets are loaded from the database table or stored into the
database table.
Option Description
Load table
Start Define here a control-trigger to load the data from a previously defined database table. If element
Start is changed before a connection to the database is made, a connection will be established
automatically.
This trigger may also be used to update the datasets.
Ready Enter here an notification-trigger, which value will be increased by 1, when the datasets of the
database were loaded.
Save table
Start Define a control-trigger to store the data in a previously defined database table. If you have
changed datasets in the table, you can activate these changes with this trigger.
Ready Define here an notification-trigger, which value will be increased by 1, when the datasets were
stored in the database.
Tab Line trigger

On this tab you define the conditions, on which lines in the database table can be inserted or deleted.
Option Description
Delete line
Start Define a control-trigger to delete a line in the database table. The value of the element
determines, which line shall be deleted. At that, the line numbers in the ODBC definition table are
the reference point.
Example
Value = 4 deletes the line in the database, which is shown in line Element line 4.
Ready Define an notification-trigger, whose value will be increased by 1, when the line was deleted from
the database table.
New line
Start Define a control trigger to insert a new line in the database table. The new line in the database
table will be generated from the contents of those elements, which are in line New record. This
line is scheduled exclusively for this purpose.
See also
ODBC definition table
Ready Define an notification-trigger, whose value will be increased by 1, when the new line was inserted
into the database table.
291
Tab Navigation
On this tab you define elements for scrolling in the database table.
Option Description
Scroll line
Forward/ Define here a num-element, which value change causes forward/backward scrolling in the
Backward database table. The number of lines, that are scrolled, results from the difference to the old
value.
Example
Previous value 2, new value 5: the database will be scrolled forward by 3 lines.
Scroll With the help of the following num-elements, it is possible to scroll in the database page by
page page. A page consists of the number of the defined element lines in the ODBC definition
table.
Forward/ Define here a num-element, which value change causes scrolling one page forward/backward
Backward in the database table. The number of pages, that are scrolled, results from the difference to
the old value.
ODBC definition table

In the ODBC definition tables data-elements defined, which exchange data with databases via the ODBC
interface. Here you enter the corresponding field and column names.
To which database a connection shall be made and on which conditions the data shall be exchanged you
define in the dialog Properties.
In the definition table you can define a maximum of 100 element lines and 128 database columns
simultaneously. The gray shaded lines, are properties of a database column and should only be modified
manually in a very special, exceptional case.
Option Description
Database column Here you enter the column names of the table, selected in dialog Properties, or you
select them with the right mouse button in dialog column selection. The data of this
column will be mapped on the elements, defined in Element line X.
Variable type The variable type (e.g.: CHAR, VARCHAR, DOUBLE, INT, ...) of the database
column will be shown here. When you have selected the column name via dialog
Column selection, the variable type will be registered automatically.
Variable size The size of the variable type is registered here. At text and numeric variables this is
the number of characters that can be stored. When you have selected the column
name via dialog Column selection, the size will be registered automatically.
Element column title Enter here an element, that shows the column name of the database table.
Element type Here you define, to which element type the following elements of this column shall
correspond. When you have selected the column name via dialog Column
selection, the element type will be registered automatically.
Note When you enter the element type manually, you have to take care, that the
data can be mapped reasonably. For example, VARCHAR should correspond to the
a text-element and DOUBLE to the a num-element.
Element new record Here you enter the elements, which provide the data for generating new records in
the database.
See also
Tab Line-Trigger
Element line X Enter the elements, which shall exchange data with the database table. When the
control-trigger Start changes its value, the contents of the database table will be
transferred on these elements.
See also
Tab Data-Trigger
292
ODBC
Example of a definition file
Dialog Column selection

In this dialog, all columns of the database table, indicated in tab Connection are offered. Mark the desired
table column and confirm the dialog with OK.
Dialog Filter / Sorting

In this dialog you enter an SQL filter or sorting instructions together with the conditions to activate them.
Column Description
Active at Enter here a num-element to activate the SQL orting / filter instructions. The SQL sorting /
filter instruction is active, if this element has a value different to 0.
SQL Sort or Here you can enter a sorting- or filter instruction. The commands must be defined
/ according to the SQL syntax.
Filter Examples:
command
Filter: WHERE Recipe name="Cherry gateau" AND property="fresh"
Sorting: Order BY Recipe name AND production date
Comment Enter here a comment for the command.
ODBC
The ODBC Runtime program has not a special user interface like the Eventjournal Runtime. Status
messages are displayed in the program window, though.
293
Language
Editor
Introduction
With the language changeover you can switch between different languages during runtime.
This is useful, e.g. if a machine with a visualization shall be delivered into multilingual countries. The same
visualization software can then be delivered to the different countries with the user texts in the respective
national language.
Another example: a system with visualization was delivered from Germany to Spain. The users on site can
watch all texts in Spanish. The system requires a maintenance, which is done by a service technician from
Germany. He switches the language from Spanish to German and gets all texts – failure messages, notes
on the maintenance etc. – in German.
General information for the Language Editor

In the Language Editor the texts can be defined in different languages.
In all editors it is possible to change online the used language with the menu command Language. During
runtime, the currently shown language depends on system-element _Language. Every language is
assigned to a dedicated value. German correspond to 0, English to 1.
Every line, you have defined in the language table, corresponds to a pseudo text-element, in the following
called language-element.
Language-elements start with two underlines and a letter sequence TX, followed by a four-digit number.
Thus, line 17 of the language table corresponds to language-element __TX0017.
If you want to display the text of the fourth line of the language table, define a Text object with name
__TX0004 and place it to the corresponding position.
Language-elements may be used always there, where text-elements are used.
Note Language-elements don't stress the database, this means, this text will not be added to the 3000
possible text-elements and these elements can be used furthermore.
See also
Language definition window
Define a project for several languages (step-by-step instructions)
295
Language definition window

The single language texts are listed in this window.
In this table you define the text for the language-elements. The text for the different languages has to be
entered into the columns. The columns to be displayed, are defined in dialog Used languages.
Every line, you have defined in the language table, corresponds to a language-element (pseudo text-
element). Language-elements start with two underlines and a letter sequence TX, followed by a four-digit
number. Thus, line 17 of the language table corresponds to language-element __TX0017. If you want to
display the text of the fourth line of the language table, define a dynamic text object with name __TX0004.
Language-elements may be used always there, where text-elements are used.
Column Description
Text This column shows the number of the language-element. This setting cannot be
changed.
German Enter here the text, which the language-element shall be assigned to, if the language is
German. (In this case the system-element _Language has value 0.)
... other Enter here the text, which the language-element shall be assigned to, if the
languages... corresponding language was selected. (In this case the system-element _Language will
have the value of the other language, e.g. 1 for English.)
See also
Creating a project in several languages
Dialog Used languages

In this dialog you can activate or deactivate languages, which shall be used in a project.
When pressing button OK the selected languages will be shown in the language definition window. There
you can enter the texts in the corresponding language.
Attention This setting here influences the language dependent alarm texts in the Eventjournal (see Tab
Alarm text in the Event definition window).
Using
Creating a project in several languages

This option is particularly interesting for machine or plant designers, who deliver projects to different
countries where different languages are spoken. The AMS Asset Graphics language option permits to
make one single visualization project and to switch during runtime from one language to another, just by a
shortcut or a mouse click.
With this function, not only the system texts, but also the project-specific texts provided by the project
engineer are switched.

The project-specific texts in the different languages are defined in the Language Editor.
Define texts
In the Graphic Editor three text objects shall be defined to display them during runtime.
Define text objects with language changeover
296
Language
Moreover, buttons are defined to switch between the languages.

Define buttons for the language changeover
Also the event texts, defined with the Eventjournal Editor, can be shown with different languages.
Define events with several languages
Define a button to change the language during runtime

For this select button Button in toolbar Input in the Graphic Editor.
Draw a button on the picture. A button is drawn as a rectangle (see drawing basic forms). The
button will automatically be given the name "Button".
Double click on the button to open dialog Properties BUTTON.
Select tab Design.
Select another name for the button, e.g. German and enter it into entry field Text.
Enter system-element _Language into the first cell of column Element. This element contains the
number of the current language. Click with the right mouse button on the cell to open dialog
Element selection. Select type Runtime elements and data type Num. Select system-element
_Language from the list of elements and confirm the dialog with OK.
Note Runtime elements will only be displayed when the runtime was stopped once.
Type NUM is automatically entered in column Type.
In the next column Action, you define the action that shall be triggered with this element when
pressing button English. Click with the right mouse button on the first cell in this column. Dialog
Action will be opened.
Select action SET to set the system-element on the wanted value.
Enter the number of the language into field Value which shall be used when clicking on button
German, in this example 0. Fields Minimum and Maximum remain empty.
Create further buttons for further languages.
Save your changes.
Define texts for the language changeover in the Language Editor

At first start the Language Editor (with the corresponding button in the toolbar Development in
Open the project, for which you want to define multilingual texts (button Open in the toolbar). The
language definition window will be opened.
Press button Language properties in the table specific toolbar to open dialog Used languages.
Set the checkbox for the languages you want to use during the runtime, in this example German
and English.
297

Any line, which you define in the language definition table, corresponds to a so called language-
element (pseudo text-element). Language-elements start with two underlines and a letter
sequence TX, followed by a four-digit number. Language-elements may be used always there,
where text-elements can be used, e.g. in the Graphic Editor, when defining a text object.
Enter the texts in column German, which shall appear in German.
In the following columns you have to enter text, translated into the respective languages.
In the example, the texts "Behälter 1" and "Container 1" are linked in the pseudo-text-element
__TX0050, the texts "Behälter 2" and "Container 2" in pseudo-text-element __TX0051 and
"Behälter 3" and "container 3" in pseudo-text element __TX0052.
Save the language definition.
Define text objects for the language changeover

Start Graphic Editor (command Graphic Editor in toolbar Development in the Project Manager).
Select button Text in toolbar Draw.
Draw a text object in the picture. A text object is drawn like a rectangle (see drawing basic forms).
The text object has the default text "Text".
Double-click on the text object to open dialog Properties TEXT.
Select tab Text and set the option Dynamic in group Text. This is important, because the
language-elements have a dynamic contents.
Enter the first language-element __TX0001, which shall display the text "Silo1" or barrel 2", into
the edit field below.
Note You have to keep in mind, that the text, shown during runtime, may be longer or shorter as
the name of the pseudo-text object. Match the size of the text object accordingly.
Create further text-elements.
Note At the same time you may leave open the Language Editor to read the number of the language-
elements.
298
Network
Editor
Introduction
The network mode permits to visualize and operate an AMS Asset Graphics project on several computers.
Generally it is possible to access on all data and to carry out all operating functions from every workstation.
However, this can be restricted by defining password levels for individual operators.
The basis for the network mode is an arbitrary network hardware and a operating system, which permits a
use of the TCP/IP protocol. If you use a firewall it is necessary that the AMS Asset Graphics programs have
access on the network. The network communication uses one configurable port.
For the identification, every workstation gets the so called network station number. The computer with
station number 0 is the master. The master coordinates the data exchange and monitors the other stations,
therefore it has to be always in operation. An operation at the master is possible in the same way as at other
stations.
Every computer stores its database in the memory. In the network mode the values of all data-elements on
all stations are synchronized. Data-elements, which are used only locally at one workstation, can be defined
in the Network Editor in the Exclude-List.
There are two different network runtime programs:

the Master program runs on the master-computer, program Station on the stations.
At parameter definitions in editors at network projects, such as the process assignment or the data storage,
it will be defined on which station the respective table shall be processed. This setting is only possible, if the
project was defined as network project in the Project Manager. In addition you can define in the Project
Manager, which program shall be started on which station.
See also
Configuration of network computers
Station definition table
Creating a network project
Setup redundancy mode
User interface Network Editor

The Network Editor is designed as MDI-application, this means, several documents (station definition tables)
can be processed at the same time.
Non-standard commands in menu Edit are

Master properties and
Exclude declaration
See also
General operation
299
Dialog Master properties

In the dialog Properties Master you define the name of the master, whether the stations shall be shut down
from the master and when time synchronizations shall be made.
Option Description
Name Enter here the name for the Master (max. 80 characters). The name is at disposal
with the system-element _MPStationName.
Note This system-element should be contained in the Exclude-List, to permit
every station to enter its own name.
Update Enter here a num-element, which change starts the synchronization of data by the
master. Normally, a time-dependant system-element such as e.g. _Sec03 is
entered.
Note If you don't use you a time-dependent system-element, you have to make
sure that a change of the element appears, before a timeout will be recognized at
the stations.
Start picture Enter here the name of a start picture (per default picture MAIN will be started) for
the visualization on the master (max. 80 characters).
Timeout Enter here a time period in seconds, within this period the master has to perform
an synchronization before the stations will shut down automatically and waiting for
a restart of the master. Possible values are 0 to 1800 seconds. If the data-element
to trigger the update has not changed within the indicated time, the stations
recognize a timeout.
There is a direct context between the trigger for update and the timeout period.
The relationship between them should be defined that way, that a timeout is
recognized after 30 or more update cycles.
If the master has detected that a station does not work anymore (timeout has
occurred), this station will be deleted from its list of active stations.
Status Enter here a num-element, which receives the status information to the master. It
will be set by each of the stations. Since every station sets this element, it should
be included into the Exclude declaration. The master sets the element only to
online or offline, since a timeout of the master can only be recognized by the
stations.
For the status applies:
0 = Station is offline
1 = Station is online
2 = Station will be signed off because of timeout.
Time synchronization A num-element can be indicated here, at the change of the data-element the
stations will synchronize with the current master time. Useful are time-dependant
system-elements, e.g. _Day.
Note However, a time synchronization is only possible, if the user logged-in at the
station, is authorized to change the time.
Stop stations with If this function is activated, all stations will be switched off automatically, if the
master master stops.
300
Network
Dialog Exclude declaration

Every computer stores its database in the memory. In the network mode the values of all data-elements on
all stations are synchronized. Data-elements, which are used only locally at one workstation, can be defined
in the Network Editor in the Exclude declaration.
Some data-elements were already entered into the EXCLUDE list per default, these are the system-
elements, that shall not be transferred. These elements are part of the standard, and will be determined in
the file MPExclude.ini. It contains the sections [Numelements] and [Textelements]. Directly after the
start of the section, there is key Number, which indicates, how many elements are part of this section. If you
want to add new elements or delete existing elements, you must ensure that the correct number of elements
is indicated that all these elements can be found. The file is stored in the program directory and thus applies
for all projects.
With the commands Insert and Delete you can insert or delete lines in the table.
Press button Standard to add all elements from file MPExclude.ini, if they are not yet in the Exclude
declaration.
Column Description
Element Enter here the name of the element, which shall be added to the Exclude declaration.
Description Here you can comment the element with a more detailed text.
this field and select from the dialog NUM (for num-elements) or TXT (for text-elements).
Note You can also mark and change several cells simultaneously. For this, click with the
right mouse button on one of the highlighted cells.
Notes
The Exclude declaration should be maintained very conscientiously, otherwise unwanted effects could
appear. If, for example, system-element _NewPic is not in registered in the declaration, all workstation will
switch to the same picture, when this was executed on a station.
You have also to take into account, that triggers to start specific actions, will only be transferred, if you have
defined this during planning of the project in exactly this way, otherwise actions could be executed twice.
Also data-elements which control the visibility of trend charts or Window objects must be added into the
Exclude declaration.
The Station definition table

In this table the network specific definitions for the different stations are made.
Every line in the table represents a station. For every station a station name, a data-element to trigger the
update, a start picture, a timeout time and a status element can be defined.
Column Description
Station Here is the number of the station for which the entry in the line shall apply.
Name Enter here the name for the station (max. 80 characters). The name is at disposal with the
system-element _MPStationName.
Note This system-element should be contained in the Exclude declaration, to permit every
station to enter its own name.
Update Enter here a num-element, which change starts the synchronization of data by the station.
Normally, a time-dependant system-element such as e.g. _Sec03 is entered.
Note During planning of the project, you have to take into account the transmission rate of the
network.
301
Column Description
Start Enter here the name of a start picture (per default picture MAIN will be started) for the
picture visualization on the respective station (max. 80 characters).
Timeout The network programs perform timeout monitoring to check, whether the stations are still
working. Possible values are 0 to 1800 seconds.
If a network station detects, that its master does not work anymore, it tries to login at the
master anew. During this time, the status element of the master is set on 2.
Note The timeout must always be longer than the update time.
Status Enter here a num-element, which receives the status information to the respective station. It
will be set by the master and transferred over the network system.
For the status applies:
0 = Station is offline
1 = Station is online
2 = Station will be signed off because of timeout
See also:
Master properties
Exclude declaration
Runtime
Network system
The network ability permits to visualize and operate an AMS Asset Graphics project via several computers.
For the identification, every workstation gets the so-called network station number. The computer with
station number 0 is the master. The master coordinates the data exchange and monitors the other stations,
therefore it has to be always in operation. An operation at the master station is possible in the same way as
at other stations.
Every computer has stored its database in the working memory in the same way as at a single computer
station. The data transmission is made via Ethernet and TCP/IP.
The AMS Asset Graphics network task performs the updates of data-elements by coordinating the contents
of the (local) database with the network database. There are two different types of network programs: the
Master runs on the master computer, Station on the other computers.
The Master
After a successful start the master opens a window, where the individual actions are shown, which the
master is performing during the start phase. If an error occurs, this will be notified with a message.
The Station
After a successful start the station opens a window, where the individual file actions shown, which the
station is performing during the start phase. If an error occurs, this will be notified with a message.
In the title bar, the station number of the computer will be shown, where the station was started.
To start a network project automatically on the master and all stations, the automatic network start must be
prepared.
302
Network
Automatic network start

With the program MPStart the runtime can be started automatically with the master.
This program (MPStart32.EXE) must be started automatically on the stations, when the computer starts. For
this, you have to add in the Windows Autostart folder.
If it has determined, that the master has been started, it will start the runtime on this station. There will be a
delay time, that you can define with an entry in file MPStartDelay.ini (in the project directory). If the master
is shut-down, MPStart will switch over automatically to the supervising mode. If the master is started with
various projects, MPStart will start also the stations with the corresponding projects.
The active stations will be displayed in black, inactive stations in gray. The current working mode is
displayed in the status bar.
Wait for master dialog

This dialog appears, when a station tries to get a connection with a network master. The progress bar
shows, that the search is active. As soon as the connection is established, the dialog will close
automatically.
Press button Cancel only, when the complete runtime shall be terminated.
Using
Configuration of network computers

First install AMS Asset Graphics on every computer with the setup program.
It is required to install a hardware-dongle at every workstation or you must configure the floating license
access.
To define the station number for a workstation, start program Configuration, select tab Network and set the
desired station number. On this tab IP address and port for the communication are also configured.
At every station you must configure the global data directory in this way that it addresses to the same
physical directory.
When pressing button OK or Accept, the settings will be written into the registration of that PC.
Note Since the entries will be accepted not before the first program start, it is necessary, to start all AMS
Asset Graphics programs anew to accept the entries.
See also
Creating a network project.
303
Creating a network project
There are three methods to run a network project.

At the first method (central administration of all files) all files, the project and program files, are stored at
one physical location in the network.
At the second method (local administration of single program files) the program files can be stored locally
on individual computers, while project files and network files are stored centrally at the same physical
location in the network. The installation on a local disk drive has the advantage, that loading of the program
can be done faster as via the network. Furthermore the network load will be reduced. This is primarily
important at relatively slow network drives via ISDN or when using modem connections.
At the third method (local administration of program- and project files) the program- and project files are
stored in subdirectories on a local disk drive. In addition to the advantage at the second method, the project
start will be faster, since the most project files are read from local directories.
Basic settings are made in the same way at all three methods. You have to proceed as follows:
1. Activate option Network project in dialog Runtime configuration in the Project Manager. Define
the programs for the master and for the stations which shall be started. Prerequisite for the
network mode is program Master for the Master computer and program Station at a Station
computer!
2. Define the data-elements in the Network Editor, which shall trigger the update and the Timeout-
times of the master and the stations. Make all other settings, which are useful for the project
(name, status, time synchronization, shut down of stations from the master). Edit the Exclude
declaration.
3. Check all editor documents on their network settings such as data storage of a table on a definite
station (see also tab General of a data storage table) or editing a process assignment table on a
definite station (see also tab Communication of a process assignment table).
4. You have to take into account, that the reaction time of the Eventjournal on the stations depends
on the network settings, since it operates with messages between master journal and station
journal. These messages will be transferred over the network system.
5. Please note, that the reaction time of trend charts, which operate with data storage files of
another station, depends on the network settings. The information of a storage will be transmitted
with messages. These messages will be transferred over the network system.
These three methods differ in individual points:
1. Central administration of all files

When using this method, all programs are started from one computer. Nevertheless, start the AMS Asset
Graphics setup on every computer where AMS Asset Graphics shall run. In this case you have to enter
always the same physical drive in the network as installation directory.
The directory, where the programs are stored, contains the project directory as subdirectory. In this
directory, which is at disposal for all computers as network drive, all data will be stored (e.g.
EXE\Project\MyProject\DS). You have to take the following into account:
Define the station number on every computer which is part of the network system.
2. Local administration of single program files

Define the station number on every computer which is part of the network system. Make sure, that all
computers are working on the same physical project path. This can be achieved with the global data
directory on tab Directories.
3. Local use of program- and project files in the runtime

Define the station number on every computer, which is part of the network system. Make sure, that all
computers are working on the same physical project path. This can be achieved with the global data
directory on tab Directories. In addition you must activate option Local data directory and enter the
directory name.
304
Network
See also:
Synchronizing a project
Automatic network start
Setup redundancy mode
First the Redundancy license options has to be enabled on every computer involved.
The network data-exchange is done with the TCP/IP-protocol. For this reason, a so called port number must
be defined. Other AMS Asset Graphics runtime programs use furthermore on the ‚normal‟ file access.
Settings for every PC

1. In Configuration the option Redundancy must be set.
2. The port number must be identical on every computer (here 2222).
Settings for the primary master
1. A master has Station number 0.

2. At the primary master the option Second network master is not set.
3. The address of the Secondary network master must be registered (IP addresses such as
192.8.200.66 are also possible).
305
Settings for the secondary master
1. A master has Station number 0.

2. At the secondary master the option Second network master is set.
3. The address of the Primary master must be registered (IP addresses such as 192.8.200.77 are
also possible).
306
Network
Settings for a station
1. The Station number must be entered.

2. The addresses of Primary and Secondary master must be registered (IP addresses such as
192.8.200.66 are also possible).
3. The redundancy main directory (shared data directory on the Secondary Master) has to be set
correctly.
More redundancy-settings:
The settings can be made in the PROJECT.INI in section Redundancy.
Example for a configuration (default values in parenthesis, entries in seconds):

[Redundancy]
PrimaryMasterStartDelay=8 (5)
SecondaryMasterStartDelay=30 (20)
MasterMasterTimeout=11 (10)
Before a master gets active it will wait for a delay time (PrimaryMasterStartDelay and
SecondaryMasterStartDelay), whether the other master is not already active. In doing so, e.g. the problem
of both masters are booting simultaneously after a power break, can be avoided. The master with the
shorter delay time will then get the active master.
The monitoring time between both masters will be defined with the entry MasterMasterTimeout.
More information on the redundancy status and the manual change of the active master can be found in
section System-elements for network.
307
Activity Log
Activity Logging
For every project, an activity log can be defined, to record operation actions at runtime and important actions
of single programs. The activity log entries are also intended for saving of changes in the editor programs.
Different log levels between 0 and 99 can be defined. If log level 0 was selected, no message is generated.
The log level for operator functions in the visualization is defined in the Graphic Editor, the log level for
operator functions in the Eventjournal in the Eventjournal Editor.
The entries in the activity log can be watched and printed with the Activity Log Viewer. Operation actions will
be recorded, independently from the fact, whether the Activity Log Viewer is started or not.
The following commands can be used in menu Configuration | Activity logging:
Dialog Activity logging

In this dialog you define, whether the activity logging shall be activated.
Set option Active and save your changes or close the dialog with button Cancel.
Dialog Activity logging editor programs

You can enter also changes at the editor programs into the activity log. When saving data, activity log
entries will be generated.
In this dialog you define a log level for every editor program.
Column Description
Editor In this column editor name is shown.
Log level Enter the log level for the editor.
The log level for start and exit of runtime programs can be defined in the dialog Runtime options.
See also
Viewer
Introduction
In the Activity Log user inputs and important actions of programs are recorded.
Which actions and user inputs are recorded into the activity log will be configured in various editors like
Project Manager, the Graphic Editor, the Eventjournal Editor, the Operation Log Editor, etc.
The activity logging itself is defined in the Project Manager.
The Activity Log Viewer displays the activity log. In order to find specific information, the Activity Log Viewer
has extensive sorting and filter options.
The Activity Log Viewer can display several views. The log messages are shown in a table.
309
You can assign different time periods and sort and filter options to a view. The summary of the settings is
called profile, which can be stored in a file and can be reused.
See also
Recording operator actions and system messages in the activity log (Step-by-step instructions)
New log view
Toolbar
General Operation
Toolbar
In the Activity Log Viewer specific toolbar the following commands are available:
Category
Select here one out of 2 categories:
Category Description
User This category includes all messages, which were triggered by an user action.
Applications This category includes all messages, which were triggered by the system, e.g. when there is
not enough memory available or when the printer does not respond.
All Select All to view both categories.
Select Profile
Select a profile here. Predefined are the profiles <All> and <Default>. These profiles cannot be changed
and stored with the same name.
Edit profile
Select this button to open dialog Profile properties.
Save profile
Click this button to save the current profile. When one of the profiles <All> or <Default> has been selected,
changes cannot be saved under the same name. Enter a new name for the profile in dialog Save as....
Optimize columns
Optimizes the width of the table columns that way, that all columns are visible.
Dialog Profile properties

In this dialog you configure on tab Time period, which period of the activity log will be shown and on tab
Table the displayed columns. On tab Sort and Filter you define, which sorting and filter functions are active.
310
Activity Log
Tab Period
On this tab you configure the span of the displayed period and whether it is displayed relatively or
absolutely.
Option Description
Relative Activate this option, if the period shall be displayed relative to the current date.
Period Here you define the number of days that shall be displayed.
End of period Here you determine the end of the displayed period. For example, if you leave the default
before setting before 0 days, the activity log will always be shown including the current day.
Absolute Activate this option, when the period shall be shown as absolute period.
From The first displayed day is defined here.
Until The last displayed day is defined here.
Tab Table
On this tab you configure the displayed columns.
Option Description
Available columns Here the columns are listed, which are still available.
Selected columns Here the columns are listed, which are selected and which are shown.
If you want to display a further column of the activity log, select it at the Available columns. Press the
button (->) to transfer the column to the Selected columns.
You can deselect a column with the button (<-).
Tab Sorting
On this tab you define sorting options for the view. Three criteria can be selected for the sorting. If the first
criterion doesn't produce any difference at several activity log entries, the second criterion will be used, then
the third.
Option Descriptions
Date When sorting on the date in descending order, the entries of the latest day will be set to the
top of the table.
Time With sorting criterion time, the entries will be sorted on the time of the day. When sorting on
the Time in descending order, the activity log entries with the latest time of the day can be
found at the top of the table.
Station At descending sorting on the station number, the activity log entries with the highest station
number are set to the top of the table.
User When sorting on user names in descending order, the activity log entries will be shown in the
table in alphabetic order. With descending sortings the entries will be sorted in the following
order: z...a, Z...A, 9...0.
Log level At descending sorting on the log level, the entry with the highest level is set to the top of the
table.
Program It will be sorted in alphabetical order according to the name of the program.
Type It will be sorted in alphabetic order according to the type of the entry. When sorting in
descending order, the warnings above are at the top of the list, then the information, then
the errors.
Event ID At descending sorting on the Event IDs, the activity log entry with the highest Event-ID will be
set to the top of the table.
Description It will be sorted in alphabetical order according to the text of the descriptions.
Comment It will be sorted in alphabetical order according to the text of the comments.
311
Tab Filter
This tab offers the possibility to set filter options for a view, this means, only those entries will be shown,
which match to the filter option.
It is possible to set filters for individual users, for a program, a station and the description.
Option Description
Type Activate one or several of the options, to permit viewing only entries of the desired type
(information, warnings, errors).
User When you want to have displayed only log entries, which are assigned to a specific user,
enter the user name here.
Program When you want to have displayed only log entries, which are assigned to a specific program,
enter the program name here.
Station To display only those log entries, which were created at a specific network station, enter the
station number here.
Description When you want to have displayed only log entries, which contain a specific text, enter the
text here.
Dialog New log view

When you select the menu command File | New a new log view will be opened.
In this dialog you select the project as well as a profile. The current project and the profile <Default> are
preset.
Log view (Table)

In a log view, the recorded information are displayed in a table.
The table can show the following informations:
Column Description
Date, The date and time, when the message was generated.
Time
Station The network station, where the message was generated.
User The logged-in user, when the message was generated.
If an alarm was acknowledged in the Eventjournal (MASTER), the user currently logged-in,
will be entered as user.
If an alarm was acknowledged in PageControl, 'PageControl' will be entered into the activity
log as user and the PageControl receiver name will be entered into field Comment.
If an alarm was acknowledged in a network system, the current user of the station will be
entered as user. The registered Time is the time, when the alarm was acknowledged by the
master.
When an alarm is acknowledged by an element, the current user of the master will be
registered as user together with the comment 'Acknowledged by element'.
Log level The level of the message.
Program The program, that has produced the message.
Type The type of the message (Error, Information or Alert).
Event ID The ID of the message (corresponds to the message as number).
Description The plain message.
When alarms are entered into the activity log, the alarm text appears here.
Comment A remark to the message.
312
Activity Log
Using
With the activity log operator inputs as well as important actions of individual programs are
recorded. Individual reports are recorded independently from the fact, whether the runtime program has
been started or not. Which actions and operator inputs are recorded in the activity log, are defined
with Project Manager, Graphic Editor, the Process Assignment Editor, etc.
Definitions for the activity logging are made with the Project Manager.
With the Activity Log Viewer you can watch the current activity log. Recording of messages in different levels
is controlled via the log level. To find specific information, the Activity Log Viewer offers extensive sorting
and filter options. The activity log is saved in the .mdb format, thus it can be used with external programs.

Enable activity logging
Define log levels for editor programs
Define log levels for starting and stopping runtime programs
Define log levels for input objects
Define log levels for acknowledgement in the Eventjournal
Define log levels for invalid telegrams in the process assignment
Start the Activity Log Viewer
Using the Activity Log Viewer
Enable activity logging

Open the relevant project (command Open in the toolbar Standard).
Select menu command Configuration | Activity logging | Definition to open dialog Activity
logging.
Set the option Active and close the dialog with Save.
Start the Activity Log Viewer
There are two ways to start the Activity Log Viewer:

Since activity logging operates independently from the runtime program, the viewer can be
started separately (command Activity Log Viewer in toolbar Runtime in the Project Manager).
The Activity Log Viewer can be started also together with the runtime program. For this you have
to proceed as follows:
Open the dialog Runtime configuration with the menu command Configuration | Runtime.
Select Activity Log Viewer from the list of standard programs into the Program list.
Using the Activity Log Viewer
Open a new log view (command New view in the toolbar). Select the desired project and one of
the profiles in the dialog New log view.
313
The profiles <Default> and <All> are predefined. Profile <Default> contains the columns Date,
Time, Users, Program and Description. Further profiles with more columns can be created at an
open log window.
Per default, the activity log of the current day is displayed. If you would like to watch another
period, select button Edit profile in the toolbar. In dialog Profile Properties you can set another
period on tab Period.
Select the columns to be displayed in the Log Viewer on tab Table. Shift the available columns
to the selected columns, if you want to display the columns, and in the opposite way, the
selected columns to the available ones if these shall not be shown anymore.
You can also define the order of the columns here. An available column will be inserted before
a selected, highlighted column. If no selected column is highlighted, the new column will be
displayed as the last one.
On tab Sort you define the sorting order. Select the sorting criterion and direction, e.g.
Ascending according to Date and Time.
On tab Filter the filter criteria can be defined to show only special records in the activity log, e.g.
only those entries which are assigned to operator Zimmermann.
You can save the settings of the profile properties permanently under a new profile. Click on
button Save profile in the toolbar. If you have worked till now with one of the predefined
profiles, dialog Save as will be opened. Enter the new profile name here and confirm the dialog
with OK. If you have changed the properties of a self-defined profile, the changes will be
saved immediately after pressing the button.
Define log level for editors
Make sure that the project, you want to edit, has been opened in the Project Manager.
Select the menu command Configuration | Activity logging | Editor programs in the main
menu... to open dialog Activity logging editor programs.
Type in the desired log level for every editor.
Confirm the dialog with Save to save your changes.
Define log level for input objects
Input objects as well as their log levels are defined in Graphic Editor.
Manager).
Open the picture.
Select the object that shall get another log level, e.g. a number, a text, a scrollbar, a slider, a
button or a graphic button, etc. Open dialog Properties with a double-click.
Select tab Input with Number or Text objects or tab Function at one of the other object types.
Enter the log level into the edit field Log level.
Close the dialog with OK and save the picture.
Define log level for input objects
Input objects as well as their log levels are defined in Graphic Editor.
Manager).
314
Activity Log
Open the picture.

Select the object that shall get another log level, e.g. a number, a text, a scrollbar, a slider, a
button or a graphic button, etc. Open dialog Properties with a double-click.
Select tab Input with Number or Text objects or tab Function at one of the other object types.
Enter the log level into the edit field Log level.
Close the dialog with OK and save the picture.
Define log level for start and stop of runtime programs

Open the relevant project in the Project Manager.
Open dialog Runtime configuration (button Runtime configuration in toolbar Standard).
Press button Options... to open dialog Options.
In the group Activity logging runtime programs you enter the log levels for Start and Stop of
the runtime programs.
Confirm the dialog with OK, dialog Runtime configuration also with OK, and save your changes.
Define log level for the acknowledgment in the Eventjournal

The acknowledgment of events is configured in the Eventjournal Editor as well as their log levels.
Start the Eventjournal Editor (command Eventjournal Editor in toolbar Development in the
Project Manager).
Open the relevant project.
Press button Group properties in the table specific toolbar to open dialog Group selection.
Select the group in which the acknowledgment shall get another log level and confirm the dialog
with Edit. Dialog Alarm group properties will be opened.
When option Acknowledgement necessary is on, you can enter the Log level.
Press OK in the dialog, close dialog Group selection and save your changes.
Record communication problems in the activity log

The log level for faulty telegrams at the process assignment is defined with the Process Assignment Editor.
Start the Process Assignment Editor (command Process Assignment Editor in toolbar
Development in the Project Manager).
Open the process-assignment table in which a activity log entry shall be generated in case of
faulty telegrams (button Open in the toolbar Standard).
Select tab Error handling.
Enter the desired log level into entry field Log level.
315
Operation Log
Editor
Introduction
AMS Asset Graphics does not only provide information on the current state of a plant, but also permits to
save data and to access on the stored data.
With the operation log, several protocols and reports can be generated, which can be watched, edited and
printed with the Operation Log Runtime. There are reports for a day, week, month and year. The reports
include the measuring values of the elements to be supervised in form of minimum, maximum, average and
sum values. The day reports are used to generate reports for a week, month and year. The data of the
reports can be displayed and printed also as diagram.
Runtime function
The data, generated during the runtime, are stored in a Microsoft SQL database. The MSDE (Microsoft SQL
server desktop engine) is used. Generally, the MSDE runs on the AMS Asset Graphics computer (in network
systems on the master). However, it is also possible to install the MSDE on a separate network server or to
use an SQL server, available in the network. This server must be prepared for the arising date volume.
During runtime defined data-elements are read from the database and calculated to single values. These
single values are saved in the database. If the hour changes (at 24 day values), a day value will be
calculated with the single values and stored in the database. At the change of the day, the day values will be
combined to a total day result. These total day values will then be summarized to week, month and year
values. The calculation function is defined in the Operation Log Editor.
To limit the data volume of the database, it must be defined, when the values of the relevant compression
level are to be deleted. Before deleting the data an export of them can be made.
The day, week, month and year data can be displayed with table views. These tables offer the possibility to
enter data manually.
A printout of data can be made via reports. These reports are defined in the Operation Log Editor or in the
Operation Log Runtime. It must be defined, which data shall be printed and in which form this shall be made.
Beside a printout on paper, the report can also be exported into other data formats such as PDF, bitmap,
XML, Excel, HTML etc.
Another form of displaying the data is the output as a diagram. Here, the data of different process variables
are shown as lines in a diagram.
See also
Protocol definition window
Diagram definition window
Protocol definition window

With this definition window the individual process variables are configured. The table has five tabs whereby
tab All presents a summary of the other tabs.
For the Description, the Designation and the Group name language texts also can be used instead of
static texts. The language text-element has to be entered with the following syntax: @__TX0003.
To display the contents of the language-elements in the editor, select command Display language texts
on/off in the toolbar. Then select a language in the list Switch language.
At the left of the toolbar you find an icon to open dialog Properties report.
317
With the menu command Edit | Open report definition and the selection in the dialog Report selection the
AMS Asset Graphics Report Designer will be started.
Column Description
Standard
ID Every definition line gets an ID as identification. This ID is generated automatically by
the program and has a great importance for the runtime. In the database all data with
this ID will be assigned to the corresponding process variable. Within a table the ID
must be unique. An exception are definitions with the line type copy.
Name In addition you can define here a name for the identification. Within a table the name
must be unique. This name is optional. It helps to retrieve the process variables in the
report designer. If no name was entered, DefID_X will be used in the report designer,
whereby X is used for the ID number. When changing the name, the report designer
definitions have to be adapted as well.
Element Here you have to enter the name of the num-element, which value shall be used for the
calculation of the process variable. Instead of a num-element a VBScript function can
also be used. In this case, the function name has to be extended by a () as identifier for
function, example: SumSpecial(). VBScript functions are drawn in green in the table.
The function is to implement on tab VBScript.
Description The description of the process variable is entered here.
Designation In this column the designation (short description, plant designation) of the process
variable can be entered.
Group Select with the right mouse button a group from dialog Group selection or enter the
group number.
Note You can also select multiple cells and then select a group.
Unit Enter here the unit such as e.g. h, m³, etc. This unit will be used for all reports. On tab
Miscellaneous you may define an individual unit for each of the reports (m³/d, m³/w,
m³/m, m³/a). These units will then have priority over this default unit.
Line type By clicking he right mouse button you can select the line type by using the dialog
Selection line type. Alternatively you can also enter the name of the line type.
Number format Configure here the total number of digits and digits after the comma, which shall be used
Total digits, to display the numerical values. This input is optional.
After digits
Functions A function defines how multiple value are summarized to a new value. A calculation is
made at every compressing level. A description of the functions can be found here.
Standard, Enter here the abbreviation for the function, or right mouse select a function via dialog
further columns Function selection, which shall be used as standard function.
If in the following columns another function is used, that function will have priority.
Instead of the standard functions VBScript functions can be entered. You have to
append () to this function name, example: MySum(). See tab VBScript compression.
Limit values
Overflow Enter her a number, which will be used as overflow limit for the sum function, when
calculating the single values from the scan values.
At the calculation the current value is compared with the previous value. If the difference
exceeds half of the overflow limit, a new difference will be defined under consideration of
an overflow case.
Example:
In column Overflow the limit is configured with 30000.
The value itself changes from 29000 to 2000: the difference 3000 is computed.
The value itself changes from 1000 to 22000: the difference -9000 is computed.
The process variable must not change by more than half of the overflow limit (e.g. from
500 on 15700), since otherwise a wrong difference will be calculated.
318
Operation Log
Column Description
Minimum These values are used as limits for the manual input.
Maximum When exceeding or falling below the limit the value can be displayed in different colors.
These parameters are optional.
Note The values Minimum/Maximum of the corresponding report type on tab
Miscellaneous have priority over this input.
Substitute values
Active With this option you can activate the using of substitute values. When active the process
value will be replaced by a substitute value, if the process value is outside the limits.
Minimum The upper and lower substitute limits will be entered as constant values here. In case of
Maximum a limit violation, the substitute value will replace the process value.
Value In this column the substitute value is entered.
Activation Enter here an element, which can force the use of the substitute value. If the element
has the value 1, the substitute value will be used.
Miscellaneous
Manual input Enter the access right, or click with the right mouse button to open dialog Select access
P-Level, right and to select a user right. During runtime, this authorization is used for the manual
Log input.
Enter a Log level to record manual inputs in the activity log.
Day view,
Week view,
Month view,
Year view
Visible Set the option, if the process variable shall be displayed in the corresponding view.
Min, These parameters are optional. Enter here the limit values for the corresponding view.
Max Especially when using the sum function, it is useful to have other limit values for e.g. the
month sums as for the day total sum. The values have a higher priority than Minimum /
Maximum on tab Limit values.
Dim This input is optional. Enter here a unit for the corresponding view (e.g. m³/d for the day
view).
Valid
From These parameters are optional. Enter a date from which the definition is visible, or after
To the line is hidden. The calculation is only performed, if the current day is within the range
limits. Outside the range limits the definition is not counted as process variable.

This dialog appears for the selection of a group.
If you click on button OK the selected group will be applied.
Dialog Function selection

With this dialog you can select a function. You can select a function with a double-click on a function or with
the button OK.
When you select User function, you have to enter the name of a VBScript function, followed by () into field
Parameter (User function see VBScript Compression).
A description of the functions you can find in chapter Functions (Operation log)
319
Dialog Properties report

In this dialog you determine the properties for reports.
Tab Database
On this tab you define the properties for the connection to the database. If marking field Standard is
selected, the MSDE instance inVISU_PMS on the local computer will be used (at a network system, the
master computer). Operating Log Runtime uses the database OperationLog and registers with user name
inVisuSystem and a predefined password. This user is available in the database. The SQL server
authentication will be used to login.
Remove the marking beside Standard, if you would like to use a special SQL server. Now, you can enter
name of the SQL server instance. The server name consists of computer name or IP address followed by
the name of the instance.
Examples of a server name:
ComputerABC\DB1
172.18.205.74\Protocols
Within an SQL server instance, a database must have been opened, the name of which you have to enter in
the dialog beside Database. For the login the fields User and Password are used. Also here, the SQL
server authentication will be used to login. The user must be authorized for reading and writing in the
database and he must be able to create tables.
Tab Definition
Define here name and resolutions for the report.
Option Description
Report name Enter the name here, which shall later on during runtime be displayed as identification to
the users. If you do not make any entry here, the file name of the definition will be shown
in square brackets (example: [report 1]).
Scanning During a scanning process, all data-elements will be scanned for the report definition and
stored for calculating the single values. If a VBScript function is used instead of a data-
element, this function will be called during the scanning procedure. Scanning of the
database is made with a maximum speed of 1/sec.
Every change If this field is highlighted, every change of an element will start a scanning process. If
there is no change at any of the elements, no scanning process will be carried out.
Trigger Enter here the name of a num-element, which starts a scanning process, as soon as its
value changes (Control-trigger). The amount of the change is irrelevant. You can use a
num-element which changes continuously (e.g. system-element _Sec01, which changes
its value every second). However, you can also select a num-element, that changes
discontinuously.
Time periods
Day value Select here one of the possible intervals for the day values. For every day X day values
will be calculated for each of the process variables. The number of the day values is
determined by the interval time. With an interval time of 2 hours this results in e.g. 12
values per day.
Single values Select here one of the possible interval times for the single values. For every day, X
single values will be calculated for each of the process variables. The number of the
single values is determined by the interval time. With an interval time of 15 minutes this
results in e.g. 96 single values per day.
Records per In this field it will be shown, how many records are stored in the database per process
day and variable and day.
definition line
320
Operation Log
Tab Groups
Up to 100 group names can be defined. The group names can be edited in this dialog. Every process
variable will be assigned to a group.
Tabs Compressing levels

The tabs Single values, Day values, Total day value, Total week values and Total month values have
identical designs. You can configure the respective compressing level on each of these tabs.
Option Description
Data
Database table For information purposes the database table name is displayed here. In this table the
data for the corresponding compressing level are stored.
Delete data after Define here, when the data of this table shall be deleted. Depending on the
compressing level the period is specified in days or months.
After each day change the system checks whether data have to be deleted.
At 0 the data will never be deleted.
Resources For information purposes, the consumption of the data volume is shown in the
database. For the calculation, the number of the process variables, currently in the
table will be taken into account. The percentage load of the MSDE is related to 2
GByte data, the limit value for the MSDE. This indication of the load is not very
precise and should therefore be considered only as reference value.
Export data Mark the field to export the data into a CSV file before deleting them.
before deleting
Destination Define here the name of a destination file to export the data. You can also use
variables in this definition.
D:\Export\$_Year\$_Month\data.csv.
Note If the file already exists, the data are appended to the end of the file.
Status
Set total state to The total value will be given status manual, if X input values have got status manual.
'manual', on If you enter 0 this function is deactivated.
Set total state to The total value will be given status substitute, if X input values have got status
'substitute', on substitute.
If you enter 0 this function is deactivated.
Tab Error handling
Option Description
Data
acquisition
Error code The last occurred problem at the data acquisition can evaluated with this element
Show error Set this option to report errors, which appear during the data acquisition, to the user.
dialog Especially if there are connection problems to an external SQL server.
Data
compression
Error code The last occurred problem at the data compression can evaluated with this element
Show error Set this option to report errors, which appear during the data compression, to the user.
dialog
321
Tab Miscellaneous
On this tab you define whether reports shall be indicated and operated during runtime, which access
authorization shall be required for this and whether these actions shall be entered into the activity log.
Option Description
Here you define the authorization (P-level) for an action and whether these action have to
be recorded in the activity log (Log).
The table has the rows:
Error Error messages can be recorded in the activity log.
messages
Report In this row you define password and log level for opening the report designer.
designer
Day view In this rows you define password and log level for opening the corresponding views.
Week view
Month view
Year view
Export
Column Mark this field, if you want to have a column heading in the 1. line of the CSV file.
names
first line
UTC time With this field you decide that time stamps are written in the UTC format. The UTC
(Universal Time Coordinated) format is a worldwide well-defined time.
If this option is not set, the local time is used for the time stamps.
CSV Here you define the separator char used for the CSV file.
separator
See also
VBScript compression – User functions for the calculation during the compression
VBScript – User functions for the calculation during scanning
Tab VBScript compression

In this VBScript Window you can use three different procedures to read or write operation log data.
Procedures for calculation during the compression.
Access on data via object ThisReport.
Function OnColChanged.
Procedures for calculation during the compression

If the runtime compresses data (e.g. hour values to a day total value), this is in general internally calculated
with standard functions (average value, sum function etc.). However, it is also possible to implement
individual procedures for the calculation. Simply write these procedures into this Script window by using the
following syntax:
322
Operation Log
Sub MyFunction (Values, NewValue)
End Sub
The procedure name (here MyFunction) can be entered in column Function instead of a standard
functions. For this, a "()" has to be appended to the function name (example: MyFunction()). You may
select any name for the procedure. If the function is available in the script and if it also has got the two
parameters, the function will be called at the calculation. If the function is not available, no calculation will be
made and the total value will be set on status invalid.
Parameter Values is a variable of type Values and parameter NewValue is of type DBValue.
Example:
Sub MySum (Values, NewValue)
Dim HelpDouble
HelpDouble = 0
Dim Anz
Anz = 0
For I = 1 To Values.Count
Set val = Values.Item(I)
If val.ItemState > 0 Then 'is valid?
HelpDouble = HelpDouble + val.ItemValue
Anz = Anz + 1
End If
Next
If Anz > 0 Then

NewValue.ItemValue = HelpDouble
NewValue.ItemState = 1
Else
NewValue.ItemState = 0
End If
End Sub
The above example shows an implementation of the sum function which is already available in the system.
All values of the array Values with a valid status are added up. If there is at least one valid value, the
variable NewValue will be set with the sum.
The following picture shows the use of this function:
323
Access on data via object ThisReport

Within this script page it is possible to access on all values with the help of object ThisReport.
The object has the following properties:
Option Description
DefRows DefRows is a collection of all definition lines. Every definition line can be read by an
item of the array (see DefRow). An access for writing is not possible.
GetColCells This function returns an object of type Cells. With parameter Type the data area is
(Type, ColTime) selected, where the data shall be read or written.
Define one of the following values:
0 for single values
1 for day values
2 for day total values
3 for week values
4 for month values
5 for year values
As time you provide a time stamp (date and time of the interval begin) by means of
which the data are addressed. With correct parameters the function returns an object
of type Cell (see Data types).
GetIntervalLenght With this function you can specify the interval time of single values and of day values.
(short Type) As parameter type please select 0 for the interval time of the single values and 1 for
the interval time of the day values.
The interval time will be returned in seconds.
TimeBaseUTC With this property you can activate the UTC mode of the VBScript interface. Is this
(bool Type) property is set to true, time stamps are in UTC. The default value is false.
Example:
Set F1 = CreateObject("PMS.NumEle")
F1.SetName("_F1")
dummy = F1.IsChanged
Sub OnRun
If F1.IsChanged Then
Set ColCells = ThisReport.GetColCells(1, date + TimeSerial(8, 0, 0))
ColCells.DefID(7).ItemValue = 67.5
ColCells.DefID(7).ItemState = 1
End If
End Sub
In the example above, at every change of element_F1, a value of 67.5 will be written in the hour value 8h of
today in the line with DefinitionID 7.
Function OnColChanged
At every interval change, e.g. at changes every 15 min, every hour, every day or every month, the function
OnColChanged will be called. Here you have the possibility to control the data once again after the interval
change. The function will be called also after a manual input.
324
Operation Log
Example:
Sub OnColChanged (TableType, ColDateTime)
Set ColCells = ThisReport.GetColCells(TableType, ColDateTime) 'get data cells
from column
If ColCells.DefID(8).ItemState > 0 And ColCells.DefID(7).ItemState > 0 Then
' add the 2 values
ColCells.DefID(9).ItemValue = ColCells.DefID(8).ItemValue +
ColCells.DefID(7).ItemValue
Else
End If
End Sub
In the example above the value of the line with DefID 7 will be added to the value of the line with DefID 8
and the result written into line 9.
Tab VBScript
In this VBScript you enter VBScript code, which is executed during the scanning process. Instead of a data-
element, a VBScript function name followed by () can be entered in column Element of table Definition. If
this function is found in this VBScript, it will be called. The return value must be a number.
Example:
Randomize ' Initialize random-number generator.
const MaxValue = 7000
const MinValue = 1000
Function Zufall
Zufall = Int((MaxValue - MinValue + 1) * Rnd + MinValue)
End Function
The example above returns random numbers in the range 1000 to 7000.
The following fig. shows the usage of this function:
Function OnInitRow
With the function OnInitRow the visibility of each row can be switched on or off. The function is called once
for each row of the definition while the view is opened.
325
Example:
Sub OnInitRow(TableType, DefID, bVisible)
If DefID = 2 Then
bVisible = 0
End If
End Sub
TableType is the type of the current table (2 for daily report, 3 for weekly reports, 4 for monthly report and 5
for annual report). DefID is the definition ID of the line. bVisible indicates whether the line is shown or
hidden. This variable is writable to control the visibility of the line.
Runtime).
A detailed description of the possible functions can be found in section VBScript.
VBScript data types
Type Values
This type is a collection of Value variables.
Option Description
Count Count is a field where the number of the value variables is stored. This field is read only.
Item(Index) With this function the individual values can be accessed. Every value is of type Value.
The access on a value is made via the Index, example: Item(5). The index must be a
value between 0 and Count.
PreviousValue (Version 6.0)
This variable serves the last value from the previous interval. The value is of type Value.
Sample: The data type values are the daily totals from the month of April. In this case the
variable PreviousValue contains the daily total of 31 March.
Type Value
This type contains an operation log value. Every value has a status, a time stamp, minimum and maximum.
Option Description
ItemState Status of the value.
ItemTime Time stamp of the value.
ItemValue The value itself.
MaxState Status of the maximum.
MaxTime Time stamp of the maximum.
MaxValue Value of the maximum.
MinState Status of the minimum.
MinTime Time stamp of the minimum.
MinValue Value of the minimum.
326
Operation Log
Type DefRows
This type is a collection of DefRow variables.
Option Description
Count Count is a field, where the number of the DefRow variables is stored. This field is read only.
Item(Index) With this function the individual DefRow variables can be accessed. Every value is of type
DefRow. The access on one of the DefRow variables is made via the index (example:
Item(5)). The index must have any value between 0 and Count.
DefID(ID) With this function, the individual DefRow variables can be accessed as well. However, the
access on one of the DefRow variables is made via the definition ID. The definition ID must
be valid, otherwise a zero will be returned.
Type DefRow
This type contains information on an operation log definition line. All variables can be read only.
Option Description
DefID Definition ID of the line.
Description Description text of the line.
ElementName Name of the AMS Asset Graphics data-element.
LineType Line type has the following values:
0 for automatic
1 for manual value
2 for title
PlantDataText Designation for the process variable
Type Cells
This type is a collection of Cell variables.
Option Description
Count Count is a field where the number of the Cell variables is stored. This field is read only.
Item(Index) With this function the individual Cell variables can be accessed. Every value is of the
type Cell. The access on one of the Cell variables is made via the index (example:
Item(5)). The index must have any value between 0 and Count.
DefID(ID) With this function, the individual Cell-variables can be accessed as well. However, the
access on one of the Cell-variables is made via the definition-ID. The definition-ID must
be available, otherwise zero will be returned.
Value(IDName) With this variable a direct access to the values is possible. Pass the identification name
as parameter. A read and write access is possible. If the value is written, the calculated
flag is added to the status of the value.
If you read the value from an element which can not be found with the identification
name, or if there is no value, a runtime error is generated.
Sample:
Set ColCells = ThisReport.GetColCells(TableType,
ColDateTime)
With ColCells
On Error Resume Next
.Value("Total") = .Value("Quantity1") +
.Value("Quantity2")
.Value("Temperature") = 18.9
End With
In the example above, the command On Error Resume Next is used to handle a
possible runtime error. The assignment of 18.9 is also done, when for example, the
Quantity2 has no value, and the addition is interrupted by an runtime error.
327
Type Cell
This type is identical to type Value. As expansion, it still contains the DefID as variable for reading.
Type DBValue
This type is identical to type Value. As expansion, it contains in addition the variable WriteDBValue. Per
default this variable is predefined with True. If the variable is set to False during a calculation for the
compression, the storing of the value into the database will be suppressed.
Status values:
Every status variable may be an OR-combination of the following values:
Value Description
0 Value is incorrect.
1 Value is OK.
2 Manual input (value was edited by a user).
4 Manual input (value was set to manual input by the system, at the calculation, X values were set
on manual state).
8 Value smaller than minimum.
16 Value has exceeded the maximum.
32 Value is a substitute value.
64 Value is a calculated value.
Dialog Properties diagram

In this dialog the properties of a diagram are defined.
These properties include:
Tab Lines
With each of the lines of the table you can to define one line for the diagram.
Option Description
Data item With the right mouse button you open a the dialog Select data-element. With the
Report/Variable selected data-element you define the process variable to be displayed as line.
Range of values For every data item in the diagram you can assign individual ranges of values. Thus,
From/To data items with various ranges can be compared.
Color Color of the line
Opt. With this button you open a dialog with special properties for the line.
328
Operation Log
Tab General
Option Description
Background
Color1 / Color2 Here you define the colors for the background. The background is drawn with a
color gradient from left (Color1) to right (Color2). If you do not want to have a color
gradient select two identical colors.
Password protection Set here the right to open the configuration of the diagram during runtime. Enter the
right as number or click with the right mouse button to open the dialog Select access
right.
Log level Enter a Log level greater than 0 to record the storing of the diagram properties into
the activity log.
Format x-axis
Color Here you define the color of the label.
Alignment Here you define the alignment of the label. The orientation is described by an angle
between 0 and 90.
Number Here you define the number of the vertical grid lines and of the appropriate labels.
An input is only possible, if the option Automatic is off.
Automatic If you want to have an automatic labeling set this option. In this case, the number of
vertical grid lines will be adjusted automatically to the width of the diagram.
Year, Month, Day, You can define whether the x-axis shall be labeled with Year, Month, Day, Hour,
Hours, Min, Sec Minute and/or Second.
Format y-axis
Align left Here you enter the orientation for the text at the left / right y-axis. Valid values are -
Align right 90 to 90°.
Automatic If you want to have an automatic labeling set this option. In this case, the number of
horizontal scale subdivisions will be adjusted automatically to the height of the
diagram.
Number Here you define the number of the horizontal grid lines and of the appropriate labels.
An input is only possible, if option Automatic is off.
Tab Grid
On this tab you configure the design of the diagram grid. Minor grid lines subdivide the main grid in addition
and are shown as dotted lines.
Option Description
Horizontal/Vertical Here you define the design of the horizontal/vertical grid lines.
Active Set this option to show grid lines.
Major grid color Configure the color of the major grid lines.
Line thickness Select the width of the lines with a number between 1 and 9.
Minor grid color With this command you change the color of the minor grid lines.
Minor grid lines If you want to have displayed minor grid lines in between the horizontal main grid
lines, enter the corresponding number here.
Border color If you want to change the border color press this button.
329
Tab Print
The description of tab Print you find here here.
In the Report Designer you will see a variable with name Trend. You can move this variable in the page to
place the diagram on the paper.
Diagram definition window

In this window you define a diagram.
In a diagram, process variables are displayed in form of a line chart. In the definition window you see a
preview of the diagram.
The window has a toolbar with specific commands to configure the properties of a diagram.
Properties of the diagram

Data range and time period
Dialog Selection line type
With this dialog you configure the function of the line.
Following line types are available:
Line type Description

Automatic Select this type for process variables, which perform the scanning process continuously and
which determine and calculate the data automatically.
Manual value This line type will also be counted as process variable. However, no scanning process will
be executed. This line type is generally used for manual inputs.
Title This line type is not counted as process variable. No data are generated in the database.
The text can be used in the report as group title.
Copy This line type is not counted as process variable, and no scanning process will be executed.
Enter a ID of another line in the column Identification ID. At runtime the data from this line
is shown.
Dialog Data range and time period

With this dialog you define the data source and the period, used to display the diagram.
As data source the values of the different compression levels can be chosen.
The following types of values are available:
Single values, day values, total day values, week values, month values and year values.
On the one hand, you determine the period with the duration in days, weeks, months or years and on the
other hand with an offset to the current time. The offset is defined also in days, weeks, months or years. An
offset of 0 will shift the end (right side of the diagram) on the endpoint of the current day, week, month or
year (depending on your choice). An offset of 1 means preceding day, week, month or year.
Beside begin and end, the start and end date will be displayed for control purposes.
330
Operation Log
Examples:
Current month:
Duration: 1 month
Offset: 0 months
The day before yesterday:

Duration: 1 day
Offset: 2 days
Previous year:
Duration: 1 year
Offset: 1 year
The last 7 days:

Duration: 1 week
Offset: 0 days
Dialog Select data-element

This dialog offers all process variables for choice.
If several reports have been defined, you can select one in the group Report.
In the group Values all process variables of the report are shown. Select a process variable and click on OK
(or a double-click with the mouse).
Dialog Report selection

There are two different type of report views: time tables and value tables. These two types have different
types of reports for day, week, month and year views.
The reports with time tables display each single period in one column. The process variables are printed
line-by-line.
Reports with value tables display the values of the process variables in the columns. In every line a value of
the corresponding time period is displayed (e.g. 31 lines with 31 day values).
Define time period and type and open one of the offered reports.
With button New you open a report with name Default. If this report doesn't exist, it will be created
automatically.
Dialog Color settings

In this dialog you configure the text colors used to display the values in the table.
Text colors Description

Manual inputs This color is used if a value was manually entered by an user.
Combined If a configured number of input values has the status 'manual' the total value (called
manual combined manual) can also get the status 'manual'. Here you define the color for this
status.
Substitute Color for values which were automatically replaced by the Operation Log Runtime (see
values Limit Values).
Minimum Color for values which have fallen below the minimum.
Maximum Color for values which have exceeded the maximum.
331
Functions
The functions determine, how the output value is to calculate from the input values.
Input values can be the following: Scan values, single values, day values, total day values, week values and
month values.
The output value is the value that contains the result of the function.
These functions are used at the following conversions:
Scan values to single value
Single values to day value
Day values to total day value
Total day values to week value
Total day values to month value
Month values to year value
Token Function Description

M Average With the average function, the input values are summarized to an output
value according to the arithmetical average calculation.
S Sum When calculating scan values to single values, the differences between the
scan values are added. The differences are formed under consideration of
the configured overflow limits.
At the other calculations, this function sums the input values up to the
output values.
S* Sum (System down) The behavior of this function is identical to that of the sum function. If the
computer was switched off or if the Operating Log Runtime was stopped,
the last scan value (last value before the stop) is used when calculating the
single values.
L Last value At this function the result always has got the value of the last input value.
I [s] Integral With the integral function the input values are multiplied with the time
I [m] difference to the last value (in seconds). These products will then be
I [h] summed up to the output value.
I [d] Use the functions with process variables with the following units:
I [s] quantity per second
I [m] quantity per minute
I [h] quantity per hour
I [d] quantity per day
I* [s] Integral (System The behavior of this function is identical to that of the integral function. If
I* [m] down) the computer was switched off or if the Operating Log Runtime was
I* [h] stopped, the last scan value (last value before the stop) is used when
I* [d] calculating the single values.
E+ Positive extremum With this function, the detected maximum values will be entered as single
value, day value, day total value etc. In this way, e.g. the year value
indicates the largest value, that was detected in the scan values over the
total year.
E- Negative extremum Same function as the E+ function, however with respect to the minimum.
- No function Select this function, if no calculation shall be executed during the
compression. No value will be written into the database.
User function If you use a user function you must enter the name of a VBScript function
followed by () in the edit field Parameter (for example: MySum(), see tab
VBScript compression). Instead of the implemented standard functions this
VBScript function will be called for the calculation of the output value.
332
Operation Log
AMS Asset Graphics Report Designer

With the AMS Asset Graphics Report Designer you configure the design of the printout.
The definitions will be saved in files with the extension LST in the in subdirectory BP of the project directoy.
The operation log provides data about different variables and fields. Normally, the contents of variables
remain unchanged on every printed page, fields change within every table line.
Note At the opened report designer, the help function can be opened with button F1.
Every value is provided with a definite structure, in the following called value structure.
In the following picture, you find the different variables, provided for every value of the operation log.
In the following table the individual variables of the value structure are described.
Variable Description
Value The value as number.
Value_Str The value as string. If the value is invalid, this string will contain "- - -".
Time Time stamp of the value as date/time variable.
Time_Str Time stamp as string.
State Status of the value. See section data type Values.
Color Dependent on the status the color will be passed as RGB value.
Comment The remarks for the value.
Min
Value The minimum as number.
Value_Str The minimum as string. If the value is invalid, this string will contain "- - -".
Time Time stamp of the minimum as date/time variable.
Time_Str Time stamp as string.
State Status of the minimum.
Color Dependent on the status of the minimum the color will be passed as RGB value.
Max Same structure as Min, however with the values of the maximum.
333
Variables
Normally, the contents of variables remain unchanged on every print page. Both report types (time tables
and value tables) have the same variables.
Example of a process variable with name Sample_1:
The following variables are provided by the Operation Log in the AMS Asset Graphics Report Designer:
General
General.Name Text variable, includes the name of the report (see tab definition)
General.Date Date of the current view
General.Day Day of the current view
General.Month Month of the current view
General.Year Year of the current view
General.NumberValues This field is only available at reports with time tables. It contains the number of
columns, e.g. 30 for 30 days.
General.Comment Text variable; includes the remarks on the current view.
Process variables Every process variable is provided by a structure in the report designer. The
name of this structure is defined by the Identification ID or by the
Identification Name (see description column ID and Name Protocol definition
window).
Sample_1 Identification name of the process variable.
Description Description of the process variable.
TagName Name of the data-element.
nDigits Number of digits for formatting
nPostCommaDigits Number of digits after the comma for formatting
Day, Week, Month, The structure of these four variable structures is identical.
Year
Unit Unit of the corresponding variable
Min Minimum of the corresponding variable
334
Operation Log
Max Maximum of the corresponding variable
Current Complete value structure of the current day, week, month or year value.
Previous1 Complete value structure of the previous day value, previous week value,
previous month value or last year's value.
Diagram In this branch all available diagrams are listed. If you pull a diagram on the page
via drag & drop, the diagram will be printed here.
The displayed period depends on the diagram settings and the period of the
current view.
Example:
The definition of the period of the diagram includes that the preceding month
shall be reported. In the month view you have selected January 2007. In the
report a diagram with the data of December 2006 is printed.
Fields
Fields are variables, which will have new data in every line of a table. The available fields depend on the
report type. Report types with time tables contain other fields than reports with value tables.
Fields in reports with time tables
Description Description of the process variable
PlantData Designation
Group.Name Group name as text
Group.Number Group as number
Function The used function as string (see Functions)
Unit Unit
DefID Identification ID
Type Type of the line. See data type DefRow.
Summary Complete value structure with the summary of the current day, week, month or year
value.
Val_x Complete value structures with individual values (e.g. all day values in the month report).
335
Fields in reports with value tables
From, To Every line (every dataset of the field) in the table contains for every process variable a
value for a definite time period (e.g.: days in the month report). This period is passed
in the variables From and To, whereby From defines the start and To the end of the
period.
Process variables Complete value structure for every process variable.
Example here: Sample_1
Runtime
Overview
The Operation Log Runtime generates data from the current values of the AMS Asset Graphics database
and saves them in an SQL database.
With this user interface, the stored data can be displayed in form of Day views, Week views, Month views
and Year views.
The data of these views can be changed with manual inputs. The changes are marked and can be made
undone.
Furthermore, a graphic display of the data from the SQL server is possible in a Diagram view.
Via the toolbar or menu File | Open you can open a report view or a diagram view.
Report views
The report views show the operation log data of a defined period in tabular form. Several views can be
opened for one or several reports.
There are 4 types of views: day, week, month and year.
The table shows the each process variable in a separate table line.
The first columns are Description and Unit, followed by the summary with minimum and maximum
values, then followed by special columns:
At a day view the single day values then follow.
At a week view the single day total values then follow.
At a month view the single day total values then follow.
At a year view the 12 month values then follow.
Via the context menu you can open a dialog to enter remarks to each value. These remarks are shown with
a tooltip text and are available in the AMS Asset Graphics Report designer. Cells with remarks are marked
red on the top left corner.
336
Operation Log
Every report view has a special toolbar with the following commands:
Button Description
Date control With this control element you select a date or a date range.
Manual input With this command you can toggle the manual input mode. This mode is available to avoid
mode inadvertent or unauthorized data input. This command can also be found in the context
menu of the table.
Abstract With this command the special columns are switched on and off.
Show single (This command is only available in a day view.)
values With this command you can display the dialog with the single values of a process variable.
Report With this command you can start the AMS Asset Graphics Report designer. The dialog
design Report selection will be opened. Having made the choice of a report, the designer will be
opened.
Report With this command you open the report selection dialog to print or export a report.
output
Remarks With this command you open a dialog to edit the remarks on the current view.
Diagram view
A diagram view displays the data of one or several process variables as a trend chart.
You find the following commands in the toolbar in the upper range of the diagram view:
Button Description
Settings With this command you open dialog Properties diagram. Among other things you define
which process variables shall be displayed.
Print This command prints the current view on the printer.
diagram As alternative to the printer you can export the views in the formats e.g. HTML, PDF, RTF
etc.
Time Opens the dialog Data range and time period.
period
<< 365 and These commands shift the displayed period by one year to the left or to the right.
>> 365
<< 31 and These commands shift the displayed period by one month to the left or to the right.
>> 31
<< 7 and These commands shift the displayed period by one week to the left or to the right.
>> 7
<< 1 and These commands shift the displayed period by one day to the left or to the right.
>> 1
^v2 This command doubles the displayed range in vertical direction.
v^2 This command halves the displayed range in vertical direction.
^^ With this command the displayed range is moved vertically up.
vv With this command the displayed range is moved vertically down.
337
In the context menu you find the following commands:

Menu Description
command
Default range This command restores the original data and time ranges.
With this function, the zooming with the mouse is made undone and the original range
set again.
Time period Same command as in the toolbar.
Tracking dialog Values at a definite time stamp are shown in a dialog (see tracking views).
Tracking ruler With this command the tracking ruler will be switched on and off (see tracking views).
Settings Same command as in the toolbar.
You save the settings of the diagram with the menu commands File | Save or File | Save as.
Dialog Report selection

With this dialog you select a report.
Select a report in the list and press the OK button. Alternatively, the desired report can be selected with a
double-click.
Dialog Single values

This dialog shows the single values of a process variable. The name of the process variable is shown in the
title. In the table you see a single value in every line together with maximum and minimum. The data can be
selected with the mouse and copied by drag & drop e.g. to Excel.
With an activated input mode an input on the single value, of the minimum and the maximum is possible.
Note This input can not be undone.
Dialog Remarks
In this dialog you can edit on the one hand the remarks from the currently displayed day, week, month or
year. In this case in the head of the dialog the report name is shown. If the dialog is opened with the context
menu of the table, the remarks to a value are edited. The associated data-element is shown in the head
area and the cell in the table is marked with a red background color.
Via button Save you close the dialog again.
338
Maintenance
Editor
Introduction
The maintenance module serves the preventive maintenance, for this purpose it compares setpoints and
actual values of the operation intervals. In the maintenance database all maintenances are registered, that
were performed.
With the Maintenance Editor you define the individual maintenance tasks.
Among others, a maintenance task will be defined with the following settings:
Description of the task (e.g. replacement of carbon brush, fan motor)
Designation of the unit (e.g. K_2045_LM)
Definition of the operation hours or the switching cycles until the next maintenance is due.
Data-element for the detection of operation hours or switching cycles.
Operating hours or the switching cycles are evaluated and compared with the preset values. In a table view
the percentage rate of the maintenance intervals, that have already passed, will be displayed. With a
configurable notification-element you can trigger an alarm in the Eventjournal, when reaching a limit value.
It is possible to show information or instructions for every maintenance task. Furthermore, remarks can be
entered for every task.
A executed maintenance will be entered in a special input mask. Date, time, user and all remarks that were
entered, are stored with the maintenance. In a table view all performed maintenances are displayed.
Network mode
When working in network mode, the calculation of runtime data is only made at the master. The
Maintenance Runtimes on stations are only viewer and you can make manual inputs.
When manual inputs on setpoints shall be possible, a write permission on the definition file of the
maintenance (Maintenance.ilH) in the project directory is required.
See also
Maintenance definition window
Dialog Properties Maintenance
Design of the maintenance database
User interface
The Maintenance Editor is designed as MDI-application, this means you can configure the maintenance
settings of several projects at the same time.
Menu Edit fas the following special command:
Design of the reports

During runtime there are two views: the maintenance view and the maintenance history view.
For each of the views, a report definition (layout) can be made.
There are respective menu commands for this. With these two commands you open the AMS Asset
Graphics Report Designer to edit corresponding layout.
See also
General Operation
339
Dialog Properties Maintenance
Tab Definition
On this tab you set the parameters for the database connection of the maintenance database.
Option Description
Database
Standard If this option is set, all other edit fields are disabled. Maintenance Runtime uses then the
standard SQL-server instance INVISU_PMS In a network project the database on the Master
is used otherwise the database on the local computer.
Server Name of the SQL-server.
Examples:
’.\inVISU_PMS’ local SQL-server with the instance name inVISU_PMS.
’ServerXY\inVISU_PMS’ SQL-server running on computer ServerXY with the
instance name inVISU_PMS.
Database Name of the database, e.g. Maintenance.
User With this user name is used to log on the database.
Password Password for login.
Tab Print
In this tab you define parameters for printing.
Option Description
Title
Main title Here you enter a name for the maintenance definition. The name can be used within the
report designer, e.g. in the title, for printing.
Subtitle 1 – Beside the main title, another four texts can be entered, which can also be used in the report
4 designer.
Tab Groups
On this tab, the group properties of the maintenance is defined. Up to 100 groups can be defined.
Option Description
Number Group number
Name Name of the group. This name will be shown in the maintenance table.
On tab VBScript you can program special calculations and analyses for the maintenance.
340
Maintenance
Maintenance definition window
Maintenance tasks are configured in the maintenance definition window. The data are presented in a table.
The table is subdivided in tabs whereby tab All presents a summary of the other tabs.
For the description, the designation and the group name, language texts also can be indicated instead of
static texts. The language-element has to be entered with the following syntax: @__TX0003.
To show the contents of the language-element in the editor, select command Display language texts
on/off in the toolbar. Adjust the desired language with Switch language list.
Column Description
Standard
Element Here you have to enter the name of the element, which value shall be used for the
calculation of the actual value.
Description The description of the unit is entered here.
Designation In this column the designation (brief description) of the unit is entered.
Group Select with the right mouse button a group from dialog Group selection or enter the
desired group number.
Note You can change several group at the same time.
Unit Enter here the unit such as e.g. h, ltr etc.
Setpoint In this column, the setpoint for a maintenance is predefined. Depending on the
function, the setpoint is entered as number or as time period. Time periods will be
predefined in hours.
Function Here you enter the function for the computing of the maintenance. You can enter a
function by typing in the function name or select one with the dialog Function selection.
Miscellaneous
Element Same column as in tab Standard of the table.
Overflow If an external operating hour counter or an external pulse counter is defined, an
overflow limit can be defined in this column.
An overflow is detected, when the value of a counter is smaller than the previous
scanned value.
When an overflow occurs the limit will be added internally. Overflow limits are e.g. 255
at an 8-bit-counter or 65535 at a 16-bit-Counter.
If no overflow limit was entered, no evaluation of overflows will be made.
Notification You can enter here a num-element, which can indicate the status of the maintenance
Element and for a device. If the current value is equal or greater than the Limit value (values in
Limit value percent) the element is set on 1, otherwise it has the value 0.
Info text Here you can indicate an additional text (RTF-Format), to be shown during runtime.
There is a possibility, to show an additional explanatory text for every maintenance
line, e.g. maintenance instructions, information on the unit, spare part lists or
manufacturer information. During runtime, this text will be indicated on a separate
display.
In this line you enter the number of the additional text that shall be loaded, when the
maintenance line is selected in the runtime. The text itself is contained in a file with
name IH_INFO_x.RTF, which must be stored in the project directory. At this, the x
corresponds to the current language, i.e. IH_INFO_0.RTF for German or
IH_INFO_1.RTF for English.
The assignment of an additional text to a maintenance line is done with numbers.
Every additional text in the RTF-file will be introduced by a line with designation
##xxxx, whereby xxxx describes the number of the additional text.
341
Column Description
##1
This is the additional text, which will be shown as additional
text with number 1.
All lines up to the next designation are part of additional text
1.
##3
This is the text, which will be shown as additional text with
number 3.
Edit the additional text with an editor, e.g. WORDPAD.EXE. With WORDPAD it is also
possible to integrate graphics into the additional text.
Def-ID This Def-ID is generated automatically by the program and has a great importance for
the runtime. In the database all data with this ID will be assigned to the corresponding
process variable. Within a table the ID must be unique.
Manual inputs
Element Same column as in tab Standard of the table.
Edit total value With this column you permit the user to change the total value with manual inputs. This
is necessary e.g. at the replacement of components in a plant.
Active, If manual inputs are allowed, this can protected by an access right (P-level). With a
P-level, right-click you can open dialog Access Right to select the right.
Log If you enter a Log level greater 0, the action will be recorded in the activity log.
Edit definition With this column you permit the user to change the definition. When this column was
marked, a new setpoint and a new notification limit can be entered.
Active, If manual inputs are allowed, this can protected by an access right (P-level). With a
P-level, right-click you can open dialog Access Right to select the right.
Log If you enter a Log level greater 0, the action will be recorded in the activity log.
Execute maintenance
P-Level and Log You can protect the execution of the maintenance by an access right (P-level). With a
right-click you can open dialog Access Right to select the right.
If you enter a Log level greater 0, the maintenance action will be recorded in the
activity log.

This dialog appears when you right-click on a cell in column Group in the Maintenance definition window.
This dialog appears for the selection of a group.
If you click on button OK, the selected group will be entered into the cell.
Dialog Function selection

This dialog appears when you right-click on a cell in column Function in the Maintenance definition window
to select a maintenance function.
Press the corresponding button to select the function. The dialog closes and the selected function will be
entered into the cell.
Button VBScript Function can only be used, when you had entered a function name before.
342
Maintenance
Functions for the calculation of the maintenance

The following functions can be used for calculation of actual values:
_Sum extern This function uses an external counter.
Die Maintenance Runtime uses the element value directly as operation number.
If an overflow limit is defined, the program will follow it.
_Sum intern This function performs an edge detection to increment the operation number.
If the value changes from 0 to 1 (or another value unequal 0), the internal
operation counter will be increased by 1.
_Runtime The runtime function does not require an element as input parameter. The time,
since the first start of the Maintenance Runtime, is used to calculate the
operating time. This function is used at tasks, which have to be performed in
definite time periods (e.g. every 3 months).
_Operating hours extern This function uses an external operating hour counter.
The value is specified in hours. Possibly the value must be scaled in the
Process Assignment or in the OPC Client.
The Maintenance Runtime uses the element value directly as operating hour
counter.
If an overflow limit is defined, the program will follow it.
_Operating hours intern This function uses an element state to calculate the operating hour.
The time, when the element has the value 1, will be measured internally and
then be added to the actual value.
VBScript function With a VBScript function an individual calculation of the actual value is possible
In this entry field you can enter a function name. This function will be called in
the VBScript for the maintenance table (see dialog Properties Maintenance).
The function in the VBScript must have the following syntax:
Sub FunctionName (Value, EleValue, DefID)
End Sub
FunctionName is the placeholder for the function entered in the edit field.
The following parameters are passed to the function:
Value current value and new value at a value assignment within the
function.
EleValue current value of the database-element.
DefID Definition-ID of the current maintenance line.
Design of the maintenance database

The data of the maintenance tasks and performed maintenances are stored in a database. The database is
addressed by the runtime module over ADO (ActiveX data Objects). To assure the function of the runtime,
there must be an ADO driver in the system, suitable to the database. The driver for SQL and MSDE can be
found on the PMS CD in directory Extras.
During runtime, the data will be refreshed once per minute.
The following tables must be available in the database:
343
Table EditorDefinition
In this table the information from the definition of the editor are stored.
Column Description Type Length
ID Consecutive table ID. int 4
DefID Unique identification number of the definition line. int 4
Description Description (plain text) of the maintenance task. nvarchar 80
PlantData Designation of the unit. nvarchar 20
GroupID Group number (see table Groups). int 4
Unit Unit for the maintenance task. nvarchar 20
NominalValue Setpoint of the maintenance task. float 8
NotifyLimit Limit value for the notification-element.. tinyint 1
Table Groups
Here you find the Group settings.
GroupID Unique identification number of the group. int 4
Name Group name. nvarchar 50
Table Maintenance
Here you find the actual data of the different maintenance tasks. If definition lines are deleted in the editor,
the relevant data of this table will be deleted at the moment of starting the runtime.

ActValue Actual value (e.g. operating time or number of the switching float 8
actions) of the maintenance task.
TotalValue Total value for the maintenance task. float 8
EditActiveOnStation This value will be set on the station number, where a manual int 4
input is presently active.
LastValue Last value for calculation. float 8
Notes Remarks. nvarchar 4000
344
Maintenance
Table MaintenanceHistory
In this table you find all performed maintenances. This table grows with every registered maintenance. The
datasets will not be deleted. In general, the number of maintenances, will not lead to disk space problems.
However, if a problem arises, due to many maintenances, the data have to be deleted manually.
MaintenanceHistoryID Consecutive table ID. int 4
MaintenanceDateTime Date / time, when the maintenance was registered. datetime 8
ActValue Value of the maintenance task at the time of the float 8
maintenance.
NominalValue Setpoint at the time of the maintenance. float 9
TotalValue Total value at the time of the maintenance. float 8
MaintenanceUser User, who has entered the maintenance. nvarchar 32
Station Network station, where the maintenance was entered. smallint 2
Info Information text, edited by the user when entering the nvarchar 3960
maintenance.
Table Settings
In this table you find informations about the database design and the definition of the Maintenance Editor.
ID Consecutive table ID. int 4
Version Version number of the database structure. int 4
InstDefinitionTime Date / time of the last change of definition. datetime 8
AMS Asset Graphics Report Designer

With this designer you configure the layout of a report. The definitions will be saved in files with the
extension LST. These files are stored in the project file in subdirectory IH.
The report layout for the maintenance is stored in file Maintenance.lst. The settings for the maintenance
history is stored in file MaintenanceHistory.lst.
The two LST-files can also be copied into directory IH with the Windows Explorer. For this, you do not have
to generate anew the definition for each of the projects.
Note At the opened report designer, the Help function can be opened with button F1.
Runtime
Maintenance Runtime
With the Maintenance Runtime you can supervise the condition of the maintenance jobs. There are 3
different views, which can respectively be switched on or off.
The Maintenance view displays the current operating times and switching cycles in a table.
In the Maintenance history view you see the performed maintenances.
The Maintenance info view shows an additional text for the currently selected maintenance.
345
See also
Menu commands
Additional information
Remarks for a maintenance job
Executing a maintenance
Edit the total value
Edit setpoints
Commands
In the Maintenance Runtime you can use the following commands.
Menu File
Command Description
Exit With this command you terminate the Maintenance Runtime.
Print The Info view will be printed. However, before this, a dialog for the choice of the printer
will be shown.
Print preview A Print-preview for the current additional info will be displayed.
Printer this command opens dialog Printer settings to select the printer and to define the printer
settings port.
Menu Edit
The menu Edit includes the following commands:
Remarks
Select this command to show or enter the remarks for the current line in the maintenance table. The same
function can be activated with Ctrl+B.
The dialog Remarks will be opened.
The text is displayed in the dialog and can be edited. Via button Save you close the dialog again.
Executing maintenance
Select this command to register a maintenance for the current selected line. The same function can be
activated with Ctrl+W.
The dialog Maintenance on 'xx' will be opened.
In field Remarks you can edit information for the maintenance. With command Maintenance executed the
maintenance will be registered and the dialog closed. Now, the maintenance data will be entered into the
maintenance list with the current time, the current user and the entered remarks. Furthermore, the current
maintenance interval will be reset on 0.
Note In network mode this dialog can only be opened, if the current maintenance line is not being edited on
other station.
Edit total value

Select this command to set a new total value for a maintenance job. An input on the total value is necessary,
if e.g. a unit is replaced. The same function can be activated out with Ctrl+G. Possibly you have to login
before this dialog is opened.
The dialog Edit total value will be opened.
After confirmation with OK the total value will be set and the actual value of the maintenance job is set to 0.
other station.
346
Maintenance
Edit setpoints
Select this command to change the setpoint value of this definition. Possibly you have to login before this
dialog is opened. The same function can be activated with Ctrl+S.
The dialog Edit setpoints will be opened.
In edit field Setpoint the current setting of the definition is shown. You can enter here a new setpoint.
Edit field Limit value shows the actual message limit, as of which a message will be generated. You can
enter a new message limit here. With OK, the new values will be accepted. The system will work directly
with the new definition data.
Note If the maintenance definition is at the same time opened in the Maintenance Editor, the setpoints will
be overwritten, when the Editor save the definition.
other station.
Report
The Maintenance and Maintenance history view will be printed using report layouts designed in the AMS
Asset Graphics Report Designer.
After activating command the dialog Print Options appears to change the output device and other options.
The printout is started with command Start.
Menu View
Command Description
Visualization With this command you can bring the visualization to the foreground.
The same function will be activated with button Visualization or with F2.
Maintenance, With this menu commands the Maintenance view, Maintenance Info for Service and
Maintenance Info, the Maintenance history view can be switched on or off.
Maintenance history
Status bar The status bar can be switched on or off.
Refresh At active maintenance views, a command Refresh is available to force a refresh of
the table. This command is also available by F5.
Maintenance views
The Maintenance Runtime has 3 different views.
Maintenance view
In this window, the individual maintenance tasks are displayed in one table. With the toolbar at the top of the
view, the unit of time-dependent maintenance tasks can be switched from hours to days. Furthermore, you
can find a display filter. Besides 'All' you find the filters '> = 80%', '> = 100%' and '> = 120%'.
Column Description
Description In this column, the description of the device is shown.
Designation The plant /type designation of the device is shown.
Unit The physical unit for the setpoint, actual value and total value.
Group Here it is shown to which group the device belongs.
Actual value Actual value since the last maintenance.
% Actual value since the last maintenance in percent of the setpoint.
347
Column Description
Setpoint Planned setpoint for the execution of the maintenance
Total Total operating hours or switching cycles of the device.
The sequence of the individual columns can be configured with the mouse and drag & drop.
Maintenance history view

In this window all performed maintenances are displayed. With the toolbar at the top of the view, the unit of
time-dependent maintenance tasks can be switched from hours to days.
Column Description
Description In this column, the description of the maintenance task is shown.
Designation The plant /type designation of the device for the maintenance task is shown.
Unit The physical unit for set value-, actual value and total value.
Group Here it is shown, to which group the maintenance task belongs.
Data at the maintenance time
Date / Time Date and Time when the maintenance was done.
Actual value Actual value at the maintenance time.
% Actual value at the maintenance time in percent of the setpoint value.
Setpoint Setpoint at the maintenance time.
Total Total operating hours or switching cycles of the device at the maintenance time.
User The user who has entered the maintenance.
Station The station number, where the maintenance was performed.
Info Information, that the user has edited when entering the maintenance.
The sequence of the individual columns can be configured with the mouse and drag & drop.
Info view
Activate this view to display the additional information for the current line in the maintenance table. This
function is only available, if also an information text to the current line is stored in RTF-format. The text is
displayed only and cannot be edited. With the menu command File | Print this additional text can be printed.
348
Debugger
Introduction
The debugger offers a user interface, which shows the values of the elements of the AMS Asset Graphics
database during runtime. The user can display and manipulate these elements with the help of the
debugger.
The debugger is a useful instrument to check, even without a connected PLC, how the objects behave with
different values.
It helps as well at the search for problems. In this way, also process values can be shown, which are
normally not visible.
Every debugger document can contain a script.
See also
How to work with the Debugger (Step-by-step instructions)
User Interface
The debugger is designed as MDI application, i.e. several debugger documents can be edited
simultaneously. Every debugger document is shown as table and shows basically the values of data-
elements.
Non-standard commands in menu Edit are:

Script
Database information
Program options
See also
Toolbar Debugger
General operation
Dialog VBScript
You can also use functions OnStart (initialization), OnRun (cyclical) and OnEnd (Debugger document is
closed).
A detailed description of the possible functions can be found in section VBScript.
Dialog Program options

In this dialog you define the behavior of the Debugger when terminating the program.
Option Description
Always saving documents Set this option, when all open tables shall be saved automatically at
when terminating program exit.
Terminate program with Set this option, if the Debugger shall be terminated together with the
runtime runtime.
349
Dialog Database information

In this dialog you get information about the database.
Option Description
Num-elements Here, the information about the num-elements is shown.
Max The maximum possible number of num-elements is shown here.
Current Here you see the current number of used num-elements.
Usage The usage of the database is shown here in percent, with respect to the num-elements.
Text elements Here, the information about the text-elements are shown.
Max The maximum possible number of text-elements is shown here.
Current Here you see the current number of used text-elements.
Usage The usage of the database is shown here in percent, with respect to the text-elements.
Database user The number of the current database users (programs) is shown here.
Table view
Into the tables you enter elements, that you want to supervise or change.
The table is has following columns:
Column Description
Element name Here you have to enter the name of the element, which shall be displayed. You can enter
num- or text-elements. A new element can be inserted, by entering the element name into
column Element name and by defining, whether the element is a num- or a text-element.
Or you click the right mouse button in column Element. In this case the dialog Element
selection will be opened to select the Element.
Value The contents of the data-element is shown here. If the element is not yet opened in the
AMS Asset Graphics database, the message Element not available will appear in this
cell.
If you change a value in a cell, the relevant data-element will be written as soon as the
cell is not in edit mode anymore.
Type Into column Element you can enter num- or text-elements. Click the right mouse button
over this field and select from the dialog NUM (for num-elements) or TXT (for text-
elements).
If you enter the element via dialog Element-selection, the element type will be set
automatically.
350
Debugger
Toolbar Debugger
You can use the following command in the toolbar:
Command Description
Optimize columns Optimizes the width of the table columns that way, that all columns are visible.
Insert line Inserts a line previous to the selected line.
Delete lines Deletes the currently selected lines.
Edit Script Select this button to open dialog VBScript.
Visualization on top Press this button to set the visualization on top.
Database information Select this button to open dialog Database information.
Always on top Select this command to configure, whether the debugger window shall be shown
always in the foreground, also when another application has the input focus.
Elements
With toolbar Elements the contents of data-elements can be changed comfortably.
The commands effect only selected lines in the table.
Command Description
Increment This command increases the selected elements by the value, entered on the right side.
Decrement This command decreases the selected elements by the value, entered on the left side.
Set This command set the selected elements to the value, entered on the right side.
Create With this command the Debuggers tries to create data-elements in the database. A num-
element element will be assigned value 0, a text-element will be empty.
Note The commands are also at disposal in menu Elements.
How to work with the debugger

Start the runtime program (button Start Runtime in toolbar Runtime in the Project Manager).
Note You can start the debugger also without having entered it into the program list before. For
this, change to the Project Manager and click button Debugger in the toolbar Runtime.
Select the picture on the visualization desktop which contains the data-element, that you want to
test.
Change to the Debugger-window.
Place the Debugger-window such way, that you can see the element, which you want to test.
For this, click with the right mouse button in the first line of column Element name. The dialog
Element selection will be opened.
Select between num- and text-elements, by activating the corresponding option in field Type.
According to your choice, the list of the num- or text-elements will be shown.
351
Select the data-element, that you want to test, in this example num-element Silo1.
With the toolbar Elements you can add or subtract the value of the element or set it on a specific
value. The current value of the data-element will be shown in column Contents in the debugger-
window. You can also follow the consequences of your manipulation directly at the object in the
visualization.
If you want to test further elements, repeat the procedure in the next line. It is also possible to
visualize the contents of objects, which are not visible in the visualization.
If you want to repeat the test., save the debugger document before you exit the runtime or the
debugger.
Testing objects and finding errors

If you want to test new objects with realistic values without having a real process communication, you can
simulate values with the Debugger.
Settings in the Project Manager

At first you have to define in the Project Manager, that the debugger shall be started with the
runtime program. Select button Runtime configuration in the toolbar to open the dialog
Runtime configuration.
Select the Debugger from the list of the standard programs into your program list.
Note If the debugger was entered as last program in the list, it will be started as last runtime
program, thus its window will be opened in the topmost level on the screen.
Close dialog Runtime configuration.
Save your settings.
Note You can also start the Debugger manually in the Project Manager. For this press the button
Debugger in the toolbar Runtime.
See also
How to work with the Debugger
352
Synchronization
Overview of the synchronization
What is SyncTool used for?

SyncTool permits to synchronize project and program files, i.e. to coordinate with source directories.
When do we need SyncTool?

By using a local data directory, the network load can be reduced. This is particularly useful at relatively slow
network connections via modems /ISDN (e.g. RAS connections). The use of the local data directory is
determined in program Configuration on tab Directories.
Important
The local data directory is only used by runtime programs.
To ensure a central project administration, editors do always work with the global data directory.
When and how will the files be synchronized?

Files will be synchronized (i.e. copied from a source directory into a target directory), when the file is not
available in the target directory or when date or file size do not agree.
Files will always be copied from the source directory, even when the file date in the target directory is newer.
Synchronization of the files is carried out in 3 steps:
Check on differences.
Copying of all different files into a local temporary directory.
Copying the files from the temporary directory into the target directory.
The functionality:
Synchronizing of a project
List of synchronized project files
Synchronizing of programs
List of synchronized program files
Logging
Directories
Further Information:
Set global and local data directory
353
Synchronizing a project
By means of the project synchronization, project files of a (global) source drive will be copied into a (local)
disk drive.
Prerequisite for the project synchronization is a successful access on the directories. Moreover, the write
authority for the local directories must be available.
Operation
Start the program SyncTool (Sync32.exe).
Synchronizing a project will be started with menu item Synchronization --> Project....
After the Selection of a project the progress of the synchronization is shown in the Status dialog.
In the List of synchronized project files the files to be synchronized are documented.
Project synchronization by the runtime program

When the following conditions are met:
The use of a local data directory is activated.
The runtime program was started on a station.
the runtime program will start automatically the project synchronization (Sync32.exe).
The runtime program waits until the synchronization is carried out (SyncTool will shut down automatically).
If the synchronization was not successful, the start of the runtime will be cancelled!
Tip To avoid the project synchronization at the start of the runtime, rename file Sync32.exe or delete the file.
Used file names in projects
Logging
Synchronization of programs
With the program SyncTool (AMS Asset Graphics) program files of a (global) source drive will be copied to a
(local) disk drive.
Prerequisite for the program synchronization is a successful access on the directories. Moreover, the write
authority for the local directories must be available. AMS Asset Graphics programs must not be started from
local program directories.
Using
Start the program SyncTool (Sync32.exe).
The program synchronization will be started via menu command Synchronize | Program.
After the Selection of the directory the progress of the synchronization will be shown in the Status dialog.
In the List of synchronized program files the files to be synchronized are documented.
List of program names and EXE-modules
Logging
354
Synchronization
Logging
SyncTool logs the action carried out in the local data directory in a text file with name
‟Sync_JJJJ_MM_TT.LOG‟ (J=year, M=month, t=day).
If the log-file does not yet exist, it will be generated.
Every log-line starts with the indications Date and time
The following data will be entered into the log file:

Start/Stop of a synchronization procedure
Copying of files
Error at synchronization
Protocol texts in the window

If SyncTool was started manually, the protocol texts will be shown simultaneously in the application
window. At the start of a new synchronization procedure the contents of this window will be deleted.
Used directories
SyncTool opens 2 new subdirectories in the local data directory:
Temp
In this directory, the files to be copied will be stored temporarily, until all files are read from the source.
Having finished copying into the target directory, the files in the Temp-directory will be deleted again.
Sync
In this directory, SyncTool will be started if the program was called up 'manually' (see Synchronizing a
project: Start by the runtime program.
Thus it is possible, that also SyncTool itself can be synchronized at the program synchronization.
In this directory there is also stored file Sync32.ini in which the configuration settings are contained.
Attention SyncTool must have write access in both directories!
Dialogs in Synctool
Info about
This dialog contains general information on the program.
Directory selection
In this dialog the local and global program directories can be defined. The respective data directories will be
used as standard.
If the options Use Global/Local data directory are unmarked, the desired program directory can be
selected freely.
After activation of button OK, it will be checked, whether also AMS Asset Graphics programs are stored in
the global program directory. After that, the program synchronisation will be started.
Further information:
355
Project selection
In this dialog you select a project to be synchronized.
There are only local projects for choice, which are already available. Having made the choice for a project,
the project synchronization will be started automatically.
Note If you want to synchronize a project, that is not stored in the local data directory, you have to create a
subdirectory with the project name in directory Project and start the project synchronization anew.
Status of the synchronization

In this dialog, the current status of the sequential synchronization is shown.
The title bar will show the type of operation. Either the program synchronization (synchronization of program
files) or the project synchronization (synchronization project: 'Project name') with definition of the project.
The status window consists of the following elements:

Option Description
Status text Here will be shown the information on the progress of the regular actions:
and - The straight upcoming action.
progress bar - A progress bar.
- Details, such as the amount of data already copied and estimated remaining time of the
action.
Source/target Here, the current directories or files, just being processed, will be shown.
The synchronization procedure can be interrupted by means of button Cancel. However, copying files from
the temporary directory into the target directory cannot be interrupted.
Note At problems with the network connection, the interruption procedure may take some time.
List of synchronized program files
The following program files are synchronized:

In the program directory the files with the extensions:
*.EXE
*.DLL
*.CHM (Help-Files)
Spica.INI, Spica.ptc, *.LNG (Language files)
InvDBUser32.LIB
MpExclude.INI
README.WRI
Oem*.TXT
In the Driver-directory files with the extensions:

*.DLL
See also
356
Synchronization
List of synchronized project files
The following project files will be synchronized:

In the Project directory the files with the extensions:
*.iAGP, *.iAJD, *.iALM
*.iBLK
*.iCDE
*.iDBT, *.iDDE, *.iDPF, *.iDST, *.iDTT
*.iLOG
*.iMLP, *.iMLT, *.iMPD
*.iODD, *.iOPC
*.iPFL, *.iPIC, *.iPMG, *.iPRN, *.iPWD
*.iRGD
*.iSBL
*.iVBS
Project.iCFG
Project.Ini
Project.vbs
ViConfig.iVPC
In the accompanying Graphic directory all files.

In the Library -directory (incl. all subdirectories) all files.
In the Cursor-directory all files with the extensions:
*.CUR
*.ANI
See also
AMS Asset Graphics Directory structure
357
System-elements
Numeric system-elements
With the help of numeric system-elements, the following scope of functions can be covered:
Initialization
Switching off single tasks
Bring to the foreground
System
Visualization
Operation
Eventjournal
Network
Time-dependent system-elements
Textual system-elements
System-elements of type TXT cannot be used as trigger. They may contain texts or control actions,
depending on their contents.
Directory paths
WinExec
WinHelp
Other system-elements
Num-element Description
_Language / With _Language you define the current active language used in the runtime. If
_SystemLanguage _Language has e.g. the value 1, all runtime programs will use the English language.
With _SystemLanguage the system language (texts in menus and dialogs and for
error messages) can be configured independently from _Language. For example,
the runtime language is Chinese (_Language has value 13) and as system language
English is used (_SystemLanguage is set on 1).
_LicenceError With this element, problems at license requests can be recognized. If the license was
recognized correctly, the element has the value 0. _LicenceError changes on 1, if
the dongle was not read correctly for the last 3 hours.
_UserPassword With this system-element, password functions can be started. The element has
notification and control functions.
1 One user is logged in.
0 No user is logged in.
-1 The user will be logged off.
-2 The dialog for the user login is displayed.
-3 A dialog is displayed for the user to change the password.
-4 The list with all users is shown. This function call should be password protected!
359
_UserExtern The system-element _UserExtern permits to determine a user by means of an
external control (e.g. a key switch). With the value of the element, the user in the
related line of the user table will be logged in, without the need of a special password
request.
Example
If _UserExtern has the value 3, the user will be logged in, whose name is in the 3rd
line of the user tablet.
Text-element Description
_Sound With this system-element a WAV-file, e.g. a particular alarm sound can be played.
With this element, the name of a WAV-file is indicated. After the playing of the sound
was started, the contents will be reset again.
If no explicit directory was indicated, the WAV-file must be stored in the current
project directory.
_UserName This system-element contains the name of the currently logged-in operator (user).
Initialization
The following system-elements will be set during the initialization of runtime programs.
The respective element is set on 1 at the start of the program.
When the program was started successfully and has initialized its data, the element will be set on 0. In an
error case, the program will be terminated and the element is set on -1.
Element Program
_InitBP Operation Log
_InitDBG Debugger
_InitDBT DB-Transfer
_InitDDE DDE
_InitDS Data Storage
_InitEJ Eventjournal
_InitEJDataManager Eventjournal Data Manager
_InitEJViewer Event Viewer
_InitIH Maintenance
_InitLOG Activity Log Viewer
_InitMP Network (Master/Station)
_InitOD ODBC
_InitOPC OPC Client
_InitPZ Process Assignment
_InitRZ Recipe
_InitVI Visualization
360
System-elements
Suspending individual programs

The following elements offer the option to deactivate individual programs temporarily for diagnosis purposes
(0: program active; 1: program inactive).
Element Program
_SuspendBP Operating Log
_SuspendDS Data Storage
_SuspendEJ Eventjournal
_SuspendIH Maintenance
_SuspendMP Network connection
_SuspendPZ Process assignment
An active telegram still is finished, after that no new telegram is started.
_SuspendVI Visualization
Bringing a program into the foreground

By changing the value of one of the following elements you can bring a program into the foreground.
Element Program
_SetTopBP Operating Log Runtime
_SetTopDBG Debugger
_SetTopEJ Eventjournal Runtime
_SetTopEJViewer Event Viewer
_SetTopIH Maintenance
_SetTopLOG Activity Log Viewer
_SetTopRZ Recipe Runtime
_SetTopVI Visualization
_SetTopBP_OpenView
The text-element _SetTopBP_OpenView is used to activate the Operation Log Runtime and additionally
open a view.
The text-element is evaluated as follows:
Type; ReportName; Date
In place of type one can use day, week, month or year. ReportName is a substitute for the name of the
definition file (without file extension). The date is optionally and can be used to open a special day, week,
month or year. If no date is attached the current system date is used. After the text element is evaluated, the
contents from the text element is deleted.
_SetTopEJViewer_OpenView
The text-element _SetTopEJViewer_OpenView is used to activate the Event Viewer and additionally open
a view.
Type;Name
In place of Type one can use ONLINE or HISTORY. Name is a substitute for the name of the definition file
(without file extension).
361
_SetTopIH_OpenView
The text-element _SetTopIH_OpenView is used to activate the Maintenance Runtime and additionally open
a view.
Type
In place of Type one can use MAINTENANCE, HISTORY or INFO.
See also
Calling the Eventjournal Runtime
Change automatically into the Eventjournal in case of an alarm
System
Element Description
_SystemCounter Will be incremented at every program run (default: 500 ms).
_SystemStart Notification-trigger for the program start. When starting the runtime, _SystemStart will
be set on 1. After all programs were started, _SystemStart will be set on 2 as indication,
that all programs are started.
_SystemStop Control-trigger for program end. If _SystemStop has a value unequal to 0, all runtime
programs will be terminated.
See also
Closing the runtime
Visualization
_Hardcopy If this element is toggled, a hardcopy will be printed on the standard printer. During
the printout, the element has the value –1. When the printout is completed, it will be
reset on 0.
_PrePic Control-trigger, which causes the change to the previous picture.
_PicPosX, Indicates the upper-left position of the drawing area of the visualization window in
_PicPosY screen coordinates.
_PicSizeX, Indicates the width and height in pixel of the current drawing area.
_PicSizeY
_ScreenSizeX, Indicates the size in pixel of the current screen resolution.
_ScreenSizeY
_ViDynFontFactor With this element you can set a global factor for the height of dynamically calculated
fonts.
This applies to the objects Button, Text and Number, if they don't use project fonts.
Sample: Set the element on 0.8 for a height of 80%.
_ViFontset Defines the current font. Possible values are 0 (default value) and 1...4 for the font
sets 1 to 4.
362
System-elements
Text- Description
element
_ActPic Contains the name of the currently displayed picture.
_NewPic Controls the switch from one picture in another. For example, buttons can be configured that
way, that they set _NewPic with the name of the desired picture and therefore effect a
picture switch.
See also
Changing to another picture
Operation
Element Description
_F1 - _F12 The system-elements _F1 to _F12 will be toggled, if the corresponding function key was
pressed. This applies also, if the function key was pressed in combination with a control key
(CTRL, ALT, SHIFT).
_Input Will be changed, if e.g. data-element are changed by the Data input, a function key, a text-
button or a graphic button.
_InputActive Will be 1, if the data input is active, and 0, if the data input is inactive.
_InputStart, By toggling this num-elements, the data input will be started or stopped (same function as
_InputStop the configured data input key combination for start / stop).
Eventjournal
_AlarmChanged This element does always change its state, when an event is coming or going.
_AlarmCome Will be set on 1, if an event occurs and will be reset on 0 by calling up the Eventjournal
(notification-trigger).
_AlarmExist Will be set on 1 at every coming alarm.
Note The element will not be set again on 0 by the system, this can be defined
by the user itself e.g. in a script. _AlarmExist offers the option to recognize
new alarms and to start actions with that.
_AlarmGone Will be set on 1, if an event disappears and will be reset on 0 , when the Eventjournal
Runtime gets the input focus.
_AlarmListFilling Indicates the current filling rate of the Eventjournal in % (at 52 entries in the
Eventjournal and with a maximum number of 1000 entries, _AlrmListFilling has the
value 5,2).
Text-element
_AlarmText Contains the message of the event at last entered in the Eventjournal.
See also
Display an event in one line of the visualization window
363
Only relevant for 'old' projects, if they are storing historical event data in MDB files:
_AlarmHistoryError If an error occurs upon writing of historical alarms, the error value will be set in
this element. When the value is 0, no error is existent. When starting the
program, the Eventjournal will set this element on 0. During runtime, the
element will only be set at the appearance of an error. Thus it always contains
the last Error. System errors have an offset of 100.000.
_AlarmHistoryJoinStart Control-trigger, which starts the summary of the daily databases to one
common database.
_AlarmHistoryJoinReady Notification-trigger, which indicates a successful summary of the daily
databases.
_AlarmHistoryJoinDays Number of days, which data shall be included in the summary (max 731 days).
_AlarmHistoryJoinError Error element for the error analysis.
The element will be set on 0 at the beginning of the summary. At a faultless
execution of the summary, the element will keep value 0.
In case of an error, the element will be set on one of the following values:
23001 Number of days in Element _AlarmHistoryJoinDays is 0
23002 Old database could not be deleted. (Possibly the database is opened
externally)
23003 Error when opening the database
23004 Error when opening the current daily database
23005 Error when opening the database
23006 Error at opening the table
23007 Error at opening a daily database
System errors will be displayed with an offset of 100.000.
Text-element
_AlarmHistoryErrorText Contains the error text (if available) of the last error in the Eventjournal when
writing historical alarms. Will be set with an empty string at the moment of
starting the journal.
See also
Historical alarms
Network
_MPStation This element is set on the current station number, thereby the 0 indicates
the network master.
The following num-elements provide information on the network status in the redundancy mode:
_RddIsPrimaryMaster The primary master sets the element on 1, otherwise the element has the
value 0.
_RddIsSecondaryMaster The secondary master sets the element on 1, otherwise the element has the
value 0.
364
System-elements
_RddPrimaryMasterState Provides information on the status of the primary master:
0 Status unknown (master does not run).
1 master runs in standby-mode (is ready, but not active).
2 Master is active.
3 and 4 these states appear during a change of the active master.
_RddSecondaryMasterState Provides information on the status of the secondary master. Status values
such as _RddPrimaryMasterState.
_RddConnectedStatNr Contains the current number of connected stations.
_RddMasterCheckTime Shows the time difference to the last valid communication with the partner-
master. (5 indicates e.g., that since 5 seconds no communication with the
partner-master has taken place).
Text-element
_MPStationName This element will be set on that station name, which was defined in the
Network Editor.
With the system-element _RddSetMaster the active master can be changed manually:
1: The primary master shall become active master.
2: The secondary master shall become active master.
After a switch over to another master, the element will again be set on 0.
The master switch over can be made on every computer (also by the master in the standby-modus).
Time-dependent system-elements
There are different system-elements available, which (when used as control-trigger) can start periodic
actions. They differ by the time period between the changes.
_Ms500 Current 500ms-value, i.e. the value changes every 500 millisecond. Range 0..119
_Sec01 Current second, i.e. the value changes every second. Range 0..59
_Sec02 Current second divided by 2, i.e. the value changes every 2 seconds. Range 0..29
_Min01 Current minute, i.e. the value changes every minute. Range 0..59
_Min02 Current minute divided by 2, i.e. the value changes every 2 minutes. Range 0..29
365
_Hour01 Current hour, i.e. the value changes every hour. Range 0..23.
_Hour02 Current hour divided by 2, i.e. the value changes every 2 hours. Range 0..11
_Day Current day, i.e. the value changes once per day (at the change of the day).
_DayOfWeek Current day of the week, i.e. the value changes from Monday to Sunday from 1 to 7.
_Week Current week, i.e. the value changes once per week (at the change of the week).
_Month Current month, i.e. the value changes once per month (at the change of the month).
Range 1..12
_Year Current year, i.e. the value changes every year (at the change of the year). Sample:
2006
_SecOfDate Contains the number of seconds since the 1.1.1980 for 00:00:00h of the current day.
_SecOfDateTime Contains the number of seconds since the 1.1.1980.
_SecOfDay Contains the number of seconds since 00:00:00h of the current day. Range 0..86399
The format of the following text-elements depends on the regional options for date and time (configured in
the operation system).
_DateStr, Contains the current date as text in the format, which is configured as regional option
_DateStrLong Short date, z.B. 03/24/07 (format: US English). Thus the current date can be
shown.
_DateStrLong is accordingly the Long date, e.g. 24.03.2007 (format: German).
_TimeStr Contains the current time.. Thus the current time can be shown.
Sample: 08:44:38 (format: US English)
See also
Displaying the current time
_TimeDateStrLong Contains the current time and the date in the format Time Date. Thus the current
date and time can be shown.
Sample: 08:44:08 02/24/2007 (format: US English).
Directory paths
_DataStoringPath This element contains the directory, where the data storage files will be stored, e.g.
D:\AMS Asset Graphics\Project\Waterworks\DS.
_ProjectName This element contains the current project names, e.g. Waterworks.
366
System-elements
_ProjectPath This element contains the current project directory, e.g. D:\AMS Asset
Graphics\Project\Waterworks.
_ProjectPathLocal This element contains the current local project directory. If no local project directory
was defined, the contents is identical with the contents of _ProjectPath.
_RecipePath This element contains the directory, where the recipe groups are created (as sub
directories), e.g. D:\AMS Asset Graphics\Project\Waterworks\RC.
_WinExec
With the text-element _WinExec it is possible to start application programs.
Principle design: File name Program parameter [Display option]
If the file name (incl. directory) contains a blank, the file name (incl. directory) must be enclosed in
apostrophe (see Example 2).
Example 1: EXCEL Test.xls [1]

Example 2: "C:\Program Files\EXCEL.exe" Test.xls
The following display options are supported:

Display option Number
SW_HIDE 0
SW_NORMAL 1
SW_SHOWMINIMIZED 2
SW_SHOWMAXIMIZED 3
SW_SHOWNOACTIVATE 4
SW_SHOW 5
SW_MINIMIZE 6
SW_SHOWMINNOACTIVE 7
SW_SHOWNA 8
SW_RESTORE 9
The display options are ‚suggestions‟ at the start of the program, which may also be ignored.
After a successful start, _WinExec will have the content "'Program name' started".
After an unsuccessful start, _WinExec will have the text "'Program name' not started. Error:
number!".
Note It is not checked, whether an instance of the program has already been started.
367
_WinHelp
With the text-element _WinHelp, an Help file can be called. Other text-elements may also be used as
variables in the text.
Principle structure: Help file [Help command] [data]
Example: basis.hlp 1 3
If no command is predefined explicitly, the command HELP_CONTENTS will be used per default.
The following Help commands are supported:
Command Number Data Example

HELP_CONTENTS 3 - BASIS.HLP 3
HELP_QUIT 2 - BASIS.HLP 2
HELP_CONTEXT 1 Number BASIS.HLP 1 4

HELP_SETCONTENTS 5 Number BASIS.HLP 5 17
HELP_CONTEXTPOPUP 8 Number BASIS.HLP 8 3
HELP_KEY 257 String BASIS.HLP 257 Zoom

HELP_PARTIALKEY 261 String BASIS.HLP 261 Data
HELP_COMMAND 258 String BASIS.HLP 258 Macro name
368
VBScript
Introduction VBScript
What is VBScript?
Microsoft® Visual BASIC® Scripting edition, a subset of the programming language Microsoft® Visual
BASIC®, is a fast and small interpreter. It can also be found in World Wide Web-Browsers and other
applications, which use Microsoft® ActiveX®-control elements, automation server as well as Java-applets.
Easy to learn and use

If you already know Visual BASIC or Visual BASIC for applications, VBScript will be familiar to you. When
you are not familiar with Visual BASIC and when you want to introduce yourself into it, you will learn
simultaneously all Visual Basic-programming languages. The syntax of the Visual BASIC script language is
described in the help file Script56.CHM. The help file be installed with ‟scd56de.exe‟ (on the installation
CD).
At those points, where data-elements are to be entered, mathematical or logical expression in a VBScript
can be used as well. An expression is e.g. a sum of several elements or other mathematical functions.
There are various menus, where expressions can be entered. The choice between data-element and
VBScript is made with the PMS Value Control.
Tab VBScript
Access to data-elements
Standard functions
Using COM objects
VBScript examples
VBScript debugging
Global functions
Note Calling the VBScript functions MsgBox and InputBox is not possible.
Working with VBScript

There are different program parts, where scripts, i.e. mathematical and logical expressions can be entered.
Graphic Editor
Dynamic standard properties like position, size and color are configured in dialogs.. Special functionality
can be defined in VBScript.
A picture script is called as long as the picture is used.
The project script is always called periodically.
Modify a graphic object by using a script
Create a script for a picture
Modify the project properties in the Graphic Editor with a script
Process Assignment
Create a script for a driver profile
Create a script for a process assignment table
Debugger
Create a script in the debugger
369
Tab VBScript
In this dialog, Visual BASIC script code (VBScript Code) can be entered.
Central component of the dialog is a text window for editing the script.
VBScript-keywords will be highlighted in colors.
The script will only be accepted (i.e. the dialog can only be terminated), when the syntax of the VBScript is
correct. In case of an error, an error message will be output. After confirmation of the message, the text
pointer is set on the error position.
VBScript Help function

(Prerequisite: file Script56.CHM is stored in the program directory).
The VBScript Help function can be called with the shortcut STRG+F1. At this, the word at the current
cursor position or at an existing marker will be used as search string for the index.
See also
Context menu when editing VBScript
Editor dialogs VBScript-window
Dialog Search
With this dialog the text can be searched for specific phrases. When the search string was found, it will be
selected in the text. Otherwise a message will be output that the text could not be found.
In the following table the individual dialog elements are described.
Dialog element Description
Search for Enter here the search string, which you want to search in the text. The pull-down list
contains all text strings, that you already have entered.
Match whole Only those words will be selected, which completely match with the search string.
word only
Match case When set, the searching is case sensitive.
Direction Up / Defines the search direction.
Down
Find next The search operation is started and the dialog be closed.
Cancel The dialog will be closed.
Dialog Replace
With this dialog, the text can be searched for specific text and automatically be replaced. When the search
string was found in the text, it will be replaced. Otherwise a message will be output that the text could not
be found.
In the following table the individual dialog elements are described:
Search for Enter here the search string, which you want to search in the text. The pull-down list
contains all text strings, that you already have entered.
Replace with Enter the text, that shall replace the found text strings.
370
VBScript

Match whole word Only those words will be selected, which completely match with the search string.
only
Match case When searching, the capitalization / use of small letters will be taken into account or
not.
Replace in
Selection It will be only be searched / replaced within the selected text. This function is only
available, if a selection was made previously in the text.
Whole file It will be searched / replaced in the whole text.
Find next The search operation is started. When the search string was found, it will be
selected in the text.
Replace When the search is selected in the text, it will be replaced by the new text. If the
search string is not selected, the first text passage will be searched for.
Replace all All passages in the selection or in the complete text will be changed automatically.
Cancel The dialog will be closed.
Dialog Go to
With this dialog it is possible to jump directly on a line in the text. Enter the desired line press OK.
Context menu when editing VBScript
With the right mouse you activate a context menu. The individual commands have the following functions:
Command Function
Num-element / After an element was selected, VBScript source text will be inserted automatically at
Text-element the current position for the declaration of the variables.
Functions By means of functions OnStart, OnRun and OnEnd, source text for this standard-
functions will automatically be inserted at the current text position.
Undo To undo an edit.
Redo To redo an edit.
Cut The highlighted text is removed and inserted into the clipboard.
Copy The highlighted text is copied into the clipboard.
Paste If text is stored in the clipboard, this text will be inserted at the current cursor position.
If a text range is selected, this text will be replaced by the text from the clipboard.
Select all The complete text will be selected.
Find... Open dialog Search.
Find next Repeat last search (in direction End).
Find previous Repeat last search (in direction Start).
Replace... Open dialog Replace
Go to line... Open dialog Go to
Go to last change The cursor will be placed at the position of the last change.
Change case
Upper case All characters of the highlighted range will be replaced by capital letters.
371
Command Function
Lower case All characters of the highlighted range will all be replaced by small letters.
Capitalize At all words of the highlighted range, the first character of each word will be set to
upper case, the other characters of the words will remain in small letters.
Invert case Small characters of the highlighted part will be changed to capital letters, capital
letters will be inverted to small letters.
Auto complete The word, just begun, will be completed automatically. At this, the text will be scanned
for words, that start with the characters, already entered. If there is a word, that starts
with these characters, the started word will be completed.
Match bracket If the cursor is placed next to a bracket ( ), the accompanying bracket for this
command will be searched and the cursor placed there.
Bookmarks
Toggle bookmark For every line, a bookmark can be defined. With this command you can switch on or
off the bookmark for the current line. When leaving tab VBScript, all bookmarks will be
switched off.
Next bookmark The cursor will be placed in the line with the next bookmark. If in the text below there
is no more bookmark, the 1. bookmark will be activated.
Previous The cursor will be placed in the line with the previous bookmark. If in the text above
bookmark there is no more bookmark, the last bookmark will be activated.
Clear all All bookmarks will be cleared.
bookmarks
Access to data-elements
The access to data-elements is made in VBScript (Visual BASIC Script) via the automation interfaces
PMS.NumEle and PMS.TxtEle.
You create an instance (an object of this class) for the PMS.NumEle class with the following instruction.
Set Num1 = CreateObject("PMS.NumEle")
Num1 is now a VBScript-variable for access a data-element. The function SetName defines which data-
element shall address by the VBScript-variable.
Num1.SetName("Num1")
The value of the variable is read or written with property Value.

a = Num1.Value
Num1.Value = 17.7
Properties and functions of PMS.NumEle and PMS.TxtEle:

Property/function Description
SetName("Name") With this function, the data-element is defined, that is used by the object.
GetName This function returns the element name.
AutoCreation This property defines if data-elements shall be created automatically when the
function SetName is called. The default is 1, that means data-elements will be
created.
Exist This function returns -1 if the element exists, otherwise 0.
Value With this object property you read or write the value of a data-element.
372
VBScript
IsChanged This function provides the information, whether the data-element has changed since
the last call of this function. In case of a change, this function returns a 1, otherwise
a 0.
After the variable was initialized with function SetName, the first time this function
will always return a 1.
The return value must be evaluated or assigned to a VBScript variable, since
otherwise a runtime error arises in the VBScript Engine.
Example:
Dummy = Num1.IsChanged
Special properties / functions of PMS.NumEle:

Bit(BitNr) With this property the bits from 0 to 31 (parameter BitNr) can be read or written.
When reading the property returns -1, if the bit is set, otherwise 0.
When writing the bit will be set, if the new value is unequal to 0.
Toggle This function increases the value of the num-element by one. If the value has
reached 255, it will be set to 0.
See also VBScript examples
VBScript standard functions

In every Script three special functions will be called. One function for initialization at the beginning, one
cyclical function and one function at the end. Begin and end describe the "life period" of an object.
OnStart This function is called at the beginning. In this function often variables are initialized.
OnRun This function will be called cyclically (once in the update cycle).
OnEnd At the end, this function is called once.
The body for standard functions can be generated comfortably via the Context menu.
Example
The lifetime of a picture lasts as long as it is shown in the runtime. When the picture is displayed the function
OnStart will be called once in the picture script. As long as the picture is shown, the OnRun-function will be
called cyclically. Before changing to another picture, the OnEnd-function is called once.
See also
Examples for standard function
373
Asynchronous call of functions
Standard functions are called synchronously. However, at some functions of COM-objects, the synchronous
call is disabled. By means of function DoAsyncCall, an asynchronous function call of the subroutine
OnAsyncCall will be made. In subroutine OnAsyncCall the asynchronous function calls can then be
executed.
DoAsyncCall and OnAsyncCall have no arguments.
Example:
' current project path

Set ProjectPath = CreateObject("PMS.TxtEle")
ProjectPath.SetName("_ProjectPath")
' Trigger to start the printout
Set PrintFormular = CreateObject("PMS.NumEle")
PrintFormular.SetName("PrintFormular")
' The Word-Object

Set ObjWord = CreateObject("Word.Application")
' *** Once at the start ***

Sub OnStart
' Reset change flag
Dummy = PrintFormular.IsChanged
End Sub
' *** Cyclical check ***

Sub OnRun
' Print Form?
If PrintFormular.IsChanged Then
' asynchronous call
DoAsyncCall
End If
End Sub
' *** Once at the end ***

Sub OnEnd
' Terminate Word
ObjWord.Quit
End Sub
' ===== Asynchronous processing =====

Sub OnAsyncCall
' Load Word-File
Set ObjDoc = ObjWord.Documents.Open(ProjectPath.Value & "\Formular.doc")
' Print
ObjWord.PrintOut
' Close document again
ObjDoc.Close
End Sub
In the Example above, a form can be printed with Word. The form is stored in the project directory.
374
VBScript
Using COM objects

COM objects, also called automation objects, are objects, that are visible for other applications or
programming tools via automation interfaces.
There are two possibilities to access on COM objects within the Scripts. For the first, VBScript Standard
offers two functions for the generation of COM objects (CreateObject and GetObject). A description to
these functions can be found in the VBScript help file.
The other possibility is function HostCreateObject. This function is an AMS Asset Graphics specific
extension for the VBScript language. Contrary to the VBScript standard, it permits to use also the events of
the COM objects. Events are triggered by the COM objects itself.
HostCreateObject (Servername.Classname, ObjName)
Arguments
Server name The name of the application, which provides the object.
Class name The type or the class of the object to be generated.
ObjName With this name, you can address the object. At Event handler functions this name must be
prefixed with a ‟_‟.
In order to evaluate the events of the COM objects, the function must be written at the start of the source
code in the global context (outside of a function or subroutine).
Example
HostCreateObject "InternetExplorer.Application", "IExplorer"
Sub OnStart
IExplorer.visible = 1
IExplorer.navigate "http://www.epro.de/ "
End Sub
Sub OnEnd
IExplorer.Quit
End Sub
Sub IExplorer_NavigateComplete2(Object, URL)

Set TextUrl = CreateObject("PMS.TxtEle")
TextUrl.SetName "TextUrl"
TextUrl.Value = URL
End Sub
In the example above, an Internet Explorer object will be generated and registered under the name
IExplorer.
In the subroutine OnStart the Internet Explorer will be brought into the foreground (visible = 1) and an
internet page is called (navigate "http://www.epro.de").
At every changeover of a page within the explorer, the Event NavigateComplete2 will be triggered. By
means of subroutine IExplorer_NavigateComplete2, the event will be read and evaluated from the Script.
Here, the new URL will be connected to a text-element.
375
Global VBScript Functions
IncludeSource
This function includes a VBScript source file into the current script. It is useful to reuse library functions or
classes.
IncludeSource (SourceFile)
SourceFile File name of the VBScript source file. If there is no path declaration in SourceFile , the file
will be opened in the global project directory.
Example:
IncludeSource "Ini.vbs"
AddLogMessage
This function inserts entries in the activity log.
AddLogMessage (LogLevel, LogID, LogText)
LogLevel Log level; must be between 0 and 99.
LogID ID of the log message; must be between 1000 and 9999.
LogText Text of the log message.
The function returns a 1, when the log entry could be made, otherwise a 0 will be returned.
Example:
AddLogMessage 21, 1401, "This is a message"
HasActUserTheRight
By means of this function it can be requested, whether the user, actually logged in, has got a specific access
authority.
HasActUserTheRight (Right)
Right The requested right (password level); must be between 0 and 99.
The function returns a 1, if the user has the requested access right, otherwise a 0 will be returned.
Example:
Function TextValue
if (HasActUserTheRight(10)) then
TextValue = "Der Benutzer hat Sonderrechte!"
else
TextValue = ""
end if
End Function
376
VBScript
PmsFormatDateTime
This functions formats a time string.
PmsFormatdateTime (Format, Date)
Format Is the format-control string (see Formatting codes for date and time).
Date The date.
The function returns the formatted time string.
Example:
PmsFormatDateTime("%Y-%m-%d %H:%M:%S", Now)
' Output: 2007-01-24 08:14:38
PmsUtcDateTime2Local
This functions transforms a UTC time to a local time.
PmsUtcDateTime2Local (UtcDate)
UtcDate Time in the UTC format.
The functions returns the local time.
PmsLocalDateTime2Utc
This functions transforms a local time to a UTC time.
PmsLocalDateTime2Utc (LocalDate)
LocalDate The local time.
The functions returns the UTC time.
Debugging
There are two prerequisites if you want to debug VBScript code.
On the one hand, the debugging function has to be activated in the Project Manager in menu Options.
Moreover, you need a script debugger. Under the address
http://msdn.microsoft.com/scripting/default.htm Microsoft offers a Script debugger free of
charge. However, you may use any other script debugger.
When the script debugger has been installed and the option Debugging active is set in the Project
Manager, you can start debugging as follows:
Debugging of runtime errors

In case of runtime errors the script debugger will be started directly (JIT Debugging). The VBScript with the
runtime error will be opened and the line with the error directly be shown. The corresponding AMS Asset
Graphics application is stopped and closed with the termination of the Script debugger.
377
Activate debugger manually at runtime

When the debugger is started manually at runtime, the VBScript can be opened via a list of the current
documents. At this, every VBScript will be represented as document in the Script debugger. After opening
the VBScript, its execution will be controlled manually and checked with stops, single steps and procedure
steps etc.
Further information for debugging be found in the help function of the Script debugger.
Access to data storage files

The access to data storage files is made by VBScript (Visual BASIC Script) via the automation interface
PMS.DataStoringFile.
You create an instance (an object of this class) for the PMS.DataStoringFile class with the following
instruction.
Set DSF = CreateObject("PMS.DataStoringFile")
Now DSF represents a VBScript variable to access a data storage file. The function Open is used to open
a data storage file.
DSF.Open("DSTable1")
Use the AddReadItem function to specify the read elements after opening. The Update function executes
the reading of the data storing file. The same time stamp applies to all read elements.
DSF.AddReadItem("SetPoint")
DSF.AddReadItem("CurrentValue")
DSF.Update
After the Update function is finished the functions GetTimeValues and GetValues return an array for the
date. All read elements of one row refer to the appropriate value in the date array.
Times = DSF.GetTimeValues()
Values = DSF.GetValues("CurrentValue")
All properties and functions of PMS.DataStoringFile:

Name Description
Functions
Open("DSFileName") Use this function to open the data storing file. A file name with the file
extension iDSF or an extension of a data storage archive (000 to 999)
can be used. If you pass a filename without an extension, the
extension iDSF is applied. If the parameter DSFileName is only a file
name without path, the data storing path is used.
AddReadItem("EleName") This function adds a variable which should be read to an internal list.
All variables in this list are read with the help of the Update function.
RemoveReadItem("EleName") This function deletes a variable from the internal “to be read” list.
RemoveAllReadItems Deletes all variables from the internal list.

Update This function is performing the reading process and stores all values
which have been added to the internal list by the AddReadItem
function.
GetTimeValues This function returns an array of Date values with the time stamps of
the data storage file.
GetValues("EleName") This function returns an array of Double values with the values of the
variable which is passed to this function via EleName.
378
VBScript
Name Description
Properties
TimeFilterFrom, These properties define the lower and upper range (type Date) of the
TimeFilterTo datasets.
NewestTime, After calling Update, these properties store the time stamp from the
OldestTime newest and oldest dataset in the date storage file.
Count After calling Update, this property stores the number of returned
datasets.
ElementInfo.Count After calling Open, this property stores the number of variables of the
data storage file.
ElementInfo.Name ElementInfo.Name is an array with the variable names of the data
storage file. Index starts with 0 and must be less than
ElementInfo.Count.
ElementInfo.Type ElementInfo.Type is an array with type information to the variables of
the data storage file. Index starts with 0 and must be less than
ElementInfo.Count. Numerical variables return a 0 and text variables
return 1.
Example:
Set DSF = CreateObject("PMS.DataStoringFile")
DSF.Open("DSTable1")
DSF.AddReadItem("SetPoint")
DSF.AddReadItem("CurrentValue")
DSF.TimeFilterTo = Now
DSF.TimeFilterFrom = DSF.TimeFilterTo - 5/1440
DSF.Update
Dim Times
Dim ValArr_1
Dim ValArr_2
Times = DSF.GetTimeValues
ValArr_1 = DSF.GetValues("SetPoint")
ValArr_2 = DSF.GetValues("CurrentValue")
...
Using
VBScript Examples
Access to a num-element
'***********Access to a num-element**********
Dim Num1 'This line is optional
Set Num1 = CreateObject("PMS.NumEle")
Num1.SetName("Num1")
Num1.Value = 5
a = Num1.Value
379
Access to a text-element
'***********Access to a text-element*******************
Dim Txt1 'This line is optional
Set Txt1 = CreateObject("PMS.TxtEle")
Txt1.SetName("Txt1")
Txt1.Value = "Main"
t = Txt1.Value
Doing an action when a data-element changes

Set ele1 = CreateObject("PMS.NumEle")
ele1.SetName "ele1"
a = ele1.IsChanged 'after opening, the change flag will be reset
Set ele2 = CreateObject("PMS.NumEle")
ele2.SetName "ele2"
Sub DoAenderung
If ele1.IsChanged Then
ele2.Toggle
End If
End Sub
Displaying a value as hexadecimal number

Function GetHexString(Value)
GetHexString = "0x" & Hex(Value) 'Hex is a VBScript function
End Function
Examples for standard functions
' Variable declaration

Set X_Position = CreateObject("PMS.NumEle")
X_Position.SetName("X_Position")
' Initialization
Sub OnStart
X_Position.Value = 8
End Sub
' Cyclical Processing

Sub OnRun
X_Position.Value = X_Position.Value + 1
if X_Position.Value > 40 then
end if
End Sub
' Processing before termination

Sub OnEnd
End Sub
380
VBScript
Change a graphic object with a VBScript

A simple example shall explain the possibilities of the script.
Silo1 is the current filling level of Silo1 and is read from a PLC. It will be compared with a constant, 1000,
which is the maximum filling level of the silo. When the current filling level has reached the maximum, the
supply valve will be closed, i.e. data-element SupplyValve1 is set on value 0.
Create an object in the Graphic Editor, that is able to display different conditions, an open and a
closed valve (see Display an object with different states).
Now, draw an object of type Number (see Displaying a numerical value).
Set the Value on tab Number on Script and press Edit Script.
At the start of the Script you see the declaration of the num-element Silo1 and below the standard
function of object Number.
Define the variables Silo1 and SupplyValve1.
Extend function NumberValue by the conditional assignment, which closes the supply valve, if
the maximum filling level has reached.
Write a VBScript for a process picture

For every process picture, a script can be made, which will only be edited, when the corresponding picture is
shown during runtime.
For example, a value, that is read from a PLC, shall be scaled differently in a picture.
Load the corresponding picture in the Graphic Editor.
Select menu item Properties | Picture | Properties PICTURE to open dialog Properties Picture.
Select tab VBScript.
At the beginning of the Script you define the num-element, that has to be scaled in this picture, in
the example Silo1.
381
The standard function OnStart will be called up once at the beginning of the script. In this function
you have to assign the variable Silo1 another value. In the example, Silo1 will be divided by 100.
Change project properties in the Graphic Editor

For every project, a script can be generated, which is valid for the complete project during the runtime.
For example, at the start of the project, some variables shall be initialized with definite values.
In the Graphic Editor select menu item Properties | Project | Visualization to open dialog
Properties Visualization.
Select tab VBScript.
At the start of the script you have to define the num-elements (Temp1, Temp2).
382
VBScript
The standard function OnStart will be called once at the beginning of the script. In this function
you have to assign the variable to the initialization values.
Write a VBScript for a process assignment table

For every process assignment table, a script can be written.
For example, before sending a table it is checked, whether specific valves are closed. If not, they are closed.
Open a process assignment table in the Process Assignment Editor or create a new one.
Select tab VBScript. You can see a list of the different standard functions.
For more standard functions, see also tab VBScript in a properties dialog of process assignment
table.
At the start of the script you have to declare the date-elements, which shall be controlled.
383
Function OnSendStart will be called before sending the table. Check in this function, whether the
valves vent_zul_silo1 and vent_zul_silo2 are closed.
Write a VBScript for a driver profile

For every driver profile a script can be written, that is valid during the runtime for all process assignment
tables, which use this driver profile.
A summary over the predefined functions you can have on tab VBScript in dialog Driver profile.
In the example, some variables shall be initialized with definite values, when the profile is started.
Select in the Process Assignment Editor the menu command File | Driver profiles |Open and
open the profile for the wanted project.
Press button New in dialog Driver profiles to create a new driver profile or to select an already
existing driver profile.
Click on VBScript.
You see the predefined functions of the driver profile script.
At the beginning of the script you have to declare the data-elements.
384
VBScript
Function OnStart will be called once, when the driver profile is created. In this function you have
to assign the variable to the initialization values.
During runtime this variables shall be changed cyclically.
385
Function OnRun will be called cyclically, independently from the fact, whether the profile is
activated or deactivated. Assign here other values to the variables. In the example, they will be
increased cyclically by 1 and reset to their initial value, when reaching the constant limit value.
Confirm the dialog with OK, close the dialog Driver profiles and save your changes.
Write a VBScript in the Debugger

For every table in the Debugger a VBScript can be written, that will be executed, as long as the table is
opened.
For example, some variables shall be initialized with definite values when opening the project.
Open an existing table in the debugger or create a new one.
386
VBScript
Press button Edit script in the toolbar to open dialog VBScript.
You can see the standard function (OnStart, OnRun, OnEnd).

At the start of the script you have to define the num-elements.
The standard function OnStart will be called once at the beginning of the script. In this function
you have to assign the variable to the initialization values.
387
inVISU 2.5 to PMS Editor
Introduction
The inVISU 2.5 to PMS Editor (DB-transfer) serves the connection of inVISU 2.5 projects to AMS Asset
Graphics. The DB-transfer coordinates the data items between the two systems. By means of the AMS
Asset Graphics DB-Transfer-Editor, the exchange elements and the inVISU-2.5-project to be coupled can be
defined and stored in an assignment file. The runtime tasks of both systems (TDB32, TDB16) read the
assignment file and arrange an exchange of the configured data items with the respective system clock.
The inVISU 2.5 to AMS Asset Graphics Editor offers a user interface, by means of whose help, an
assignment file will be generated. In this file, the AMS Asset Graphics elements are assigned to inVISU 2.5
elements and vice versa. The choice of the elements will be relieved by choosing the path of inVISU 2.5 and
of the project, to make selections from the Reference lists.
See also
DB-Transfer-Table-window
Runtime
The runtime consists of a 32-bit runtime task for AMS Asset Graphics (TDBT32.EXE), a 16-bit runtime task
for inVISU 2.5 (TDBT16.EXE) and a 32-Bit-coupling-DLL (InvDBT32.DLL).
Program start
For the program start of the DB-transfer, the runtime programs (TDB32 and TDB16) must have been
entered in the respective program list of the projects to be coupled. In addition, the runtime of the inVISU 2.5
project (LZ.EXE) should be included in the AMS Asset Graphics program list.
See also Dialog Runtime configuration in the Project Manager
Attention Take care, that program DB-transfer is started before starting the LZ 2.5.
Program stop
To stop the runtimes of both systems, set the checkbox System stop in the dialog Select projects. If one of
the both system-elements _SystemStop (AMS Asset Graphics) or _PrStop (inVISU 2.5) is set in order to
stop the runtime, it will be transmitted to the other system and both systems will be stopped.
Accompanying system-elements
The Data base-transfer has got several system-elements in both systems.
AMS Asset Graphics

Element name Description
_InitDBT Indicates, whether the DB-transfer is initialized or not:
0 the initialization was completed correctly.
1 the initialization is in progress.
-1 The program is terminated.
_SuspendDBT with this system-element, the DB-transfer can be switched off.
The elements for the error handling can be defined in dialog Error handling.
inVISU 2.5
_DBTErr Indicates, whether the DB-transfer has noticed an error during the last action.
0 no error
1 error
_DBTErCt Counter of the errors that have occurred.
389

_DBTInit Indicates, whether the DB-transfer has been initialized or not.
0 the initialization was completed correctly
1 the initialization is in progress
_DBTAus with this system-element, the DB-transfer can be switched off.
DB-transfer table window

The AMS Asset Graphics elements as well as the corresponding inVISU 2.5 elements are entered into the
DB transfer tables. Typing in the element names in is made easier by choosing these names from the
reference list. This choice is also possible for inVISU 2.5 elements, when you have already defined the
corresponding project (see dialog Select projects).
To indicate, that the elements are connected to the other system, they can be provided automatically with a
prefix (see dialog Select prefix).
Column Description
AMS Asset Enter here the AMS Asset Graphics element. If you click with the right mouse button
Graphics Element on this field, you can select the element name from the AMS Asset Graphics
reference list.
inVISU 2.5 Enter here the inVISU-2.5 element. If you click with the right mouse button on this
Element field, you can select the element name from the inVISU 2.5 reference list.
Description Enter here a description to explain the element, e.g. where it is used, what is the
value range of it etc.
Type Into column Element you can enter num- or text-elements. Click the right mouse
button over this field and select from dialog Select type.
Note You can also mark and change several cells simultaneously. For this, click with
the right mouse button on one of the highlighted cells.
Dialog Selection prefix

To simplify the input of element names in the table, the registered element names are not only entered into
the edited cell but also in the relevant cell of the other system. However, this does only happen if the
element name was selected from the Reference list and the corresponding cell of the other system is still
empty. To recognize at the element name that this element is connected with another system, a prefix can
put in front of the element name for this operation.
The prefix may be defined differently for AMS Asset Graphics and for inVISU 2.5.
Prefix Enter here up to 4 characters. At an element selection from AMS Asset Graphics, these
PMS characters are put in front of the inVISU 2.5 element name.
Prefix 2.5 Enter here up to 8 characters. At an element selection from inVISU 2.5, these characters are
put in front of the AMS Asset Graphics element name.
Note You can only access on the reference list of the inVISU-2.5-project, when the relevant project was
selected previously (see Dialog Select projects).
390
inVISU 2.5 to PMS Editor
Dialog Select projects

In this dialog you define the directory, where the inVISU-2.5 data are stored and select the desired inVISU-
2.5 project.
Path Select here the inVISU-2.5 data directory a. Click button Browse on the right of the entry
field, to select the directory, or enter it manually.
Project After you have entered the data directory, the inVISU-2.5-projects will be shown here.
Select a project, to have access on the inVISU-2.5-reference list when selecting an element.
SystemStop Activate this option, to stop both systems – AMS Asset Graphics and inVISU 2.5 –
simultaneously.
If one of the both system-elements _SystemStop (AMS Asset Graphics) or _PrStop
(inVISU 2.5) is set, in order to stop the runtime, it will be transmitted to the other system and
both systems will be stopped.
Dialog reference list

To relieve input of data items in, there is the possibility to select a data-element from a reference list.
Different from the input via the keyboard, no typing mistake can creep in.
There are two reference lists for the different data types, num-elements and text-elements.
You open the reference list by clicking with the right mouse button on a cell of the table.
Option Description
Data Here you select with data type Num the indication of the reference list for num-elements and
type with data type Text the indication of the reference list for text-elements.
Number The number of data items of the inVISU 2.5 project is shown here.
Select in the left column the desired element name and confirm the dialog with OK.
Dialog Error handling

In this dialog you define elements, which indicate or count faults at database transfers.
Indicating Enter a num-element, which reports an appearing communication error with value 1. If no
element error occurs, the value of the element is 0.
Counter Enter a num-element, which counts the communication errors here. In case an error is
detected, this counter will be increased by 1.
391
Database interface
Overview data interface

Overview
The database interface offers two possibilities for connection to the AMS Asset Graphics database.
For the first, the database is addressed via a C++ User DLL.
In addition, the data-elements can be accessed via an automation server. The files and functions, necessary
for this, are provided by the database interface.
See also
Directory structure
Files of the database interface
Connection via C++
Connection via the automation server
Files of the database interface

C++
The following files are enclosed for the connection to C++:
DB_Defines.h
T_UserDB.h
User_DBClass.cpp
User_DBClass.h
User_DBInfo.cpp
User_DBInfo.h
The files have to be included in your C++ project.
393
Automation Server
The file InvDBServer32.tlb is enclosed.
It describes the object, which are provided by the AMS Asset Graphics automation server.
It can be imported by every program, that is capable for automation.
Automation
Connection via automation server

Overview
The database-interface offers the possibility to connect to the AMS Asset Graphics database with the help of
a so called automation server. The automation server can create, read and write data-elements.
The descriptions for the required function functions are summarized in file InvDBServer32.tlb. This file type
can be imported into your program environment, e.g. Visual Basic, to make these functions available for you.
Possible Problems
When accessing on InvDbServer32 you could possibly get error message 70 "Access denied", depending
on the configuration of the operating system. The problem is caused by an access restriction defined in the
operating system.
To troubleshoot the problem with Windows 2000 you have to proceed as follows:
1. Start program DCOMCNFG.EXE (as Administrator).
2. On page Standard security, click button Edit Default for the Default Access Permissions.
3. If not available you have to add user INTERACTIVE in the following dialog.
4. Enter the access right Access Permission for user INTERACTIVE.
5. After a restart of the operating system the access on InvDbServer32 should now be possible.
To troubleshoot the problem with Windows XP / Server 2003 you have to proceed as follows:
1. Start program DCOMCNFG.EXE (as Administrator).
2. Select menu item Properties with the right mouse button, in the tree view in field Component
Services -> Computer -> My Computer. Click button Edit Default on page Default COM Security for
the Access Permissions.
3. If not available, you have to add user INTERACTIVE in the following dialog.
4. Set the right Access Permission for user INTERACTIVE.
5. After a restart of the operating system the access on InvDbServer32 should now be possible.
See also
Creating an application with the automation server
394
Database interface
Example User_Program_VB
We have added a Visual BASIC 6.0 the User_Program_VB application as example for an application
program with data access via the automation server. In this example the operation principle of the objects
and the methods of the automation server are realized. In addition, the update message of the program is
used to show the current value of data-elements.
Register update message

Declare the global variable WM_DB_UPDATE.
WM_DB_UPDATE = RegisterWindowMessage("WM_DB_UPDATE") ' register the AMS Asset
Graphics Update Message
Handling the update message in an own WindowProc

To receive the update message the function WindowProc must be replaced by an own function, in which
the AMS Asset Graphics update message is handled.
Function WindowProc(ByVal hw As Long, ByVal uMsg As Long, ByVal wParam As
Long, ByVal lParam As Long) As Long
' The message is stored in uMsg.
' AMS Asset Graphics Database Update Message

If uMsg = WM_DB_UPDATE Then
' Explanation:
' You can not make an Automation call to an out-of-process (ActiveX) EXE from
' within the event notification of the system
' If an Automation method needs to be called in response to a user event
' involving the System Tray, use a simple Timer to post yourself a message,
' and then let the callback function complete.
' When the Timer event fires, you can safely call your Automation method.
' Enable the Timer in Form1. It will be disabled in the timer-function

Form1.Timer1.Enabled = True
End If
'Always call the original handler when done

WindowProc = CallWindowProc(lpPrevWndProc, hw, uMsg, wParam, lParam)
End Function
Function Timer1
The function processes the cyclical tasks of the program. The timer-function is activated by the update
message and switches off automatically.
' Timer function to make automation calls in the WindowProc function
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
Timer1.Enabled = False ' Disable the timer
' Initialisation not ready

If (InitUserVB.GetValue() = 1) Then
Else
ReadPMSTxtValue ' Read PMS Value of Num-Object
ReadPMSNumValue ' Read PMS Value of Txt-Object
ReadSystemStopValue ' Read PMS Value of _SystemStop
ReadSetTopUserVB ' Read PMS Value of SetTopUserVB
End If
End Sub
395
Open Database
In a Visual BASIC program the database can be opened in the Form_Load procedure of the dialog.
' Procedure is called when the window started
Private Sub Form_Load()
bOk = InitUserVB.SetName("InitUserVB", True) ' Set the Name of the Object
and make a creation
InitUserVB.SetValue (1) ' Tell the System the User-Program is initialise
gWH = Me.hWnd ' Set the global Window Handle

Caption = "AMS Asset Graphics- VISUAL BASIC User-Demo "' Set the title of
the Window
NumName = "TestNum" ' Default name for Num-Object

TxtName = "TestTxt" ' Default name for Txt-Object
bOk = NumEle.SetName(NumName, True) ' Set the name of the object and create
it
bOk = TxtEle.SetName(TxtName, True) ' Set the name of the object and create
it
bOk = SystemStop.SetName("_SystemStop", True) ' Set the name of the object

and create it
bOk = SetTopVI.SetName("_SetTopVI", True) ' Set the name of the object and
create it
bOk = SetTopUserVB.SetName("SetTopUserVB", True)' Set the name of the
object and create it
Timer1.Enabled = False ' Disable the timer

Timer1.Interval = 10 ' Set the timer interval to 10 milliseconds
DataBase.Open (gWH) ' Open the connection to the database so that

' the update message comes in
hook ' Public function from module 1 see there
InitUserVB.SetValue (0) ' Tell the system the user program is initialized
End Sub
Close Database
In a Visual BASIC program, the database can be closed in the Form_Unload procedure of the dialog.
' Procedure is called when the window is destroyed
Private Sub Form_Unload(Cancel As Integer)
' If Initialization is not ready and your program stops
If (InitUserVB.GetValue() = 1) Then
InitUserVB.SetValue (-1) ' set the data-element to -1 so that the
runtime
' recognizes an error
End If
Unhook ' Public function from module 1 see there
396
Database interface
DataBase.Close ' Close the connection to the database so that

' no update message is coming in
ServerApplication.Quit ' terminate the AMS Asset Graphics automation

server
Set ServerApplication = Nothing ' Delete database object
Set DataBase = Nothing ' Delete database object

Set TxtEle = Nothing ' Delete TxtEle object
Set NumEle = Nothing ' Delete NumEle object
Set SetTopVI = Nothing ' Delete NumEle object SetTopVI
Set SystemStop = Nothing ' Delete NumEle object SystemStop
Set SetTopUserVB = Nothing ' Delete NumEle object SystemStop
Set InitUserVB = Nothing ' Delete NumEle object SystemStop
End Sub
Create Num Object

This function is called with button Create in the field NUM. A num-element will be created with the entered
name.
' Procedure for button Num Create
Private Sub NumCreate_Click()
bOk = NumEle.SetName(NumName, True) ' Set the name of the num-element and
create it
End Sub
Create Txt Object

This function is called with button Create in the field TXT. A text-element will be created with the indicated
name.
' Procedure for button Txt Create
Private Sub TxtCreate_Click()
bOk = TxtEle.SetName(TxtName, True) ' Set the name of the text-element and
create it
End Sub
Read Num Object

This function is called with button Read in the field NUM. The function tries to read the entered num-
element.
' Procedure for button Num Read
Private Sub NumRead_Click()
NumValue = NumEle.GetValue() ' Read the value of the num-element
End Sub
Read Txt Object

This function is called with button Read in the field TXT. The function tries to read the entered text-element.
' Procedure for button Txt Read
Private Sub TxtRead_Click()
TxtValue = TxtEle.GetValue() ' Read the value of the text-element
End Sub
397
Write Num Object

This function is called with button Write in the field NUM. The function tries to write the entered num-
element.
' Procedure for button Num Write
Private Sub NumWrite_Click()
NumEle.SetValue (NumValue) ' Write the value of the num-element
End Sub
Write Txt Object

This function is called with button Write in the field TXT. The function tries to write the entered text-element.
' Procedure for button Txt Write
Private Sub TxtWrite_Click()
TxtEle.SetValue (TxtValue) ' Write the value of the text-element
End Sub
Provided TLB file

The file InvDBServer32.tlb is provided for integration in a program environment. In addition, the AMS Asset
Graphics automation server (InvDBServer32.exe) is enclosed. It must be started once to register the
automation interface.
The following objects can be opened with the database interface after integration of the TLB file.
InvDBServer32.DBConnectServer
With this object the message connection to the database is realized.
Methods
Name Description
Open Registration to the AMS Asset Graphics database. The parameter hWnd must be a valid
(HWND:long) window handle.
Returns true, if the function call was successful.
Close() Disconnects from the database.
Returns true, if the function call was successful.
InvDBServer32.NumEleServer
This object corresponds to a num-element in the database. It can be created, changed or read.
Methods
Name Description
procedure Toggle Increases the object value by 1.
function GetName Returns the name of the object on EleName and as return value.
(EleName:string)
function Returns the length of the name.
GetNameLength
function SetName Sets the name of the element. If Create is true and the element doesn't exist, it
(EleName:string, will be created.
Create:boolean) Returns true, if the function call was successful.
function Exist Returns true, if the object exists in the database.
398
Database interface
Name Description
function IsChanged Returns true, if the object has changed.
(Clear:boolean) Clear defines, if the change flag shall be cleared after the function call.
function SetChange Sets the object as changed. Returns true, if the function call was successful.
function SetValue Sets the value of the object. Returns true, if the function call was successful.
(Value:double)
function GetValue Returns the current value of the object.
InvDBServer32.TxtEleServer
This object corresponds to a text-element in the database. It can be created, changed or read.
Methods
Name Description
function GetName Returns the name of the object on EleName and as return value.
(EleName: string)
function Returns the length of the name.
GetNameLength
function SetName Sets the name of the element. If Create is true and the element doesn't exist, it
(EleName:string, will be created.
Create:boolean) Returns true, if the function call was successful.
function Exist Returns true, if the object exists in the database.
function IsChanged Returns true, if the object has changed.
(Clear:boolean) Clear defines, if the change flag shall be cleared after the function call.
function SetChange Sets the object as changed. Returns true, if the function call was successful.
function SetValue Sets the value of the object. Returns true, if the function call was successful.
(Value:string)
function GetValue Returns the value of the object.
InvDBServer32.TdbInfoServer
This object can read information from the AMS Asset Graphics and can send the update message.
Methods
Name Description
procedure Update Sends an update message in the database to all connected runtime programs.
function IsUpdate Returns true, if the message is the AMS Asset Graphics update message.
(Message:short)
procedure GetInfo Returns information on the database in the parameters:
(RefCount:long, RefCount = Applied database user
MaxNUM:long, MaxNUM = Max. number of num-elements
MaxTXT:long, MaxTXT = Max. Number of text-elements
AktNUM:long, AktNUM = Current number of num-elements
AktTXT:long) AktTXT = Current number of text-elements
function GetNameNUM Returns the name of the num-element at the Index position as string.
(Index:long)
function GetNameTXT Returns the name of the text-element at the Index position as string.
(Index:long)
399
Creating an application with the automation server

General
The automation server, that is used to connect the applications to the AMS Asset Graphics database,
includes the following files:
InvDBServer32.tlb
InvDBServer32.exe
The files are stored in the AMS Asset Graphics program directory.
File InvDBServer32.tlb contains the definitions for the automation calls. It can be imported in the individual
development environments. With this, the object can be applied and used.
In InvDBServer32.exe the automation server for AMS Asset Graphics is implemented. It must be started
once on the computer, in order to register the automation interface.
See also
Example
C++
C++ connection
Overview
The database-interface offers the possibility to connect to the AMS Asset Graphics database with the help of
C++.
The database can send a update message cyclically to your program. In addition, the C++ interface offers
you functions to create, read or write data-elements. The functions, necessary for this, are summarized in
classes.
The following drawing shows the interaction of the single components.
400
Database interface
See also
Provided C++ classes
Exported functions of InvDBUser32.DLL
Writing an application program in C++
Provided C++ classes

The C++ database-interface provides 4 classes
CUserDBConnection
CUserNumEle
CUserTxtEle
CUserTdbInfo
CUserDBConnection
With this class the message connection to the database is realized.
Constructors / destructors
Name Description
CUserDBConnection() Default constructor.
~CUserDBConnection() Default destructor.
Functions
Name Description
Open Opens the message connection to the database.
(HWND hWnd)
Close() Closes the message connection to the database.
Members
Name Description
HWND m_hWnd Window handle of the user program.
CUserTdbInfo
Message functions
Name Description
void Update Sends an update message to all connected programs.
(void);
BOOL IsUpdate Returns TRUE, if the received message is a update message.
(UINT Message);
401
Information functions
Name Description
void GetInfo Returns information on the database in the parameters:
(LPDWORD RefCount, RefCount = Applied database user
LPDWORD MaxNUM, MaxNUM = Max. number of num-elements
LPDWORD MaxTXT, MaxTXT = Max. Number of text-elements
LPDWORD AktNUM, LPDWORD AktNUM = Current number of num-elements
AktTXT) AktTXT = Current number of text-elements
BOOL GetNameNUM Retrieves the name of the num-element / text-element in parameter
(LPSTR EleName, EleName at the index position.
DWORD Index) Returns true, if the function call was successful.
BOOL GetNameTXT
(LPSTR EleName,
DWORD Index)
Macros
Name Description
DefUserNum(Name) This macro creates with the specified name a num-element in the database and an
object in the source code.
DefUserTxt(Name) This macro creates with the specified name a text-element in the database and an
object in the source code.
CUserNumEle
With this class num-elements can be created, read or modified.
Constructors
Name Description
CUserNumEle() The default constructor.
CUserNumEle Creates an object with a name and resets immediately the change
(LPCSTR Name, flag.
BOOL bClearChange = FALSE)
CUserNumEle Creates an object with a name and sets InitValue.
(LPCSTR Name, double
InitValue
Operators
Name Description
double operator = (CUserNumEle Name) Sets the object with the value of the named num-element.
void operator =(double NumValue Sets the num-element with a double value.
operator const double() Returns the value as double.
operator const int() Returns the value as integer.
void operator ++(void) Increments the value.
void operator --(void) Decrements the value.
402
Database interface
Functions
Name Description
void Toggle() The object value will be increased by one at every call, until the maximum value is
reached. At the next call of the function, the value will be reset on 0 again.
LPSTR GetName Returns the name of the object in parameter EleName and as return value.
(LPSTR EleName)
LPCSTR GetName() Returns the element name.
int Returns the length of the name.
GetNameLength()
BOOL SetName Sets the name of the object with or without creating the object.
(LPCSTR EleName,
BOOL bCreate =
TRUE)
BOOL Exist() Decides, whether the element does exist in the database. Returns TRUE, if the
element exists.
BOOL IsChanged Returns TRUE if the object has changed.
(BOOL bClear = bClear defines, if the change flag shall be reset after the function call.
TRUE)
BOOL SetChange(); Sets the change flag for the num-element.
Members
The member variables should not be addressed directly. Instead of this, use the corresponding function.
Name Description
char m_Name Name of the currently used element.
DWORD m_Index The position of the element in the database.
DWORD In this variable the last change status is stored. When this member has another
m_OldChange value as that in the database, the element is considered as changed.
CUserTxtEle
Constructors
Name Description
CUserTxtEle() The default constructor.
CUserTxtEle Creates an object with a name and clears immediately the change
(LPCSTR Name, flag.
BOOL bClearChange = FALSE)
CUserTxtEle Creates an object with a name and sets it with InitText.
(LPCSTR Name, LPCSTR
InitText)
403
Operators
Name Description
operator = (CUserTxtEle Name) Compares the object value with the values of the named object.
operator = (LPSTR Text) Set object value with Text.
operator = (LPCSTR Text) Set object value with Text.
operator == (LPSTR Text) Check if object value is equal with Text.
operator != (LPSTR Text) Check if object value is not equal with Text.
operator LPCSTR() Returns the value as LPCSTR-pointer.
Functions
Name Description
LPSTR GetName Returns the name of the object in parameter EleName and as return value.
(LPSTR EleName)
LPCSTR GetName() Returns the name of the object.
int GetNameLength() Returns the length of the name.
BOOL SetName Sets the name of the object with or without creating the object.
(LPCSTR EleName,
BOOL bCreate = TRUE)
BOOL Exist(void) Returns TRUE, if the element exists.
BOOL IsChanged Returns TRUE if the object has changed.
(BOOL bClear = TRUE) bClear defines, if the change flag shall be reset after the function call.
BOOL SetChange(void); Sets the change flag for the text-element.
Members
The member variables should not be addressed directly. Instead of this, use the corresponding function.
Name Description
char m_Name Name of the currently used element.
DWORD m_Index The position of the element in the database.
DWORD In this variable the last change status is stored. When this member has another
m_OldChange value as that in the database, the element is considered as changed.
Writing an application program in C++

General
The database-interface for the connection to C++ includes the following files:
DB_Defines.h
T_DBUser.h
User_DBClass.Cpp und.h
User_DBInfo.Cpp und.h
InvDBUser32.lib
The files contain the definition of the database, the function calls of the InvDBUser32.DLL and the user
classes.
To make a program to an AMS Asset Graphics application program, add these files to the program. Add file
InvDBUser32.lib from the AMS Asset Graphics program directory to the project.
404
Database interface
See also
Example
Example User_Program_VC
The program User_Program_VC demonstrate the use of the database interface in the language C++.
In addition, the update message of the program is used to show the current values of the data-elements.
You will find the samples in the file User_Program_VCDlg.cpp.
Register update message

Declare the global variable WM_DB_UPDATE.
UINT NEAR WM_DB_UPDATE = RegisterWindowMessage(szWM_DB_UPDATE); // database
message for update
Enter update message in message map

To receive the update message, it must be registered in the message map of the program. Function
OnTDBUpdate will be called up with the update message.
BEGIN_MESSAGE_MAP(CUser_Program_VCDlg, CDialog)
//{{AFX_MSG_MAP(CUser_Program_VCDlg)
ON_WM_SYSCOMMAND()
ON_WM_PAINT()
ON_WM_QUERYDRAGICON()
ON_BN_CLICKED(ID_CREATE_NUM, OnCreateNum)
ON_BN_CLICKED(ID_CREATE_TXT, OnCreateTxt)
ON_BN_CLICKED(ID_READ_NUM, OnReadNum)
ON_BN_CLICKED(ID_READ_TXT, OnReadTxt)
ON_BN_CLICKED(ID_WRITE_NUM, OnWriteNum)
ON_BN_CLICKED(ID_WRITE_TXT, OnWriteTxt)
ON_REGISTERED_MESSAGE(WM_DB_UPDATE, OnTDBUpdate) // register update message
ON_WM_CREATE()
ON_WM_DESTROY()
ON_EN_CHANGE(IDC_NAME_NUM, OnChangeNameNum)
ON_EN_CHANGE(IDC_NAME_TXT, OnChangeNameTxt)
ON_BN_CLICKED(ID_APP_ABOUT, OnAppAbout)
ON_BN_CLICKED(ID_APP_VI, OnAppVi)
//}}AFX_MSG_MAP
END_MESSAGE_MAP()
405
Function OnTDBUpdate
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
// CUser_Program_VCDlg
// update message from AMS Asset Graphics
LRESULT CUser_Program_VCDlg::OnTDBUpdate(WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam)
{
wParam; lParam;
// Initialization ready?
if ((int) _InitUserVC == 1)
return (0);
// Check if _SystemStop
if ((BOOL) _SystemStop != 0) {
int Result = 0;
EndDialog(Result); // stop the program
}
// Check if program must be on top
if (_SetTopUserVC.IsChanged()) {
if (AfxGetMainWnd()->IsIconic()) // Is the application
iconized?
AfxGetMainWnd()->ShowWindow(SW_RESTORE); // then restore
AfxGetMainWnd()->ActivateTopParent(); // application activate
AfxGetMainWnd()->GetLastActivePopup()->SetFocus(); // set focus to
window
}
// find out if the object exist in the database

if (m_NumEle.Exist()) {
// set the dialog variable with the value
itoa(m_NumEle, m_PMSValueNum.GetBuffer(20), 10);
m_PMSValueNum.ReleaseBuffer();
}
else {
// set the dialog variable with the message text
m_PMSValueNum = "object does not exist in database";
}

if (m_TxtEle.Exist()) {
// set the dialog variable with the value
m_PMSValueTxt = m_TxtEle;
}
else {
// set the dialog variable with the message text
m_PMSValueTxt = "object does not exist in database";
}
SetDlgItemText(IDC_PMS_VALUE_NUM, m_PMSValueNum);
SetDlgItemText(IDC_PMS_VALUE_TXT, m_PMSValueTxt);
return (FALSE);
}
406
Database interface
Open Database
In a dialog-based application, the database can be opened in the OnCreate function of the dialog.
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
// CUser_Program _VCDlg
// window is created
int CUser_Program_VCDlg::OnCreate(LPCREATESTRUCT lpCreateStruct)
{
// set the Init-Element to 1 so that the Runtime recognize Initialisation
startet
_InitUserVC = 1;
if (CDialog::OnCreate(lpCreateStruct) == -1)
return -1;
// connect the AMS Asset Graphics database

if (!m_DBConnection.Open(m_hWnd)) {
AfxMessageBox("Could not connect to AMS Asset Graphics database"); //
Error message
}
// set the init element to 0 so that the runtime detects initialization

ready
_InitUserVC = 0;
return 0;
}
Close Database
In a dialog-based application, the database can be closed in the OnDestroy function of the dialog.
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
// window is destroyed
void CUser_Program_VCDlg::OnDestroy()
{
CDialog::OnDestroy();
// disconnect from the AMS Asset Graphics database

if (!m_DBConnection.Close()) {
AfxMessageBox("Could not connect to AMS Asset Graphics database"); //
Error message
}
// If initialization is not ready and your program stops

if ((double)_InitUserVC == 1) {
// set the Init-Element to -1 so that the runtime detects an error
_InitUserVC = -1;
}
}
407
Create num-element
This function is called with button Create in the field NUM.
A num-element will be created with the entered name and value.
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
// This function creates a num-element in the AMS Asset Graphics database
void CUser_Program_VCDlg::OnCreateNum()
{
// get the data from the dialog
UpdateData();
// create the Num-object with the name and value

CUserNumEle Num = CUserNumEle(m_NameNum, m_ValueNum);
}
Create text-element
This function is called with button Create in the TXT -field. A text-element will be created with the entered
name and value.
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
// This function creates a text-element in the AMS Asset Graphics database
void CUser_Program_VCDlg::OnCreateTxt()
{
UpdateData();
// create the Txt-object with the name and value

CUserTxtEle Txt = CUserTxtEle(m_NameTxt, m_ValueTxt);
}
Read num-element
This function is called with button Read in the field NUM. The function tries to read the entered num-
element.
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
// This function read a num-element from the AMS Asset Graphics database
void CUser_Program_VCDlg::OnReadNum()
{
// find out if the object exist in the AMS Asset Graphics database
// set the dialog variable with the object-value
m_ValueNum = m_NumEle;
}
else {
// Error message
AfxMessageBox("num-element doesn't exist in AMS Asset Graphics
database");
}
// set the data in dialog
UpdateData(FALSE);
}
408
Database interface
Read text-element
This function is called with button Read in the field TXT. The function tries to read the entered text-element.
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
// This function read a text-element from the AMS Asset Graphics database
void CUser_Program_VCDlg::OnReadTxt()
{
// find out if the object exist in the AMS Asset Graphics database
// set the dialog variable with the object-value
m_ValueTxt = m_TxtEle;
}
else {
// Error message
AfxMessageBox("text-element doesn't exist in AMS Asset Graphics
database");
}
// set the data in dialog
UpdateData(FALSE);
}
Write num-element
This function is called with button Write in the field NUM. The function tries to write the entered num-
element.
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
// This function writes in a num-element
void CUser_Program_VCDlg::OnWriteNum()
{
UpdateData();

// set the object-value with the dialog variable
m_NumEle = m_ValueNum;
}
else {
// Errormessage
AfxMessageBox("object does not exist in AMS Asset Graphics database");
}
}
409
Write text-element
This function is called with button Write in the field TXT. The function tries to write the entered text-element.
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
// This function writes in a text-element
void CUser_Program_VCDlg::OnWriteTxt()
{
UpdateData();

// set the object-value with the dialog variable
m_TxtEle = m_ValueTxt;
}
else {
// Error message
AfxMessageBox("object does not exist in AMS Asset Graphics database");
}
}
Exported functions of the InvDBUser32.DLL

General
The exported functions of the InvDBUser32.Dll are used for the connection from C++ to the AMS Asset
Graphics database.
When you have inserted these classes in your program, you do not need any additional calls of these
functions.
Message functions
Name Description
BOOL Opens the database and permits the system to send an update-
TDBUser_OpenDatabase message to your program.
(HWND hWnd)
BOOL Closes the message-connection to the database.
TDBUser_CloseDatabase
(HWND hWnd)
void TDBUser_Update(void) Forces the transmitting of an update-message to all tasks connected to
the database.
BOOL TDBUser_IsUpdate Returns TRUE, if it is a update-message.
(DWORD Message)
410
Database interface
Element functions
Name Description
BOOL TDBUser_CreateNUM Creates a num-element / text-element in the database.
(LPCSTR EleName, LPDWORD Index)
BOOL TDBUser_CreateTXT
BOOL TDBUser_ExistNUM Decides, whether the num-element / text-element does exist in
(LPCSTR EleName, LPDWORD Index) the database or not.
BOOL TDBUser_ExistTXT
double TDBUser_GetNUM Returns the value of the num-element.
BOOL TDBUser_GetTXT Returns the value of the text-element in parameter TextValue.
(LPCSTR EleName, LPSTR TextValue,
LPDWORD Index)
void TDBUser_SetNUM Sets a new value to the num-element / text-element in the
(LPCSTR EleName, double NumValue, database.
LPDWORD Index)
void TDBUser_SetTXT
(LPCSTR EleName, LPCSTR
TxtValue,
LPDWORD Index)
void TDBUser_ToggleNUM Increases the value of the num-element by 1.
BOOL TDBUser_SetChangeNUM Sets the num-element / text-element as changed.
BOOL TDBUser_SetChangeTXT
BOOL TDBUser_IsChangedNUM Returns TRUE, if the num-element / text-element has changed.
(LPCSTR EleName, LPDWORD Index,
LPDWORD OldChange, BOOL
bClearBit)
BOOL TDBUser_IsChangedTXT
(LPCSTR EleName, LPDWORD Index,
LPDWORD OldChange, BOOL
bClearBit)
BOOL Returns the element name of a num-element / text-element at
TDBUser_EleNameOfIndexNUM the index position).
(LPSTR EleName, DWORD Index,
BOOL bSortedPos)
BOOL
TDBUser_EleNameOfIndexTXT
(LPSTR EleName, DWORD Index,
BOOL bSortedPos)
411
Glossary
Alarm picture
For every event an alarm picture can be defined. This picture will be displayed, when the event occurs.
Operator / User
To protect the system against unauthorized access, up to 100 different operators (or users) can be defined
with passwords, which are assigned to different access rights.
Operating Log Runtime

The Operating Log Runtime records and calculates data.
These data can be viewed and printed in reports.
Picture change
Change from one process picture to another one.
The change of the pictures can be realized in different ways. Generally, a function key or a button is defined,
by means of which the system-element _NewPic is assigned to the name of the new picture.
An other option for a picture change can be configured in the Eventjournal Editor. A picture can be defined
here, to which the program changes automatically, when an event occurs.
DB-Transfer
Transfer of data types between the systems inVISU 2.5 and AMS Asset Graphics.
DDE
The abbreviation DDE stands for Dynamic Data Exchange. DDE is a mechanism of Windows to permit data
exchange between different applications.
Database replication
The database replication is a technique of the SQL server. With this technique data can be replicated by
different databases. AMS Asset Graphics uses the merge replication, which permits the changing of data at
both databases.
Data input
Input or change of data-elements (e.g. setpoints) during runtime.
413
Data-element
A data-element, also called element, is a variable in AMS Asset Graphics, which contains a numerical value
or a text. The data-element can gets the value either directly from the process, via the data input or from
other actions.
A number of data-element (system-elements) is predefined.
Data storage
With the data storage num- and text-elementst can be stored to definable times (e.g. every 2 seconds) or
depending on events (e.g. a data change). These stored data can be accessed with trend charts or with
external programs for purposes of representation or further processing.
Data types
The following abbreviations are used for the different data types:
Abbreviation Data type
NUM Num-element
TXT Text-element
C-Num Numerical constants in VBScript
C-Txt Text constants in VBScript
Debugger
By means of the Debugger the contents of data-elements can be watched and changed. This permits testing
objects and detecting errors.
Properties
Every object is characterized by its properties. There are static and dynamic properties. The characteristics
of an object (e.g. of a circle which changes its color depending on a data-element) are defined in property
dialogs.
Development
In order to provide the desired design and properties for the runtime programs, they have to be defined
before in the development.
The development programs are the Project Manager for the administration of the projects, the Graphic
Editor to create process pictures. Other components are the process assignment , events, data storage,
trend charts, activity and operation logs, recipes, etc.
Event
An event is triggered, when a data-element is leaving the permissible range. An event that has occurred
(event comes), will be entered into the Eventjournal and can be seen there. An event is regarded as active,
as long as the reason for its triggering is still available.
414
Glossar
Eventjournal
The eventjournal is a runtime list of events.
Event Viewer
The program Event Viewer shows current and historical events.
The events can be printed in configurable reports.
Maintenance Runtime
Maintenance is the routine actions which keep devices in working order (maintenance) or prevent trouble
from arising (preventive maintenance).
The Maintenance Runtime records and calculates the maintenance data automatically.
These data can be viewed and printed in reports.
Runtime
The real process visualization, whose properties were defined in the AMS Asset Graphics development
environment. The individual tasks are executed by different programs. The list of the runtime programs is
defined in the Project Manager.
Activity Log
With the Activity Log, operator inputs during runtime and important actions of individual programs can be
documented.
The Activity Log Viewer displays the data in multiple views.
Log level
Via the log level, the recording of entries into the activity log is controlled over different levels. The activity
log entries can be sorted according to the log level.
An action with the log level 0 is not recorded in the activity log.
Network mode
The network mode permits to visualize and operate an AMS Asset Graphics project via several computers.
At this, one computer operates as master and the other computers as stations.
Notification-trigger
An notification-trigger indicates the completion of an action by the change of its value.
The element will be increased by 1 and reset on 0 when reaching 255.
Num-element
A num-element is a variable and can store floating point numbers in the range from -1.7E+308 to 1.7E+308.
415
ODBC
The ODBC interface (Open Data Base Connectivity) permits applications, to access on data of several
databases via SQL commands, e.g. ORACLE, MS SQL-Server, INFORMIX, PARADOX, dBase or ACCESS.
This interface offers a maximum in portability, one application can access on different databases. This
permits the application designer to develop applications without the need to commit on one definite
database management system (DBMS). Then, the end user can add the so called database drivers, which
realize the connection between the application and the database.
OPC
OLE for Process Control (OPC), is the original name for an open standards specification. The standard
specifies the communication of real-time plant data between control devices from different manufacturers
A client-server architecture subdivides the software components in OPC Server and OPC Clients. An OPC
Server provides data via the OPC interface, for example it collects data via a field bus system and offers
them to other clients. The AMS Asset Graphics program, as OPC Client, has access on measuring points
via so-called OPC-items. The OPC-items have logical names (such as "Filling level" or "Weight") and can be
summarized to a group (item-group). The access for reading and writing will take place on this group level.
Object
Every object forms an independent unit which shows properties like color, form, outline, size and display
position.
The properties are part of its definition. An object can have static and dynamic properties.
Password protection
With the help of the password protection, the operation of the AMS Asset Graphics is protected against
unauthorized access.
Project
A project summarizes all definitions of a task to one name.
With the development programs several projects can be edited and data (e.g. graphics) can be transferred
from one project to another one.
The definitions of an AMS Asset Graphics project are stored in a project directory of the same name.
Process assignment
Definition of the assignment of data-elements with real process values via so called process assignment
tables.
Acknowledgment
Acknowledgment of events is made in the Eventjournal Runtime or in the Event Viewer.
The definition, whether an acknowledgement is required or not, is configured in the Eventjournal Editor.
416
Glossar
Recipe
A recipe is a file, which contains values for a group of data-elements. These values can be transferred from
the file to data-elements (loading a recipe) or saved from the data-elements into the file (saving a recipe).
The values of the data-elements are e.g. setpoints of a machine or ratios of chemical recipe mixtures.
Recipe group
A recipe group is the definition, which data-elements are part of a recipe.
Recipe groups are defined in the Recipe Editor. During runtime, several recipes can be defined for every
recipe group.
Recipe Runtime
With the Recipe Runtime you can load, edit and save recipes during runtime.
Ring buffer
The data of the data storage are saved in one or more ring buffers.
It can freely be defined, how many datasets shall be stored in one ring buffer. If the ring buffer is full, the
oldest dataset will first be overwritten.
Button
A button is a control element that provides the user a simple way to start dedicated functions.
Slider
With help of a slider data-elements are displayed and can be changed.
The value will be displayed via the position of a thumb, which is also used to change its value. The slider
can be divided in sectors with a scale.
Scrollbar
With help of a scrollbar data-elements are displayed and can be changed.
The value will be displayed via the position of a thumb, which is also used to change its value.
Script
A script is a mathematical or logical expression, which can be used for inputs instead of data-elements. An
expression can e.g. be a sum of several elements or other mathematical functions.
Language changeover
The changing of the used language in the runtime is called language changeover.
417
This is useful, e.g. if a machine with a visualization shall be delivered into multilingual countries. The same
visualization software can then be delivered to the different countries with the user texts in the respective
national language.
Control-trigger
If the value of a control-trigger changes, the relevant action will be started.
Symbol
One or several objects can be saved with their properties as a symbol. This symbol can be loaded again and
placed into any graphic. In doing so, it can keep its original size but can also be enlarged or reduced.
System-element
A system-element is a data-element, whose functionality is predefined by the AMS Asset Graphics.
Text-element
A text-element is a variable can store texts with a maximum length of 80 characters.
Toggle
Increasing of a data-element by 1; when reaching 255, the data-element will be reset to 0 again.
Toggling is used to start actions.
Driver
A (communication-) driver is a program which realizes the data exchange to the process.
The drivers to be used, are defined in the Process Assignment Editor.
Driver profile
A driver profile summarizes the settings, which describe the communication parameter to a specified partner
device.
For every driver any number of profiles may be generated. A driver profile can be assigned to any of process
assignment tables.
Trend chart
A trend chart shows stored data of a definite period. This period may be set differently during runtime, thus
the representation of both, online data and historical data is possible.
Trigger
A data-element which controls actions or indicates them.
418
Glossar
Vector graphic
A vector graphic is mathematically be defined as a set of several points, which are connected with each
other by lines. The static and dynamic elements of a vector graphic are called objects. Since every object is
an independent unit, it can be moved any time and its properties can be changed without reducing its quality
and without affecting other objects in the graphic.
UTC
The international abbreviation for "Coordinated Universal Time " is UTC. UTC is assigned to the time zone
defined by the 0 meridian (Greenwich).
The UTC is a basis for dates, because it enables exact international date specifications.
Local time zones are expressed as positive or negative offsets from UTC.
Since the time remains unchanged over the whole year, an hour must be added or removed in addition for
the summertime.
Visualization
Definition of the optical appearance of the process data in the runtime program (i.e. of the static and
dynamic objects).
Also the name for the runtime program, which presents the pictures.
Zooming
With the zooming function, the view area on the process graphic in the Graphic Editor can be enlarged or
reduced.
You can also zoom in trend charts.
419
Appendix
Functionality
The following table gives a general overview on the AMS Asset Graphics functions.
Functionality Editor Runtime program

Configuration
Entering of license information. Configuration
Configuration (network station system; data
directories,
floating license).
Project administration (create, delete and Project Manager
copy projects or project files).
Starting editors. Project Manager
Starting of runtime programs. Project Manager Runtime
Cross reference. Project Manager
User interface /Operation
Graphics (static and dynamic). Graphic Editor Visualization
Visualization as a
component
User interface. Graphic Editor Visualization
Trend charts (displaying store data). Graphic Editor, Visualization,
Data Storage Editor Data Storage Runtime
Password protection, Activity log Project Manager, Graphic Activity Log Viewer
Editor,
Eventjournal Editor, Recipe
Editor
Touch Panel operation Project Manager, Graphic Visualization,
Editor Eventjournal Runtime,
Recipe Runtime
Network mode
Network Editor Network Master
Network Station
Network Start
Language changeover
Definition of used languages. Language Editor All runtime programs
Definition of language texts.
Alarms
Detection of alarms. Eventjournal Editor Eventjournal Runtime
Historical alarms. Eventjournal Editor Event Viewer
Alarm reporting. Eventjournal Runtime,
Event Viewer
Data handling
Storage of data (event-triggered). Data Storage Editor Data Storage Runtime
Import/Export of data.
421
Functionality Editor Runtime program

Maintenance tasks. Maintenance Editor Maintenance Runtime
Recipe administration (create, delete, load, Recipe Editor Recipe Runtime
store and edit recipes).
Data exchange via drivers. Process Assignment Editor + Process Assignment
Driver Runtime,
Driver
OPC Client. OPC Editor OPC Runtime
OPC Server. OPC Server
Data exchange per ODBC ODBC Editor ODBC Runtime
Data and commands per DDE-client. DDE Editor DDE Runtime
DDE-Server functionality DDE Runtime
Others
Displaying and manipulation of runtime data. Debugger
Stop all runtime programs Stop
Parallel operation with inVISU 2.5 inVISU 2.5 to PMS Editor inVISU 2.5 to PMS
Runtime
Programming interfaces
VBScript
Visual Basic
Microsoft Visual C++
Add-Ins
Acron-Protocols
PageControl (e.g. SMS, Email, remote
operation)
Hardware monitoring with SNMP.
422
Appendix
Directory structure
AMS Asset Graphics uses the following directory structures:
AMS Asset Graphics(1)

+--- Driver (2)
+--- Doc (3)
+--- Dongle (4)
+--- UserInterface (5)
+--- C++
+--- Automation Server
+--- VBScript (6)
+--- Cursor (7*)
+--- Library (8*)
+--- Demo
+--- Engines
+--- .
+--- .
+--- Project (9*)
+--- DefaultProject (10)
+--- PMS_Working
+--- Graphic
+--- Ref
+--- DS
+--- BP
+--- IH
+--- LOG
+--- 2008
+--- 2009
+--- 2010
+--- RC
+--- Group1
+--- Recipe_2
+--- TestProject
+--- .
+--- .
Explanations to the directories:

No. Name Description
1 AMS Asset In this directory, the AMS Asset Graphics program files are stored. The name of
Graphics the directory is indicated at the installation. The standard name is AMS Asset
Graphics.
This directory is named program directory in the documentation.
2 Driver In this directory, the driver files are stored.
This directory is named Driver directory in the documentation.
3 Doc In this directory, the program description is stored as Word-format together with a
form for the license information.
4 Dongle This directory contains the system software, necessary for requesting and
423
No. Name Description

checking the dongle.
5 UserInterface This directory contains files that are used to generate an application program.
(See User interface files)
6 VBScript Setups and documentation for VBScript are stored in this directory.
7 Cursor * In this directory the files for different mouse cursors are stored. Cursor files can
be used in the visualization in connection with buttons and other controls.
8 Library * In directory Library, data files are stored, which are used also for other projects.
Library is the root directory for the libraries.
The following files are stored in libraries:
- iSBL (Symbols)
- Graphics files such as BMP (bitmap), JPG, WMF/EMF (Metafiles)
New libraries are installed with the Graphic Editor.
9 Project * In this directory all projects are stored as separate subdirectories (project
directories). At this, the name of the project is also the name of the directory.
The projected data files will also be stored in the project directory.
Each project directory again contains up to 6 subdirectories:
Graphic files (e.g. BMP, EMF, JPG) and symbol files (iSBL) which are used only
in the accompanying project, are stored in subdirectory GRAPHIC.
Reference files (file ending iREF) are stored (automatically) in subdirectory REF.
Reference files are necessary for generating the cross-reference list.
The runtime files of the data storage are stored in subdirectory DS.
Report designer patterns for the maintenance are stored in subdirectory IH.
In subdirectory LOG all activity log files are saved. This LOG-directory contains
hierarchically, the year (4 digits) and the month (2 digits) in form of subdirectories.
The month directory contains an activity log file for every day.
Subdirectory RC contains the runtime files of the Recipe Runtime. Every recipe
group represents also a subdirectory of this directory; in these subdirectories the
real recipes are stored as database files.
10 DefaultProject When generating a new project (Project Manager), the files are copied from this
directory into the new project directory.
If several projects are edited, project files can be stored in directory
DefaultProject, which are identical in all projects, thus these definitions are at
disposal when starting a new project.
The root directory for the directories, labeled with * (indicated red in the graphic), can be modified with
program Configuration in tab Directories. This root directory is named Data directory in the
documentation. The default setting for the data directory is the program directory.
The bold typed names are used in the programs, for this reason they must not be changed.
424
Appendix

File name Description
Basis32.exe Graphic Editor
BP32.exe Operation Log Editor
ConfigPC.exe Configuration
DS32.exe Data Storage Editor
EJ32.exe Eventjournal Editor
IH32.exe Maintenance Editor
InvDBServer32.exe Automation server
InvOPCServer32.exe OPC Server
Log32.exe Activity Log Viewer
Lz32.exe Runtime program
ML32.exe Language Editor
MP32.exe Network Editor
MPStart32.exe Network Start
OD32.exe ODBC Editor
OPC32.exe OPC Editor
PM32.exe Project Manager
PZ32.exe Process Assignment Editor
RZ32.exe Recipe Editor
Stop32.exe Stop
Sync32.exe SyncTool
TB32.exe Operation Log Runtime
TDBT32.exe DB-Transfer-runtime
TDDE32.exe DDE Runtime
TDS32.exe Data Storage Runtime
TEJ32.exe Eventjournal Runtime
TEJ32_Viewer.exe Event Viewer
TIH32.exe Maintenance Runtime
TMPM32.exe Network Master
TMPS32.exe Network Station
TOD32.exe ODBC Runtime
TOPC32.exe OPC Runtime (OPC Client)
TPZ32.exe Process Assignment Runtime
TRZ32.exe Recipe Runtime
Vi32.exe Visualization
ViViewer.ocx Visualization as ActiveX
425
Used file names in projects

File name Description Editor Runtime File identification text
*.iPIC Picture file BASIS32 VI32 i4 Visualization Picture
*.iSBL Symbols for pictures BASIS32 VI32 i4 Visualization Symbol
ViConfig.iVPC Visualization project BASIS32 VI32 i4 Visualization Project
configuration Configuration
BlinkCol.iBLK Flashing color definitions BASIS32 BASIS32, i4 Blink Configuration
VI32,
EJ32,
TEJ32
*.iDTT Process assignment table PZ32 TPZ32 i4 DataTransferTable
Profiles.iDPF Driver profile definitions PZ32 TPZ32 i4 DriverProfiles
*.iOPC OPC assignment file OPC32 TOPC32 i4 OPC Tag Definition
Alarms.iALM Alarm definitions EJ32 TEJ32 i4 AlarmDefines

Groups.iAGP Group definitions EJ32 TEJ32 i4 GroupDefines
Printer.iPRN Printer definitions EJ32 TEJ32 i4 PrinterDefines
TEJ_look.iAJD Definitions for outfit of the TEJ32 i4 EventJournal Outfit
Eventjournal
*.iDST Data storage table DS32 TDS32 i4 DataStoringTable
*.iDSF Data storage files with TDS32 i4 Datastoring Data File
archived values
*.iRGD Recipe group definitions RZ32 TRZ32 i4 Recipe Group Definition
*.iMLP Language parameter ML32 LZ32 i4 MultiLanguageParameter
*.iMLT Language table ML32 LZ32 i4 MultiLanguageTable
*.iDDE Data transfer table DDE32 TDDE32 i4 DDE Data Table
*.iCDE Command transfer table DDE32 TDDE32 i4 DDE Command Table
*.iODD ODBC table OD32 TOD32 i4 ODBC-Definition
MP_Def.iMPD Network configuration MP32 TMPM32, i4 MultiPlace File
TMPS32
*.iDBT Database transfer DBT32 TDBT32 i4 DB Transfer Definition
definition file
*.iIH Maintenance definition IH32 TIH32 i4 IH Maintenance Definition
*.iBPP Operation log report BP32 TBP32 i4 BP Protocol Definition
*.iBPG Operation log diagram BP32 TBP32 i4 BP Grapf Definition
Project.iPMG Runtime configuration PM32 LZ32 i4 Project Runtime

Configuration
Project.INI Runtime settings: PM32 all runtime
- Refreshing time programs
- Alt-F4-disable
Project.vbs Compatibility reasons.
Please do not use it
anymore.
426
Appendix
File name Description Editor Runtime File identification text

*.iPFE View profile for current TEJ_Viewer32 i4 EJ Online View Settings
events
*.iPFH View profile for historical TEJ_Viewer32 i4 EJ History View Settings
events
*.iPFL Activity log profile LOG32 i4 Log Profile
*.iDEB Debugger table DEB32 i4 Debugger Table
File versions
When loading documents, all programs are downward compatible. This means that documents, created
with older program versions can be read. Exceptions will be explained explicitly in the relevant program
descriptions.
All documents created by AMS Asset Graphics programs contain version and type informations.
Documents are always stored with the current file version.
Information regarding specific files can be shown with command TYPE filename at the DOS prompt. The file
identification text and the current file version of the document will be shown then.
Example:
i4 Visualization Picture, Version: 0011
The file version will be checked on the following conditions:

Is the file identification text of the file matching with the identification text of the document?
Is the file version valid? Valid file versions must have a value greater 0.
If no valid file version can be found, a message window appears in the editor.
Example:
The file type of file:
File name
is invalid!
After this, the file version will be compared with the current document version.
If both are matching, the document will be loaded.
If the file version is lower than the document version, the editor shows the message window and
the file will be loaded. When storing the file, this will be made in the new version.
Example:
Warning:
Version xxx of file 'File name'
will be converted, when saved,
to version yyy!
If the file version is higher than the document version, a message window appears.
Example:
The version xxx of file
'File name'
is unknown! Continue reading?
427
Formatting codes for date and time

Code Description
%a Abbreviated weekday name
%A Full weekday name
%b Abbreviated month name
%B Full month name
%c Date and time representation appropriate for locale
%d Day of month as decimal number (01 – 31)
%H Hour in 24-hour format (00 – 23)
%I Hour in 12-hour format (01 – 12)
%j Day of year as decimal number (001 – 366)
%m Month as decimal number (01 – 12)
%M Minute as decimal number (00 – 59)
%p´ Current locale‟s A.M./P.M. indicator for 12-hour clock
%S Second as decimal number (00 – 59)
%U Week of year as decimal number, with Sunday as first day of week (00 – 53)
%w Weekday as decimal number (0 – 6; Sunday is 0)
%W Week of year as decimal number, with Monday as first day of week (00 – 53)
%x Date representation for current locale
%X Time representation for current locale
%y Year without century, as decimal number (00 – 99)
%Y Year with century, as decimal number
%z, %Z Time-zone name or abbreviation; no characters if time zone is unknown
%% Percent sign
428
Index
429
A Colors................................................................67
Step-by-step ................................................109
Acknowledgment............................................. 220 Tab Colors ....................................................67
Activity Log Command tables .............................................280
Definition ..................................................... 309
Log level...................................................... 415 Communication logging...................................171
New entry via VBScript ............................... 376 Configuration of network computers................303
Recording operator actions and system Copying objects.................................................52
messages.................................................... 313
Copying project files ..........................................32
Activity Log Viewer.......................................... 309
Commands.................................................. 310 Create archive .................................................253
Filter ............................................................ 310 Cross reference...........................................15, 29
Profile properties ......................................... 310
Sorting ........................................................ 310 D
Alarm picture ................................................... 413 Data exchange tables .....................................279
Definition ..................................................... 413
Data input ..........................................................92
Alarms historical Properties for a picture ..................................92
Old mode .................................................... 236 Testing ..........................................................96
Aligning objects Data storage............................ 253, 254, 256, 258
Position ......................................................... 44 Archiving .....................................................253
Size ............................................................... 44 Create a data storage .................................260
Space between objects ................................. 44 Error codes .................................................258
AMS Asset Graphics Export..........................................................254
Data interface.............................................. 393 Import ..........................................................256
Directory structure....................................... 423 Modifying a data storage .............................263
Functionality ................................................ 421 Data Storage Editor.................................251, 252
Program design........................................... 426 Introduction .................................................251
Program names and EXE-modules............. 425 Properties of a data storage ........................252
Project files ................................................. 426
Data Storage Runtime.....................................260
User interface..................................................9
Welcome .........................................................1 Data storage tables .........................................258
AMS Asset Graphics Report Designer Database .........................................................289
Maintenance ............................................... 345 Database replication
Operation Log ............................................. 333 AMS Asset Graphics database tables ...........39
Archiving data ................................................. 262 Configuring ....................................................37
Requirements ................................................38
Assign printers for the Eventjournal ................ 224
Data-element...............................................3, 414
Automatic filling ........................................... 10, 12
Renaming ......................................................44
Automation interface ....................... 394, 395, 398
DCOM .....................................................213, 416
Example ...................................................... 395
Overview ..................................................... 394 DDE ................................................ 277, 281, 287
Possible problems....................................... 394 DDE-Server .................................................281
TLB file ........................................................ 398 Examples DDE-Server ................................287
Step-by-step ........................................282, 287
Automation server ........................................... 393
DDE Editor ......................................................277
B Command table ...........................................280
Bitmap ............................................................... 60 Data exchange table ...................................279
Properties commands .................................277
Button ............................................................... 60 Properties data exchange ...........................277
C DDE Runtime
DDE client ...................................................281
C++ Connection .............................................. 400 DDE Server .................................................281
Call a help file ................................................. 368 DDE-Client ......................................................281
Central database.................................................3 Debugger ........................................................349
Checkbox .......................................................... 61 Overview .....................................................349
Design ........................................................... 78 Default project ...................................................27
Color selection .................................................. 17 Dialog New project ........................................27
430
Index
Setup a default project .................................. 32 Events .....................................................238

Define setpoints .............................................. 110 History .....................................................239
Properties ................................................240
Disable Alt+F4 .................................................. 28 Statistic ...................................................239
Disable task switch ........................................... 28 Eventjournal ....................................233, 235, 363
Display operating panel (sub picture) .............. 114 Acknowledging ............................................233
Additional text......................................235, 246
Dongle
Alarm picture ...............................................233
Dongle entry.................................................. 21
Beep............................................................233
Drag & Drop ...................................................... 10 Calling the Eventjournal Runtime ................120
Draw pipes ........................................................ 83 Commands ..................................................233
Event window ..............................................235
Drawing basic forms ....................................... 100 Options and filters .......................................235
Driver .............................................................. 169 Printing ........................................................233
AEG PG interface ....................................... 174 Runtime .......................................................233
Apex ............................................................ 173 Eventjournal Editor ..........................................219
H1TCP ........................................................ 177 Acknowledgment .........................................224
IBSNT ......................................................... 182 Acknowledgment informations ....................224
Addressing .............................................. 182 Acoustic messages with new alarms ...........249
Commissioning ....................................... 185 Additional text..............................................224
Error messages....................................... 185 Alarm element .............................................224
FC Card .................................................. 184 Alarm limits .................................................224
Profile ...................................................... 183 Alarm picture ...............................................224
RFC ........................................................ 185 Alarm text ....................................................224
Introduction ................................................. 169 Automatic change of pictures in alarm
Mitsubishi situations .....................................................247
FX-Series ................................................ 186 Automatic change to the Eventjournal in alarm
S7_Connection ........................................... 192 situations .....................................................247
Overview ................................................. 192 Define an event ...........................................244
S7_Ethernet ................................................ 195 Event definition window...............................224
Installation of the PLC software .............. 197 Groups ........................................................220
Overview ................................................. 195 Start flashing objects in the visualization
Process assignment ................................ 196 window in case of ........................................248
S7-Adressing mode ................ 195, 196, 197 User interface ..............................................220
S7_MPI ....................................................... 202 Value hysteresis ..........................................224
Process assignment ................................ 202
S7PG .......................................................... 190 Events
SICP ........................................................... 203 Step-by-step ................................................244
Character delay....................................... 204
Siemens
F
MPI ......................................................... 201 Filling.................................................................10
PPI .......................................................... 194 Automatic filling of table fields .......................10
SIPG ........................................................... 205 Gradual instructions for programming a filling
Softnet ........................................................ 199 level indicator ..............................................108
Driver specific settings .................................... 170 Tab Filling .....................................................67
Dynamic actions in a group ............................. 105 Flashing colors ..................................................98

Dialog flashing colors ....................................98
E Step-by-step instructions ...............................54
Edit polygon points ............................................ 52 Font
Project font ....................................................99
Element ........................................................... 414 With fixed size ...............................................99
Element name .....................................................3 Function keys
Rules ...............................................................3 Step-by-step ................................................118
Element selection.............................................. 15
G
Ellipse ............................................................... 57
General operation .............................................. 9
Event Viewer ................................................... 238
Multiple start................................................ 243 Graphic
Show events of multiple projects ................. 243 Colors............................................................. 5
Status .......................................................... 243 Format ............................................................ 5
Views Resolution ...................................................... 5
431
Graphic button .......................................... 61, 112 Language-element ..........................................295

Graphic Editor ................................................... 41 Life time of a password .....................................33
Configure object properties ........................... 67 Line ...................................................................57
Different screen resolutions .......................... 57 Command .....................................................57
Menu Properties............................................ 49
Overview ....................................................... 41 Link-Symbol ................................................62, 81
Project properties .......................................... 47 Creating ........................................................46
Shortcuts ....................................................... 42 Log levels runtime programs .............................28
Toolbar
Logging the communication ............................171
Alignment .................................................. 45
Colors ....................................................... 45 M
Dialog ........................................................ 45
Draw ......................................................... 46 Maintenance Editor .........................................339
Language .................................................. 45 Database connection ..................................340
Symbol ...................................................... 46 Function selection .......................................342
Zoom ......................................................... 46 Functions ....................................................343
Tree view ...................................................... 42 Group selection ...........................................342
User interface................................................ 41 Tab Definition ..............................................340
Tab Groups .................................................340
Graphic files ...................................................... 80
Tab Print .....................................................340
Graphic formats ................................................ 60 User interface ..............................................339
Graphic objects ................................................. 56 Maintenance Runtime .....................................345
Grid ................................................................... 44 Commands ..................................................346
Grid capture .................................................. 44 Edit setpoints...............................................346
Grid display ................................................... 44 Edit total value.............................................346
Executing maintenance ...............................346
H Remarks ......................................................346
Views ..........................................................347
Hardcopy......................................................... 362
Marking .............................................................52
I Master .............................................................299
Initialization ..................................................... 360 Menu
Installation ...........................................................6 ? ....................................................................15
Parallel dongle ................................................6 Edit ................................................................13
Language ......................................................14
Interface to user program ................................ 393
View ..............................................................14
inVISU 2.5 ....................................................... 389 Windows .......................................................14
inVISU 2.5 to PMS Editor ................................ 389 Menu commands...............................................47
J Menu Edit ..........................................................48

Menu File ..........................................................47
JPEG ................................................................ 60
Menu Views ......................................................49
L Menu Windows..................................................49
Language Metafile .............................................................60
Data-elements............................................. 359 Create ...........................................................55
Language Editor.......................................... 295 Save Metafile ................................................55
Menu Language ............................................ 14 Step-by-step instructions .............................102
Language changeover .................................... 296
Define texts ................................................. 297 N
Language Editor.......................................... 295 Network ...........................................................364
Step-by-step................................................ 296
Using in text objects .................................... 298 Network Editor.................................................299
Exclude declaration .....................................301
Language definition......................................... 296 Station definition table .................................301
Define used languages ............................... 296 Station options ............................................301
Input of language texts ................................ 296 User interface ..............................................299
Language Editor.............................................. 295 Network license .................................................23
Language switching Network station
Define a button to change the language ..... 297 Activation of a data storage table on a station
Language table ............................................... 295 ....................................................................252
432
Index
Number ............................................................. 58 Panel view.......................................................114

Step-by-step instructions............................. 107 Password
Data-elements .............................................359
O Definition in the Project Manager ..................33
Object Overview .......................................................33
Dialog object ................................................. 85
PC Settings .......................................................21
EditBox...................................................... 90
InputBox .................................................... 85 Picture
ListBox ...................................................... 87 Changing .....................................................111
MsgBox ..................................................... 89 Properties ......................................................92
Dynamic colors ............................................. 72 Picture change
Dynamic filling ............................................... 73 automatic ....................................................220
Dynamic position........................................... 69
Dynamic size ................................................. 70 Picture switch-over ..........................................362
Rotation......................................................... 71 Play sounds ....................................................359
VBScript ........................................................ 73 PLC
View options.................................................. 68 AEG
Objects A120........................................................174
Aligning objects ............................................. 49 A250........................................................174
ODBC PG-Interface ............................................174
(glossar) ...................................................... 416 Apex ............................................................173
Filter ............................................................ 293 Interbus .......................................................182
Properties.................................................... 290 Siemens
Sorting ........................................................ 293 3964R (S5 + S7) .....................................203
Ethernet-Connection ...............................195
ODBC Editor ................................................... 289 H1TCP ....................................................177
Definition table ............................................ 292 PG-Interface (S5) ....................................205
User interface.............................................. 289 S7 200.....................................................194
OLE-object S7 300.............................................190, 201
Action ............................................................ 74 S7 400.............................................190, 201
Softnet.....................................................199
OPC
Server status ............................................... 208 Polygon .......................................................57, 83
Draw a pipe ...................................................83
OPC client ....................................................... 211
Edit a polygon or a polyline ...........................55
OPC Editor
Polyline .......................................................55, 57
Append item ................................................ 210
Edit a polygon or a polylinie ..........................55
User interface.............................................. 207
Position .............................................................67
OPC Runtime .................................................. 211
Step-by-step ................................................100
OPC Server..................................................... 212 Tab Position ..................................................67
OPC-Editor...................................................... 207 Print picture .......................................................47
Operating systems ..............................................6 Printer settings ..................................................47
Windows 2000/XP/2003 ..................................6
Process assignment
Windows 98/ME ..............................................6
Behaviour of the process assignment .........154
Windows NT 4.0..............................................6
Process Assignment Editor .....................153, 154
Operation ........................................................ 363
Data mapping ..............................................162
Operation Log ......................... 317, 320, 328, 330 Data range ..................................................162
Definition of a diagram ................................ 330 Define the process assignment ...................166
Dialog Properties diagram........................... 328 Driver profile ........................................154, 158
Dialog Properties report .............................. 320 New table ....................................................154
Introduction ................................................. 317 Process assignment table ...........................162
Protocol definition window........................... 317 Scaling value ranges ...................................162
Report designer .......................................... 333 User interface ..............................................154
Operation Log Runtime ................................... 336 Value range .................................................162
Overview of objects ........................................... 56 Process Assignment Runtime .........................165
Process assignment table ...............................162
P
Program list .......................................................27
PageControl .................................................... 233
Project Manager ....................................25, 29, 30
433
Copying project files ...................................... 32 Search for .......................................................370

Cross reference ............................................ 29 Search for data-elements ..................................43
Menu commands .......................................... 26
Rename elements ......................................... 30 Select object......................................................52
Setup a default project .................................. 32 Selecting from the reference list ........................15
Set-up a new project ..................................... 32
Shortcuts
R Definition for a picture .............................95, 98
Global definition for a project ..................95, 98
Radio button...................................................... 61 Picture .........................................................118
Design ........................................................... 78 Project .........................................................119
Recipe Step-by-step ................................................118
Step-by-step................................................ 271 Size ...................................................................67
Recipe Editor .................................................. 265 Step-by-step ................................................101
Define a recipe group .................................. 271 Tab Size ........................................................67
Recipe group windows .................................... 265 Slider .................................................................62
Design ...........................................................76
Recipe Runtime .............................................. 269
Calling the Recipe Runtime......................... 121 Sound output ...................................................359
Create a new recipe .................................... 271 Standard programs ...........................................30
Load a recipe .............................................. 272
Operation at runtime ................................... 269 Start picture .......................................................96
Save a recipe .............................................. 273 Start user programs ........................................367
Rectangle .......................................................... 57 Starting a project ...............................................31
Redundancy .................................................... 364 Station .............................................................299
Reference list .................................................... 15 Status
Selection from the reference list .................... 15 Display an object with different states .........102
Remote-operation (OPC-server) ..................... 213 Symbol ..............................................................55
Rename elements ............................................. 30 Create symbols .............................................55
Load symbols ................................................55
Renaming.......................................................... 44
Elements ....................................................... 44 Synchronization...............................................353
Dialogs ........................................................355
Replace ........................................................... 370 Directories ...................................................355
Resize ............................................................... 52 Program files ...............................................356
Resize objects with the keyboard .................. 52 Programs ............................................354, 355
Project .........................................................354
Resizing
Project files .................................................357
objects .......................................................... 54
System-elements ....................................359, 364
Rotate ............................................................... 44
Date and time ..............................................365
Rotate objects by 90° .................................... 44
Directory paths ............................................366
Step-by-step................................................ 103
Eventjournal ................................................363
Rotation............................................................. 67 Network .......................................................364
Tab Rotate .................................................... 67 Operation ....................................................363
Round Rectangle .............................................. 57 Redundancy ................................................364
Runtime stop ...............................................362
Runtime Suspending programs .................................361
Closing the runtime ..................................... 122 Visualization ................................................362
Eventjournal ................................................ 233
Insertion of standard programs ..................... 32 T
Network system .......................................... 302
Recipe ......................................................... 269 Table .....................................................10, 11, 12
Using trend charts ....................................... 136 Automatic filling .............................................12
Drag & Drop ..................................................10
Runtime configuration ....................................... 27 Replacing text ...............................................11
Runtime Program .............................................. 31 Searching for text ..........................................11
Shortcuts .......................................................10
S Using a table .................................................10
Saving data ..................................................... 262 Testing objects and finding errors ...................352
Scrollbar ............................................................ 61 Testing of objects ............................................352
434
Index
Text ................................................................... 58 Dialog Search..............................................370

Time ................................................................ 113 DoAsyncCall................................................374
Displaying the current time.......................... 113 Examples ............................ 374, 375, 379, 380
Internet Explorer......................................375
TimeStampEleName ....................................... 257 Printing with Word ...................................374
Toolbar Debugger ........................................... 351 Standard functions ..................................380
HasActUserTheRight ..................................376
Toolbar Elements ............................................ 351
HostCreateObject........................................375
Touch Panel .............................. 92, 147, 148, 150 IncludeSource .............................................376
Input dialog for numbers ............................. 151 Introduction .................................................369
Input dialog for text ..................................... 152 OnAsyncCall ...............................................374
Object settings ............................................ 150 OnEnd .........................................................373
Picture settings ............................................. 92 OnRun .........................................................373
Project settings ........................................... 148 OnStart ........................................................373
Step-by-step................................................ 147 PmsFormatDateTime ..................................376
Touch screen .................................... 92, 147, 148 PmsLocalDateTime2Utc .............................376
PmsUtcDateTime2Local .............................376
Trend chart...................................................... 136 Standard functions ......................................373
Archive ........................................................ 136 Using COM objects .....................................375
Commands.................................................. 138 Visualization
Definition ..................................................... 122 Data input ..................................................63
Display archives .......................................... 146 Mouse messages ......................................63
Displaying a trend chart .............................. 141 Scrolling wheel of the mouse ....................63
Displaying a XY-trend chart ........................ 144 Special functions .......................................63
Operation at runtime ................................... 136
Tracking ruler .............................................. 137 Vertical text .......................................................84
Update ........................................................ 136 View options ......................................................68
Trigger concept ...................................................4 Visualization ........................................96, 99, 362
Basic functions ..............................................99
U Changing pictures .......................................111
Update Script .............................................................96
Runtime......................................................... 28 Start picture ...................................................96
User table.......................................................... 33 W
Using dialogs .................................................... 12 Window .......................................................62, 77
Using property dialogs ...................................... 67 Design ...........................................................77
Using the right mouse button ............................ 12 Word wrapping ..................................................84
UTC ................................................................ 419 Working with different screen resolutions ..........57
V X
Variables in texts.................................................4 XY-trend chart .................................................138
Commands ..................................................140
VBScript ... 63, 369, 370, 371, 372, 374, 375, 376,
CSV-file as data source ..............................127
378
Definition .....................................................127
Access to data storage files ........................ 378
Runtime .......................................................138
Access to data-elements ............................. 372
Tracking dialog ............................................139
AddLogMessage ......................................... 376
Asynchronous call of functions.................... 374 Z
Automation .................................................. 375
Bit function .................................................. 372 Zoom
Calling VBScript help .................................. 370 Picture ...........................................................54
Context menu.............................................. 371 Trend chart ..................................................136
Debugging............................................. 28, 377 XY-trend chart .............................................138
Dialog Replace............................................ 370
435

4.4 AMS Asset Graphics Manual

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

4.4 AMS Asset Graphics Manual

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Machinery Health® Management

AMS Asset Graphics Operating Manual

AMS Asset Graphics

Date: May 06, 2011

Software Version 5.4.0.1033

Part Number: MHM-97032, Rev 0

2. General operation _________________________________________________________________ 9

Tab Design (Properties BUTTON) 74

Display an operating panel (sub picture) 114

6. Process Assignment ____________________________________________________________ 153

Driver specific settings 170

Process assignment tables (S7_Ethernet) 196

7. OPC __________________________________________________________________________ 207

8. Events ________________________________________________________________________ 219

SQL database for events 228

9. Data Storage ___________________________________________________________________ 251

10. Recipes _______________________________________________________________________ 265

Recipe group window 265

11. DDE __________________________________________________________________________ 277

12. ODBC _________________________________________________________________________ 289

13. Language ______________________________________________________________________ 295

14. Network _______________________________________________________________________ 299

15. Activity Log ____________________________________________________________________ 309

16. Operation Log __________________________________________________________________ 317

Dialog Color settings 331

17. Maintenance ___________________________________________________________________ 339

18. Debugger ______________________________________________________________________ 349

19. Synchronization ________________________________________________________________ 353

20. System-elements _______________________________________________________________ 359

Other system-elements 359

21. VBScript_______________________________________________________________________ 369

22. inVISU 2.5 to PMS Editor _________________________________________________________ 389

23. Database interface ______________________________________________________________ 393

Creating an application with the automation server 400

24. Glossary ______________________________________________________________________ 413

Language changeover 417

25. Appendix ______________________________________________________________________ 421

26. Index _________________________________________________________________________ 429

Welcome to AMS Asset Graphics

Central database, data-elements and objects

Graphic formats and color palette

Installation parallel dongle

Note AMS Asset Graphics uses VBScript of the Microsoft Corporation.

AMS Asset Graphics consists of the following program modules:

Getting started with AMS Asset Graphics

Save your settings.

Central database, data-elements and objects

The following rules apply to element names:

There are two types of data-elements:

Text-elements can take on texts with a max. length of 80 characters.

Using variables in texts

Wild-card for num-elements

Wild-card for text-elements

If the character @ shall be used in the text, @@ must be entered.

Graphic format and colors

Properties of graphic objects

Object type Position Size Rotate Filling Color VBScript

Object type Position Size Rotate Filling Color VBScript

Installation of a parallel dongle

De-installation of the parallel dongle

For the de-installation, you have to proceed as follows:

AMS Asset Graphics user interface

In active cells, data can be entered directly via the keyboard.

Working with helper dialogs